Superstack 4 Switch 5500G-Ei Family: Command Reference Guide

SuperStack® 4 Switch 5500G-EI Family
Command Reference Guide

Version 3.1.x
http://www.3com.com/
Part number: DUA1725-0CAA01
Published: July 2005
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3Com Corporation
350 Campus Drive
Marlborough, MA
USA 01752-3064
Copyright © 2005, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative
work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from 3Com Corporation.
3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation
to provide notification of such revision or change.
3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied
warranties, terms or conditions of merchantability, satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product(s)
and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time.
If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document,
in the hard copy documentation, or on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE.TXT or !LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to locate a copy, please contact
3Com and a copy will be provided to you.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND
If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following:
All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense. Software is delivered as “Commercial Computer Software” as
defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com’s
standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June
1987), whichever is applicable. You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in, or
delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide.
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered in other countries.
3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation.
ntel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company, Ltd.
IEEE and 802 are registered trademarks of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.
ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT
It is the policy of 3Com Corporation to be environmentally-friendly in all operations. To uphold our policy, we are committed to:
Establishing environmental performance standards that comply with national legislation and regulations.
Conserving energy, materials and natural resources in all operations.
Reducing the waste generated by all operations. Ensuring that all waste conforms to recognized environmental standards. Maximizing the recyclable and reusable content
of all products.
Ensuring that all products can be recycled, reused and disposed of safely.
Ensuring that all products are labelled according to recognized environmental standards.
Improving our environmental record on a continual basis.
End of Life Statement
3Com processes allow for the recovery, reclamation and safe disposal of all end-of-life electronic components.
Regulated Materials Statement
3Com products do not contain any hazardous or ozone-depleting material.
Environmental Statement about the Documentation
The documentation for this product is printed on paper that comes from sustainable, managed forests; it is fully biodegradable and recyclable, and is completely
chlorine-free. The varnish is environmentally-friendly, and the inks are vegetable-based with a low heavy-metal content.

CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS GUIDE

About This Software Version 19
Organization of the Manual 19
Intended Readership 20
Conventions 20
Related Manuals 21
1 USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS

Logging in Commands 24
authentication-mode 24
auto-execute command 24
command-privilege level 25
databits 26
display history-command 27
display user-interface 27
display users 29
free user-interface 29
header 30
history-command max-size 32
idle-timeout 33
language-mode 33
lock 34
parity 34
protocol inbound 35
quit 35
return 36
screen-length 36
send 37
service-type 37
View 37
set authentication password 39
shell 39
speed 40
stopbits 40
super 41
super password 42
sysname 42
system-view 43

telnet 43
user-interface 44
user privilege level 45
2 USING PORT COMMANDS

Ethernet Port Configuration Commands 49
broadcast-suppression 49
copy configuration 50
description 50
display interface 51
display loopback-detection 53
display port 54
display unit 54
duplex 55
flow-control 56
interface 56
jumboframe enable 57
loopback 57
loopback-detection control enable 58
loopback-detection enable 59
loopback-detection interval-time 59
loopback-detection per-vlan enable 60
multicast-suppression 60
port access vlan 61
port hybrid pvid vlan 62
port hybrid vlan 62
port link-type 63
port trunk permit vlan 64
port trunk pvid vlan 65
reset counters interface 65
shutdown 66
speed 67
unicast-suppression 67
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands 68
debugging link-aggregation error 68
debugging link-aggregation event 69
debugging lacp packet 69
debugging lacp state 70
display link-aggregation summary 71
display link-aggregation verbose 71
display link-aggregation interface 72
display lacp system-id 73
lacp enable 74
lacp port-priority 74
lacp system-priority 75
link-aggregation group agg-id description 75
link-aggregation group agg-id mode 76

port link-aggregation group 77
reset lacp statistics 77
3 USING VLAN COMMANDS

VLAN Configuration Commands 80
description 80
display interface VLAN-interface 80
display vlan 81
interface VLAN-interface 82
port 82
shutdown 83
vlan 84
Voice VLAN Configuration Commands 85
display voice vlan oui 85
display voice vlan status 85
voice vlan aging 86
voice vlan enable 86
voice vlan 87
voice vlan mac_address 87
voice vlan mode 88
voice vlan security 89
4 USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS

PoE Configuration Commands 92
display poe interface 92
display poe interface power 93
display poe powersupply 94
poe enable 95
poe legacy enable 95
poe max-power 96
poe mode 97
poe power-management 97
poe priority 98
poe update 99
5 USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IP Address Configuration Commands 104
display ip host 104
display ip interface 104
ip address 105
ip host 106
ARP Configuration Commands 107
arp check enable 107
arp static 107
arp timer aging 108
debugging arp packet 109

display arp 110
display arp timer aging 111
reset arp 111
Resilient ARP Configuration Commands 112
debugging resilient-arp 112
display resilient-arp 113
resilient-arp enable 113
resilient-arp interface vlan-interface 114
BOOTP Client Configuration Commands 115
debugging dhcp xrn xha 115
ip address bootp-alloc 115
DHCP Client Configuration Commands 116
debugging dhcp client 116
debugging dhcp xrn xha 116
display dhcp client 117
ip address dhcp-alloc 117
DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 118
address-check 118
debugging dhcp-relay 119
dhcp-security static 119
dhcp-server 120
dhcp-server ip 121
display dhcp-security 122
display dhcp-server 122
display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface 123
Access Management Configuration Commands 124
am enable 124
am ip-pool 124
am trap enable 125
display am 126
display isolate port 127
port isolate 127
UDP Helper Configuration Commands 128
debugging udp-helper 128
display udp-helper server 128
udp-helper enable 129
udp-helper port 129
udp-helper server 130
IP Performance Configuration Commands 131
display fib 131
display fib ip_address 131
display fib acl 132
display fib 133
display fib ip-prefix 133
display fib statistics 134
display icmp statistics 134
display ip socket 135
display ip statistics 136

display tcp statistics 137
display tcp status 138
display udp statistics 139
reset ip statistics 140
reset tcp statistics 140
reset udp statistics 140
tcp timer fin-timeout 141
tcp timer syn-timeout 141
tcp window 142
6 USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS

Routing Table Display Commands 146
display ip routing-table 146
display ip routing-table acl 147
display ip routing-table ip_address 149
display ip routing-table ip_address1 ip_address2 151
display ip routing-table ip-prefix 151
display ip routing-table protocol 153
display ip routing-table radix 154
display ip routing-table statistics 155
display ip routing-table verbose 155
Static Route Configuration Command 157
delete static-routes all 157
ip route-static 157
RIP Configuration Commands 159
checkzero 159
default cost 160
display rip 160
display rip interface 161
display rip routing 162
filter-policy export 163
filter-policy import 164
host-route 165
import-route 165
network 166
peer 167
preference 167
reset 168
rip 168
rip authentication-mode 169
rip input 170
rip metricin 171
rip metricout 172
rip output 172
rip split-horizon 173
rip version 173
rip work 174

summary 175
timers 176
traffic-share-across-
interface 176
OSPF Configuration Commands 177
abr-summary 177
area 178
asbr-summary 178
authentication-mode 179
default cost 180
default interval 181
default limit 181
default tag 182
default type 183
default-cost 183
default-route-advertise 184
display debugging ospf 185
display ospf abr-asbr 185
display ospf asbr-summary 186
display ospf brief 187
display ospf cumulative 189
display ospf error 190
display ospf interface 192
display ospf lsdb 193
display ospf nexthop 195
display ospf peer 196
display ospf request-queue 197
display ospf retrans-queue 198
display ospf routing 199
display ospf vlink 200
import-route 202
network 203
nssa 204
ospf 205
ospf authentication-mode 206
ospf cost 207
ospf dr-priority 207
ospf mib-binding 208
ospf mtu-enable 209
ospf network-type 209
ospf timer dead 210
ospf timer hello 211
ospf timer poll 212
ospf timer retransmit 212
ospf trans-delay 213
peer 214

preference 214
reset ospf 215
router id 215
silent-interface 216
snmp-agent trap enable ospf 217
spf-schedule-interval 218
stub 218
vlink-peer 219
IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands 220
apply cost 220
apply tag 221
display ip ip-prefix 222
display route-policy 222
if-match { acl | ip-prefix } 225
if-match cost 226
if-match interface 226
if-match ip next-hop 227
if-match tag 228
ip ip-prefix 228
route-policy 229
Route Capacity Configuration Commands 231
display memory 231
display memory limit 231
memory auto-establish disable 232
memory auto-establish enable 233
memory { safety | limit } 233
7 USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL COMMANDS

IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands 237
display igmp-snooping configuration 237
display igmp-snooping group 237
display igmp-snooping statistics 238
igmp-snooping 239
igmp-snooping host-aging-time 239
igmp-snooping max-response-time 240
igmp-snooping router-aging-time 241
reset igmp-snooping statistics 241
Multicast Common Configuration Commands 242
debugging multicast forwarding 242
debugging multicast kernel-routing 242
debugging multicast status-forwarding 243
display multicast forwarding-table 243
display multicast routing-table 244
mtracert 246
multicast route-limit 247

multicast routing-enable 247
reset multicast forwarding-table 248
reset multicast routing-table 249
IGMP Configuration Commands 250
debugging igmp 250
display igmp group 250
display igmp interface 251
igmp enable 252
igmp group-limit 252
igmp group-policy 253
igmp group-policy vlan 254
igmp host-join 255
igmp host-join port 255
igmp host-join vlan 256
igmp lastmember-
queryinterval 257
igmp max-response-time 258
igmp robust-count 258
igmp timer other-querier-present 259
igmp timer query 260
igmp version 261
reset igmp group 261
PIM Configuration Commands 262
bsr-policy 262
c-bsr 263
c-rp 264
crp-policy 265
debugging pim common 266
debugging pim dm 266
debugging pim sm 267
display pim bsr-info 268
display pim interface 269
display pim neighbor 269
display pim routing-table 270
display pim rp-info 271
pim 272
pim bsr-boundary 272
pim dm 273
pim neighbor-limit 273
pim neighbor-policy 274
pim sm 275
pim timer hello 275
register-policy 276
reset pim neighbor 276
reset pim routing-table 277
source-policy 278
static-rp 279

8 USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
ACL Configuration Command List 282
acl 282
display acl 283
display packet-filter 284
display time-range 284
packet-filter 285
reset acl counter 286
rule 286
time-range 289
QoS Configuration Commands List 290
display mirror 290
display qos-interface all 291
display qos-interface line-rate 291
display qos-interface mirrored-to 292
display qos-interface traffic-limit 293
display qos-interface traffic-priority 293
display qos-interface traffic-redirect 294
display qos-interface traffic-statistic 294
display queue-scheduler 295
line-rate 296
mirrored-to 296
mirroring-port 297
monitor-port 298
priority 298
priority trust 299
queue-scheduler 300
reset traffic-statistic 300
traffic-limit 301
traffic-priority 302
traffic-redirect 304
traffic-statistic 305
QoS Profile Configuration Commands 306
apply qos-profile 306
display qos-profile 306
packet-filter 307
qos-profile 308
qos-profile user-based 308
traffic-limit 309
traffic-priority 310
Logon user’s ACL Control Command 311
acl 311
ip http acl 312
snmp-agent community 312
snmp-agent group 313
snmp-agent usm-user 314

9 USING FABRIC COMMANDS
Fabric Commands 317
display xrn-fabric 317
change self-unit 317
change unit-id 318
set unit name 319
sysname 319
10 USING RSTP COMMANDS

RSTP Configuration Commands 322
display stp 322
323
display stp ignored-vlan 324
display stp tc 324
reset stp 324
stp 325
stp bpdu-protection 326
stp cost 327
stp edged-port 327
stp loop-protection 328
stp ignored vlan 329
stp mcheck 329
stp mode 330
stp pathcost-standard 331
stp point-to-point 331
stp port priority 332
stp priority 333
stp root primary 333
stp root secondary 334
stp root-protection 335
stp timeout-factor 336
stp timer forward-delay 336
stp timer hello 337
stp timer max-age 337
stp transmit-limit 338
11 USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS

802.1x Configuration Commands 343
display dot1x 343
dot1x 344
dot1x authentication-method 345
dot1x dhcp-launch 346
dot1x max-user 346
dot1x port-control 347
dot1x port-method 348
dot1x quiet-period 349

dot1x retry 350
dot1x supp-proxy-check 351
dot1x timer 352
reset dot1x statistics 353
Centralized MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands 354
debugging mac-authentication event 354
display mac-authentication 355
mac-authentication 356
mac-authentication domain 357
mac-authentication timer 358
AAA Configuration Commands 359
access-limit 359
attribute 359
cut connection 360
display connection 361
display domain 363
display local-user 363
domain 364
idle-cut 366
level 366
local-user 367
messenger 368
password 369
radius-scheme 369
scheme 370
self-service-url 371
service-type 372
state 373
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands 374
accounting optional 374
data-flow-format 374
display local-server statistics 375
display radius 376
display radius statistics 377
display stop-accounting-buffer 378
key 379
local-server 380
nas-ip 381
primary accounting 381
primary authentication 382
radius nas-ip 383
radius scheme 384
reset radius statistics 385
reset stop-accounting-buffer 385
retry 386
retry realtime-accounting 387
retry stop-accounting 388
secondary accounting 388

secondary authentication 389
server-type 390
state 391
stop-accounting-buffer enable 392
timer 392
timer realtime-accounting 393
timer response-timeout 394
user-name-format 395
12 USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

File System Management Commands 402
cd 402
copy 403
delete 403
dir 404
execute 405
file prompt 406
format 406
mkdir 406
more 407
move 407
pwd 408
rename 409
reset recycle-bin 409
rmdir 410
undelete 410
Configuration File Management Commands 411
display current-configuration 411
display saved-configuration 413
display this 413
display startup 414
reset saved-configuration 414
save 415
startup saved-configuration 416
416
FTP Server Configuration Commands 416
display ftp-server 417
display ftp-user 417
ftp server 417
ftp timeout 418
local-user 418
password 419
service-type 420
FTP Client Commands 421
ascii 421
binary 422
bye 422

cd 422
cdup 423
close 423
delete 424
dir 424
disconnect 424
ftp 425
get 425
lcd 426
ls 426
mkdir 426
passive 427
put 427
pwd 428
quit 428
remotehelp 428
rmdir 429
user 429
verbose 429
TFTP Configuration Commands 430
tftp get 430
tftp put 430
MAC Address Table Management Commands 431
display mac-address 431
display mac-address aging-time 432
mac-address 433
mac-address max-mac-count 434
mac-address timer 434
Device Management Commands 436
boot boot-loader 436
boot bootrom 436
display boot-loader 436
display cpu 437
display device 437
display fan 438
display memory 438
display power 439
display schedule reboot 439
reboot 440
schedule reboot at 440
schedule reboot delay 441
Basic System Configuration and Management Commands 442
clock datetime 442
clock summer-time 443
clock timezone 444
sysname 445
System Status and System Information Display Commands 445
display clock 445

display config-agent 446
display debugging 447
display version 447
System Debug Commands 447
debugging 448
display diagnostic-information 448
Network Connection Test Commands 449
end-station polling ip-address 449
ping 449
tracert 451
HWPing Commands 453
hwping-agent enable 453
hwping 453
count 454
destination ip 454
frequency 455
test-type 455
test-enable 456
display hwping 456
Log Commands 457
display channel 457
display info-center 458
display logbuffer 458
display logbuffer summary 460
display trapbuffer 460
info-center channel name 461
info-center console channel 462
info-center enable 462
info-center logbuffer 463
info-center loghost 464
info-center loghost source 465
info-center monitor channel 465
info-center snmp channel 466
info-center source 467
info-center switch-on 469
info-center timestamp 470
info-center trapbuffer 470
reset logbuffer 471
reset trapbuffer 471
terminal debugging 472
terminal logging 472
terminal monitor 473
terminal trapping 473
SNMP Configuration Commands 474
display snmp-agent 474
display snmp-agent community 474
display snmp-agent group 475
display snmp-agent mib-view 476

display snmp-agent statistics 477
display snmp-agent sys-info 478
display snmp-agent usm-user 479
display snmp-proxy unit 479
enable snmp trap 480
snmp-agent community 480
snmp-agent group 481
snmp-agent local-engineid 482
snmp-agent mib-view 483
snmp-agent packet max-size 483
snmp-agent sys-info 484
snmp-agent target-host 485
snmp-agent trap enable 486
snmp-agent trap life 487
snmp-agent trap queue-size 488
snmp-agent trap source 488
snmp-agent usm-user 489
undo snmp-agent 490
RMON Configuration Commands 490
display rmon alarm 491
display rmon event 491
display rmon eventlog 492
display rmon history 493
display rmon prialarm 494
display rmon statistics 495
rmon alarm 496
rmon event 497
rmon history 498
rmon prialarm 499
rmon statistics 500
NTP Configuration Commands 501
debugging ntp-service 501
display ntp-service sessions 502
display ntp-service status 502
display ntp-service trace 503
ntp-service access 504
ntp-service authentication enable 504
ntp-service authentication-keyid 505
ntp-service broadcast-client 505
ntp-service broadcast-server 506
ntp-service max-dynamic sessions 507
ntp-service multicast-client 507
ntp-service multicast-server 508
ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 509
ntp-service source-interface 509
ntp-service in-interface disable 510
ntp-service unicast-peer 511
ntp-service unicast-server 512

SSH Configuration Commands 513
debugging ssh server 513
display rsa local-key-pair public 513
display rsa peer-public-key 514
display ssh server 515
display ssh user-information 515
peer-public-key end 516
protocol inbound 516
public-key-code begin 517
public-key-code end 518
rsa local-key-pair create 518
rsa local-key-pair destroy 519
rsa peer-public-key 520
ssh server authentication-retries 520
ssh server rekey-interval 521
ssh server timeout 521
ssh user assign rsa-key 522
ssh user username authentication-type 523
A BOOTROM INTERFACE
Accessing the Bootrom Interface 525
Boot Menu 526
Download Application File to Flash 526
Select Application File to Boot 526
Display all Files in Flash 527
Delete File from Flash 527
Modify Bootrom Password 528
Enter Bootrom Upgrade Menu 528
Skip Current Configuration File 528
Set Bootrom Password Recovery 528
Set Switch Startup Mode 529
Reboot 529
Boot Menu File Download Commands 529

ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide provides all the information you need to use the configuration
commands supported by version 3.0.x software on the 3Com® SuperStack® 4
Switch 5500G-EI.
About This Software The software in the Switch 5500G-EI is a subset of that used in some other 3Com
Version products. Depending on the capabilities of your hardware platform, some
commands described in this guide may not be available on your Switch, although
the unavailable commands may still display on the command line interface (CLI). If
you try to use an unavailable command, an error message displays.
CAUTION: Any command that displays on the CLI, but is not described in this
guide, is not supported in version 3.0.x software. 3Com only supports the
commands described in this guide. Other commands may result in the loss of data,
and are entered at the user’s risk.
Organization of the The Switch 5500G-EI Command Reference Guide consists of the following
Manual chapters:
■ Using System Access Commands — Introduces the commands used for
accessing the Switch.
■ Using Port Commands — Introduces the commands used for configuring
Ethernet port and link aggregation.
■ Using VLAN Commands — Introduces the commands used for configuring
VLANs.
■ Using Network Protocol Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring network protocols.
■ Using Routing Protocol Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring routing protocols.
■ Using Multicast Protocol Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring multicast protocols.
■ Using QoS and ACL Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring QoS/ACL.
■ Using STP Commands — Introduces the commands used for configuring STP.
■ Using AAA and RADIUS Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring 802.1x, AAA and RADIUS.
■ Using Reliability Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring VRRP.

20 ABOUT THIS GUIDE
■ Using System Management Commands — Introduces the commands used

for system management and maintenance.
Intended Readership The manual is intended for the following readers:

■ Network administrators
■ Network engineers
■ Users who are familiar with the basics of networking
Conventions This manual uses the following conventions:

Table 1 Icons
Icon Notice Type Description

Information note Information that describes important features or instructions.
Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or

potential damage to an application, system, or device.
Warning Information that alerts you to potential personal injury.
Table 2 Text conventions
Convention Description
Screen displays This typeface represents text as it appears on the screen.
Keyboard key names If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are
linked with a plus sign (+), for example:
Press Ctrl+Alt+Del
The words “enter” When you see the word “enter” in this guide, you must type
and “type” something, and then press Return or Enter. Do not press Return or
Enter when an instruction simply says “type.”
Fixed command This typeface indicates the fixed part of a command text. You must type
text the command, or this part of the command, exactly as shown, and
press Return or Enter when you are ready to enter the command.
Example: The command display history-command must be
entered exactly as shown.
Variable This typeface indicates the variable part of a command text. You must
command text type a value here, and press Return or Enter when you are ready to
enter the command.
Example: in the command super level , a value in the range 0 to 3
must be entered in the position indicated by level
{ x | y | ... } Alternative items, one of which must be entered, are grouped in braces
and separated by vertical bars. You must select and enter one of the
items.
Example: in the command flow-control {hardware | none |
software}, the braces and the vertical bars combined indicate that
you must enter one of the parameters. Enter either hardware, or
none, or software.

Related Manuals 21
Table 2 Text conventions

[] Items shown in square brackets [ ] are optional.
Example 1: in the command display users [all], the square
brackets indicate that the parameter all is optional. You can enter the
command with or without this parameter.
Example 2: in the command user-interface [type]
first-number [last-number] the square brackets indicate that the
parameters [type] and [last-number] are both optional. You can
enter a value in place of one, both or neither of these parameters.
Alternative items, one of which can optionally be entered, are grouped
in square brackets and separated by vertical bars.
Example 3: in the command header [shell | incoming |

login] text, the square brackets indicate that the parameters
shell, incoming and login are all optional. The vertical bars
indicate that only one of the parameters is allowed.
Related Manuals The 3Com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI Getting Started Guide provides
information about installation.
The 3Com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI Configuration Guide provides

information about configuring your network using the commands described in
this guide.

22 ABOUT THIS GUIDE

1 USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
Logging in Commands
■ authentication-mode
■ auto-execute command
■ command-privilege level
■ databits
■ display history-command
■ display user-interface
■ display users
■ free user-interface
■ header
■ history-command max-size
■ idle-timeout
■ language-mode
■ lock
■ parity
■ protocol inbound
■ quit
■ return
■ screen-length
■ send
■ service-type
■ View
■ set authentication password
■ shell
■ speed
■ stopbits
■ super
■ super password
■ sysname
■ system-view

24 CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
■ telnet
■ user-interface
■ user privilege level
Logging in Commands This section describes the commands that you can use to configure system access
and system security.
authentication-mode Syntax
authentication-mode { password | scheme | none }
View
User interface view
Parameter
password: Requires local authentication of password at log in.
scheme: Requires local or remote authentication of username and password at

log in.
none: Allows users to log in without username or password.
Description
This command configures the authentication method for a user at log in.
Use the command authentication-mode password to prompt a user for local

password authentication at login. To set the password, use set authentication
password.
Use the command authentication-mode scheme to prompt a user to provide

local or remote user name and password authentication at login. The type of the
authentication depends on your network configuration. For further information,
see “AAA and RADIUS”.
Use the command authentication-mode none to allow a user to log in without

username or password authentication.
By default, users logging in using the console port do not need to pass any
terminal authentication. Users logging in via modem or Telnet are required to
provide password authentication when they log in.
Example
To configure local password authentication, enter the following command:
<SW5500>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW5500]user-interface aux 0
[SW5500-ui-aux0]authentication-mode password
auto-execute command Syntax

auto-execute command text

undo auto-execute command
View
User Interface View
Parameter
text: Specifies the command to be run automatically.
Description
Enter auto-execute command text to configure the Switch to automatically run
a specified command. When the user logs in, the command will be executed
automatically. This command is usually used to configure the telnet command on
the terminal, which will connect the user to a designated device automatically.
Enter undo auto-execute command to cancel the auto-execute command so the

command is not run automatically.
By default, auto-execute is disabled.
CAUTION: If you execute this command, the user-interface can no longer be used
to perform routine configurations on the local system. Ensure that you can log in
to the system in some other way to cancel the configuration, before you configure
the auto-execute command and save the configuration.
Example
To configure the Switch to automatically Telnet to device 10.110.100.1 after the
user logs in via VTY 0, enter the following command:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]user-interface vty 0
[SW5500-ui-vty0]auto-execute command telnet 10.110.100.1
command-privilege level Syntax

command-privilege level level view view command
undo command-privilege view view command
View
System View
Parameter
level: Enter the command level you want to assign to this command, ranging
from 0 to 3.
view: Enter the name of the view that contains the command. This can be any of
the views supported by the Switch.
command: Enter the command to be configured.
Description
Use the command-privilege level command to configure the priority level
assigned to any command within a selected view.

The command levels are, from lowest to highest:

■ 0 – Visit
■ 1 – Monitoring
■ 2 – System
■ 3 – Management
You can assign a priority level depending on user requirements. The commands
that a user can access depend first on the access level assigned to the command
and second on the access level assigned to the user interface. If the two levels are
different, the access level assigned to the command has priority. For example, if
the access level of a user interface is 1, but a specific user can access commands at
level 3, the user can log in from this user interface, but can access commands up
to and including level 3.
By default:
■ ping, tracert, and telnet are at level 0
■ display and debugging are at level 1
■ all configuration commands are at system level 2
■ FTP, XMODEM, TFTP and commands for file system operations are at level 3
Use the undo command-privilege view command to restore the default priority
to a command.
Example
To configure the precedence of the command ‘interface’ as 0, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]command-privilege level 0 view system interface
databits Syntax
databits { 7 | 8 }
undo databits
View
User interface view
Parameter
7 – Sets the data bits to 7.
8 – Sets the data bits to 8.
Description
Use the databits command to configure the data bits for the AUX (Console) port
to either 7 or 8. By default, the value is 8. Use the undo databits command to
restore the default value (8).
This command can only be performed in the AUX user interface view.

Example
To configure the data bits of the AUX (Console) port to 7 bits, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-aux0]databits 7
display Syntax
history-command display history-command
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display history-command command to view the commands previously
entered during this login session, up to a specified maximum.
To set the maximum number of commands to display, see history-command

max-size.
Example
To display previously entered commands, enter the following.
<SW5500>display history-command
The commands display on screen.
display user-interface Syntax

display user-interface [ type number | number ] [summary]
View
All views
Parameter
type number: Enter the type and number of the user interface you want to
display details on, for example VTY 3.
number: Enter the index number of the user interface you want to display details
on.
summary: Display the summary of a user interface.
Description
Use the display user-interface command to view information on a user
interface. You can choose to access this information by user interface type and
type number, or by user interface index number. The information displayed is the
same whichever access method you use.

This command without the summary parameter displays user interface type,
absolute/relative index, transmission speed, priority, authentication methods, and
physical location. This command with the summary parameter displays one user
interface in use with user interface name and other user interface information.
Example
To display information on a user interface with an index number of 0, enter the
following.
<SW5500>display user-interface aux 0
The information is displayed in the following format:

Idx Type Tx/Rx Modem Privi Auth Int
0 AUX 0 19200 - 3 N -
+ : Current user-interface is active.

F : Current user-interface is active and work in async mode.
Idx : Absolute index of user-interface.
Type : Type and relative index of user-interface.
Privi: The privilege of user-interface.
Auth : The authentication mode of user-interface.
Int : The physical location of UIs.
A : Authentication use AAA.
N : Current UI need not authentication.
P : Authentication use current UI's password.
Table 3 Output description of the display user-interface command
Field Description
+ Indicates that the user interface is in use
F Current user interface is in use and working in asynchronous
mode
Idx Displays the index number of the user interface
Type Displays the type and type number of the user interface
Tx/Rx Displays the user interface speed
Modem Displays the modem operation mode
Privi Indicates the command level that can be accessed from this
user interface
Auth Indicates the user interface authentication method
Int Indicates the physical location of the user interface
Display the summary information of user interface 0.
<SW5500>display user-interface 0 summary

0: U
1 character mode users. (U)

1 total UIs in use.
UI's name: aux0
Table 4 Output Description of the display user-interface summary Command
Field Description
0: U User interface type
1 character mode users One type of user interface

Table 4 Output Description of the display user-interface summary Command
Field Description
1 total UIs in use The total number of user interfaces in use
UI’s name User interface name
display users Syntax

display users [ all ]
View
All views
Parameter
all: Enter to display information on all user interfaces.
Description
Use the display users command to view information on the current user
interface. Use the display users all command to view the information on all
user interfaces.
Example
To display information on the current user interface, enter the following
[SW5500]display users
The information displays in the following format:

UI Delay Type IPaddress Username Userlevel
F 0 AUX 0 00:00:00 3
The categories of information displayed are as follows:

Table 5 Output description of the display users command
Field Description
F Indicates that the user interface is in use and is working in asynchronous mode
UI Number of the first list is the absolute number of user interface.
Number of the second list is the relative number of user interface
Delay Indicates the interval from the latest input until now, in seconds.
Type Indicates the user interface type.
IPaddress Displays initial connection location, namely the host IP address of the incoming
connection.
Username Display the login name of the user who is using this interface
Userlevel Display the level of the user using this user interface
free user-interface Syntax

free user-interface { type | number }
View
User view

Parameter
type: Enter the type and type number of the user interface to be reset.
number: Enter the index number of the user interface to be reset.
Description
Use this command to reset a specified user interface to its default settings. The
user interface will be disconnected after the reset.
Use free user-interface type to reset the interface with the specified type
and type number to its default settings. Use free user-interface number to
reset the interface with the specified index number to its default settings.
You cannot use this command on the current user interface.
Example
To reset user interface AUX 1 from another user interface on the Switch , enter the
following:
<SW5500>free user-interface aux 1
After the command is executed, user interface AUX 1 is disconnected. When you
next log in using user interface AUX 1, it opens using the default settings .
header Syntax
header { shell | incoming | login } text
undo header { shell | incoming | login }
View
System view
Parameter
login: Login information in case of authentication. It is displayed before the user

is prompted to enter user name and password.
shell: User conversation established header, the information output after user
conversation has been established. If authentication is required, it is prompted
after the user passes authentication..
incoming: Login header, the information output after a Modem user logs in. If
authentication is required, it is prompted after the user passes authentication. In
this case, no shell information is output..
text: Specifies the title text. If you do not choose any keyword in the command,
the system displays the login information by default. The system supports two
types of input mode: you can input all the text in one line (a maximum of 256
characters, including command key word, can be entered); or you can input all the
text in several lines using the <Enter> key, and more than 256 characters can be
entered. The text starts and ends with the first character. After entering the last
character, press the <Enter> key to exit the interactive process.

Description
Use the header command to configure the system to display a header during user
log in. Use the undo header { shell | incoming | login } command to
delete the specified header.
When the user logs in, and a connection is activated, the login header displays.
After the user successfully logs in, the shell header displays.
The first characters in the text are regarded as the start and stop characters. After
you type in the stop character, the system will exit the header command
automatically.
If you do not want to use the control characters, you can type in text with the
same characters at the beginning and end, and press Enter.
If you press <Enter> after typing any of the three keywords shell, login and
incoming in the command, then what you type after the word header is the
contents of the login information, instead of identifying header type.
You can judge whether the initial character can be used as the header contents
this way:
1 If there is only one character in the first line and it is used as the identifier, this
initial character pairs with the ending character and is not the header contents.
2 If there are many characters in the first line but the initial and ending characters
are different, this initial character pairs with the ending character and is the
header contents.
3 There are many characters in the first line and the initial character is identical with
the ending character, this initial character is not the header contents.
Example
Configure the header of setting up a session.
Mode 1: Input in one line

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]header shell %SHELL: Hello! Welcome%
The starting and ending characters must be the same, and press the <Enter> key
to finish a line.
■ When you log on the Switch again, the terminal displays the configured session
establishment title.
[SW5500]quit
<SW5500>quit
Please press ENTER
SHELL: Hello! Welcome
The initial character "%" is not the header contents.
<SW5500>

Mode 2: Input in several lines

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]header shell % SHELL:
After you pressing the <Enter> key, the system prompts the following message:
Input banner text, and quit with the character '%'.
Go on inputting the rest text and end your input with the first letter:
Hello! Welcome %
Press the <Enter> key.

[SW5500]
When you log on the Switch again, the terminal displays the configured session
establishment title.
[SW5500]quit
<SW5500>quit
Please press ENTER
%SHELL:
The initial character "%" is the header contents.
Hello! Welcome
<SW5500>
history-command Syntax
max-size history-command max-size value
undo history-command max-size
View
User interface view
Parameter
value: Enter the number of previously entered commands that you want the
Switch to save.
Description
Use the command history-command max-size to specify the amount of
previously entered commands that you want the Switch to save. Enter any value
between 0 and 256. The default is 10, that is, the 10 most recently entered
commands are saved. Use the undo history-command max-size command to
restore the default value.
To display the most recently-entered commands, up to the specified maximum,

use the command display history-command.
Example
To set the history buffer to 20, that is to save the 20 most recently-entered
commands, enter the following:

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-aux0]history-command max-size 20
idle-timeout Syntax
idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]
undo idle-timeout
View
User interface view
Parameter
minutes: Enter the number of minutes you want to allow a user interface to
remain idle before it is disconnected. This can be in the range 0 to 35791.
seconds: Enter the number of seconds in addition to the number of minutes.

Optional.
Description
Use the idle-timeout command to configure the amount of time you want to
allow a user interface to remain idle before it is disconnected. Use the undo
idle-timeout command to restore the default idle-timeout. By default,
idle-timeout is set to 10 minutes.
To disable idle timeout, set the idle-timeout value to 0.
Example
To configure the timeout value to 1 minute on the AUX user interface, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-aux0]idle-timeout 1
language-mode Syntax
language-mode { chinese | english }
View
User View
Parameter
chinese: Sets the language of the command line interface to Chinese.
english: Sets the language of the command line interface to English.
Description
Use the language-mode command to choose the language of the command line
interface. By default, the command line interface is set to English.

Example
To change the command line interface from English to Chinese, enter the
following:
<SW5500-ui-aux0>language-mode chinese
lock Syntax
lock
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the lock command to lock the current user interface and prevent
unauthorized users from accessing it. An authorized user must enter a valid
password to access the interface.
Example
To lock the current user interface, enter the following:
<SW5500>lock
Password: xxxx
Again: xxxx
parity Syntax
parity { even | mark | none | odd | space }
undo parity
View
User Interface View
Parameter
even: Sets the Switch to even parity.
mark: Sets the Switch to mark parity (1)
none: Sets the Switch to perform no parity checking.
odd: Sets the Switch to odd parity.
space: Sets the Switch to zero parity (0)
Description
Use the parity command to configure the parity mode on the AUX (Console)
port. Use the undo parity command to restore the default parity mode (no parity
checking).
This command can only be performed in the AUX user interface view.

Example
To set mark parity on the AUX (Console) port, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-aux0]parity mark
protocol inbound Syntax

protocol inbound { all| ssh | telnet }
View
VTY user interface view
Parameter
all: Supports both Telnet and SSH protocols.
ssh: Supports only SSH protocol.
telnet: Supports only Telnet protocol.
Description
Use the protocol inbound command to configure the protocols supported by a
designated user interface.
By default, the user interface supports Telnet and SSH protocol.
For the related commands, see user-interface vty.
Example
Configure SSH protocol supported by VTY0 user interface.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-vty0]protocol inbound ssh
quit Syntax
quit
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the quit command to exit from the current view to the next highest view. If
the current view is user view, this command quits the system.
There are three levels of view, which are, from high to low:
■ user view

■ system view
■ menu views, for example VLAN view, Ethernet port view, and so on.
Related commands: return, system-view.
Example
To return to user view from system view, enter the following:
[SW5500]quit
<SW5500>
return Syntax
return
View
System view or higher
Parameter
None
Description
Use the return command to return to user view from any other view.
Ctrl+Z performs the same function as the return command.
To return to the next highest level of view, use quit.
Example
To return to user view from any other view (the example below shows the
command entered from the system view), enter the following.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]return
<SW5500>
screen-length Syntax
screen-length screen-length
undo screen-length
View
User interface view
Parameter
screen-length: Enter the maximum number of information lines that you want
to display on a terminal screen, ranging from 0 to 512. The default is 24.
Description
Use the command screen-length to configure how many information lines
(maximum) will be displayed on the screen of a terminal. Use the command undo
screen-length to restore the default of 24 lines.

To disable this function, that is to allow an unlimited number of information lines,

enter the parameter as 0.
Example
To configure a terminal to display 20 lines of information, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-aux0]screen-length 20
send Syntax
send { all | number | type }
View
User view
Parameter
all: Sends a message to all user interfaces.
type: Enter the type and type number of the user interface that you want to send
a message to.
number: Enter the absolute/relative number of the interface that you want to
send a message to.
Description
Use the send command to send messages to other user interfaces.
Example
To send a message to all the user interfaces, enter the following:
<SW5500>send all
service-type Syntax
service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access |{ssh |
telnet | terminal }* [ level level ]}
undo service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access
|{ssh | telnet | terminal }* }
View Local-user View
Parameter
telnet: Specifies user type as Telnet.
ssh: Specifies user type as SSH.
level level: Specifies the level of Telnet, SSH or terminal users. The argument
level is an integer in the range of 0 to 3 and defaults to 0.
ftp: Specifies user type as ftp.

ftp-directory directory: Specifies the directory of ftp users, directory is a

character string of up to 64 characters.
lan-access: Specifies user type to lan-access, which mainly refers to Ethernet

accessing users, 802.1x supplicants for example.
terminal: Authorizes the user to use the terminal service (login from the Console
port).
Description
Use the command service-type to configure which level of command a user can
access after login. Use the command undo service-type to restore the default
level of command (level 1).
Commands are classified into four levels, as follows:

■ 0 - Visit level. Users at this level have access to network diagnosis tools (such as
ping and tracert), and the Telnet commands. A user at this level cannot save
the configuration file.
■ 1 - Monitoring level. Users at this level can perform system maintenance,
service fault diagnosis, and so on. A user at this level cannot save the
configuration file.
■ 2 - System level. Users at this level can perform service configuration
operations, including routing, and can enter commands that affect each
network layer. Configuration level commands are used to provide direct
network service to the user.
■ 3 - Management level. Users at this level can perform basic system operations,
and can use file system commands, FTP commands, TFTP commands, XModem
downloading commands, user management commands and level setting
commands.
Example
To allow a user zbr to configure commands a level 0 after login, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]local-user zbr
[SW5500-luser-zbr]service-type telnet level 0
To activate these settings, quit the system and login with the username zbr. Now
only the commands at level 0 are listed on the terminal.
[SW5500]quit
<SW5500>?
User view commands:
language-mode Specify the language environment

ping Ping function
quit Exit from current command view
super Set the current user priority level
telnet Establish one TELNET connection
tracert Trace route function

set authentication Syntax

password set authentication password { cipher | simple } password
undo set authentication password
View
User interface view
Parameter
cipher: Configure to display the password in encrypted text.
simple: Configure to display the password in plain text.
password: If the authentication is in the simple mode, the password must be in

plain text. If the authentication is in the cipher mode, the password can be either
in encrypted text or in plain text. If a plain text password is entered when cipher
mode has been selected, the password will be displayed in the configuration
settings as encrypted. A plain text password is a sequential character string of no
more than 16 digits, for example, 3Com918. The length of an encrypted password
must be 24 digits and in encrypted text, for example,
_(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4<1!!.
Description
Use the set authentication password command to configure the password for
local authentication. Use the undo set authentication password command to
cancel local authentication password.
The password in plain text is required when performing authentication, regardless

of whether the configuration is plain text or cipher text.
By default, a password is required for users connecting over Modem or Telnet. If a

password has not been set, the following prompt is displayed: Login password
has not been set!
Example
To configure the local authentication password on VTY 0 to 3Com, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-vty0]set authentication password simple 3com
shell Syntax
shell
undo shell
View
User interface view
Parameter
None

Description
Use the shell command to enable the terminal service for a user interface. The
terminal service is enabled by default. Use the undo shell command to disable
the terminal service for a user interface.
When using the undo shell command, note the following points.
■ For reasons of security, the undo shell command can only be used on user
interfaces other than the AUX user interface.
■ You cannot use this command on the current user interface.
■ You are asked to confirm the command.
Example
To disable the terminal service on the VTY user interfaces 0 to 4, enter the
following from another user interface:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]user-interface vty 0 4
[SW5500-ui-vty0-4]undo shell
speed Syntax
speed speed-value
undo speed
View
User interface view
Parameter
speed-value: Specify the transmission rate on the AUX (Console) port in bits per
second (bps). This can be any of the following values: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 .
The default rate is 19200 bps.
Description
Use the speed command to configure the transmission rate on the AUX (Console)
port. Use the undo speed command to restore the default rate.
This command can only be performed in AUX user interface view.
Example
To configure the transmission speed on the AUX (Console) port as 9600 b/s, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-aux0]speed 9600
stopbits Syntax
stopbits { 1 | 1.5 | 2 }

undo stopbits
View
User interface view
Parameter
1: Sets the stop bits to 1.
1.5: Sets the stop bits to 1.5.
2: Sets the stop bits to 2.
Description
Use the stopbits command to configure the stop bits on the AUX (Console) port.
Use the undo stopbits command to restore the default stop bits (the default
is 1).
This command can only be performed in AUX user interface view.
Example
To configure the stop bits to 2, enter the following from the AUX (Console) port:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-aux0]stopbits 2
super Syntax
super level
View
All views
Parameter
level: Enter a user level in the range 0 to 3. The default is 3.
Description
The super command gives a user access to a higher level than their currently
assigned user level.
To ensure that only an authorized user can access the higher level, use the super
password command to set a password for the higher level. If the user does not
enter a valid password, the user level does not change.
Login users are classified into four levels that correspond to the four command
levels. A user can only use commands at the levels that are equal to or lower than
their user level.
Related commands: super password, quit.
Example
To change to user level 3 from the current user level.

<SW5500>super 3
Password:
The password prompt displays only if you set a password using the super
password command.
super password Syntax

super password [ level level ]{ simple | cipher } password
undo super password [ level level ]
View
System View
Parameter
level: Enter a user level in the range 1 to 3. The default is 3. The password you
enter is set for the specified level.
cipher: Configure to display the password in encrypted text.
simple: Configure to display the password in plain text.
password: If the authentication is in the simple mode, the password must be in

plain text. If the authentication is in the cipher mode, the password can be either
in encrypted text or in plain text. If a plain text password is entered when cipher
mode has been selected, the password will be displayed in the configuration
settings as encrypted. A plain text password is a sequential character string of no
more than 16 digits, for example, 3Com918. The length of an encrypted password
must be 24 digits and in encrypted text, for example,
_(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4<1!!.
Description
Use the super password command to configure the password for changing the
user from a lower level to a higher level. To prevent unauthorized users from illegal
intrusion, user ID authentication is performed when users switch from a lower
level to a higher level. For the sake of confidentiality, on the screen the user cannot
see the password that he entered. The user has three chances to input valid
password, and then switch to the higher level. Otherwise, the original user level
will remain unchanged. Use the undo super password command to cancel the
password settings.
The password in plain text is required when performing authentication, regardless

of whether the configuration is plain text or encrypted text.
Example
To set the password for level 3 to zbr, type the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]super password level 3 simple zbr
sysname Syntax
sysname text

undo sysname
View
System view
Parameter
text: Enter the host name of the Switch. The host name must be no more than
30 characters long. The default is SW5500.
Description
Use the sysname command to configure the host name of the Switch. Use the
undo sysname command to restore the host name to the default of SW5500.
Changing the hostname of the Ethernet switch will affect the prompt of
command line interface. For example, if the hostname of the Ethernet switch is
MyHost, the prompt in user view will be <MyHost>.
Example
To configure the hostname of the Switch to 3Com, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]sysname 3Com
[3Com]
system-view Syntax
system-view
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Enter system-view to enter the system view from the user view.
Related commands: quit, return.
Example
To enter system view from user view, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
System view: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW5500]
telnet Syntax
telnet { hostname | ip_address } [ service_port ]
View
User view

Parameter
hostname: Enter the host name of the remote Switch. It is configured using the
ip host command.
ip_address: Enter the IP address or the host name of the remote Switch. If you
enter the host name, the Switch must be set to static resolution.
service_port: Designates the management port on the remote Switch, in the

range 0 to 65535. Optional.
Description
Use the telnet command to log in to another Ethernet switch from the current
switch via Telnet for remote management. To terminate the Telnet logon, press
<Ctrl+K> .
If you do not specify a service_port, the default Telnet port number of 23 is

used.
Related command: display tcp status.
Example
To log in to the Ethernet switch Switch32 at IP address 10.1.1.1 from the current
Switch (Switch01), enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-vty0-4]authentication-mode none
<Switch01>telnet 10.1.1.1
Trying 10.1.1.1.....
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.1.1.1...
*********************************************************
* All rights reserved (1997-2005) *
* Without the owner's prior written consent, *
*no decompiling or reverse-engineering shall be allowed.*
*********************************************************
<Switch32>
user-interface Syntax
user-interface [ type ] first_number [ last_number ]
View
System view
Parameter
type: Enter the user interface type, which can be aux or vty.
first_number: Specifies the number of the first user interface to be configured..
last_number: Specifies the number of the last user interface to be configured.

Description
Using user-interface command, you can enter single user interface view or
multiple user interface views to configure the corresponding user interfaces.
Example
To configure the user interfaces with index numbers 0 to 9, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]user-interface 0 9
[SW5500-ui0-9]
This example command selects two AUX (Console) port user interfaces and two
VTY user interfaces (VTY 0, VTY 1). You can now assign access levels to these
interfaces using the user privilege level command.
user privilege level Syntax

user privilege level level
undo user privilege level
View
User interface view
Parameter
level: Enter the level of command that a user can access, in the range 0 to 3.
Description
Use the user privilege level level command to configure the command level
that a user can access from the specified user interface. The user can use all the
available commands at this command level. Use the undo user privilege level
command to restore the default command level. By default, a user can access all
commands at Level 3 after logging in through the AUX user interface, and all
commands at Level 0 after logging in through a VTY user interface.
Example
To configure a user to access command level 0 after logging in from the VTY 0
user interface, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]user privilege level 0
When the user Telnets from the VTY 0 user interface to the switch, the terminal
displays commands at level 0, as shown below:
<SW5500>?
User view commands:
language-mode Specify the language environment

ping Ping function
quit Exit from current command view
super Set the current user priority level
telnet Establish one TELNET connection
tracert Trace route function

undo Negate a command or set its default

2 USING PORT COMMANDS
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands

■ broadcast-suppression
■ copy configuration
■ description
■ display interface
■ display loopback-detection
■ display port
■ display unit
■ duplex
■ flow-control
■ interface
■ jumboframe enable
■ loopback
■ loopback-detection control enable
■ loopback-detection enable
■ loopback-detection interval-time
■ loopback-detection per-vlan enable
■ multicast-suppression
■ port access vlan
■ port hybrid pvid vlan
■ port hybrid vlan
■ port link-type
■ port trunk permit vlan
■ port trunk pvid vlan
■ reset counters interface
■ shutdown
■ speed
■ unicast-suppression
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands

■ debugging link-aggregation error

48 CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
■ debugging link-aggregation event

■ debugging lacp packet
■ debugging lacp state
■ display link-aggregation summary
■ display link-aggregation verbose
■ display link-aggregation interface
■ display lacp system-id
■ lacp enable
■ lacp port-priority
■ lacp system-priority
■ link-aggregation group agg-id description
■ link-aggregation group agg-id mode
■ port link-aggregation group
■ reset lacp statistics

Ethernet Port This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Configuration ports on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
broadcast-suppression Syntax
broadcast-suppression { ratio | pps pps }
undo broadcast-suppression
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
ratio: Specifies the bandwidth ratio of broadcast traffic allowed on an Ethernet

port. The ratio value ranges from 1 to 100. The incremental step is 1. By default,
the ratio is 100 meaning all broadcast traffic is accepted. The smaller the ratio is,
the less bandwidth is allocated to broadcast traffic and therefore less broadcast
traffic is accepted on the Ethernet port.
pps pps: Specifies the maximum number of broadcast packets per second
accepted on an Ethernet port. Ranges from 1 to 148810 pps.
Description
Use broadcast-suppression to configure the amount of broadcast traffic that

will be accepted on a port. Once the broadcast traffic exceeds the value set by the
user, the excess broadcast traffic will be discarded. This feature can be used to
ensure network service and prevent broadcast storms.
Example
Enable a limit of 20% of the available bandwidth on a port to be allocated to

broadcast traffic. Broadcast traffic exceeding 20% of the ports bandwidth will be
discarded.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[SW5500-Ethernet1/0/1]broadcast-suppression 20
[SW5500-Ethernet1/0/1]
Specify the maximum packets per second of broadcast traffic on Ethernet1/0/1 to

be 1000.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Ethernet1/0/1]broadcast-suppression pps 1000

copy configuration Syntax

copy configuration source { interface-type interface_number |
interface_name | aggregation-group agg-id } destination {
interface_list [ aggregation-group agg-id ] | aggregation-group
agg-id }
View
System View
Parameter
interface_type: Source port type.
interface_num: Source port number.
interface_name: Source port name, in the format of interface_name =

interface_type interface_num. For more information, see the parameter item for
the interface command.
interface_list: Destination port list, interface_list1 = { interface_type

interface_num | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num |
interface_name } ] &<1-10>. &<1-10> indicates that the former parameter can
be input 10 times repeatedly at most.
agg-id: Source or destination aggregation group ID. If it is a source aggregation

group, the port with minimum port number is the source port; if it is a destination
aggregation group, the configurations of all its member ports change to be
consistent with that of the source.
Description
Use the copy configuration command to copy the configuration of a specific
port to other ports, to ensure consistent configuration.
Example
Copy the configuration of aggregation group 1 to aggregation group 2.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]copy configuration source aggregation-group 1, destination
aggregation-group 2
description Syntax
description text
undo description
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
text: Enter a description of the Ethernet port. This can be a maximum of 80
characters.

Description
Use the description command to enter a description of an Ethernet port. Use
the undo description command to cancel the description.
By default, an Ethernet port does not have a description.
Example
Set the description of port Ethernet1/0/1 to be lanswitch-interface.

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface Gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]description lanswitch-interface
display interface Syntax

display interface [ interface_type |
interface_type interface_number ]
View
All views
Parameter
interface_type: Enter the interface type. This can be either Aux, Ethernet,
GigabitEthernet , NULL, Vlan-interface.
interface_number: Enter the interface number in the format

unit-number/0/port-number.
The unit number is a number in the range 1 to 8.
The port number is a number in the range 1 to 28 or 1 to 52 depending on the

number of ports you have on your unit.
You can use the interface_name at this command. This consists of the
interface_type and the interface_number combined as a single parameter. For
example Ethernet1/0/1.
Description
Use the display interface command to view the configuration information on
the selected interface. Along with others, this interface could be a specific port's
interface (for example, Ethernet1/0/1) or a specific VLAN interface (for example,
vlan-interface 1).
Example
To display configuration information on Ethernet port 1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>display interface Ethernet 1/0/1

Ethernet1/0/1 current state : UP

IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is

00e0-fc00-0010
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Media type is twisted pair, loopback not set
Port hardware type is 1000_BASE_T
Unkown-speed mode, unknown-duplex mode
Link speed type is autonegotiation, link duplex type is
autonegotiation
Flow-control is not enabled
The Maximum Frame Length is 1536
Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100%
Allow jumbo frame to pass
PVID: 1
Mdi type: auto
Port link-type: access
Tagged VLAN ID : none
Untagged VLAN ID : 1
Last 300 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Last 300 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Input(total): 0 packets, 0 bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts
Input(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts
Input: 0 input errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles, 0 CRC
frame, - overruns, 0 aborts, - ignored, - parity errors
Output(total): 0 packets, 0 bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Output(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 pauses
Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, - buffer failures
- aborts, 0 deferred, 0 collisions, 0 late collisions
- lost carrier, - no carrier
Table 6 Output Description of the Display Interface Command
Field Description
Ethernet1/0/1 current state Indicates the current state of the Ethernet port (up
or down)
IP Sending frames’ format Displays the Ethernet frame format
Hardware address Displays the port hardware address
Description Displays the port description
The Maximum Transmit Unit Indicates the maximum transmit unit
Media type Indicates the type of media
loopback not set Displays the port loopback test state
Port hardware type Displays the port hardware type
Unknowns-speed mode, Both the duplex mode and the rate are set to
unknown-duplex mode, link speed type auto-negotiation.
is autonegotiation, link duplex type is
autonegotiation
Flow control is not enabled Port flow control state
The Maximum Frame Length Indicates the maximum length of the Ethernet
frames that can pass through the port
Broadcast MAX ratio Port broadcast storm suppression ratio
Allow jumbo frame to pass Indicates that jumbo frame are allowed to pass
through the port

Table 6 Output Description of the Display Interface Command

PVID Indicates the port default VLAN ID.
Mdi type Indicates the cable type
Port link-type Indicates the port link type
Tagged VLAN ID Indicates the VLANs with packets tagged
Untagged VLAN ID Indicates the VLANs with packets untagged
Last 300 minutes input rate: Displays the input/output rate and the number of
0 packets/sec, 0 bytes/sec packets that were passed on this port in the last
300 seconds
Last 300 minutes output rate:
0 packets/sec, 0 bytes/sec
Input(total): 0 packets, 0 bytes The statistics information of input/output packets
and errors on this port. A “-” indicates that the
- broadcasts, - multicasts
item isn't supported by the switch.
Input(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts
Input: 0 input errors, 0 runts, 0 giants,
0 throttles, 0 CRC
- frame, - overruns, 0 aborts, -
ignored, - parity errors
Output(total): 0 packets, 0 bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Output(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 pauses
Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, -
buffer failures
- aborts, 0 deferred, 0 collisions, 0
late collisions
- lost carrier, - no carrier
display Syntax
loopback-detection display loopback-detection
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display loopback-detection command to view whether the port
loopback detection has been enabled. If it has been enabled, then the time
interval of the detection and the current port loopback information will also be
displayed.
Example
To display if the port loopback detection is enabled, enter the following:
<SW5500>display loopback-detection
The details display in the following format:

Loopback-detection is running
Detection interval time is 30 seconds
There is no port existing loopback link
Table 7 Output Description of the Display Loopback-detection Command
Field Description
Loopback-detection is running The Loopback-detection is enabled
Detection interval time is 30 seconds The detection interval is 30 seconds
There is no port existing loopback link No port is in the loopback state
display port Syntax

display port { hybrid | trunk }
View
All views
Parameter
hybrid: Enter to display the hybrid ports.
trunk: Enter to display the trunked ports.
Description
Use the display port hybrid command to view the ports whose link type is
hybrid. Use the display port trunk command to view the ports whose link type
is trunk.
Example
To display the currently configured hybrid ports, enter the following:
<SW5500>display port hybrid
The details display in the following format:
The following hybrid ports exist:

GigabitEthernet1/0/1 GibabitEthernet1/0/2
This example indicates that the current configuration has two hybrid ports,
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 and GigabitEthernet1/0/2.
display unit Syntax

display unit unit-id interface
View
Any view
Parameter
unit-id: Specifies Unit ID, ranging from 1 to 8.

Description
Using display unit unit-id interface command, you can view all port
interfaces for the specified unit.
Example
Display the port information for all ports on Unit 1.
<SW5500>display unit 1 interface
Aux1/0/0 current state :DOWN
Line protocol current state :DOWN
Internet protocol processing : disabled
Description : Aux1/0/0 Interface
Data drive mode: interactive
5 minutes input rate 0.0 bytes/sec, 0.0 packets/sec
5 minutes output rate 0.0 bytes/sec, 0.0 packets/sec
0 packets input, 1000 bytes
0 packets output, 27317 bytes
error: Parity 0, Frame 0, Overrun 0, FIFO 0
DCD=UP DTR=UP DSR=UP RTS=UP CTS=UP
Cascade1/2/1 current state :DOWN

Description : Cascade1/2/1 Interface
The Maximum Transit Unit is 1500, Hold timer is 10(sec)
(Omitted)
duplex Syntax
duplex { auto | full | half }
undo duplex
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameters
auto: Enter to set the port to auto-negotiation.
full: Enter to set the port to full-duplex.
half: Enter to set the port to half-duplex.
Description
Use the duplex command to configure the duplex mode of an Ethernet port to
auto-negotiation, full duplex or half-duplex. Use the undo duplex command to
restore the duplex mode of a port to the default mode (auto-negotiation).
Related command: speed.
Example
To configure the Ethernet port “Ethernet1/0/1” to auto-negotiation, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view


[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]duplex auto
flow-control Syntax
flow-control
undo flow-control
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameters
None
Description
Use the flow-control command to enable flow control on an Ethernet port. This
avoids discarding data packets due to congestion. Use the undo flow-control
command to disable flow control.
By default, flow control is disabled.
Example
To enable flow control on port “Ethernet1/0/1”, enter the following.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]flow-control
interface Syntax
interface interface_type interface_num | interface_name
View
System View
Parameter
interface_type: Enter the interface type. This can be either ,
GigabitEthernet, TenGigabitEthernet, Cascade.
interface_number: Enter the interface number in the format unit ID/slot

number/port-number.
The unit ID is a number in the range 1 to 8.
The slot number is a number in the range 0 to 2
The port number is a number in the range 1 to 28 or 1 to 52 depending on the

number of ports you have on your unit.

You can use the interface_name at this command. This consists of the
interface_type and the interface_number combined as a single parameter. For
example Ethernet1/0/1.
Description
Use the command interface interface_type interface_number to enter the
interface of the specified port.
If you want to configure the parameters of an Ethernet port, you must first use
this command to enter the Ethernet port view.
Example
To enter the interface for port “GigabitEthernet1/0/1”, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface Gigabitethernet1/0/1
jumboframe enable Syntax

jumboframe enable
undo jumboframe enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None.
Description
Use the jumboframe enable command to allow jumbo frames to pass through
the specified Ethernet port. Use the undo jumboframe enable command to
prevent jumbo frames from passing through an Ethernet port.
If using the 3comoscfg.def default file, jumbo frame support is disabled on all
ports. When it is enabled, frames between 1522 bytes and 9216 bytes are
permitted.
Example
Allow jumbo frames to pass through Ethernet port 1/0/1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]jumboframe enable
loopback Syntax
loopback { external | internal }

View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
external: External loop test.
internal: Internal loop test.
Description
Use the loopback command to configure the Ethernet port to perform the
loopback test to check if the Ethernet port works normally. The loop test will finish
automatically after being performed for a while.
By default, the Ethernet port will not perform the loopback test.
Example
To perform the internal loop test for Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]loopback internal
loopback-detection Syntax
control enable loopback-detection control enable
undo loopback-detection control enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the loopback-detection control enable command to enable loopback
detection control function on a Trunk port or Hybrid port. Use the undo
loopback-detection control enable command to disable loopback detection
control function on a Trunk port or Hybrid port.
This command controls the operating status of the port, when the loopback
detection function is enabled and lookback is detected on a Trunk or Hybrid port.
When this function is enabled and loopback is detected on a Trunk or Hybrid port,
the system begins to control the operating status of the port. When this function
is disabled and loopback is found, the system just reports a Trap message but has
no control over the operating status of the Trunk or Hybrid port.
By default, the loopback detection control function on Trunk or Hybrid ports is

disabled.
This command has no effect on Access ports.

Example
Enable port loopback detection control.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]loopback-detection control enable
enable loopback-detection enable
undo loopback-detection enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the loopback-detection enable command to enable port loopback
detection. If there is a loopback port found, the switch will put it under control.
Use the undo loopback-detection enable command to disable port loopback
detection.
Loopback detection of a specified port only functions after port loopback

detection is enabled in the System or Ethernet port view. By default, port loopback
detection is disabled.
Related commands: display loopback-detection
Example
To enable port loopback detection, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]loopback-detection enable
interval-time loopback-detection interval-time time
undo loopback-detection interval-time
View
System View
Parameter
time: Specifies the interval of monitoring external loopback conditions of the
port. It ranges from 5 to 300, measured in seconds.

By default, the interval is 30 seconds.
Description
Use the loopback-detection interval-time command to configure the
detection interval for the external loopback condition of each port. Use the undo
loopback-detection interval-time command to restore the default interval.
Related commands: display loopback-detection
Example
To configure the detection interval for the external loopback condition of each
port to 10 seconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]loopback-detection interval-time 10
per-vlan enable loopback-detection per-vlan enable
undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to configure the
system to perform loopback detection on all VLANs on Trunk and Hybrid ports.
Use the undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to configure the
system to only perform loopback detection on the default VLANs on the port.
By default, the system performs loopback detection to the default VLAN on Trunk
and Hybrid ports.
Example
Configure the detection interval for the external loopback condition of each port
to 10 seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]loopback-detection per-vlan enable
multicast-suppression Syntax
multicast-suppression { ratio | pps pps}
undo multicast-suppression

View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
ratio: Specifies the bandwidth ratio of multicast traffic allowed on an Ethernet

the ratio is 100 meaning all multicast traffic is accepted. The smaller the ratio is,
the less bandwidth is allocated to multicast traffic and therefore less broadcast
traffic is accepted on the Ethernet port.
pps pps: Specifies the maximum number of multicast packets per second accepted
on an Ethernet port. Ranges from 1 to 148810 pps.
Description
Use multicast-suppression to configure the amount of multicast traffic that will

be accepted on a port. Once the multicast traffic exceeds the value set by the user,
the excess multicast traffic will be discarded. This feature can be used to ensure
network service and prevent multicast storms.
Example
multicast traffic. Multicast traffic exceeding 20% of the ports bandwidth will be
discarded.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]multicast-suppression 20
port access vlan Syntax

port access vlan vlan_id
undo port access vlan
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter a VLAN ID in the range 2 to 4094, as defined in IEEE 802.1Q.
Description
■ Use the port access vlan command to assign the access port to a specified
VLAN.
■ Use the undo port access vlan command to remove the access port from
the VLAN.
Example
To assign GigabitEthernet port 1/0/1 to VLAN3, enter the following.
<SW5500>system-view


[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]port access vlan 3
port hybrid pvid vlan Syntax

port hybrid pvid vlan vlan_id
undo port hybrid pvid
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter a VLAN ID in the range 2 to 4094, as defined in IEEE 802.1Q. The
default is 1.
Description
Use the port hybrid pvid vlan command to configure the default VLAN ID of
the hybrid port. Use the undo port hybrid pvid command to restore the default
VLAN ID of the hybrid port.
Hybrid port can be configured together with the isolate-user-vlan. But if the
default VLAN has set mapping in the isolate-user-vlan, the default VLAN ID cannot
be modified. If you want to modify it, cancel the mapping first.
The default VLAN ID of local hybrid port must be consistent with that of the peer
one, otherwise, the packets cannot be properly transmitted.
Related command: port link-type.
Example
To configure the default VLAN of the hybrid port Ethernet1/0/1 to VLAN100, enter
the following.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]port hybrid pvid vlan 100
port hybrid vlan Syntax

port hybrid vlan vlan_id_list { tagged | untagged }
undo port hybrid vlan vlan_id_list
View
Ethernet Port View

Parameter
vlan_id_list: Enter a VLAN ID, or more than one VLAN ID, in the range 2 to
4094. The hybrid port will be added to the specified VLANs. This can be a single
VLAN, a series of individual VLANs separated by a space, or the the first VLAN in a
range of VLANs (vlan_id to last_vlan_id).
You can enter up to ten vlan_id parameters in one port hybrid vlan
command.
tagged: Enter to tag the port for the specified VLAN.
untagged: Enter to leave the port untagged for the specified VLAN.
Description
Use the port hybrid vlan command to add the port to the specified VLAN(s).
The port needs to have been made a hybrid port before you can do this. See the
related command below. Use the undo port hybrid vlan command to remove
the port from the specified VLAN(s).
A hybrid port can belong to multiple VLANs. A port can only be added to a VLAN
if the VLAN has already been created. See the vlan vlan-vid command.
Example
To add the port Ethernet1/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4 and all VLANs in the range 50 to
100 as a tagged port, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]port hybrid vlan 2 4 50 to 100 tagged
port link-type Syntax

port link-type { access | hybrid | trunk | xrn-fabric }
undo port link-type
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
access: Enter to configure the port as an access port.
hybrid: Enter to configure the port as a hybrid port
trunk: Enter to configure the port as a trunk port.

Description
Use the port link-type command to configure the link type of the Ethernet
port. Use the undo port link-type command to restore the port as default
status. By default, a port is an access port.
A port on a Switch can be configured as an access port, a hybrid port, a trunk port
or a fabric port. However, to reconfigure between hybrid and trunk link types, you
must first restore the default, or access, link type.
Example
To configure the Ethernet port Ethernet1/0/1 as a trunk port, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]port link-type trunk
port trunk permit vlan Syntax

port trunk permit vlan {vlan_id_list | all}
undo port trunk permit vlan {vlan_id_list| all}
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter a VLAN ID, or more than one VLAN ID, in the range 1 to 4094.
The trunk port will be added to the specified VLANs. This can be a single VLAN, a
series of individual VLANs separated by a space, or the first VLAN in a range of
VLANs. If this is the first VLAN in a range use the last_vlan_id parameter to
indicate the last VLAN in the range (vlan_id to last_vlan_id).
You can enter up to ten vlan_id parameters at one port trunk permit vlan
command.
all: Enter to add the trunk port to all VLANs.
Description
Use the port trunk permit vlan command to add a trunk port to one VLAN, a
selection of VLANs or all VLANs. Use the undo port trunk permit vlan
command to remove a trunk port from one VLAN, a selection of VLANs or all
VLANs.
A trunk port can belong to multiple VLANs. If the port trunk permit vlan
command is used many times, then the VLAN enabled to pass on trunk port is the
set of these vlan_id_list.

Example
To add the trunk port Ethernet1/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4 and all VLANs in the range
50-100, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]port trunk permit vlan 2 4 50 to 100
port trunk pvid vlan Syntax

port trunk pvid vlan vlan_id
undo port trunk pvid
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter a VLAN ID in the range 2 to 4094, as defined in IEEE802.1Q. This
is the VLAN that you want to be the default VLAN for a trunk port.
The default is 1.
Description
Use the port trunk pvid vlan command to configure the default VLAN ID for a
trunk port. Use the undo port trunk pvid command to restore the default VLAN
ID for a trunk port.
The default VLAN ID of local trunk port should be consistent with that of the peer
one, otherwise packets cannot be properly transmitted.
Example
To configure the trunk port Ethernet1/0/1 to the default VLAN of 100, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]port trunk pvid vlan 100
reset counters interface Syntax

reset counters interface [ interface_type | interface_type
interface_num | interface_name]
View
User view

Parameter
interface_type: Specifies the port type.
interface_num: Specifies the port number.
interface_name: Specifies the port name in the interface_name=

interface_type interface_num format.
For parameter description, refer to the interface command.
Description
Use the reset counters interface command to reset the statistical information
on the port and count the related information again on the port for the user.
If you do not enter a port type, or port type and port number, information is
cleared from all ports on the Switch. If only the port type is specified, all the
information on ports of this type will be cleared. If both port type and port
number are specified, the information on the dpecified port will be cleared. After
802.1x is enabled, the port information cannot be reset.
Example
To reset statistical information on Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>reset counters interface ethernet1/0/1
shutdown Syntax
shutdown
undo shutdown
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the shutdown command to disable an Ethernet port. Use the undo shutdown
command to enable an Ethernet port.
By default, the Ethernet port is enabled.
Example
To disable and then enable Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]undo shutdown

speed Syntax
For a 100 Mbps Ethernet port, the parameters for this command are as follows:
speed { 10 | 100 | auto }
speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto }
speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 | auto }
The undo form of this command is:

undo speed
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
10: Enter to set the port speed to 10 Mbps.
10000:Enter to set the port speed to 10000 Mbps.
auto: Enter to set the port speed to auto-negotiation.
Description
Use the speed command to configure the port speed. Use the undo speed
command to restore the default speed. By default, the speed is auto.
Related command: duplex.
Example
To configure the port speed of port Ethernet1/0/1 to 10 Mbps, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]speed 1000
unicast-suppression Syntax
unicast-suppression { ratio | pps pps }
undo unicast-suppression
View
Ethernet Port View

Parameter
ratio: Specifies the bandwidth ratio of unicast traffic allowed on an Ethernet

the ratio is 100 meaning all unicast traffic is accepted. The smaller the ratio is, the
less bandwidth is allocated to unicast traffic and therefore less broadcast traffic is
accepted on the Ethernet port.
pps pps: Specifies the maximum number of unicast packets per second accepted
on an Ethernet port. Ranges from 1 to 148810 pps.
Description
Use unicast-suppression to configure the amount of unicast traffic that will be

accepted on a port. Once the multicast traffic exceeds the value set by the user,
the excess unicast traffic will be discarded. This feature can be used to ensure
network service and prevent unicast storms.
Example
unicast traffic. Unicast traffic exceeding 20% of the ports bandwidth will be
discarded.
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]unicast-suppression 20
Specify the maximum packets per second of the unicast traffic on an

Ethernet1/0/1 as 1000 Mpps.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Ethernet1/0/1]unicast-suppression pps 1000
Ethernet Port Link This section describes the commands you can use to configure Ethernet Port LInk
Aggregation Aggregation on the Switch.
Commands
debugging Syntax
link-aggregation error debugging link-aggregation error
undo debugging link-aggregation error
View
User View
Parameter
None

Description
Use the debugging link-aggregation error command to enable link
aggregation error debugging. Use the undo debugging link-aggregation
error command to disable link aggregation error debugging.
Example
To enable link aggregation error debugging, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging link-aggregation error
debugging Syntax
link-aggregation event debugging link-aggregation event
undo debugging link-aggregation event
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging link-aggregation event command to enable link
aggregation events debugging. Use the undo debugging link-aggregation
event command to disable link aggregation events debugging.
Example
To enable link aggregation events debugging, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging link-aggregation event
debugging lacp packet Syntax

debugging lacp packet [ interface { interface_type interface_number
| interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num |
interface_name } ] ]
undo debugging lacp packet [ interface { interface_type

interface_number | interface_name } [ to { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } ] ]
View
User View
Parameter
interface { interface_type interface_ num | interface_name } [ to {
interface_type interface_ num | interface_name } ]: Specifies ports. You
can specify multiple sequential ports with the to parameter, instead of specifying
only one port.
interface_name: Specifies port name, in the format of interface_name =

interface_type interface_num.

interface_type: Specifies port type and interface_num port number.
For more information, see the parameter item for the interface command.
Description
Use the debugging lacp packet command to enable LACP packets debugging at
a designated port or ports. Use the undo debugging lacp packet command to
disable LACP packets debugging at a designated port or ports.
Example
To enable LACP packets debugging at Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging lacp packet interface ethernet1/0/1
debugging lacp state Syntax
debugging lacp state [ interface { interface_type interface_number |

interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num | interface_name
} ] ] { { actor-churn | mux | partner-churn | ptx | rx }* | all }
undo debugging lacp state [ interface { interface_type

interface_number | interface_name } [ to { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } ] ] { { actor-churn | mux |
partner-churn | ptx | rx }* | all }
View
User View
Parameter
interface { interface_type interface_num | interface_name } [ to {

interface_type interface_num | interface_name } ]: Specifies ports. You
only one port.

actor-churn: Debugging actor-churn state machine.
mux: Debugging MUX state machine.
partner-churn: Debugging partner-churn state machine.
ptx: Debugging PTX state machine.
rx: Debugging RX state machine.
all: Debugging all state machines.

Description
Use the debugging lacp state command to enable LACP state machines
debugging on a designated port or ports. Use the undo debugging lacp state
command to disable LACP state machines debugging on a designated port or
ports.
Example
To enable all LACP state machines debugging.
<SW5500>debugging lacp state all
display link-aggregation Syntax

summary display link-aggregation summary
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display link-aggregation summary command to view summary
information of all aggregation groups, including actor system ID, aggregation
group ID, aggregate group type, partner system ID, number of selected ports,
number of standby ports, load sharing type and master port number.
Example
To display summary information of all aggregation information, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display link-aggregation summary
Aggregation Group Type: D -- Dynamic, S -- Static, M -- Manual
Loadsharing Type: Shar – Loadsharing, NonS – Non-Loadsharing
Actor ID: 0x8000, 00e0-fcff-ff04
AL AL Partner ID Select Standby Share Master

ID Type Ports Ports Type Port
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1 D 0x8000,00e0-fcff-ff01 1 0 NonS Ethernet1/0/1
10 M none 1 0 NonS Ethernet1/0/2
20 S 0x8000,00e0-fcff-ff01 1 0 NonS Ethernet1/0/3
display link-aggregation Syntax

verbose display link-aggregation verbose [ agg_id ]
View
Any view
Parameter
agg_id: Aggregation group ID, which must be a valid existing ID, in the range of
1 to 464.

Description
Use the display link-aggregation verbose command to view detailed

information of a link aggregation, including aggregation ID, the type of
aggregation, load-sharing type, detailed local information (member ports, port
status, port priority, LACP state flag and operation key), and detailed remote
information (indexes of remote ports, port priority, LACP state flag, operation key
and system ID.)
Note that unlike a dynamic aggregation, a manual aggregation has no protocol to

get the remote peer information of the partner. Therefore, every item for the
remote peer is 0. This does not indicate the actual state of the remote peer.
Example
To display detailed information of aggregation group 1, enter the following:
<SW5500>display link-aggregation verbose 1
Loadsharing Type: Shar -- Loadsharing, NonS -- Non-Loadsharing
Aggregation ID: 1, AggregationType: Manual, Loadsharing Type: NonS

Aggregation Description:
System ID: 0x8000, 0e0-fcff-ff04
Port Status: S -- Selected, T -- Standby
Local:
Port Status Priority Flag Oper-Key
--------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 S 32768 0x3d
Remote:
Actor Partner Priority Flag Oper-Key SystemID
--------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 32768 0x3d3 0 0x8000,00e0-fcff-ff01
display Syntax
link-aggregation display link-aggregation interface { interface_type interface_number
interface | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface-num |
interface_name } ]
View
Any view
Parameter
only one port.


Description
Use the display link-aggregation interface command to view detailed link
aggregation information at a designated port, including aggregation group ID for
the port, port priority, operation key, LACP state flag, partner information (system
ID, port number, port priority, operation key, LACP state flag, LACP packet
statistics).
Note that unlike a dynamic aggregation, a manual aggregation has no protocol to

get the remote peer information of the partner. Therefore, every item for the
remote peer is 0. This does not indicate the actual state of the remote peer.
Example
To display detailed link aggregation information of a link aggregation member

port, enter the following:
<SW5500>display link-aggregation interface Gigabitethernet4/0/1
If the aggregation has been created manually, the display will be similar to the
following:
GigabitEthernet4/0/1:
Attached AggID: 1
Local:
Port-Priority: 32768, Oper key: 1, Flag: 0x00
Remote:
System ID: 0x0, 0000-0000-0000
Port Number: 0, Port-Priority: 0, Oper-key: 0, Flag: 0x00
If the aggregation is static or dynamic, the display will be similar to the following:
<SW5500>display link-aggregation interface Gigabitethernet4/0/1

GigabitEthernet1/0/1:
Attached AggID: 20
Local:
Port-Priority: 32768, Oper key: 2, Flag: 0x3d
Remote:
System ID: 0x8000, 000e-84a6-fb00
Port Number: 2, Port-Priority: 32768 , Oper-key: 10, Flag: 0x3d
Received LACP Packets: 8 packet(s), Illegal: 0 packet(s)
Sent LACP Packets: 9 packet(s)
Related command: display link-aggregation verbose.
display lacp system-id Syntax

display lacp system-id
View
Any view
Parameter
None

Description
Use the display lacp system-id command to view actor system ID, including
system priority and system MAC address.
Related command: link-aggregation.
Example
To display the local system ID.
<SW5500>display lacp system-id
Actor System ID: 0x8000, 00e0-fc00-0100
lacp enable Syntax

lacp enable
undo lacp enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the lacp enable command to enable LACP.
Use the undo lacp enable command to disable LACP.
Example
To enable LACP at Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]lacp enable
lacp port-priority Syntax

lacp port-priority port-priority-value
undo lacp port-priority
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
port-priority-value: Port priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. By default, it is
32768.

Description
Use the lacp port priority command to configure port priority value. Use the
undo lacp port-priority command to restore the default value.
Related commands: display link-aggregation verbose and display

link-aggregation interface.
Example
To set port priority as 64, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]lacp port-priority 64
lacp system-priority Syntax

lacp system-priority system-priority-value
undo lacp system-priority
View
System View
Parameter
system-priority-value: System priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. By default, it
is 32768.
Description
Use the lacp system-priority command to configure system priority value.
Use the undo lacp system-priority command to restore the default value.
Related command: display lacp system-id.
Example
To set system priority as 64, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]lacp system-priority 64
link-aggregation group Syntax

agg-id description link-aggregation group agg_id description alname
undo link-aggregation group agg-id description
View
System View
Parameter
agg_id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 464.

alname: Aggregation group name, character string with 1 to 32 characters.
Description
Use the link-aggregation group agg_id description command to configure
descriptor for an aggregation group. Use the undo link-aggregation group
agg-id description command to delete aggregation group descriptor.
Example
To configure myal1 as the descriptor of aggregation group 22, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]link-aggregation group 22 description myal1

[SW5500]
link-aggregation group Syntax

agg-id mode link-aggregation group agg_id mode { manual | static }
undo link-aggregation group agg_id
View
System View
Parameter
manual: Manual aggregation group.
static: Static aggregation group.
Description
Use the link-aggregation group agg_id mode command to create a manual or
static aggregation group. Use the undo link-aggregation group command to
delete an aggregation group.
A manual or static aggregation group can have up to eight ports. You can use the
link-aggregation group agg-id mode command to change an existing dynamic
aggregation group into a manual or static one. If the port number in a group
exceeds eight, this operation fails and the system prompts you about the
configuration failure.
Related command: display link-aggregation summary.
Example
To create manual aggregation group 22, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]link-aggregation group 22 mode manual

port link-aggregation Syntax

group port link-aggregation group agg_id
undo port link-aggregation group
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
Description
Use the port link-aggregation group agg_id command to add an Ethernet
port into a manual or static aggregation group. Use the undo port
link-aggregation group command, to delete an Ethernet port from a manual or
static aggregation group.
Example
To add Ethernet1/0/1 into aggregation group 22, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]port link-aggregation group 22
reset lacp statistics Syntax

reset lacp statistics [ interface { interface_type interface_number
| interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num |
View
User View
Parameter
only one port.


Description
Use the reset lacp statistics command to clear LACP statistics at a
designated port. If no port is specified, then LACP statistics at all ports shall be
cleared.
Related command: display link-aggregation interface.
Example
To clear LACP statistics at all Ethernet ports, enter the following:
<SW5500>reset lacp statistics

3 USING VLAN COMMANDS
VLAN Configuration Commands

■ description
■ display interface VLAN-interface
■ display vlan
■ interface VLAN-interface
■ port
■ shutdown
■ vlan
Voice VLAN Commands

■ display voice vlan oui
■ display voice vlan status
■ voice vlan aging
■ voice vlan enable
■ voice vlan
■ voice vlan mac_address
■ voice vlan mode
■ voice vlan security

80 CHAPTER 3: USING VLAN COMMANDS
VLAN Configuration This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Commands VLANs and VLAN interfaces on your system.
description Syntax
description string
undo description
View
VLAN view
Parameter
string: Enter a description of the current VLAN, up to a maximum of 32
characters. For a description of a VLAN interface, the maximum is 80 characters.
Description
Use the description command to set a description for the current VLAN. Use the
undo description command to cancel the description of current VLAN.
The default description character string of the current VLAN is no description!.

The default description character string of the VLAN interface is the interface
name, for example, vlan-interface1.
Related command: display vlan.
Example
To give VLAN1 the description “RESEARCH”, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]vlan 1
[SW5500-vlan1]description RESEARCH
display interface Syntax

VLAN-interface display interface vlan-interface [ vlan_id ]
View
All views
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter the ID number of the VLAN interface, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Description
Use the display interface vlan-interface command to view the information

about a specific VLAN interface, or all VLAN interfaces. The information displayed
includes:
■ Current status of the interface
■ Current status of the line protocol

■ VLAN interface description

■ Maximum Transmit Unit (MTU)
■ IP address and subnet mask
■ Format of the IP frames
■ MAC hardware address.
Use display interface vlan-interface to display information on all VLAN

interfaces. Use display interface vlan-interface vlan_id to display
information on a specific VLAN interface
Related command: interface Vlan-interface.
Example
To display information on VLAN interface 1, enter the following:
<SW5500>display interface vlan-interface 1

Vlan-interface1 current state :DOWN
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is
00e0-fc07-4101
Internet Address is 161.71.61.206/24 Primary
Description : Vlan-interface1 Interface
display vlan Syntax

display vlan [ vlan_id | all | static | dynamic ]
View
All views
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter to display information on a specified VLAN.
all: Enter to display information on all VLANs.
static: Enter to display information on VLANs created statically by the system.
dynamic: Enter to display information on VLANs created dynamically by the

system.
Description
Use the display vlan command to view related information about specific
VLANs, specific types of VLAN or all VLANs. The information includes: VLAN type,
whether the Route interface has been configured on the VLAN, the Broadcast
Suppression max-ratio, the VLAN description, and a list of the tagged and
untagged ports that belong to the VLAN. Use the command display vlan to
display a summary of the VLAN IDs of all VLANs configured on the system. Use the
command display vlan vlan_id to display information on a specific VLAN. Use

the command display vlan all to display information on all the VLANs. Use
the command display vlan dynamic to display information on VLANs created
dynamically by the system. Use the command display vlan static to display
information of VLAN created statically by the system.
Related command: vlan.
Examples
To display information about VLAN 1:
<SW5500>display vlan 1
VLAN ID: 1
VLAN Type: static

Route Interface: configured
IP Address: 161.71.61.206
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Description: VLAN 0001
Tagged Ports:
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
Untagged Ports:
Ethernet1/0/1 Ethernet1/0/2 Ethernet1/0/3
interface VLAN-interface Syntax

interface vlan-interface vlan_id
undo interface vlan-interface vlan_id
View
System View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter the ID of the VLAN interface you want to configure, in the range
1 to 4094. Note that VLAN1 is the default VLAN and cannot be deleted.
Description
Use the interface vlan-interface command to enter a VLAN interface view
and use the related configuration commands. Use the undo interface
vlan-interface command to exit the current VLAN interface.
Related command: display interface vlan-interface.
Example
To enter the interface view of VLAN1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface vlan-interface 1
port Syntax
port interface_list

undo port interface_list
View
VLAN view
Parameter
interface_list: list of Ethernet ports to be added to or deleted from a certain
VLAN, expressed as interface_list= {{ interface_type interface_num |
interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num | interface_name } ]
}&<1-10>.
interface_type is the interface type, interface_num is the interface number

and interface_name is the interface name. For their meanings and value range, see
the parameter of Port in this document. The interface number after keyword to
must be larger than or equal to the port number before to.
&<1-10>: Represents the repeatable times of parameters, 1 is the minimal and 10

is the maximal.
Description
Using the port command, you can add one port or one group of ports to a VLAN.
Using the undo port command, you can cancel one port or one group of ports
from a VLAN.
You can add/delete trunk port and hybrid ports to/from a VLAN by port and undo
port commands in Ethernet Port View, but not in VLAN View.
For the related command, see display vlan.
Example
Add Ethernet1/0/2 through Ethernet1/0/4 to VLAN 2.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]vlan2
[SW5500-vlan2]port ethernet1/0/2 to ethernet1/0/4
shutdown Syntax
shutdown
undo shutdown
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the shutdown command to disable the VLAN interface. Use the undo
shutdown command to enable the VLAN interface.

By default, when all Ethernet ports are in DOWN status in VLAN interface, the
VLAN interface is in DOWN status and is disabled. When there is one or more
Ethernet ports in VLAN interface are in UP status, the VLAN interface is UP.
This command can be used to start the interface after the related parameters and
protocols of VLAN interface are set. Or when the VLAN interface fails, the
interface can be shut down first and then restarted, in this way, the interface may
be restored to normal status. Shutting down or starting VLAN interface will not
take any effect on any Ethernet port of this VLAN.
Example
Restart interface after shutting down the interface.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface vlan-interface2
[SW5500-Vlan-interface2]shutdown
[SW5500-Vlan-interface2]undo shutdown
vlan Syntax
vlan vlan_id
undo vlan vlan_id { [to vlan_id ] | all }
View
System View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to configure, in the range 1 to
4094.
all: Delete all VLANs.
Description
Use the vlan command to enter the VLAN view, and use the related configuration
commands. Use the undo vlan command to exit from the specified VLAN. VLAN 1
is default VLAN and cannot be deleted.
Related commands: display vlan.
Example
To enter VLAN 1 view, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]vlan 1

Voice VLAN This section describes the commands you can use to configure voice VLANs.
Configuration
Commands
display voice vlan oui Syntax

display voice vlan oui
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display voice vlan oui command to display the OUI address supported by
the current system and its relative features.
Related commands: voice vlan vlan_id enable, voice vlan enable.
Example
To display the OUI address of Voice VLAN, enter the following:
[SW5500]display voice vlan oui
Oui Address Mask Description
00e0-bb00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 3com phone
0003-6b00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Cisco phone
00e0-7500-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Polycom phone
00d0-1e00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Pingtel phone
00aa-bb00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 ABC
display voice vlan status Syntax

display voice vlan status
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display voice vlan status command to display the relative Voice
VLAN features including the Voice VLAN status, the configuration mode, the
current Voice VLAN port status etc.
Related commands: voice vlan vlan_id enable, voice vlan enable.
Example
To enable the Voice VLAN on VLAN 2 and display the Voice VLAN status, enter the
following:
[SW5500]display voice vlan status

Voice Vlan status: ENABLE

Voice Vlan ID: 2
Voice Vlan configuration mode: AUTO
Voice Vlan security mode: Security
Voice Vlan aging time: 100 minutes
Current voice vlan enabled port:
--------------------------------
Ethernet1/0/2, Ethernet1/0/3,
voice vlan aging Syntax

voice vlan aging minutes
undo voice vlan aging
View
System View
Parameter
minutes: The aging time of Voice VLAN, in minutes, ranging from 5 to 43200.
The default value is 1440 minutes.
Description
Use the voice vlan aging command to set the aging time of Voice VLAN. Use
the undo voice vlan aging command to set the aging time back to the default.
Related commands: display voice vlan status.
Example
To set the aging time of Voice VLAN to 100 minutes, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]voice vlan aging 100
voice vlan enable Syntax

voice vlan enable
undo voice vlan enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the voice vlan enable command to enable the Voice VLAN features on the
port. Use the undo voice vlan enable command to disable the Voice VLAN
features on the port.

You can only run the Voice VLAN function on the port when all the Voice VLAN
features in system view and port view are enabled.
For the related command, see display voice vlan status.
Example
To enable the Voice VLAN features on port Ethernet1/0/2, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface Gigabitethernet1/0/2
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/2]voice vlan enable
voice vlan Syntax

voice vlan vlan_id enable
undo voice vlan enable
View
System View
Parameter
vlan_id: The VLAN ID for the Voice VLAN to be enabled, in the range of 2 to
4094.
Description
Use the voice vlan command to globally enable the Voice VLAN features of one
VLAN. Use the undo voice vlan enable command to globally disable the Voice
VLAN features of one VLAN.
A specified VLAN must exist for a successful Voice VLAN enabling. You cannot
delete a specified VLAN that has enabled Voice VLAN and only one VLAN can
enable Voice VLAN features at one time.
Example
Enable the Voice VLAN features on VLAN 2 (VLAN 2 already exists).
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]voice vlan 2 enable
voice vlan mac_address Syntax

voice vlan mac-address oui mask oui_mask [ description string ]
undo voice vlan mac-address oui
View
System View

Parameter
oui: The MAC address to be set, in the format H-H-H.
oui_mask: The valid length of a MAC address, represented by a mask, and in the
format H-H-H.
description string: Description of the MAC address, in the range of 1 to 30.
Description
Use the voice vlan mac-address command to set the MAC address that the
Voice VLAN can control. Use the undo voice vlan mac-address command to
cancel this MAC address.
Here the OUI address refers to a vendor . The OUI address system can learn 16
MAC addresses at most. There are four default OUI addresses after the system
starts:
Table 8 Default OUI Addresses
No. OUI Description

1 00:E0:BB 3Com phone
2 00:03:6B Cisco phone
3 00:E0:75 Polycom phone
4 00:D0:1E Pingtel phone
For the related command, see display voice vlan oui.
Example
To set the MAC address 00AA-BB00-0000 as an OUI address, enter the following.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]voice vlan mac-address 00aa-bb00-0000 mask ffff-ff00-0000
description ABC
voice vlan mode Syntax

voice vlan mode auto
undo voice vlan mode auto
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the voice vlan mode auto command to set the Voice VLAN in auto mode.
Use the undo voice vlan mode auto command to set the Voice VLAN in manual
mode.

By default, the Voice VLAN is in auto mode.
If required, the voice vlan mode auto and undo voice vlan mode auto
commands must be executed before the Voice VLAN features are enabled globally.
Example
To set the Voice VLAN in manual mode, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]undo voice vlan mode auto
voice vlan security Syntax

voice vlan security enable
undo voice vlan security enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the voice vlan security enable command to enable the Voice VLAN
security mode. In this mode, the system can filter out the traffic whose source
MAC is not OUI when the traffic travels through the access port of IP Phone within
the Voice VLAN, while the other VLANs are not influenced. Use the undo voice
vlan security enable command to disable the Voice VLAN security mode.
By default, the Voice VLAN security mode is enabled.
Example
To disable the Voice VLAN security mode, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]undo voice vlan security enable


4 USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE)
COMMANDS
PoE Configuration Commands

■ display poe interface
■ display poe interface power
■ display poe powersupply
■ poe max-power
■ poe mode
■ poe power-management
■ poe priority
■ poe update

92 CHAPTER 4: USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS
PoE Configuration This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Commands PoE on your system.
display poe interface Syntax

display poe interface [ interface-name | interface-type
interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Port on the Switch.
Description
Use the display poe interface command to view the PoE status of a specific
port or all ports on the Switch.
Example
Display the PoE status of the Ethernet port GigabitEthernet1/0/10.
[SW5500]display poe interface gigabitethernet1/0/10

Port power enabled :enable
Port power ON/OFF :on
Port power status :Standard PD
Port power mode :signal
Port PD class :0
port power priority :low
Port max power :15400 mW
Port current power :460 mW
Port peak power :552 mW
Port average power :547 mW
Port current :10 mA
Port voltage :51 V
Display the PoE status of all ports.
[sw5500]display poe interface
PORT INDEX POWER ENABLE MODE PRIORITY STATUS

GigabitEthernet1/0/1 off enable signal low Detection


GigabitEthernet1/0/25 off disable signal low User set off
display poe interface Syntax

power
display poe interface power [ interface-name | interface-type
interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Port on the Switch.
Description
Use the display poe interface power command, you can view the power
information of a specific port or all ports on the switch.
Example
Display the power information of port GigabitEthernet1/0/10.
[SW5500]display poe interface power gigabitethernet1/0/10

Port power :12400 mW
Display the power information of all ports.
[SW5500]display poe power

PORT INDEX POWER (mW) PORT INDEXPOWER
(mW)
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 0
display poe Syntax

powersupply
display poe powersupply
View
Any view
Parameter
None

Description
Use the display poe powersupply command to view the parameters of the
power sourcing equipment (PSE).
Example
Display the PSE parameters.
[SW5500]display poe powersupply
PSE ID :1
PSE Legacy Detection :disable
PSE Total Power Consumption :12000 mW
PSE Available Power :268000 mW
PSE Peak Value :12000 mW
PSE Average Value :12000 mW
PSE Software Version :290
PSE Hardware Version :000
PSE CPLD Version :021
PSE Power-Management mode :auto
poe enable Syntax

poe enable
undo poe enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the poe enable command to enable the PoE feature on a port.
Use the undo poe enable command to disable the PoE feature on a port.
By default, the PoE feature on each port is enabled.
Example
Enable the PoE feature on the current port.
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]poe enable
Port power supply is enabled
# Disable the PoE feature on the current port.
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]undo poe enable
Port power supply is disabled
poe legacy enable Syntax

poe legacy enable
undo poe legacy enable

View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the poe legacy enable command to enable the nonstandard-PD detect
function.
Use the undo poe legacy enable command to disable the nonstandard-PD
detect function.
PDs compliant with 802.3af standards are called standard PDs.
By default, the nonstandard-PD detect function is disabled.
Example
Enable the nonstandard-PD detect function.
[SW5500]poe legacy enable

Legacy detection is enabled
Disable the nonstandard-PD detect function.
[SW5500]undo poe legacy enable

Legacy detection is disabled
poe max-power Syntax

poe max-power max-power
undo poe max-power
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
max-power: Maximum power distributed to the port, ranging from 1000 to

15400 mW.
Description
Use the poe max-power command to configure the maximum power that can be
supplied by current port.
Use the undo poe max-power command to restore the maximum power supplied
by current port to the default value.
By default, the maximum power that a port can supply is 15400 mW.

The unit of power is mW. You can set the power in the granularity of 100 mW.
The actual maximum power will be 5% larger than what you have set allowing for
the effect of transient peak power.
Example
Set the maximum power supplied by current port.
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]poe max-power 15000

Set Port max power successfully
Restore the default maximum power on the current port.
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]undo poe max-power

Set Port max power successfully
poe mode Syntax

poe mode { signal | spare }
undo poe mode
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
signal: Supply power through the signal line.
spare: Supply power through the spare line. Currently, the Switch 5500G-EI
Family does not support spare mode. If the subordinate PD only supports the
spare mode, a conversion is needed.
Description
Use the poe mode command to configure the PoE mode on the current port.
Use the undo poe mode command to restore the PoE mode on the current port to
the default mode.
By default, the port is powered through the signal cable.
Example
Set the PoE mode on current port to signal.
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]poe mode signal

Set PoE mode successfully
poe power-management Syntax

poe power-management { auto | manual }
undo poe power-management

View
System View
Parameter
auto: Adopt the auto mode, a PoE management mode based on port priority.
manual: Adopt the manual mode.
Description
Use the poe power-management command to configure the PoE management

mode of port used in the case of power overloading.
Use the undo poe power-management command to restore the default mode.
By default, the PoE management mode on port is auto.
Example
Configure the PoE management mode on port to auto.
[SW5500]poe power-management auto

Auto Power Management is enabled
Restore the default management mode.
[SW5500]undo poe power-management

Auto Power Management is enabled
poe priority Syntax

poe priority { critical | high | low }
undo poe priority
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
critical: Set the port priority to critical.
high: Set the port priority to high.
low: Set the port priority to low.
Description
Use the poe priority command to configure the power supply priority on a port.
Use the undo poe priority command to restore the default priority.
By default, the port priority is low.

If there are too many ports with critical priority, the total power these ports need
might exceed the maximum power supplied by the equipment, i.e., 300W. In this
case, no new PD can be added to the switch.
When the remaining power of the whole equipment is below 18.8 W, no new PD
can be added to the Switch.
Example
Set the port priority to critical.
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]poe priority critical
Set Port PSE priority successfully
Restore the default priority.
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]undo poe priority

Set Port PSE priority successfully
poe update Syntax

poe update { refresh | full } filename
View
System View
Parameter
refresh: The refresh update mode is used when the PSE processing software is
valid.
full: The full update mode is used when the PSE has no valid processing
software.
filename: Update file name, with a length of 1 to 64 characters.
Description
Use the poe update command to update the PSE processing software online
Note that:
z The full mode is used only when you cannot use the refresh mode.
z When the update procedure in refresh mode is interrupted for some

unexpected reason (e.g. power-off) or some errors occur, you can use the full
mode to re-update.
z When the PSE processing software is damaged (that is, all the PoE commands
cannot be successfully executed), you can use the full mode to update and restore
the software.

Example
Update the PSE processing software online.
[SW5500]poe update refresh 0290_021.s19

...................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
...........
Update PoE board successfully

5 USING NETWORK PROTOCOL
COMMANDS
IP Address Configuration Commands

■ display ip host
■ display ip interface
■ ip address
■ ip host
ARP Configuration Commands

■ arp check enable
■ arp static
■ arp timer aging
■ debugging arp packet
■ display arp
■ display arp timer aging
■ reset arp
Resilient ARP Configuration Commands

■ debugging resilient-arp
■ display resilient-arp
■ resilient-arp enable
■ resilient-arp interface vlan-interface
BOOTP Client Configuration Commands

■ debugging dhcp xrn xha
■ ip address bootp-alloc
DHCP Client Configuration Commands

■ debugging dhcp client
■ debugging dhcp xrn xha
■ display dhcp client
■ ip address dhcp-alloc
DHCP Relay Configuration Commands

■ address-check

102 CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
■ debugging dhcp-relay
■ dhcp-security static
■ dhcp-server
■ dhcp-server ip
■ display dhcp-security
■ display dhcp-server
■ display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface
Access Management Configuration Commands

■ am enable
■ am ip-pool
■ am trap enable
■ display am
■ display isolate port
■ port isolate
UDP Helper Configuration Commands

■ debugging udp-helper
■ display udp-helper server
■ udp-helper enable
■ udp-helper port
■ udp-helper server
IP Performance Configuration Commands

■ display fib
■ display fib ip_address
■ display fib acl
■ display fib
■ display fib ip-prefix
■ display fib statistics
■ display icmp statistics
■ display ip socket
■ display ip statistics
■ display tcp statistics
■ display tcp status
■ display udp statistics
■ reset ip statistics
■ reset tcp statistics
■ reset udp statistics
■ tcp timer fin-timeout

103
■ tcp timer syn-timeout

■ tcp window

IP Address This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage IP
Configuration Addressing on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
display ip host Syntax

display ip host
View
All Views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip host command to display all host names and their
corresponding IP addresses.
Example
To display all host names and their corresponding IP addresses, type the following:
<SW5500>display ip host
Host Age Flags Address

My 0 static 1.1.1.1
Aa 0 static 2.2.2.4
display ip interface Syntax

display ip interface interface-type interface-number
View
All views
Parameter
vlan_id Enter the identifier of the vlan interface.
Description
Use the display ip interface vlan-interface command to view information
on the specified interface.
Example
To display information for VLAN-interface 1, enter the following:

<SW5500>display ip interface vlan-interface 1

Vlan-interface1 current state : DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Internet Address is 1.1.1.1/8 Primary
Broadcast address : 1.255.255.255

IP Address Configuration Commands 105
The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytes

input packets : 0, bytes : 0, multicasts : 0
output packets : 0, bytes : 0, multicasts : 0
TTL invalid packet number: 0
ICMP packet input number: 0
Echo reply: 0
Unreachable: 0
Source quench: 0
Routing redirect: 0
Echo request: 0
Router advert: 0
Router solicit: 0
Time exceed: 0
IP header bad: 0
Timestamp request: 0
Timestamp reply: 0
Information request: 0
Information reply: 0
Netmask request: 0
Netmask reply: 0
Unknown type: 0
DHCP packet deal mode: global
ip address Syntax
ip address ip_address { mask | mask_length } [ sub ]
[ undo ] ip address [ ip-address { mask | mask_length } [ sub ] ]
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameters
ip_address Enter the IP address of the VLAN interface.
mask Enter the IP subnet mask of the VLAN interface.
mask_length Enter the IP mask length of the VLAN interface.
sub Enter if the specified IP address and subnet mask are a secondary IP address
and subnet mask for this VLAN interface.
Description
Use the ip address ip_address mask command to configure the primary IP
address and IP subnet mask for a VLAN interface.
Use the ip address ip_address mask sub command to configure a secondary

address and IP subnet mask for a VLAN interface. Usually, only one IP address is
required for each interface. If you want to connect the interface to several
subnets, you can configure an IP addresses for each subnet.
Use the undo ip address ip_address mask sub command to cancel a

secondary IP address and IP subnet mask of a VLAN interface.

Use the undo ip address ip_address mask command to cancel the primary IP
address and IP subnet mask of a VLAN interface. Before you can cancel the
primary IP address of an interface, you must cancel any secondary IP addresses.
Use the undo ip address command without any parameters to delete the
primary and secondary IP addresses of an interface.
By default, the IP address of a VLAN interface is set to null.
The subnet address of an IP address can be identified by subnet mask. For

instance, the IP address of an interface is 202.38.10.102, and the mask is
255.255.0.0. You can confirm that the subnet address is 202.38.0.0 by
performing the logic operation “AND” on the IP address and mask.
Note that the VLAN interface cannot be configured with the secondary IP address
if its IP address is set to be allocated by BOOTP or DHCP.
Related commands: display ip interface .
Example
Configure the IP address of interface VLAN interface 1 as 202.38.10.66 and
subnet mask as 255.255.255.0.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface1]ip address 202.38.10.66 255.255.255.0
ip host Syntax
ip host hostname ip_address
undo ip host hostname [ ip_address ]
View
System View
Parameters
hostname Enter the host name of the connecting device. This is a character string
of up to 20 characters.
ip_address Enter the host’s IP address.
Description
Use the ip host command to configure the host name and the host IP address in
the Switch 5500G-EI’s host table. This allows you to ping or Telnet a local device by
host name.
Use the undo ip host command to remove the host name and the host IP address
from the host table.
By default, the host name and corresponding IP address are null.
Related command: display ip host

Example
To enter a host name of Lanswitch1 for the IP address 202.38.0.8, enter the
following .
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ip host Lanswitch1 202.38.0.8
ARP Configuration This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Commands Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) operations on your Switch 5500G-EI.
arp check enable Syntax

arp check enable
undo arp check enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the arp check enable command to enable the checking of an ARP entry so
the device does not learn the ARP entry where the MAC address is a multicast
MAC address. Use the undo arp check enable command to disable the checking
of ARP entry so the device learns the ARP entry where the MAC address is a
multicast MAC address.
By default, the checking of ARP entry is enabled and the device does not learn the
ARP entry where the MAC address is a multicast MAC address.
Example
Configure that the device learns the ARP entry where the MAC address is
multicast MAC address.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]undo arp check enable
arp static Syntax

arp static ip_address mac_address [ vlan_id { interface_type |
interface_number }]
undo arp static ip_address
View
System View
Parameters
ip_address Enter the IP address of the ARP mapping entry.

mac_address Enter the MAC address of the ARP mapping entry, in the format
H-H-H (H indicates a four digit hexadecimal number, for example
00e0-fc01-0000).
vlan_id Enter the ID number of the local VLAN that you want to use to associate
with the ARP mapping entry. The VLAN ID can be in the range 1 to 4094.
Optional.
interface_type Enter the type of the port that you want to use to send frames
to this address. Optional, but must be entered if a VLAN ID is specified.
interface_number Enter the number of the port that you want to use to send
frames to this address. Optional, but must be entered if a VLAN ID is specified.
Description
Use the arp static command to manually configure the static ARP mapping
entries in the ARP mapping table. You must enter an IP address and MAC address
with this command. You can optionally enter a VLAN ID, which also requires entry
of an interface type and interface number. An aggregation port or port with LACP
enabled cannot be set as the egress port of static ARP.
Use the undo arp ip_address command to remove a static ARP mapping entry
from the ARP table.
To remove all static ARP entries, use the reset arp static command. Note that
the reset arp static command removes all static ARP entries permanently.
By default, the ARP mapping table is empty, and the Switch uses dynamic ARP to
maintain its address mapping.
Related commands: reset arp, display arp, debugging arp.
Example
To associate the IP address 202.38.10.2 with the MAC address 00e0-fc01-0000,
and the ARP mapping entry to Ethernet1/0/1 on VLAN1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]arp static 202.38.0.10 00e0-fc01-0000 1 gigabitEthernet1/0/1
arp timer aging Syntax

arp timer aging aging_time
undo arp timer aging
View
System View
Parameter
aging_time Enter the aging time of dynamic ARP aging timer, in the range 1 to
1440 minutes. The default is 20 minutes.

Description
Use the arp timer aging command to configure the dynamic ARP aging timer.
Use the undo arp timer aging command to restore the default time of 20
minutes.
Related commands: display arp timer aging
Example
To configure the dynamic ARP aging timer to 10 minutes, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]arp timer aging 10
debugging arp packet Syntax

debugging arp [ packet | error | info packet ]
undo debugging arp packet
View
User View
Parameters
None
Description
Use the debugging arp command to enable ARP debugging.
Use the undo debugging arp command to disable the corresponding ARP
debugging.
By default, undo ARP debugging is enabled.
For the related commands, see arp static and display arp.
Example
To enable ARP packet debugging, enter the following:

<SW5500>debugging arp packet
*0.771346-ARP-8-S1-arp_send:Send an ARP Packet, operation : 1,

sender_eth_addr :
00e0-fc00-3500,sender_ip_addr : 10.110.91.159, target_eth_addr :

0000-0000-0000
, target_ip_addr : 10.110.91.193
*0.771584-ARP-8-S1-arp_rcv:Receive an ARP Packet, operation : 2,

sender_eth_addr
: 0050-ba22-6fd7, sender_ip_addr : 10.110.91.193, target_eth_addr :

00e0-fc00-3500, target_ip_addr : 10.110.91.159

Table 9 Output Description of the debugging arp packet Command
Field Description
operation Type of ARP packets: 1 ARP request packet; 2 ARP reply packet
sender_eth_addr Ethernet address of the sender
sender_ip_addr IP address of the sender
target_eth_addr Target Ethernet address. If the packet is ARP request packet, the target IP
address will be 0
target_ip_addr Target IP address
display arp Syntax

display arp [ ip-address | [ dynamic | static ] [ | { begin | include
| exclude } text ]]
View
All views
Parameters
dynamic Enter to display the dynamic ARP entries in the ARP mapping table.
static Enter to display the static ARP entries in the ARP mapping table.
begin Enter to start displaying from the first ARP entry that contains the specified
character string "text".
include Enter to display only the ARP entries that contain the specified character
string "text".
exclude Enter to display only the ARP entries that do not contain the specified
character string "text".
text Enter a character string. The ARP entries that contain this character string are
displayed.
Description
Use the display arp command to display the ARP mapping table entries by
entry type, or by a specified IP address.
Related commands: arp static, reset arp.
Example
To display all ARP entries in the mapping table, enter the following:
<SW5500>display arp
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name / AL ID Aging Type
161.71.61.20 0020-9c08-e774 1 GigabitEthernet2/0/6 20 D
--- 1 entry found ---

<SW5500>

Table 10 Output Description of the display arp Command
Field Description
IP Address IP address of the ARP mapping entry
MAC Address MAC address of the ARP mapping entry
VLAN ID VLAN to which the static ARP entry belongs
Port Name Port to which the static ARP entry belongs
Aging Aging time of dynamic ARP entry in minutes
Type Type of ARP entry
display arp timer aging Syntax

display arp timer aging
View
All views.
Parameter
None.
Description
Use the display arp timer aging command to view the current setting of the
dynamic ARP aging timer.
Example
To display the current setting of the dynamic ARP aging timer, enter the following:
<SW5500>display arp timer aging

Current ARP aging time is 10 minute(s)
reset arp Syntax

reset arp [ dynamic | static | interface { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } ]
View
User view
Parameters
dynamic Enter to clear the dynamic ARP mapping entries. Note that dynamic ARP
entries start re-learning immediately.
static Enter to clear the static ARP mapping entries. Note that static ARP entries
are deleted permanently.
interface interface_type interface_num interface_name Enter to clear the

ARP mapping entries for the specified port.

Description
Use the reset arp command to remove information that is no longer required
from the ARP mapping table. You can remove entries of a specified type, or from a
specified port.
Use the reset arp command to clear all ARP entries. You are asked to confirm
this entry.
Use the reset arp dynamic command to clear all dynamic ARP entries.
Use the reset arp static command to clear all static ARP entries.
Use the display arp interface command to clear all entries for the specified
port.
Related command: arp static, display arp.
Example
To clear static ARP entries, enter the following:
<SW5500>reset arp static
Resilient ARP This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Configuration Resilient ARP operations
Commands
debugging resilient-arp Syntax

debugging resilient-arp { packet | state | error | all }
undo debugging resilient-arp { packet | state | error | all }
View
User view
Parameters
packet Enter to enable debugging resilient ARP packets.
state Enter to enable debugging resilient ARP state machine.
error Enter to enable debugging resilient ARP errors (including packet errors).
all Enter to enable all resilient ARP debugging.
Description
Use the debugging resilient-arp command to enable resilient ARP debugging.
Use the undo debugging resilient-arp command to disable resilient ARP

debugging.
By default, all resilient ARP debugging is disabled.

Resilient ARP Configuration Commands 113
Example
To enable debugging resilient ARP packets, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging resilient-arp packet
display resilient-arp Syntax

display resilient-arp [ unit unit-id ]
View
Any view
Parameter
unit-id Enter the unit ID, in the range of 1 to 8.
Description
Use the display resilient-arp command to view resilient ARP state
information of the units, the resilient ARP packet-sending VLAN interfaces.
If no unit ID is specified, the system displays the resilient ARP state information of
all units. Otherwise, the system only displays the resilient ARP state information of
the designated units.
Example
To display resilient ARP state information of Unit 1, enter the following:
<SW5500>display resilient-arp unit 1
The state of unit 1 is: L3Master
The sending interface(s):
Vlan-interface1
resilient-arp enable Syntax

resilient-arp enable
undo resilient-arp enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the resilient-arp enable command to enable the resilient ARP function.
Use the undo resilient-arp enable command to disable the resilient ARP
function.
By default, resilient ARP function is enabled.
For the related command, see display resilient-arp.

Example
To enable the resilient ARP function, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]resilient-arp enable
resilient-arp interface Syntax

vlan-interface resilient-arp interface vlan-interface vlan-id
undo resilient-arp interface vlan-interface vlan-id
View
System View
Parameter
vlan-id Enter the VLAN interface ID.
Description
Use the resilient-arp interface vlan-interface command to configure the
Switch to send resilient ARP packets out the specified VLAN interface.
Use the undo resilient-arp interface vlan-interface command to stop the

Switch from sending ARP packets out of the specified VLAN interface.
By default, the system sends resilient ARP packets out of VLAN interface 1.
For the related command, see display resilient-arp.
Example
To set VLAN interface 2 to send resilient ARP packets., enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]resilient-arp interface vlan-interface 2

BOOTP Client Configuration Commands 115
BOOTP Client This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Configuration BOOTP Client operations on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
debugging dhcp xrn xha Syntax

debugging dhcp xrn xha
undo debugging dhcp xrn xha
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging dhcp xrn xha command to enable BOOTP client hot backup
debugging.
Use the undo debugging dhcp xrn xha command to disable BOOTP client hot
backup debugging.
By default, BOOTP client hot backup debugging is disabled.
Example
To enable BOOTP client hot backup debugging, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging dhcp xrn xha
ip address bootp-alloc Syntax

ip address bootp-alloc
undo ip address bootp-alloc
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the ip address bootp-alloc command to configure VLAN interface to
obtain IP address using BOOTP.
Use the undo ip address bootp-alloc command to remove the configuration.
By default, the VLAN interface does not obtain an IP address using BOOTP.
Related command: display bootp client

Example
To configure VLAN interface 1 to obtain IP address using BOOTP, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ip address bootp-alloc
DHCP Client This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Configuration Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Client operations on your Switch
Commands 5500G-EI.
debugging dhcp client Syntax

debugging dhcp client { all | error | event | packet }
undo debugging dhcp client { all | error | event | packet }
View
User view
Parameters
all Enter to enable all DHCP client debugging.
error Enter to enable DHCP client error (including packet unrecognizable )

debugging.
event Enter to enable DHCP client event (including address allocation and data
update) debugging.
packet Enter to enable DHCP client packet debugging.
Description
Use the debugging dhcp client command to enable DHCP client debugging.
Use the undo debugging dhcp client command to disable DHCP client
debugging.
By default, all DHCP client debugging is disabled.
Example
To enable DHCP client event debugging, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging dhcp client event
debugging dhcp xrn xha Syntax

debugging dhcp xrn xha
undo debugging dhcp xrn xha
View
User view

DHCP Client Configuration Commands 117
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging dhcp xrn xha command to enable DHCP client hot backup
debugging.
Use the undo debugging dhcp xrn xha command to disable DHCP client hot
backup debugging.
By default, DHCP client hot backup debugging is disabled.
Example
To enable DHCP client hot backup debugging, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging dhcp xrn xha
display dhcp client Syntax

display dhcp client [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
verbose Enter to display detailed information about address allocation at DHCP
client.
Description
Use the display dhcp client command to view detailed information about
address allocation at DHCP client.
Example
To display detailed information about address allocation at DHCP client, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display dhcp client verbose
DHCP client statistic information:
Vlan-interface1:
Current machine state: BOUND
Alloced IP: 169.254.0.2 255.255.0.0
Alloced lease: 86400 seconds, T1: 43200 seconds, T2: 75600 seconds
Lease from 2002.09.20 01:05:03 to 2002.09.21 01:05:03
Server IP: 169.254.0.1
Transaction ID = 0x3d8a7431
Default router: 2.2.2.2
DNS server: 1.1.1.1
Domain name: 3Com.com
Client ID: 3com-00e0.fc0a.c3ef-Ethernet0/0
Next timeout will happen after 0 days 11 hours 56 minutes 1 seconds.
ip address dhcp-alloc Syntax

ip address dhcp-alloc

undo ip address dhcp-alloc
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the ip address dhcp-alloc command to configure VLAN interface to obtain IP

address using DHCP.
Use the undo ip address dhcp-alloc command to remove the configuration.
By default, the VLAN interface does not obtain an IP address using DHCP.
Example
To configure VLAN interface to obtain IP address using DHCP, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ip address dhcp-alloc
DHCP Relay This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Configuration Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) operations on your Switch
Commands 5500G-EI.
address-check Syntax
address-check enable
address-check disable
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the address-check enable command to enable DHCP relay security to check
address validity.
Use the address-check disable command to disable DHCP relay security.
Example
To enable DHCP security on VLAN interface 1 enter the following:

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface1]address-check enable
debugging dhcp-relay Syntax

debugging dhcp-relay
undo debugging dhcp-relay
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging dhcp-relay command to enable DHCP relay debugging.
Use the undo debugging dhcp-relay command to disable DHCP relay

debugging. By default, DHCP relay debugging is disabled.
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, dhcp-server, display dhcp-server and

display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface.
Example
To enable DHCP relay debugging, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging dhcp-relay
*0.7200205-DHCP-8-dhcp_debug:
From client to server:
Interface: VLAN-Interface 1
ServerGroupNo: 0
Type: dhcp-request
ClientHardAddress: 0010-dc19-695d
ServerIpAddress: 192.168.1.2
*0.7200230-DHCP-8-dhcp_debug:
From server to client:
Interface: VLAN-Interface 1
ServerGroupNo: 0
Type: dhcp-ack
ClientHardAddress: 0010-dc19-695d
AllocatedIpAddress: 10.1.1.1
*0.7200580-DHCP-8-largehop:
Discard DHCP request packet because of too large hop count!
*0.7200725-DHCP-8-invalidpkt:
Wrong DHCP packet!
dhcp-security static Syntax

dhcp-security static ip_address mac_address

undo dhcp-security { ip_address | all | dynamic | static }
View
System View
Parameters
static Enter a static address.
ip_address Enter the client’s static IP address.
mac_address Enter the client’s MAC address.
all Enter to cancel all address table entry.
dynamic Enter to cancel dynamic address table entry.
static Enter to cancel static address table entry.
Description
Use the dhcp-security command to configure a static address table entry for a
DHCP Server group.
Use the undo dhcp-security command to cancel a address table entry for a
DHCP Server group.
Related command: display dhcp-security.
Example
To assign the IP address 1.1.1.1 to the MAC address 0005-5D02-F2B3, and add
this information to the static address table, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dhcp-security static 1.1.1.1 0005-5D02-F2B3
dhcp-server Syntax
dhcp-server groupNo
undo dhcp-server
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
groupNo Enter the DHCP Server group number, in the range 0 to 19.
Description
Use the dhcp-server command to associate a VLAN interface with a DHCP Server
group. DHCP Server requests are forward to the server associated with this group
from the specified interface.

Use the undo dhcp-server command to remove the VLAN interface from the
selected DHCP Server group. By default, DHCP Server requests are not forwarded.
You can only add the primary VLAN interface to a DHCP Server group. The primary
VLAN interface is the first interface that you configure.
This command has more parameters when entered in system view. Refer to
dhcp-server ip below for details.
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, display dhcp-server, display

dhcp-server interface vlan-interface, debugging dhcp-relay.
Example
To add VLAN-Interface 1 to DHCP Server group1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]dhcp-server 1
dhcp-server ip Syntax
dhcp-server groupNo ip ipaddress1 [ ipaddress2 ]
undo dhcp-server groupNo
View
System View
Parameters
groupNo Enter the DHCP server group number, in the range 0 to 19.
ipaddress1 Enter the IP address of the primary Server in the group.
ipaddress2 Enter the IP address of the secondary Server in the group. Optional.
Description
Use the dhcp-server ip command to configure the IP address of the DHCP

Server used by the DHCP Server group.
Use the undo dhcp-server ip command to delete the IP addresses of all DHCP
Servers in DHCP Server group.
This command has fewer parameters when entered in VLAN Interface View. Refer
to dhcp-server command for details.
Related commands: dhcp-server, debugging dhcp-relay.
Example
To configure the primary and secondary IP addresses of DHCP Server group 1 as
1.1.1.1 and 2.2.2.2 respectively, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dhcp-server 1 ip 1.1.1.1 2.2.2.2

To delete the IP addresses of DHCP Server group1, enter the following:

[SW5500]undo dhcp-server 1
display dhcp-security Syntax

display dhcp-security [ ip_address | dynamic | static ] [ unit
unit-id ]
View
All views
Parameters
ip_address Enter to display user address entries of the specific IP address..
dynamic Enter to display the dynamic address table entry.
static Enter to display the static address table entry.
unit unit-id Enter to display user address entries of the specific unit ID, ranging
from 1 to 8.
Description
Use the display dhcp-security command to display information on all clients.
Use the display dhcp-security ip_address command to display information

on a specific client. Use the IP address to identify the client.
Example
To display the IP addresses for each client, enter the following:
<SW5500>display dhcp-security
Unit ID IP Address MAC Address Type

1 2.2.2.2 0005.5d02.f2b2 Static
1 3.3.3.3 0005.5d02.f2b3 Dynamic
--- 2 dhcp-security item(s) found ---
display dhcp-server Syntax

display dhcp-server groupNo
View
All views.
Parameter
groupNo Enter a DHCP Server group number, in the range 0 to 19.

Description
Use the display dhcp-server command to view information on a selected DHCP
Server group.
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, dhcp-server, display dhcp-server

interface vlan-interface, debugging dhcp-relay.
Example
To view information on DHCP Server group 0, enter the following:
<SW5500>display dhcp-server 0

The first IP address of DHCP Server group 0: 1.1.1.1
The second IP address of DHCP Server group 0: 1.1.1.2
Messages from this server group: 0
Messages to this server group: 0
Messages from clients to this server group: 0
Messages from this server group to clients: 0
DHCP_OFFER messages: 0
DHCP_ACK messages: 0
DHCP_NAK messages: 0
DHCP_DECLINE messages: 0
DHCP_DISCOVER messages: 0
DHCP_REQUEST messages: 0
DHCP_INFORM messages: 0
DHCP_RELEASE messages: 0
BOOTP_REQUEST messages: 0
BOOTP_REPLY messages: 0
display dhcp-server Syntax

interface vlan-interface display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface vlan_id
Views
All views
Parameter
vlan_id Enter the VLAN interface number.
Description
Use the display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface command to display
the information on the DHCP Server group corresponding to a specific VLAN
interface.
Related commands: dhcp-server, display dhcp-server, debugging

dhcp-relay.
Example
To view the information on the DHCP Server group corresponding to
VLAN-Interface 2, enter the following:
<SW5500>display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface 2


The DHCP server group of this interface is 0
The information shown above indicates that vlan-interface 2 is configured with a

DHCP Server group whose ID is 0.
Access Management This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Configuration Access Management Configuration operations on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
am enable Syntax
am enable
undo am enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the am enable command to enable the access management function.
Use the undo am enable command to disable the function.
By default, the Access management function is disabled.
When using the access management function, It is recommended that you cancel
the static ARP configuration to ensure that the binding of the IP address and
Ethernet switch takes effect. If you have configured the static ARP for an IP
address in the current port IP address pool from another port, the system will
prompt you to cancel the static ARP setting.
Example
To enable the access management function, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]am enable
am ip-pool Syntax
am ip-pool address-list
undo am ip-pool { all | address-list }
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameters
all Enter to configure to operate on all the IP addresses (or IP address pools).

ip-pool Enter to configure IP address pool for access management.
address-list Enter IP address list in the start_ip_address [ip_address_num

] & < 1-10 > format.
start_ip_address is the start address of an IP address range in the pool.
ip_address_num specifies how many IP addresses following start_ip_address in

the range.
&< 1-10 > means you can specify ten IP address ranges at most.
Description
Use the am ip-pool command to configure the IP address pool for access
management on a port. The packet whose source IP address is in the specified
pool is allowed to be forwarded on Layer 3 via the port of the switch.
Use the undo am ip-pool command to cancel the access management IP pool of
the port.
By default, all the IP address pools for access control on the port are null and all
the packets are permitted through.
Note that if the IP address pool to be configured contains the IP addresses

configured in the static ARP at other ports, then the system prompts you to delete
the static ARP to make the later binding effective.
Example
To configure the access management IP address pool on Ethernet1/0/1 and
permits the addresses from 202.112.66.2 through 202.112.66.20 and the
specified 202.112.65.1 to access the port, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]am ip-pool 202.112.66.2 19 202.112.65.1
am trap enable Syntax

am trap enable
undo am trap enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the am trap enable command to enable the access management trap
function.

Use the undo am trap enable command to disable the access management trap
function.
By default, the access management trap is disabled.
Example
To enable the access management trap, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]am trap enable
display am Syntax
display am [ interface-list ]
View
Any view
Parameters
interface-list Enter to display the access management information of the
specified port in the { { interface_type interface_num | interface_name }
[ to { interface_type interface_num | interface_name } ] } &<1-10>
format.
interface_name Enter the port name, represented with interface_name=

interface_type is the port type and interface_num is the port number.
&<1-10> indicates the preceding parameter can be input up to 10 times.
Description
Use the display am command to view the status of access management function
and configuration of IP address pool.
Example
To display the access management configurations on Ethernet0/1.
<SW5500>display am Ethernet1/0/1
Ethernet1/0/1
Status : disabled
IP Pools : (NULL)

Table 11 Output Description of the display am Command
Field Description
Status AM state on the port: enabled or disabled
IP Pools IP pools. NULL represents no configuration. Each IP address section is
represented in X.X.X.X (number), of these, "X.X.X.X" represents the
first address, and "number" represents that "number" consecutive IP
addresses from the beginning of this address are within the IP pools
display isolate port Syntax

display isolate port
View
Any view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the display isolate port command to view port isolation information.
Example
To display port isolation information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display isolate port
UNIT 1:
Ethernet1/0/1
port isolate Syntax

port isolate
undo port isolate
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the port isolate command to add a port to an isolation group using the
following commands, and achieves port-to-port isolation between this port and
other ports of this group, that is, Layer 2 forwarding between the isolated ports is
not available.
Use the undo port isolate command to remove a port from an isolation group.
By default, a port is not in an isolation group, namely Layer 2 forwarding is

achievable between this port and other ports.

Example
To add Ethernet1/0/1 and Ethernet1/0/2 to isolation group, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]port isolate
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]quit
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/2]port isolate
UDP Helper This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Configuration UDP Helper Configuration operations on your Switch.
Commands
debugging udp-helper Syntax

debugging udp-helper { event | packet [ receive | send ] }
undo debugging udp-helper { event | packet [ receive | send ] }
View
User view
Parameters
event UDP Helper event debugging.
packet UDP Helper packet debugging.
receive UDP Helper inbound packet debugging.
send UDP Helper outbound packet debugging.
Description
Use the debugging udp-helper command to enable UDP Helper debugging.
Use the undo debugging udp-helper command to disable UDP Helper

debugging.
By default, UDP Helper debugging is disabled.
Example
To enable UDP Helper packet debugging, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging udp-helper packet
display udp-helper Syntax

server display udp-helper server [ interface vlan-interface vlan_id ]
View
Any view

UDP Helper Configuration Commands 129
Parameter
vlan_id VLAN interface ID.
Description
Use the display udp-helper server command to view the information of
destination Helper server corresponding to the VLAN interface.
Example
To display the information of destination Helper server corresponding to the VLAN
interface 1, enter the following:
<SW5500>display udp-helper server interface vlan-interface 1
interface name server address packets sent

VLAN-interface1 192.1.1.2 0
udp-helper enable Syntax

udp-helper enable
undo udp-helper enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the udp-helper enable command to enable relay of UDP broadcast packets .
Use the undo udp-helper enable command to disable relay of UDP broadcast
packets .
By default, relay of UDP broadcast packets is disabled.
Example
To enable the UDP Helper function.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]udp-helper enable
udp-helper port Syntax

udp-helper port { port | dns | netbios-ds | netbios-ns | tacacs |
tftp | time }
undo udp-helper port { port | dns | netbios-ds | netbios-ns | tacacs

| tftp | time }
View
System view

Parameters
port Enter the ID of the UDP port with relay function to be enabled, in the range
of 1 to 65535.
dns Domain name system, corresponding to UDP port 53.
netbios-ds NetBios datagram service, corresponding to UDP port 138.
netbios-ns NetBios name service, corresponding to UDP port 137.
tacacs TAC access control system, corresponding to UDP port 49.
tftp Trivial file transfer protocol, corresponding to UDP port 69.
time Time service, corresponding to UDP port 37.
Description
Use the udp-helper port command to configure the UDP port with relay
function.
Use the undo udp-helper enable command to remove the configuration.
Example
To configure the UDP port with relay function as the UDP port corresponding to
DNS, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]udp-helper port dns
udp-helper server Syntax

udp-helper server ip-address
undo udp-helper server [ ip-address ]
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
ip-address Enter the IP address of the destination server.
Description
Use the udp-helper server command to configure the relay destination server.
Use the undo udp-helper server command to delete the relay destination server.
By default, no relay destination server is configured.
Related command: display udp-helper server.
Example
To configure the relay destination server with IP address 192.1.1.2, enter the
following:

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]udp-helper server 192.1.1.2
IP Performance This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the IP
Configuration Performance Configuration operations on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
display fib Syntax

display fib
View
Any view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the display fib command to view the summary of the forwarding
information base. The information includes: destination address/mask length, next
hop, current flag, timestamp and outbound interface.
Example
To display the summary of the Forwarding Information Base, enter the following:
<SW5500>display fib
Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface
127.0.0.0/8 127.0.0.1 U t[0] InLoopBack0
Table 12 Description of the output information of the display fib command
Field Description
Flag
The flag options include:
B – Blackhole route
D – Dynamic route
G – Gateway route
H – Local host route
S – Static route
U – Route in UP status
R – Unreachable route
L – Route generated by ARP or ESIS
display fib ip_address Syntax

display fib ip_address1 [ { mask1 | mask-length1 } [ ip_address2 {
mask2 | mask-length2 } | longer ] | longer ]
View
Any view

Parameters
ip_address1, ip_address2 Enter destination IP address, in dotted decimal
format. ip_address1 and ip_address2 jointly define the address range. The FIB
entries in this address range will be displayed.
mask1, mask2, mask-length1, mask-length2 Enter the IP address mask, in

dotted decimal format, or an integer in the range of 0 to 32 to represent the mask
length.
longer All FIB entries matching a specific destination IP address (range) .
Description
Use the display fib ip_address command to view the FIB entries matching the
destination IP address (range). Each line outputs a FIB entry and the display
contents for each entry include destination address/mask length, next hop, current
flag, timestamp and outbound interface.
Example
To display the FIB entries whose destination addresses match 169.253.0.0 in
natural mask range, enter the following:
<SW5500>display fib 169.253.0.0
Route Entry Count: 1
169.0.0.0/16 2.1.1.1 U t[0] Vlan-interface1
To display the FIB entries whose destination addresses are in the range of
169.254.0.0/16 to 169.254.0.6/16, enter the following:
<SW5500>display fib 169.254.0.0 255.255.0.0 169.254.0.6 255.255.0.0

Route Entry Count: 1
display fib acl Syntax

display fib acl number
View
Any view
Parameter
number Enter the ACL in number form, in the range 2000 to 2999
Description
Use the display fib acl command to view the FIB entries matching a specific
ACL.
Example
To display the FIB entries matching ACL 2000, enter the following:
<SW5500>display fib acl 2000
Route entry matched by access-list 2000:
Summary counts: 1


127.0.0.0/8 127.0.0.1 U t[0] InLoopBack0
display fib Syntax

display fib | { { begin | include | exclude } text }
View
Any view
Parameters
begin Enter to display the FIB entries from the first one containing the character
string text.
include Enter to display only those FIB entries containing the character string text.
exclude Enter to display only those FIB entries excluding the character string text.
text Enter string of specific characters.
Description
Use the display fib command to view the FIB entries which are output from the
buffer according to regular expression and related to the specific character string.
Example
To display the lines starting from the first one containing the string 169.254.0.0,
enter the following:
<SW5500>display fib | begin 169.254.0.0
display fib ip-prefix Syntax

display fib ip-prefix listname
View
Any view
Parameter
listname Enter prefix list name, a string of one to 19 characters.
Description
Use the display fib ip-prefix command to view the FIB entries matching the
specific prefix list.
Example
To display the FIB entries matching prefix list abc0, enter the following:
<SW5500>display fib ip-prefix abc0
Route Entry matched by prefix-list abc0:
Summary count: 3
127.0.0.0/8 127.0.0.1 U t[0] InLoopBack0

127.0.0.1/32 127.0.0.1 U t[0] InLoopBack0

169.0.0.0/8 2.1.1.1 SU t[0] Vlan-interface1
display fib statistics Syntax

display fib statistics [ | { begin | include | exclude } text ]
View
Any View
Parameter
begin: Display the FIB entries from the first one containing the character string
text.
include: Display only those FIB entries containing the character string text.
exclude: Display only those FIB entries excluding the character string text.
text: String of specific characters.
Description
Use the display fib statistics command to view the total number of FIB
entries.
Example
To display the total number of FIB entries, enter the following:
<SW5500>display fib statistics
Route Entry Count : 30
display icmp statistics Syntax

display icmp statistics
View
Any View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display icmp statistics command to view the statistics information
about ICMP packets.
Related commands: display ip interface reset ip statistics.
Example
To view statistics about ICMP packets, enter the following:
<SW5500> display icmp statistics
Input: bad formats 0 bad checksum 0
echo 5 destination unreachable 0
source quench 0 redirects 0
echo reply 10 parameter problem 0

timestamp 0 information request 0

mask requests 0 mask replies 0
time exceeded 0
Output:echo 10 destination unreachable 0
source quench 0 redirects 0
echo reply 5 parameter problem 0
timestamp 0 information reply 0
mask requests 0 mask replies 0
time exceeded 0
Table 13 Output Description of the display icmp statistics Command
Field Description
bad formats Number of input packets in bad format
bad checksum Number of input packets with wrong checksum
echo Number of input/output echo request packets
destination unreachable Number of input/output packets with unreachable destination
source quench Number of input/output source quench packets
redirects Number of input/output redirected packets
echo reply Number of input/output echo reply packets
parameter problem Number of input/output packets with parameter problem
timestamp Number of input/output timestamp packets
information request Number of input information request packets
mask requests Number of input/output mask request packets
mask replies Number of input/output mask reply packets
information reply Number of output information reply packets
time exceeded Number of time exceeded packets
display ip socket Syntax

display ip socket [ socktype sock-type ] [ task-id socket-id ]
View
Any View
Parameters
sock-type Enter the type of a socket: (tcp:1, udp 2, raw ip 3).
task-id Enter the ID of a task, with the value ranging from 1 to 100.
socket-id Enter the ID of a socket, with the value ranging from 0 to 3072.
Description
Use the display ip socket command to display the information about the
sockets in the current system.
Example
To display the information about the socket of TCP type, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ip socket socktype 1
SOCK_STREAM:
Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 1, Proto = 6,

LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONN SO_KEEPALIVE SO_SENDVPNID
SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC

LA = 10.153.17.99:23, FA = 10.153.17.56:1161,
socket option = SO_KEEPALIVE SO_OOBINLINE SO_SENDVPNID
SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_ISCONNECTED SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC

LA = 10.153.17.99:23, FA = 10.153.17.82:1121,
socket option = SO_KEEPALIVE SO_OOBINLINE SO_SENDVPNID
SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_ISCONNECTED SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
Table 14 Output Description of the display ip socket Command
Field Description
SOCK_STREAM The socket type
Task The ID of a task
socketid The ID of a socket
Proto The protocol number used by the socket
sndbuf The sending buffer size of the socket
rcvbuf The receiving buffer size of the socket
sb_cc The current data size in the sending buffer. The value makes sense
only for the socket of TCP type, because only TCP is able to cache
data
rb_cc The current data size in the receiving buffer
socket option The option of the socket
socket state The state of the socket
display ip statistics Syntax

display ip statistics
View
Any View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip statistics command to view the statistics information
about IP packets.
Related commands: display ip interface , reset ip statistics.

Example
To view statistics about IP packets, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ip statistics
Input: sum 7120 local 112
bad protocol 0 bad format 0
bad checksum 0 bad options 0
Output: forwarding 0 local 27
dropped 0 no route 2
compress fails 0
Fragment:input 0 output 0
dropped 0
fragmented 0 couldn't fragment 0
Reassembling:sum 0 timeouts 0
Table 15 Output Description of the display ip statistics Command
Field Description
Input: sum Sum of input packets
local Number of received packets whose destination is
the local device
bad protocol Number of packets with wrong protocol number
bad format Number of packets in bad format
bad checksum Number of packets with wrong checksum
bad options Number of packets that has wrong options
Output: forwarding Number of forwarded packets
local Number of packets that are sent by the local
device
dropped Number of dropped packets during transmission
no route Number of packets that cannot be routed
compress fails Number of packets that cannot be compressed
Fragment: input Number of input fragments
output Number of output fragments
dropped Number of dropped fragments
fragmented Number of packets that are fragmented
couldn't fragment Number of packets that cannot be fragmented
Reassembling: sum Number of packets that are reassembled
timeouts Number of packets that time out
display tcp statistics Syntax

display tcp statistics
View
Any View
Parameter
None

Description
Use the display tcp statistics command to view the statistics information
about TCP packets.
The statistics information about TCP packets are divided into two major kinds
which are Received packets and Sent packets. Each kind of packet is further
divided into different kinds such as window probe packets, window update
packets, duplicate packets, and out-of-order packets. Some statistics information
that is closely related to TCP connection, such as window probe packets, window
update packets, and data packets retransmitted, is also displayed. All of this
displayed information is measured in packets.
Related commands: display tcp status, reset tcp statistics.
Example
To view statistics about TCP packets, enter the following:
<SW5500>display tcp statistics
Received packets:
Total: 753
packets in sequence: 412 (11032 bytes)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0
checksum error: 0, offset error: 0, short error: 0
duplicate packets: 4 (88 bytes), partially duplicate packets: 5 (7
bytes)
out-of-order packets: 0 (0 bytes)
packets of data after window: 0 (0 bytes)
packets received after close: 0
ACK packets: 481 (8776 bytes)
duplicate ACK packets: 7, too much ACK packets: 0
Sent packets:
Total: 665
urgent packets: 0
control packets: 5 (including 1 RST)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 2
data packets: 618 (8770 bytes) data packets retransmitted: 0 (0
bytes)
ACK-only packets: 40 (28 delayed)
Retransmitted timeout: 0, connections dropped in retransmitted

timeout: 0
Keepalive timeout: 0, keepalive probe: 0, Keepalive timeout, so
connections disconnected : 0
Initiated connections: 0, accepted connections: 0, established
connections: 0
Closed connections: 0 (dropped: 0, initiated dropped: 0)
Packets dropped with MD5 authentication: 0
Packets permitted with MD5 authentication: 0
display tcp status Syntax

display tcp status
View
Any View

Parameter
None
Description
Use the display tcp status command to view the TCP connection state.
Example
To display the state of all TCP connections, enter the following:
<SW5500>display tcp status

TCPCB Local Add:port Foreign Add:port State
03e37dc4 0.0.0.0:4001 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
04217174 100.0.0.204:23 100.0.0.253:65508 Established
Table 16 Output Description of the display tcp status Command

Field Description
Local Add:port Local IP address: local port
Foreign Add:port Remote IP address; remote port
State State of the TCP link
display udp statistics Syntax

display udp statistics
View
Any View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display udp statistics command to view UDP traffic statistic
information.
For related configuration, please refer to the reset udp statistics command.
Example
To display the UDP traffic statistic information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display udp statistics

Received packet:
Total:0
checksum error:0
shorter than header:0, data length larger than packet:0
no socket on port:0
broadcast:0
not delivered, input socket full:0
input packets missing pcb cache:0
Sent packet:
Total:0

reset ip statistics Syntax

reset ip statistics
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset ip statistics command to clear the IP statistics information.
Related commands: display ip interface, display ip statistics.
Example
To clear the IP statistics information, enter the following:
<SW5500>reset ip statistics
reset tcp statistics Syntax

reset tcp statistics
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset tcp statistics command to clear the TCP statistics information.
Related command: display tcp statistics.
Example
To clear the TCP statistics information, enter the following:
<SW5500>reset tcp statistics
reset udp statistics Syntax

reset udp statistics
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset udp statistics command to clear the UDP statistics information.

Example
To clear the UDP traffic statistics information, enter the following:
<SW5500>reset udp statistics
tcp timer fin-timeout Syntax

tcp timer fin-timeout time-value
undo tcp timer fin-timeout
View
System View
Parameter
time-value Enter the TCP finwait timer value in second, with the value ranging
from 76 to 3600; By default, 675 seconds.
Description
Use the tcp timer fin-timeout command to configure the TCP finwait timer.
Use the undo tcp timer fin-timeout command to restore the default value of
the TCP finwait timer.
When the TCP connection state changes from FIN_WATI_1 to FIN_WAIT_2, the
finwait timer is enabled. If the switch does not receive FIN packet before finwait
timer timeouts, the TCP connection will be terminated.
Related commands: tcp timer syn-timeout, tcp window.
Example
To configure the TCP finwait timer value as 800 seconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]tcp timer fin-timeout 800
tcp timer syn-timeout Syntax

tcp timer syn-timeout time-value
undo tcp timer syn-timeout
View
System View
Parameter
time-value Enter the TCP synwait timer value measured in second, whose value
ranges from 2 to 600. The default time-value is 75 seconds.
Description
Use the tcp timer syn-timeout command to configure the TCP synwait timer.

Use the undo tcp timer syn-timeout command to restore the default value of
the timer.
TCP will enable the synwait timer, if a SYN packet is sent. The TCP connection will
be terminated If the response packet is not received.
Related commands: tcp timer fin-timeout, tcp window.
Example
To configure the TCP synwait timer value as 80 seconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]tcp timer syn-timeout 80
tcp window Syntax

tcp window window-size
undo tcp window
View
System View
Parameter
window-size Enter the size of the transmission and receiving buffers measured in
kilobytes (KB), whose value ranges from 1 to 32. By default, the window-size is
8KB.
Description
Use the tcp window command to configure the size of the transmission and
receiving buffers of the connection-oriented Socket.
Use the undo tcp window command to restore the default size of the buffer.
Related commands: tcp timer fin-timeout, tcp timer syn-timeout.
Example
To configure the size of the transmission and receiving buffers as 3KB, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]tcp window 3

6 USING ROUTING PROTOCOL
COMMANDS
Routing Table Display Commands
■ display ip routing-table
■ display ip routing-table acl
■ display ip routing-table ip_address
■ display ip routing-table ip_address1 ip_address2
■ display ip routing-table ip-prefix
■ display ip routing-table protocol
■ display ip routing-table radix
■ display ip routing-table statistics
■ display ip routing-table verbose
Static Route Configuration Command
■ delete static-routes all

■ ip route-static
RIP Configuration Commands
■ checkzero
■ default cost
■ display rip
■ display rip interface
■ display rip routing
■ filter-policy export
■ filter-policy import
■ host-route
■ import-route
■ network
■ peer
■ preference
■ reset
■ rip

144 CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
■ rip authentication-mode
■ rip input
■ rip metricin
■ rip metricout
■ rip output
■ rip split-horizon
■ rip version
■ rip work
■ summary
■ timers
■ traffic-share-across- interface
OSPF Configuration Commands
■ abr-summary
■ area
■ asbr-summary
■ authentication-mode
■ default cost
■ default interval
■ default limit
■ default tag
■ default type
■ default-cost
■ default-route-advertise
■ display debugging ospf
■ display ospf abr-asbr
■ display ospf asbr-summary
■ display ospf brief
■ display ospf cumulative
■ display ospf error
■ display ospf interface
■ display ospf lsdb
■ display ospf nexthop
■ display ospf peer
■ display ospf request-queue
■ display ospf retrans-queue
■ display ospf routing
■ display ospf vlink

145
■ import-route
■ network
■ nssa
■ ospf
■ ospf authentication-mode
■ ospf cost
■ ospf dr-priority
■ ospf mib-binding
■ ospf mtu-enable
■ ospf network-type
■ ospf timer dead
■ ospf timer hello
■ ospf timer poll
■ ospf timer retransmit
■ ospf trans-delay
■ peer
■ preference
■ reset ospf
■ router id
■ silent-interface
■ snmp-agent trap enable ospf
■ spf-schedule-interval
■ stub
■ vlink-peer
IP Routing Policy Commands
■ apply cost
■ apply tag
■ display ip ip-prefix
■ display route-policy
■ if-match { acl | ip-prefix }
■ if-match cost
■ if-match interface
■ if-match ip next-hop

■ if-match tag
■ ip ip-prefix
■ route-policy
Route Capacity Configuration Commands

■ display memory
■ display memory limit
■ memory auto-establish disable
■ memory auto-establish enable
■ memory { safety | limit }
Routing Table Display This section describes the commands you can use to display routing table
Commands information.
When the Switch runs a routing protocol, it is able to perform the functions of a
router. The term router in this section can refer either to a physical router, or to the
Switch running a routing protocol.
display ip routing-table Syntax

display ip routing-table
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip routing-table command to view a summary of routing

table information
Each line in the table represents one route. The displayed information includes
destination address/mask length, protocol, preference, cost, next hop and output
interface.
Only the currently used route, that is the best route, is displayed.
Example
To view a summary of routing table information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ip routing-table
Routing Table: public net
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 1.1.1.1 Vlan-interface1
1.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0


Table 17 Output Description of the display ip routing-table Command
Field Description
Destination/Mask Destination address/Mask length
Protocol Routing protocol
Pre Routing preference
Cost Cost
Interface Output interface, through which the data packet destined for the
destination network is sent

acl display ip routing-table acl acl_number [ verbose ]
View
All views.
Parameters
acl_number Enter the number of the IP ACL, in the range 2000 to 2999.
verbose Enter to display verbose information about both the active and inactive
routes that passed filtering rules. If you do not enter this parameter, the command
only displays a summary of the active routes that passed filtering rules.
Description
Use the display ip routing-table acl command to view the route filtered
through the specified ACL.
This command is used to display the routes that passed the filtering rules in the
specified ACL.
The command only displays routes that passed basic ACL filtering rules.
Example
To display a summary of the active routes filtered through basic ACL 2000, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]acl number 2000
[SW5500-acl-basic-2000]rule permit source 10.1.1.1 0.0.0.255
[SW5500-acl-basic-2000]rule deny source any
[SW5500-acl-basic-2000]display ip routing-table acl 2000

Routes matched by access-list 2000:

Summary count: 4
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
For detailed description of the output information, see Table 18.
To display the verbose information of the active and inactive routes that are
filtered through basic ACL 2000.
<SW5500>display ip routing-table acl 2000 verbose
Routes matched by access-list 2000:

Generate Default: no
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both* = Next hop in use
Summary count:2
**Destination: 10.1.1.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0

Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 10.1.1.2 Interface: 10.1.1.2(Vlan-interface1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Retain Unicast>
Age: 7:24 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
**Destination: 10.1.1.2 Mask: 255. 255. 255. 255

*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast>
Age: 7:24 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
Table 18 Output Description of the ip routing-table acl verbose Command
Field Description
Destination Destination address
Mask Mask
Protocol Routing protocol
Preference Routing preference
Nexthop Next hop address
Interface Output interface, through which the data packet destined for the
destination network is sent
Vlinkindex Virtual link index

Table 18 Output Description of the ip routing-table acl verbose Command
Field Description
State Route state desription:
ActiveU — The route is selected and is optimum
Blackhole — Blackhole route is similar to Reject route, but it will not
send the ICMP unreachable message to the source end
Delete — The route is deleted
Gateway — Identifies that the route is not an interface route
Hidden — The route exists, but it is unavailable temporarily for some
reasons (e.g., configured policy or interface is Down). Moreover, you
do not wish to delete it. Therefore, you need to hide it, so as to
restore it again later
Holddown — Holddown is one kind of route redistribution policy
adopted by some distance-vector (D-V) routing protocols (e.g., RIP),
through which these routing protocols can avoid the flooding of error
routes and deliver the routing unreachable message accurately. For
example, the RIP redistributes a certain route every a period of time
regardless of whether the actually found routes destined for the same
destination change. For more details, refer to the specific routing
protocols
Int — The route is discovered by interior gateway protocol (IGP)
NoAdvise — The routing protocol does not redistribute NoAdvise
route when it redistributes routes based on the policy
NotInstall — The routing protocol generally selects the route with the
highest precedence from its routing table, then places it in its core
routing table and redistributes it. Although the NotInstall route
cannot be placed in the core routing table, it is possibly that it is
selected and redistributed
Reject — Unlike the normal routes, the Reject route will discard the
packets that select it as their route, and the router will send ICMP
unreachable message to the source end. Reject route is usually used
for the network test
Retain — When the routes from the routing table are deleted, the
routes with Retain flag will not be deleted. Using this function you can
set Retain flag for some static routes, so that they can exist in the core
routing table
Static — The route with Static flag will not be cleared from the
routing table after you save it and reboot the router. Generally, the
static route configured manually in the router belongs to a Static
route
Unicast — Unicast route
Age Time to live
Cost Value of cost

ip_address display ip routing-table ip_address [ mask ] [ longer-match ] [
verbose ]
View
All views
Parameters
ip_address Enter the destination IP address.

mask Enter either the IP subnet mask (in x.x.x.x format), or the subnet mask length
(in the range 0 to 32). Optional.
longer-match Enter to display an address route that matches the destination IP

address in natural mask range . Optional.
verbose Enter to display verbose information about both active and inactive
routes. Without this parameter, this command only displays a summary of active
routes. Optional.
Description
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address command to view routing
information for a specific IP address, and you can also choose the type of
information to display. If the destination address, ip_address, has a
corresponding route in natural mask range, this command will display all subnet
routes or only the route best matching the destination address, ip_address, is
displayed. And only the active matching route is displayed.
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address mask command to display the

route that matches the specified IP destination address and subnet mask.
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address longer-match command to

display all destination address routes that match destination IP addresses in natural
mask range.
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address verbose command to display

verbose information about both active and inactive routes.
Example
There is corresponding route in natural mask range. Display the summary.
<SW5500>display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0
Routing Tables:
Summary count:1
169.0.0.0/16 Static 60 0 2.1.1.1 LoopBack1
There are corresponding routes in the natural mask range. Display the detailed
information.
<SW5500>display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0 verbose
Routing Tables:
Summary count:2
Protocol: #Static Preference: 60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1 Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>
Age: 3:47 Cost: 0/0
Protocol: #Static Preference: 60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1 Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>

Age: 3:47 Cost: 0/0
For detailed description of output information, refer to Table 18.

ip_address1 ip_address2 display ip routing-table ip_address1 mask1 ip_address2 mask2
[ verbose ]
View
All views
Parameters
ip_address1 mask1 Enter the destination IP address and subnet mask that you
want to start the address range. This command displays the route for your chosen
address range. The subnet mask can be entered as either a dotted decimal
notation (x.x.x.x), or an an integer in the range 0 to 32.
ip_address2 mask2 Enter the IP address and subnet mask that you want to end
the address range. The subnet mask can be entered as either a dotted decimal
notation (x.x.x.x), or an an integer in the range 0 to 32.
verbose Enter to display the verbose information of both the active and inactive
routes. Without this parameter, the command only displays a summary of active
routes. Optional.
Description
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address1 mask1 ip_address2 mask2
command to view the route information for the specified address range.
Example
To display the routing information of destination addresses ranging from 1.1.1.0
to 2.2.2.0., with a subnet mask of 24, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ip routing-table 1.1.1.0 24 2.2.2.0 24

Routing tables:
Summary count: 3
1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 00 1.1.1.1 Vlan-interface1
1.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 00 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
2.2.2.0/24 DIRECT 00 2.2.2.1 Vlan-interface2
For a detailed description of the output information, refer to Table 17.

ip-prefix display ip routing-table ip-prefix ip_prefix_name [ verbose ]
View
All views

Parameter
ip_prefix_name Enter the ip prefix list name.
verbose Enter to display verbose information about both the active and inactive
routes that passed filtering rules. Without this parameter, this command displays
the summary of active routes that passed filtering rules.
Description
Use the command display ip routing-table ip-prefix ip_prefix_name to
view information on the routes that passed filtering rules for the specified IP prefix
name.
Use the command display ip routing-table ip-prefix ip_prefix_name

verbose to display both the active and inactive routes that passed filtering rules.
Without the verbose parameter, this command displays the summary of the
active routes that passed filtering rules.
Example
To display the summary information for ip prefix list abc2, active route only, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ip ip-prefix abc2 permit 10.1.1.0 24 less-equal 32
[SW5500]display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:

Summary count: 2
For a detailed description of the output information, see Table 18.
To display the information on the active and inactive routes for prefix list abc2,
[SW5500]display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2 verbose
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:

Summary count:2
*NextHop: 10.1.1.2 Interface: 10.1.1.2(Vlan-interface1)
Vlinkindex: 0
Age: 3:23:44 Cost: 0/0 Tag:0
**Destination: 10.1.1.2 Mask: 255. 255. 255. 255


Vlinkindex: 0
Age: 3:23:44 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
For detailed information of the output information, refer to Table 18.

protocol display ip routing-table protocol protocol [ inactive | verbose ]
View
All views
Parameters
protocol Enter one of the following:
■ direct Displays the direct connection route information
■ static Displays the static route information.
■ ospf Displays OSPF route information.
■ ospf-ase Displays OSPF ASE route information.
■ ospf-nssa Displays OSPF NSSA route information.
■ rip Displays RIP route information.
inactive Enter to display inactive route information. Without this parameter, the
command displays both active and inactive route information. Optional.
verbose Enter to display verbose route information. Without this parameter, the
command displays the route summary. Optional.
Description
Use the display ip routing-table protocol command to view the route
information for a specified protocol.
Example
To display a summary of all direct connection routes, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ip routing-table protocol direct

DIRECT Routing tables:
Summary count: 4
DIRECT Routing tables status:<active>:
Summary count: 3
DIRECT Routing tables status:<inactive>:
Summary count: 1

To display a summary of all static route information, enter the following:

<SW5500>display ip routing-table protocol static

STATIC Routing tables:
Summary count: 1
STATIC Routing tables status:<active>:
Summary count: 0
STATIC Routing tables status:<inactive>:
Summary count: 1
1.2.3.0/24 STATIC 60 0 1.2.4.5 Vlan-interface2
The displayed information helps you to confirm whether the configuration of the
static routing is correct.
For detailed description of the output, refer to Table 17.

radix display ip routing-table radix
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip routing-table radix command to view the route
information in a tree structure.
Example
To display the route information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ip routing-table radix

Radix tree for INET (2) inodes 7 routes 5:
+-32+--{210.0.0.1
+--0+
| | +--8+--{127.0.0.0
| | | +-32+--{127.0.0.1
| +--1+
| +--8+--{20.0.0.0
| +-32+--{20.1.1.1
Table 19 Output Description of the display ip routing-table radix Command
Field Description
INET Address suite
inodes Number of nodes
routes Number of routes


statistics display ip routing-table statistics
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip routing-table statistics command to display the
routing information for all protocols.
The information includes the number of routes per protocol, the number of active
routes per protocol, the number of routes added and deleted per protocol, and
the number of routes that are labeled deleted but that are not deleted per
protocol. The total number of routes in each of these categories is also displayed.
Example
To display the integrated route information, enter the following:

<SW5500>display ip routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto route active added deleted
DIRECT 24 4 25 1
STATIC 4 1 4 0
BGP 0 0 0 0
RIP 0 0 0 0
IS-IS 0 0 0 0
OSPF 0 0 0 0
O_ASE 0 0 0 0
O_NSSA 0 0 0 0
AGGRE 0 0 0 0
Total 28 5 29 1
Table 20 Output Description of the display ip routing-table statistics

Command
Field Description
Proto Routing protocol
route Number of routes
active Number of active routes
added Number of added routes after the router is rebooted or the routing
table is cleared last time.
deleted Number of deleted routes (such routes will be freed in a period of
time)

verbose display ip routing-table verbose
View
All views

Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip routing-table verbose command to display the verbose
routing table information.
The information displayed includes the route state, the verbose description of each
route and the statistics of the entire routing table.
All current routes, including inactive routes and invalid routes, are displayed.
Example
To display the verbose routing table information, enter the following:

<SW5500>display ip routing-table verbose

Routing Tables:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use
Destinations: 3 Routes: 3
Holddown: 0 Delete: 62 Hidden: 0
*NextHop: 1.1.1.1 Interface:
1.1.1.1(Vlan-interface1)
Age: 20:17:41 Cost: 0/0
Age: 20:17:42 Cost: 0/0
*NextHop: 2.2.2.1 Interface:
2.2.2.1(Vlan-interface2)
Age: 20:08:05 Cost: 0/0
The meaning of route state is defined in Table 18. Other generated information is
described in Table 21.
Table 21 Output Description of the display ip routing-table verbose Command
Descriptor Meaning
Holddown The number of holddown routes.
This refers to a route advertising policy that some distance vector routing
protocols (such as RIP) use to avoid expansion of error routes and to improve
the transmission speed and accuracy of unreachable routes. It usually
advertises a static route at an interval, regardless of the changes to dynamic
routes to the same destination. For details, see the specific routing protocol.
Delete The number of deleted routes.

Static Route Configuration Command 157
Table 21 Output Description of the display ip routing-table verbose Command

Hidden The number of hidden routes, that is routes not available at present but still
required. They can be hidden for future use.
Static Route This section describes the command you can use to configure a static route.
Configuration
Command
delete static-routes all Syntax

delete static-routes all
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the delete static-routes all command to delete all the static routes.
The system requests your confirmation before it deletes all the configured static
routes.
Related commands: ip route-static and display ip routing-table.
Example
Delete all the static routes in the router.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]delete static-routes all
Are you sure to delete all the static routes?[Y/N]
ip route-static Syntax
ip route-static ip_address { mask | mask-length } { interface_name |
gateway_address } [ preference preference_value ] [ reject |
blackhole ]
undo ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask_length } [

interface_name | gateway_address ] [ preference preference_value ] [
reject | blackhole ]
View
System view
Parameters
ip-address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
mask Enter the IP subnet mask.

mask-length Enter the number of consecutive 1s in the mask. Because 1s in the

32-bit mask must be consecutive, the mask in dotted decimal format can be
replaced by mask-length.
interface_name Specify the transmission interface name of the route.Packets that

are sent to a NULL interface, are discarded immediately which decreases the
system load.
gateway_address Specify the next hop IP address of the route.
preference_value Enter the preference level of the route in the range 1 to 255.
The default is 60.
reject Enter to indicate an unreachable route.
blackhole Enter to indicate a blackhole route.
Description
Use the ip route-static command to configure a static route.
Use the undo ip route-static command to delete the configured static route.
By default, the system can access the subnet route directly connected to the
router. If you do not use the parameters preference, reject or blackhole, the
route will be reachable by default with a preference level of 60.
A static route is a special route. You can set up an interconnecting network with a
static route configuration. The problem for such configuration is when a fault
occurs to the network, the static route cannot change automatically to steer away
from the node causing the fault without the help of an administrator.
In a relatively simple network, a system adminstrator may chose to implement

static routes rather than a dynamic routing protocol. The proper configuration and
usage of static routes can improve the network performance and ensure
bandwidth for important applications.
All the following routes are static routes:

■ Reachable route — A normal route. That is, the IP packet is sent to the next
hop via the route marked by the destination. It is the most common type of
static route.
■ Unreachable route — When a static route to a destination has the "reject"
attribute, all the IP packets to this destination will be discarded, and the
originating host will be informed destination unreachable.
■ Blackhole route — If a static route to a destination has the "blackhole"
attribute, the outgoing interface of this route is the Null 0 interface regardless
of the next hop address, and any IP packets addressed to this destination are
dropped without notifying the source host.
The attributes reject and blackhole are usually used to control the range of
reachable destinations of this router and to help troubleshoot the network.

Use the following precautions when configuring a static route:

■ You cannot specify an interface address of the local Switch as the next hop
address of an static route.
■ When the destination IP address and subnet mask are both set to 0.0.0.0, this
is the configured default route. A packet is forwarded using the default route
as a last resort if no better routing match is found in the routing table.
■ As an alternative way to configure preference level, a flexible routing protocol
can be adopted.
Related command: display ip routing-table, delete static-routes all.
Example
To configure the next hop of the default route as 129.102.0.2, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 129.102.0.2
RIP Configuration This section describes the commands you can use to configure the Routing
Commands Information Protocol (RIP).
When the Switch 5500G-EI runs a routing protocol, it is able to perform the
functions of a router. The term router in this section can refer either to a physical
router or to the Switch 5500G-EI running a routing protocol.
checkzero Syntax
checkzero
undo checkzero
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the checkzero command to check the zero field of RIP-1 packets. By default,
RIP-1 performs zero field checking.
Use the undo checkzero command to disable the checking of the zero fields.
According to the RFC1058 protocol specifications, some fields in RIP-1 packets

must be set to zero. These are called zero fields. During the zero check operation,
if a RIP-1 packet is received in which the zero fields are not zeros, it will be
rejected. Use the checkzero command to enable or disable the zero check
operation on RIP-1.
This command does not work with RIP-2 packets, since RIP-2 packets have no zero
fields.

Example
To configure the Switch not to perform zero checking for RIP-1 packet, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]undo checkzero
default cost Syntax

default cost value
undo default cost
View
RIP view
Parameter
value Enter the default routing cost, in the range 1 to 16. The default is 1.
Description
Use the default cost command to set the default routing cost of an imported
route.
Use the undo default cost command to restore the default value.
If you do not specify a routing cost when using the import-route command, the
default cost you specify here is used.
Related command: import-route.
Example
To set the default routing cost of the imported route of another routing protocol
to 3, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]default cost 3
display rip Syntax

display rip
View
All Views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display rip command to view the current RIP running state and its
configuration information.

Example
To display the current running state and configuration information of RIP, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display rip
RIP is running
public net VPN-Instance
Checkzero is on Default cost : 1
Summary is on Preference : 100
Traffic-share-across-interface is off
Period update timer : 30
Timeout timer : 180
Garbage-collection timer : 120
No peer router
Network :
202.38.168.0
Table 22 Output Description of the display rip Command
Field Description
RIP is running RIP is active
Checkzero is on Zero field checking is enabled
Default cost:1 The default route cost is 1
Summary is on Routes are summarized automatically
Preference: 100 The preference of RIP is 100
Period update timer : 30 The three RIP timers
Timeout timer : 180
Garbage-collection timer : 120
No peer router No destination address of a transmission is specified
Network: 202.38.168.0 RIP enabled on network segment 202.38.168.0
display rip interface Syntax

display rip interface
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display rip interface command to view RIP interface information.
Example
To display rip interface information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display rip interface
RIP Interface: public net
Address Interface Ver MetrIn/Out Input Output Split-horizon
1.0.0.1 Vlan-inteface1002 0/1 on on on

Table 23 Description of the display rip interface Command

Field Description
Address The IP address of the interface which runs RIP protocol
(you should enable the network segment in which this
address resides using the network command in RIP
protocol view)
Interface Name of the inteface which runs RIP protocol. The IP
address of this inteface corresponds to the IP address of
the Address field.
Ver Version of the RIP protocol running on an interface
Metrin/Out Cost of additional route which is added when sending or
receiving routes.
Input Allow/disallow the interface to receive RIP packets: on for
allow, off for disallow.
Output Allow/disallow the interface to send RIP packets: on for
allow, off for disallow.
Split-horizon The split-horizon is enabled or disabled: on for enabled,
off for disabled.
display rip routing Syntax

display rip routing
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display rip routing command to view RIP routing information.
Example
To display rip routing information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display rip routing
RIP routing table: public net
Destination/Mask Cost NextHop Age SourceGateway
10.3.4.0/32 1 1.1.1.1 10s 1.1.1.1
11.0.0.0/8 1 1.1.1.1 10s 1.1.1.1
Table 24 Description of the display rip routing Command

Field Description
Destination/Mask Length of the destination addresss/mask
Cost Route cost
NextHop Nexthop address of a route
Age Existing time of a route in the routing table (aging time)
SourceGateway Source gateway address. The route is learnt from the
gateway with this address.

filter-policy export Syntax

filter-policy { acl_number | gateway gateway-ip | ip-prefix
ip_prefix_name | route-policy route-policy-name } export
[routing_process]
undo filter-policy { acl_number | gateway gateway-ip | ip-prefix

ip_prefix-name | route-policy route-policy-name } export
[routing_process]
View
RIP view
Parameters
acl_number Enter the number of the ACL that you want to use to filter the
destination addresses of the routing information.
gateway-ip
ip_prefix_name Enter the name of the address prefix list that you want to use to
filter the destination addresses of the routing information.
route-policy-name: Route policy name that filters routing information. After

enabling RIP protocol, you can determine which routes are to be sent/received
based on acl/cost/interface/ip/ip-prefix/tag fields.
routing_protocol Enter the routing protocol whose routing information is to be

filtered. This can be one of the following:
■ direct — Specifies direct routes
■ ospf — Specifies Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).
■ ospf-ase — Specifies OSPF external routes.
■ ospf-nssa — Specifies OSPF NSSA external routes.
■ static — Specifies static routes.
Description
Use the filter-policy export command to configure RIP to filter the advertised
routing information.
Use the undo filter-policy export command to configure RIP not to filter the
advertised routing information. This is the default.
Related commands: acl, filter-policy import, ip ip-prefix.
Example
To filter the advertised route information using ACL 2000, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]filter-policy 2000 export

filter-policy import Syntax

filter-policy gateway ip_prefix_name import
undo filter-policy gateway ip_prefix_name import
filter-policy { acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name [ gateway

ip-prefix-name ] | route-policy route-policy-name } import
undo filter-policy { acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name | [

gateway ip-prefix-name ] | route-policy route-policy-name } import
View
RIP View
Parameters
gateway ip_prefix_name Enter the name of the address prefix list. This is used to
filter the addresses of this neighboring routers advertising the routing information.
acl_number Enter an ACL number. This is used to filter the destination addresses
of the routing information.
ip_prefix_name Enter the name of the address prefix list. This is used to filter the
route-policy-name: Route policy name that filters routing information. After

enabling RIP protocol, you can determine which routes are to be sent/received
based on acl/cost/interface/ip/ip-prefix/tag fields.
Description
Use the filter-policy gateway import command to configure the switch to
filter the routing information received from a specified address.
Use the undo filter-policy gateway import command to configure the

switch not to filter the routing information received from the specified address.
Use the filter-policy import command to configure the switch to filter global
Use the undo filter-policy import command to disable filtering of received

global routing information.
By default, RIP does not filter the received routing information.
Related commands: acl, filter-policy export, ip ip-prefix.
Example
To configure the filtering of the global routing information using acl 2000, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]filter-policy 2000 import

host-route Syntax
host-route
undo host-route
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the host-route command to configure RIP to accept host routes. This is the
default.
Use the undo host-route command to configure RIP to reject host routes.
Example
To configure RIP to reject a host route, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]undo host-route
import-route Syntax
import-route protocol [ cost value | route-policy route-policy-name
]
undo import-route protocol
View
RIP view
Parameters
protocol Enter the routing protocol to be imported. This can be one of the
following: direct, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa or static.
value Enter the cost value of the route to be imported.
route-policy route_policy_name Enter a route-policy name. Only routes that

match the conditions of the specified policy are imported.
Description
Use the import-route command to import the routes of other protocols into RIP.
Use the undo import-route command to cancel the import of routes from other
protocols. By default, RIP does not import any other protocol’s route.
The import-route command can be used to import the route of another protocol
with a certain cost value. RIP regards the imported route as its own route and

transmits it with the specified cost value. This command can greatly enhance the
RIP capability of obtaining routes, thus increases the RIP performance.
If the cost value is not specified, routes will be imported according to the
default cost ranging from 1 to 16. If the imported route cost value is 16, then
RIP continues to announce this cost to other routers running RIP, and marks this
route with HOLDDOWN. However, this router can still forward packets until the
Garbage Collection timer times out (defaults to 120 seconds).
Related commands: default cost.
Example
To import a static route with a cost of 4, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]import-route static cost 4
To set the default cost, and then import an OSPF route with this default cost, enter
the following two commands:
[SW5500-rip]default cost 3
[SW5500-rip]import-route ospf
network Syntax
network network_address
undo network network_address
View
RIP view
Parameter
network_address Enter the IP network address of an interface.
Description
Use the network command to enable Routing Information Protocol (RIP) on the
interface of a specified network segment connected to the router.
Use the undo network command to disable RIP on the interface. By default, RIP is
disabled on an interface.
After you have enabled RIP, you must also enable RIP for a specified interface using
this command. RIP only operates on the interface of specified network segments.
The undo network command is similar to the undo rip work command in the
VLAN Interface View, in that an interface using either command will result in the
interface not receiving/transmitting RIP routes. However, if you use undo rip
work, other interfaces will still forward the routes of the interfaces set to undo rip
work. If you use undo network, other interfaces will not forward the routes of
interfaces set to undo network.

When the network command is used on an IP address, the interface on this

network segment is enabled. For example, if you view the network 129.102.1.1
with both the display current-configuration command and the display
rip, the IP address is shown as 129.102.0.0.
Related commands: rip work.
Example
To enable RIP on the interface with the network address 129.102.0.1, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]network 129.102.0.0
peer Syntax
peer ip_address
undo peer ip_address
View
RIP view
Parameter
ip_address Enter the interface IP address of the peer router.
Description
Use the peer command to configure the destination address of the peer device.
Use the undo peer command to cancel the set destination address. By default,
there is no destination address.
3Com recommends that you do not use this command. RIP can use unicast to
exchange information with non-broadcasting networks. If required, you can use
this command to specify the destination address of the peer device.
Example
To specify the sending destination address as 202.38.165.1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]peer 202.38.165.1
preference Syntax
preference value
undo preference
View
RIP view

Parameter
value Enter the preference level, in the range 1 to 255. By default, the value is
100.
Description
Use the preference command to configure the route preference of RIP.
Use the undo preference command to restore the default preference.
The default value of each routing protocol is determined by the specific routing
policy. This “preference” determines the optimal route in the IP routing table. You
can use this command to modify the RIP preference.
Example
To specify an RIP preference of 20, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]preference 20
reset Syntax
reset
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset command to reset the system configuration parameters of RIP.
When you need to re-configure parameters of RIP, this command can be used to
restore to the default setting.
Example
Reset the RIP system.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]reset
rip Syntax
rip
undo rip
View
System View

Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip command to enable RIP and enter the RIP command view. From here,
you can configure RIP using the other commands described in this section.
Use the undo rip command to disable RIP. By default, RIP is disabled.
Enabling RIP does not affect interface configurations.
Example
To enable RIP, and enter RIP view, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]
rip authentication-mode Syntax

rip authentication-mode { simple password | md5 { usual key-string |
nonstandard key-string key-id }}
undo rip authentication-mode
View
Interface View
Parameters
simple Enter to specify simple text authentication mode.
password Enter the simple text authentication key.
md5 Enter to specify MD5 cipher text authentication mode.
usual Enter to specify the MD5 cipher text authentication packet to use the
general packet format (RFC1723 standard format).
key-string Enter the MD5 cipher text authentication key. If it is entered in plain
text, the MD5 key is a character string not exceeding 16 characters. This key is
displayed in a cipher text form in a length of 24 characters when display
current-configuration command is executed. Inputting the MD5 key in cipher
text form with 24 characters long is also supported.
nonstandard: Enter to set the MD5 cipher text authentication packet to use a
nonstandard packet format (as described in RFC2082).
key-id Enter an MD5 cipher text authentication identifier, ranging from 1 to 255.
Description
Use the rip authentication-mode command to configure the RIP-2
authentication mode and its parameters for the Switch 5500G-EI.

Use the rip authentication-mode simple command to configure the RIP-2

simple text authentication key.
Use the rip authentication-mode md5 usual key-string to configure the

MD5 cipher text authentication key for RIP-2.
Use the rip authentication-mode md5 nonstandard key-string key-id

command to configure the MD5 cipher text authentication ID for RIP-2.
Use the undo rip authentication-mode command to cancel RIP-2

authentication.
There are two RIP-2 authentication modes: simple authentication and MD5 cipher
text authentication. When you use MD5 cipher text authentication mode, two
types of packet formats are available. The standard format (set using the usual
parameter), is described in RFC 1723. The non-standard format (set using the
nonstandard parameter), is described in RFC 2082.
RIP-1 does not support authentication.
Related command: rip version.
Example
To specify the interface “Vlan-interface 1” to use simple authentication with the
key set to “aaa”, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]rip version 2
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]rip authentication-mode simple aaa
To specify the interface Vlan-interface 1 to use MD5 authentication with the key
string as “aaa” and the packet type set to usual, enter the following:
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]rip authentication-mode md5 key-string aaa
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]rip authentication-mode md5 type nonstandard
To set MD5 authentication on Vlan-interface 1 with the key string set to “aaa”
and the packet type set to usual, enter the following:
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]rip authentication-mode md5 usual aaa
rip input Syntax

rip input
undo rip input
View
Interface View

Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip input command to allow an interface to receive RIP packets. By
default, all interfaces except loopback interfaces are able to receive RIP packets.
Use the undo rip input command to block an interface from receiving RIP
packets.
This command is used in conjunction with two other two commands: rip output
and rip work. The rip input and rip output commands control, respectively,
the receipt and the transmission of RIP packets on an interface. The rip work
command allows both receipt and tranmission of RIP packets.
Related commands: rip output, rip work.
Example
To set the interface Vlan-interface 1 not to receive RIP packets, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]undo rip input
rip metricin Syntax

rip metricin value
undo rip metricin
View
Interface View
Parameter
value Enter an additional route metric to be added when receiving a packet,
ranging from 0 to 16. By default, the value is 0.
Description
Use the rip metricin command to configure an additional route metric to be
added to the route when an interface receives RIP packets.
Use the undo rip metricin command to restore the default value of this
additional route metric.
Related command: rip metricout.
Example
To set the additional route metric to 2 when the interface Vlan-interface 1 receives
RIP packets, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]rip metricin 2
rip metricout Syntax

rip metricout value
undo rip metricout
View
Interface View
Parameter
value Enter an additional route metric added when transmitting a packet,
ranging from 1 to 16. By default, the value is 1.
Description
Use the rip metricout command to configure an additional route metric to be

added to a route when an interface transmits RIP packets.
Use the undo rip metricout command to restore the default value of the
additional route metric.
Related command: rip metricin.
Example
To set the additional route metric to 2 when the interface Vlan-interface 1
transmits RIP packets, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]rip metricout 2
rip output Syntax

rip output
undo rip output
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip output command to allow an interface to transmit RIP packets.
Use the undo rip output command to disable an interface from transmitting RIP
packets.
By default, all interfaces except loopback interfaces are able to transmit RIP
packets.

This command is used in conjunction with two other commands: rip input and
rip work. rip input and rip output control, respectively, the receipt and the
transmission of RIP packets on an interface. rip work allows both receipt and
transmission of RIP packets.
Related commands; rip input, rip work.
Example
To prevent the interface Vlan-interface 1 from transmitting RIP packets, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]undo rip output
rip split-horizon Syntax

rip split-horizon
undo rip split-horizon
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip split-horizon command to configure an interface to use split
horizon when transmitting RIP packets. This is the default.
Use the undo rip split-horizon command to configure an interface not to use
split horizon when transmitting RIP packets.
Normally, split horizon is necessary for preventing router loops. You may need to
disable split horizon to ensure proper operation of protocols.
Example
To set the interface Vlan-interface 1 not to use split horizon when processing RIP
packets, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]undo rip split-horizon
rip version Syntax

rip version 1
rip version 2 [ broadcast | multicast ]
undo rip version
View
Interface View

Parameters
1 Enter to set the interface version to RIP-1.
2 Enter to set the interface version to RIP-2.
broadcast Enter to set the transmission mode of an RIP-2 packet to broadcast.
multicast Enter to set the transmission mode of an RIP-2 packet to multicast.
Description
Use the rip version command to configure the version number of RIP packets
on an interface.
Use the undo rip version command to restore the default RIP packet version on
the interface. The interface RIP version is RIP-1.
By default, RIP-1 transmits packets in broadcast mode, while RIP-2 transmits

packets in multicast mode.
When running RIP-1, the interface receives and transmits RIP-1 packets, and can
also receive RIP-2 broadcast packets.
When running RIP-2 in broadcast mode, the interface receives and transmits RIP-2
broadcast packets, and can also receive both RIP-1 packets and RIP-2 multicast
packets.
When running RIP-2 in multicast mode, the interface receives and transmits RIP-2
multicast packets, and can also receive RIP-2 broadcast packets. The interface can
not receive RIP-1 packets.
Example
To configure the interface Vlan-interface 1 to RIP-2 broadcast mode, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]rip version 2 broadcast
rip work Syntax

rip work
undo rip work
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip work command to enable the RIP on an interface. This is the default.

Use the undo rip work command to disable RIP on an interface.
This command is used in conjunction with the rip input, rip output and
network commands. Refer to the descriptions of these commands for details.
Related commands: network, rip input, rip output.
Example
To disable the running of RIP on interface Vlan-interface 1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]undo rip work
summary Syntax
summary
undo summary
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the summary command to activate RIP-2 automatic route summarization. This
is the default.
Use the undo summary command to disable RIP-2 automatic route summarization.
Route aggregation can be performed to reduce the routing traffic on the network
as well as to reduce the size of the routing table. RIP-1 does not support subnet
masks. Forwarding subnetted routes may cause ambiguity. Netwroks that use
RIP-1 should always use the natural mask. Therefore, RIP-1 uses route
summarization all the time. If RIP-2 is used, route summarization function can be
disabled with the undo summary command, when it is necessary to broadcast the
subnet route.
Related command: rip version
Example
To set the RIP version on the interface Vlan-interface 1 to RIP-2, and then disable
the route aggregation, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]quit
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]undo summary

timers Syntax
timers { update update-timer-length | timeout timeout-timer-length} *
undo timers { update | timeout } *
View
RIP View
Parameters
update-timer-length Enter the value of the period update timer, ranging from 1
to 3600 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.
timeout-timer-length Enter the value of the timeout timer, ranging from 1 to

3600 seconds. The default value is 180 seconds.
Description
Use the timers command to modify the values of the three RIP timers: period
update, timeout, and garbage-collection.
Use the undo timers command to restore the default settings.
By default, the values of period update, timeout, and garbage-collection timers

are 30 seconds, 180 seconds, and 120 seconds, respectively.
Generally, the value of the garbage-collection timer is fixed to 4 times the value of
the period update timer. Adjusting the period update timer will affect the
garbage-collection timer.
The modification of RIP timers takes effect immediately.
Related Command: display rip
Example
Set the values of the Period Update timer and the Timeout timer of RIP to 10
seconds and 30 seconds respectively.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]timers update 10 timeout 30
traffic-share-across- Syntax
interface traffic-share-across-interface
undo traffic-share-across-interface
View
RIP View
Parameter
None

Description
Use the traffic-share-across-interface command to enable RIP to distribute
traffic equally among interfaces by employing equivalent routes.
Use the undo traffic-share-across-interface command to disable traffic

sharing among interfaces.
By default traffic sharing across RIP interfaces is disabled.
Example
To enable RIP traffic sharing across interfaces, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]traffic-share-across-interface
OSPF Configuration This section describes the commands you can use to configure the Open Shortest
Commands Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.
When the Switch 5500G-EI runs a routing protocol, it is able to perform the
functions of a router. The term router in this section can refer either to a physical
router or to the Switch 5500G-EI running a routing protocol.
abr-summary Syntax
abr-summary ip_address mask [ advertise | not-advertise ]
undo abr-summary ip_address mask
View
OSPF Area view
Parameters
ip_address Enter a network segment IP address.
mask Enter the subnet mask.
advertise Enter to advertise only the summarized route.
not advertise Enter to not advertise routes matching the specified IP address
and mask.
Description
Use the abr-summary command to configure route aggregation on the area
border router.
Use the undo abr-summary command to disable route aggregation on the area
border router. This is the default.
This command is applicable only to an area border router (ABR) and is used for the
route aggregation in an area. The ABR only transmits an aggregated route to other
areas. Route aggregation refers to the routing information that is processed in the

ABR. For each network segment configured with route aggregation, there is only
one route transmitted to other areas.
Example
To enter area 1, and then aggregate the network segments, 66.48.10.0 and
66.48.120.0 into the summary route 66.48.0.0, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]router id 1.1.1.1
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]area 1
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]network 66.48.10.0 0.0.0.255
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]abr-summary 66.48.0.0 255.255.0.0
area Syntax
area area_id
undo area area_id
View
OSPF view
Parameter
area_id Enter the ID of the OSPF area. This can either be in IP address format, or
as a number in the range 0 to 4294967295.
Description
Use the area command to enter an OSPF area view.
Use the undo area command to exit from the OSPF area view.
Example
To enter the OSPF area view 0, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf]area 0
[SW5500-ospf-area-0.0.0.0]
asbr-summary Syntax
asbr-summary ip_address mask [ not-advertise | tag value ]
undo asbr-summary ip-address mask
View
OSPF view
Parameter
ip_address Enter the matched IP address.

mask Enter the IP subnet mask.
not-advertise Enter this parameter if you do not want to advertise routes

matching the specified IP address and mask.
tag value Enter a tag value, which is mainly used to control advertisement of
routes via route-policy. This value can be in the range 0 to 4294967295. The
default is 1.
Description
Use the asbr-summary command to configure a summary of imported routes for
OSPF.
Use the undo asbr-summary command to cancel the summary. This is the default.
After the summarization of imported routes is configured, if the local router is an

autonomous system border router (ASBR), this command summarizes the
imported Type-5 LSAs in the summary address range. When NSSA is configured,
this command will also summarize the imported Type-7 LSAs in the summary
address range.
If the local router acts as both an ABR and an ASBR in the NSSA, this command
summarizes Type-5 LSAs translated from Type-7 LSAs. If the router is not the ASBR
in the NSSA, the summarization is disabled.
Related commands: display ospf asbr-summary.
Example
To summarize the OSPF imported routes, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf]asbr-summary 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0 not-advertise
authentication-mode Syntax
authentication-mode { simple | md5 }
undo authentication-mode
View
OSPF Area View
Parameters
simple Enter to configure simple text authentication mode.
md5 Enter to configure MD5 cipher text authentication mode.
Description
Use the authentication-mode command to configure an OSPF area to use a
specified authentication mode.

Use the undo authentication-mode command to cancel the authentication

mode for this area. By default, an area does not support an authentication mode.
All the routers in one area must use the same authentication mode (no
authentication, simple text authentication or MD5 cipher text authentication). In
addition, all routers on the same segment must use the same authentication key.
To configure a simple text authentication key, use the ospf

authentication-mode simple command.
To configure an MD5 cipher text key, use the ospf authentication-mode md5
command.
Related command: ospf authentication-mode.
Example
To set the OSPF area 0 to support MD5 cipher text authentication, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0]authentication-mode md5
default cost Syntax

default cost value
undo default cost
View
OSPF View
Parameter
value Enter the default routing cost of the external route imported by OSPF, in
the range 0 to 16777214. By default, its value is 1.
Description
Use the default cost command to configure the default routing cost of an
external route imported by OSPF.
Use the undo default cost command to restore the default value of the default
routing cost configured for OSPF to import external routes.
Since OSPF can import external routing information, whose routing cost can
influence routing selection and calculation, and propagate it to the entire
autonomous system, it is necessary to specify the default routing cost for the
protocol to import external routes.

Example
To specify a default routing cost of 10 for an external route imported by OSPF,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]default cost 10
default interval Syntax

default interval seconds
undo default interval
View
OSPF View
Parameter
seconds Enter the default interval, in seconds, for redistributing external routes.
This can be in the range 1 to 2147483647. The default is 1 second.
Description
Use the default interval command to configure the default interval for OSPF to
import external routes.
Use the undo default interval command to restore the default value of 1
second.
Because OSPF can import external routing information and broadcast it to the
entire autonomous system, and importing routes can affect the performances of
the device (depending on the number of external routes being imported), it is
necessary to specify the default interval for the protocol to import external routes.
Example
To specify a default interval of 10 seconds for OSPF to import external routes,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]default interval 10
default limit Syntax

default limit routes
undo default limit
View
OSPF View

Parameter
routes Enter a limit on the number of imported external routes, in the range 200
to 2147483647. By default, the limit is 1000.
Description
Use the default limit command to configure maximum number of allowed
imported routes.
Use the undo default limit command to restore the default value.
OSPF can import external routing information and advertise them to the whole AS.
Importing too many external routes at once can greatly affect the performance of
the device.
Related commands: default interval.
Example
To specify a limit of 200 imported external routes, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]default limit 200
default tag Syntax

default tag tag
undo default tag
View
OSPF View
Parameter
tag Enter a tag number, in the range 0 to 4294967295.
Description
Use the default tag command to configure the default tag of OSPF when it
redistributes an external route.
Use the undo default tag command to restore the default tag of OSPF when it
redistributes the external route.
OSPF requires a default tag when redistributing a route found by other routing
protocols.
Related command: default type.
Example
To set a default tag of 10 to OSPF imported external routes, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]default tag 10
default type Syntax

default type { 1 | 2 }
undo default type
View
OSPF view
Parameters
1 Enter to set the default to external routes of type 1.
2 Enter to set the default to external routes of type 2.
Description
Use the default type command to configure the default type when OSPF
redistributes external routes.
Use the undo default type command to restore the default type. By default,
external routes are imported as type 2.
OSPF requires a default type when redistributing a route found by other routing
protocols.
Related command: default tag.
Example
To specify the default type as type 1 when OSPF imports an external route, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]default type 1
default-cost Syntax
default-cost value
undo default-cost
View
OSPF Area view
Parameter
value Enter the cost value of the default route transmitted by OSPF to a Stub or
NSSA area, in the range 0 to 16777214. The default value is 1.

Description
Use the default-cost command to configure the cost of the route transmitted by
OSPF to a Stub or NSSA area.
Use the undo default-cost command to restore the default cost of the default
route transmitted by OSPF to a Stub or NSSA.
Related commands: stub, nssa.
Example
To set area 1 as a Stub area, and to set the cost of the default route transmitted to
this Stub area to 60, enter the following commands:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]stub
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]default-cost 60
default-route-advertise Syntax
default-route-advertise [ always | cost value | type type_value |
route-policy route_policy_name ]*
undo default-route-advertise [ always | cost | type | route-policy ]*
View
OSPF view
Parameters
always Enter to generate an ASE LSA which describes the default route and
advertise it if the local router is not configured with the default route. If this
parameter is not set, the local router cannot import the ASE LSA, which generates
the default route only when it is configured with the default route.
cost value Enter the cost value of the ASE LSA, in the range 0 to 16777214. The
default value is 1.
type type_value Enter the external type of this ASE LSA, which can be either 1 or
2. The default value is 2.
route-policy route_policy_name Enter to have the route-policy effect the

value in ASE LSA if the default route matches the route-policy specified by
route-policy-name. The length of route_policy_name parameter ranges from 1
to 16 character string.
Description
Use the default-route-advertise command to import the default route into
the OSPF Autonomous System.
Use the undo default-route-advertise command to cancel the import of

default route. This is the default.

The import-route command cannot import the default route. When local router
is not configured with default route, the keyword always should be used by ASE
LSA to generate default route.
Related command: import-route.
Example
If a local route has no default route, the ASE LSA of the default route will be
generated.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]default-route-advertise
The ASE LSA of the default route will be generated and advertised to OSPF route
area even if the local router has no default route.
[SW5500-ospf]default-route-advertise always
display debugging ospf Syntax

display debugging ospf
View
Any View
Description
Use the display debugging ospf command to view the debugging states of
global OSPF and all processes.
For related commands, see debugging ospf.
Example
To display the debugging states of global OSPF and all processes, enter the
following.
<SW5500>display debugging ospf
OSPF global debugging state:

OSPF SPF debugging is on
OSPF LSA debugging is on
OSPF process 100 debugging state:
OSPF process 200 debugging state:

OSPF LSA debugging is on
display ospf abr-asbr Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] abr-asbr

View
All views
Parameter
process-id Enter the process ID of OSPF, ranging from 1 to 65535. The
command is applied to all current OSPF processes if you do not specify a process
ID.
Description
Use the display ospf abr-asbr command to view information about the Area
Border Router (ABR) and Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) of OSPF.
Example
To display information on the ABR and ASBR of OSPF, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf abr-asbr
OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.110.98.138
Routing Table to ABR and ASBR
I = Intra i = Inter A = ASBR B = ABR S = SumASBR
Destination Area Cost Nexthop Interface
IA 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0 10 10.153.17.89 Vlan-interface1

Table 25 Output Description of the ospf abr-asbr Command
Field Description
Destination Router ID of the ABR or ASBR
Area Area where the router is connected with ASBR
Cost The routing overhead value of the route
Nexthop Nexthop address to the destination
Interface The local output interface
display ospf Syntax

asbr-summary display ospf [ process-id ] asbr-summary [ ip_address mask ]
View
All Views
Parameters
process-id: Enter the process ID of OSPF, ranging from 1 to 65535. The
ID.
ip_address Enter an IP address.
mask Enter an IP subnet mask.
Description
Use the display ospf asbr-summary command to view the summary
information of an OSPF imported route, or all OSPF imported routes.

If you do not specify an IP address and subnet mask, the summary information of
all OSPF imported routes is displayed.
Related command: asbr-summary.
Example
To display the summary information of all OSPF imported routes, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display ospf asbr-summary
Summary Addresses
Total summary address count: 2
Summary Address
net : 168.10.0.0
mask : 255.254.0.0
tag : 1
status : Advertise
The Count of Route is 0
Summary Address
net : 1.1.0.0
mask : 255.255.0.0
tag : 100
status : DoNotAdvertise
The Count of Route is 0
Table 26 Output Description of the display ospf abr-asbr summary Command
Field Description
net Destination network segment
Mask IP subnet mask
tag Tag
status Status information including two values:
■ DoNotAdvertise — The summary routing information to the network segment
will not be advertised.
■ Advertise — The summary routing information to the network segment will be
advertised.
display ospf brief Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] brief
View
All Views
Parameter
ID.
Description
Use the display ospf brief command to view OSPF summary information.

Example
To display OSPF summary information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf brief
OSPF Protocol Information
RouterID: 10.110.95.189 Border Router: AS

spf-schedule-interval: 5
Routing preference: Inter/Intra: 10 External: 150
Default ASE parameters: Metric: 1 Tag: 0.0.0.1 Type: 2
SPF computation count: 16
Area Count: 1 Nssa Area Count: 0
Area 0.0.0.0:
Authtype: none Flags: <>
SPF scheduled: <>
Interface: 201.1.1.4 (Vlan-interface1)
Cost: 1 State: DR Type: Broadcast
Priority: 1
Designated Router: 201.1.1.4
Backup Designated Router: 201.1.1.3
Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1
Table 27 Output Description of the display ospf brief Command
Field Description
RouterID Router ID of the router
Border Router Border routers for connection to the area, including autonomous system
border router (ASBR) and area border router (ABR).
spf-schedule-interval Interval of SPF schedule.
Authtype Authentication type of OSPF.
Routing preference Routing preference of OSPF. The internal route of OSPF includes
intra/inter area route, and its default routing preference is 10. While that
of the external route of OSPF is 150 by default.
Default ASE Default ASE parameters of OSPF, including metric, type, and tag.
parameters
SPF computation SPF computation count since OSPF is enabled.
count
Area Count Areas connected to this router.
Nssa Area Count Number of NSSA areas.
SPF scheduled SPF scheduled (flag).
Interface IP address of the interface.
Cost Cost of the interface.
State State information
Type OSPF network type of interface
Priority Priority of interface
Designated Router IP address of designated router
Backup Designated IP address of backup designated router
Router

Table 27 Output Description of the display ospf brief Command

Timers OSPF timers:
■ Hello — Interval of hello packets
■ Dead — Interval of dead neighbors
■ Poll — Interval of poll
■ Retransmit — Interval of retransmitting LSAs
■ Transmit delay — Delay time of transmitting LSAs
display ospf cumulative Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] cumulative
View
All Views
Parameter
process-id Enter process ID of OSPF, ranging from 1 to 65535. The command is
applied to all current OSPF processes if you do not specify a process ID.
Description
Use the display ospf cumulative command to view the OSPF cumulative
information.
Example
To display the OSPF cumulative information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf cumulative

Cumulations
IO Statistics
Type Input Output
Hello 225 437
DB Description 78 86
Link-State Req 18 18
Link-State Update 48 53
Link-State Ack 25 21
ASE: 1 Checksum Sum: FCAF
LSAs originated by this router
Router: 50 SumNet: 40SumASB: 2
LSAs Originated: 92 LSAs Received: 33
Area 0.0.00.0:
Neighbors: 1 Interfaces: 1
Spf: 54 Checksum Sum F020
rtr: 2 net: 0 sumasb: 0 sumnet: 1
Area 0.0.0.1:
Neighbors: 0 Interfaces: 1
Spf: 19 Checksum Sum 14EAD
rtr: 1 net: 0sumasb: 1sumnet: 1
Routing Table:
Intra Area: 2 Inter Area: 0ASE: 1

Table 28 Output Description of the display ospf cumulative Command
Field Description
IO Statistics Type Type of input/output OSPF packet.
Input Number of received packets.
Output Number of transmitted packets.
ASE Number of all ASE LSAs.
checksum sum Checksum of ASE LSAs.
LSAs originated Number of originated LSAs.
received Number of received LSAs generated by other routers.
Router Number of all Router LSAs.
SumNet Number of all Sumnet LSAs.
SumASB Number of all SUMASB LSAs
Area Neighbors Number of neighbors in this area.
Interfaces Number of interfaces in this arera.
Spf Number of SPF computation count in this area.
rtr, net, Number of all LSAs in this area.
sumasb,
sumnet
Routing Intra Area Number of intra-area routes.
Table
Inter Area Number of inter-area routes.
ASE Number of external routes.
display ospf error Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] error
View
All Views
Parameter
process-id Enter the process ID of OSPF, ranging from 1 to 65535. The command
is applied to all current OSPF processes if you do not specify a process ID.
Description
Use the display ospf error command to view OSPF error information.
Example
To display the OSPF error information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf error
OSPF packet error statistics:

0: IP: received my own packet 0:OSPF: wrong packet type
0: OSPF: wrong version 0:OSPF: wrong checksum
0: OSPF: wrong area id 0:OSPF: area mismatch
0: OSPF: wrong virtual link 0:OSPF: wrong authentication type
0: OSPF: wrong authentication key0:OSPF: too small packet

0: OSPF: packet size > ip length 0:OSPF: transmit error

0: OSPF: interface down 0:OSPF: unknown neighbor
0: HELLO: netmask mismatch 0:HELLO: hello timer mismatch
0: HELLO: dead timer mismatch 0:HELLO: extern option mismatch
0: HELLO: router id confusion 0:HELLO: virtual neighbor unknown
0: HELLO: NBMA neighbor unknown 0:DD: neighbor state low
0: DD: router id confusion 0:DD: extern option mismatch
0: DD: unknown LSA type 0:LS ACK: neighbor state low
0: LS ACK: wrong ack 0:LS ACK: duplicate ack
0: LS ACK: unknown LSA type 0:LS REQ: neighbor state low
0: LS REQ: empty request 0:LS REQ: wrong request
0: LS UPD: neighbor state low 0:LS UPD: newer self-generate LSA
0: LS UPD: LSA checksum wrong 0:LS UPD:received less recent LSA
0: LS UPD:unknown LSA type 0:OSPF routing: next hop not exist
0: DD: MTU option mismatch 0:ROUTETYPE: wrong type value
Table 29 Description of information generated by the display ospf error command
Field Description
IP: received my own packet Received my own packet
OSPF: wrong packet type OSPF packet type error
OSPF: wrong version OSPF version error
OSPF: wrong checksum OSPF checksum error
OSPF: wrong area id OSPF area ID error
OSPF: area mismatch OSPF area mismatch
OSPF: wrong virtual link OSPF virtual link error
OSPF: wrong authentication type OSPF authentication type error
OSPF: wrong authentication key OSPF authentication key error
OSPF: too small packet OSPF packet too small
OSPF: packet size > ip length OSPF packet size exceeds IP packet length
OSPF: transmit error OSPF transmission error
OSPF: interface down OSPF interface is down, unavailable
OSPF: unknown neighbor OSPF neighbors are unknown
HELLO: netmask mismatch Network mask mismatch
HELLO: hello timer mismatch Interval of HELLO packet is mismatched
HELLO: dead timer mismatch Interval of dead neighbor packet is mismatched
HELLO: extern option mismatch Extern option of Hello packet is mismatched
HELLO: router id confusion Hello packet: Router ID confusion
HELLO: virtual neighbor unknown Hello packet: unknown virtual neighbor
HELLO: NBMA neighbor unknown Hello packet: unknown NBMA neighbor
DD: neighbor state low Database description (DD) packet: asynchronous
neighbor state
DD: unknown LSA type DD packet: unknown LSA type
LS ACK: neighbor state low Link state acknowledgment (LS ACK) packet:
asynchronous neighbor state
LS ACK: wrong ack Link state acknowledgment packet: ack error
LS ACK: duplicate ack Link state acknowledgment packet: ack duplication
LS ACK: unknown LSA type Link state acknowledgment packet: unknown LSA type
LS REQ: neighbor state low Link state request (LS REQ) packet

Table 29 Description of information generated by the display ospf error command
Field Description
LS REQ: empty request Link state request packet: empty request
LS REQ: wrong request Link state request packet: erroneous request
LS UPD: neighbor state low Link state update packet: asynchronous neighbor state
LS UPD: newer self-generate LSA Link state update packet: newer LSA generated by
itself
LS UPD: LSA checksum wrong Link state update packet: LSA checksum error
LS UPD:received less recent LSA Link state update packet: received less recent LSA
LS UPD: unknown LSA type Link state update packet: unknown LSA type
OSPF routing: next hop not exist Next hop of OSPF routing does not exist
DD: MTU option mismatch MTU option of DD packet is mismatched
ROUTETYPE: wrong type value Route type: the value of the type is wrong
display ospf interface Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] interface [ interface-type port-number ]
View
All Views
Parameters
interface-type Enter the interface type.
port-number Enter the port number.
Description
Use the display ospf interface command to view OSPF interface information
for a specified port, or for all ports.
The information displayed includes OSPF configuration and running state.
Example
To display OSPF interface information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf interface vlan-interface 1

Interfaces
Interface: 10.110.10.2 (Vlan-interface1)

Cost: 1 State: BackupDR Type: Broadcast
Priority: 1
Designated Router: 10.110.10.1
Backup Designated Router: 10.110.10.2

Table 30 Output Description of the display ospf interface Command
Field Description
Cost Cost of the interface
State State of the interface state machine
Type Network type of OSPF
Priority Priority of DR for interface election
Designated Router Designated router on the network in which the interface resides
Backup Designated Backup designated router on the network in which the interface resides
Router
Timers OSPF timers:
■ Retransmit — Interval of retransmitting LSA
■ Transmit delay — Delay time of transmitting LSA
display ospf lsdb Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] [ area_id ] lsdb [ brief | [ asbr | ase |
network | nssa | router | summary ] [ ip_address ] [ originate-router
ip_address | self-originate ]]
View
All Views
Parameters
area_id Enter the ID of the OSPF area, as either an ID number or an IP address.
brief Enter to view brief information.
asbr Enter to view information about summary ASBR-LSA.
ase Enter to view information about AS-external-LSA.
network Enter to view information about the Network LSA.
nssa Enter to view information about the NSSA-external-LSA.
router Enter to view information about the Router-LSA.
summary Enter to view information about Summary-Net-LSA.
originate-router Enter to view information about the LSA generator.
self-originate Enter to view information about self-originated LSA.

Description
Use the display ospf lsdb command to view database information about the
OSPF connecting state.
Example
To display database information about the OSPF connecting state, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display ospf lsdb
Link State Database
Area: 0.0.0.0
Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric Where
Rtr 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.2 465 36 8000000c 0 SpfTree
Rtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 449 36 80000004 0 SpfTree
Net 10.153.17.89 2.2.2.2 465 32 80000004 0 SpfTree
SNet 10.153.18.0 1.1.1.1 355 28 80000003 10 Inter List
Area: 0.0.0.1
Rtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 449 36 80000004 0 SpfTree
Rtr 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 429 36 8000000a 0 Clist
Net 10.153.18.89 3.3.3.3 429 32 80000003 0 SpfTree
SNet 10.153.17.0 1.1.1.1 355 28 80000003 10 Inter List
ASB 2.2.2.2 1.1.1.1 355 28 80000003 10 SumAsb List
AS External Database:
ASE 10.153.18.0 1.1.1.1 1006 36 80000002 1 Ase List
ASE 10.153.16.0 2.2.2.2 798 36 80000002 1 Uninitialized
ASE 10.153.17.0 2.2.2.2 623 36 80000003 1 Uninitialized
ASE 10.153.17.0 1.1.1.1 1188 36 80000002 1 Ase List
Table 31 Output Description of the display ospf lsdb Command
Field Description
Type Type of the LSA
LinkStateID Link state ID of the LSA
AdvRouter Router ID of the router originating the LSA
Age Age of the LSA
Len Length of the LSA
Sequence Sequence number of the LSA
Metric Cost from the router originating the LSA to LSA destination
Where Location of the LSA
<SW5500> display ospf lsdb ase

Link State Data Base
type: ASE
ls id: 2.2.0.0
adv rtr: 0.0.0.2
ls age: 349
len: 36

seq#: 80000001
chksum: 0xfcaf
Options: (DC)
Net mask: 255.255.0.0
Tos 0 metric:1
E type:2
Forwarding Address:0.0.0.0
Tag: 1
Table 32 Output Description of the display ospf lsdb ase Command
Field Description
type Type of the LSA
ls id Link state ID of the LSA
adv rtr Router ID of the router originating the LSA
ls age Age of the LSA
len Length of the LSA
Seq# Sequence number of the LSA
chksum Checksum of the LSA
Options Options of the LSA
Net mask Network mask
E type Type of external route
Forwarding Address Forwarding address
Tag Tag
display ospf nexthop Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] nexthop
View
All Views
Parameter
Description
Use the display ospf nexthop command to view the information about the
next-hop.
Example
To display the OSPF next-hop information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf nexthop
Address Type Refcount Intf Addr Intf Name

--------------------------------------------------------------------
202.38.160.1 Direct 3 202.38.160.1 Vlan-interface2
202.38.160.2 Neighbor 1 202.38.160.1 Vlan-interface2

Table 33 Output Description of the display ospf nexthop Command
Field Description
Address Address of the next hop
Type Type of the next hop
Refcount Reference count of the next hop, that is, number of routes using the
next hop
Intf Addr IP address of the interface to the next hop
Intf Name The interface to the next hop
display ospf peer Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] peer [ brief ]
View
All Views
Parameter
ID.
Description
Use the display ospf peer command to view detailed OSPF peer information.
Use the display ospf peer brief command to view brief information of every
peer in the OSPF Autonomous System, in particular the peer number of all states
in every area.
Example
To view the information on an SPF peer, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf peer

Neighbors
Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.153.17.88(Vlan interface1)’s
neighbor(s)
RouterID: 2.2.2.2 Address: 10.153.17.89
State: Full Mode: Nbr is Master Priority: 1
DR: 10.153.17.89 BDR: 10.153.17.88
Dead times expires in 31s
Neighbor has been up for 01:14:14
Table 34 Output Description of the display ospf peer Command
Field Description
RouterID Router ID of neighbor router
Address Address of the interface, through which neighbor router
communicates with the router
State State of adjacency relation

Table 34 Output Description of the display ospf peer Command
Field Description
Mode Master/Slave mode formed by negotiation in exchanging DD packet
Priority Priority of DR/BDR for neighbor election
DR IP address of the interface of elected DR
BDR IP address of the interface of elected BDR
Dead timer expires in If no hello packet received from the peer within this interval, the peer
31 seconds will be considered to be invalid.
Neighbor has been up Time of neighbor connection
for 01:14:14
To view brief information for every peer, enter the following:

<SW5500>display ospf peer brief
Neighbor Statistics
Area ID Down Attempt Init 2-Way ExStart Exchange Loading Full Total
0.0.0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0.0.0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
Table 35 Output Description of the display ospf peer brief Command
Field Description
Area ID Area ID
Down The initial state for OSPF to establish neighbor relation, which indicates that
the OSPF router has not received the message from a certain neighbor router
within a period of time.
Attempt Enabled in the NBMA environment, such as Frame Relay, X.25 or ATM. It
indicates that OSPF router has not received the message from a certain
neighbor router within a period of time, but still attempts to send a Hello
packet to the adjacent routers for their communications with a lower
frequency.
Init Indicates that the OSPF router has received a Hello packet from a neighbor
router, but its IP address is not contained in the Hello packet. Therefore, a
two-way communication between them has not been established.
2-Way It indicates that a two-way communication between an OSPF router and a
neighbor router has been established. DR and BDR can be selected in this state
(or higher state)
ExStart In this state, the router determines the sequence number of the initial
database description (DD) packet used for data exchange, so that it can obtain
the latest link state information.
Exchange Indicates that the OSPF router sends DD packets to its neighbor routers to
exchange link state information.
Loading In this state, OSPF router requests routes from the neighbor based on the
updated link state information from neighbor routers and its expired
information, and waits for response from neighbor routers.
Full Indicates that database synchronization between the routers has been
completed, and their link state databases are consistent.
display ospf Syntax

request-queue display ospf [ process-id ] request-queue

View
All Views
Parameter
ID.
Description
Use the display ospf request-queue command to view information about the
OSPF request-queue.
Example
To display the information on the OSPF request-queue, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf request-queue
The Router's Neighbors is

Interface: 1.1.1.3 Area: 0.0.0.0
LSID: 1.1.1.3 AdvRouter: 1.1.1.3 Sequence:80000017 Age:35
Table 36 Output Description of the display ospf request-queue Command
Field Description
Router ID Router ID of neighbor router
Address Address of the interface, through which neighbor routers communicate
with the router
Interface Address of the interface on the network segment
Area Area number of OSPF
LSID:1.1.1.3 Link State ID of the LSA
AdvRouter Router ID of the router originating the LSA
Sequence Sequence number of the LSA, used to discover old and repeated LSAs
Age Age of the LSA
display ospf Syntax

retrans-queue display ospf [ process-id ] retrans-queue
View
All Views
Parameter
ID.
Description
Use the display ospf retrans-queue command to view information on the
OSPF retransmission queue.

Example
To display information on the OSPF retransmission queue, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf retrans-queue
The Router's Neighbors is
Interface: 103.169.2.5 Area: 0.0.0.1
Retrans list:
Type: ASE LSID:129.11.77.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1
Type: ASE LSID:129.11.108.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1
display ospf routing Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] routing
View
All Views
Parameter
process-id: Enter process ID of OSPF, ranging from 1 to 65535. The command is
applied to all current OSPF processes if you do not specify a process ID.
Description
Use the display ospf routing command to view the information about the
OSPF routing table.
Example
To view information on the OSPF routing table, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf routing

Routing tables
Routing for Network
Destination Cost Type NextHop AdvRouter Area
10.110.0.0/16 1 Net 10.110.10.1 1.1.1.1 0
10.10.0.0/16 1 Stub 10.10.0.1 3.3.3.3 0
Total Nets: 2
Intra Area: 2 Inter Area: 0 ASE: 0 NSSA: 0

Table 37 Output Description of the display ospf routing Command
Field Description
Destination Destination of network segment
Cost Cost of route
Type Type of route
NextHop Next hop of route
AdvRouter Router ID of the router advertising the route
Area Area ID
Intra Area Number of intra-area routes
Inter Area Number of inter-area routes
ASE Number of external routes
NSSA Number of NSSA routes
display ospf vlink Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] vlink
View
All Views
Parameter
ID.
Description
Use the display ospf vlink command to view the information about OSPF
virtual links.
Example
To view OSPF virtual links information, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ospf vlink

Virtual links
Virtual-link Neighbor-id -> 2.2.2.2, State: Full

Cost: 0 State: Full Type: Virtual
Transit Area: 0.0.0.2
Table 38 Output Description of the display ospf vlink Command
Field Description
Virtual-link Router ID of virtual-link neighbor router
Neighbor-id
State State
Interface IP address of the interface on the virtual link

Table 38 Output Description of the display ospf vlink Command

Cost Route cost of the interface
Type Type: virtual link
Transit Area ID of transit area tha the virtual link passes, and it cannot be backbone
area, Stub area, or NSSA area
Timers OSPF timers:
■ Retransmit — Interval of retransmitting LSA
■ Transmit delay — Delay time of transmitting LSA

filter-policy { acl_number | gateway gateway-ip | ip-prefix
ip_prefix_name } export [ routing_protocol ]
undo filter-policy {acl_number | gateway gateway-ip | ip-prefix

ip_prefix-name } export [ routing_protocol ]
View
OSPF View
Parameter
acl_number Enter an access control list number.
ip_prefix_name: Enter the name of the address prefix list.
routing_protocol Enter the protocol advertising the routing information. This

can be one of the following: direct, rip and static.
Description
Using the filter-policy export command, you can configure how OSPF filters
the advertised routing information. Only the routing information that meets these
conditions is advertised.
Using the undo filter-policy export command, you can cancel the filtering
rules. By default, no filtering of the distributed routing information is performed.
Related commands: acl, ip ip-prefix.
Example
To configure OSPF to only advertise the routing information permitted by acl 2000,
enter the following commands:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-acl-basic-2000]quit
[SW5500]ospf

[SW5500-ospf-1]filter-policy 2000 export

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | gateway
ip_prefix_name } import
undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | gateway

ip_prefix_name } import
View
OSPF View
Parameter
acl_number Enter the access control list number used for filtering the destination
addresses of the routing information.
ip_prefix_name Enter the name of address prefix list used for filtering the
gateway ip_prefix_name Enter the name of address prefix list used for filtering
the addresses of the neighboring routers advertising the routing information.
Description
Using the filter-policy import command, you can configure how OSPF filters
the routing information received. Only the routing information that meets these
conditions can be received.
Using the undo filter-policy import command, you can cancel the filtering of
the received routing information received. By default, no filtering of the received
routing information is performed.
In some cases, it may be required that only the routing information meeting some
conditions can be received. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the
filtering conditions for the routing information to be received. Only the routing
information passing the filtration can be received.
Example
To filter the received routing information using the rules defined by access control
list 2000, enter the following commands:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]filter-policy 2000 import
import-route Syntax
import-route protocol [ cost value ] [ type value ] [ tag value ] [
route-policy route_policy_name ]

undo import-route protocol
View
OSPF View
Parameter
protocol Enter the source routing protocol to be imported. This can be one of the
following: direct, rip, and static.
route-policy route_policy_name Enter a route policy name. Only routes that

match the specified route policy are imported.
cost value Enter the cost of the imported route.
type value Enter the cost type of imported routes. The value can be 1 or 2. The
default value is 2.
tag value Enter the tag value for imported external routes.
Description
Using the import-route command, you can import the external routing
information of another routing protocol.
Using the undo import-route command, you can cancel the import of external
routing information. By default, the routing information of other protocols is not
imported.
3Com recommends that you configure the route type, cost, and tag together in
one command; otherwise, the new configuration overwrites the old one.
Example
To configure an imported RIP route with the external route of type 2, a route tag
of 33 and a route cost of 50, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]import-route rip type 2 tag 33 cost 50
network Syntax
network ip_address ip_mask
undo network ip_address ip_mask
View
OSPF Area view
Parameter
ip_address Enter the IP address of the network segment where the interface is
located.

ip_mask Enter the IP address mask or IP address wildcard shielded text (similar to
the complement of the IP address mask).
Description
Using the network command, you can configure the interface running OSPF
protocol to which the interface belongs.
Using the undo network command, you can cancel the interface running OSPF. By
default, the interface does not belong to any area.
With the two parameters, ip_address and ip_mask, one or more interfaces can
be configured as an area. To run the OSPF protocol on one interface, the master IP
address of this interface must be in the range of the network segment specified by
this command. If the slave IP address of the interface is in the range of the
network segment specified by this command, this interface will not run OSPF
protocol.
Related command: ospf.
Example
To configure the interfaces whose master IP addresses are in the segment range of
10.110.36.0 to run the OSPF protocol, and to specify the number of the OSPF area
where these interfaces are located as 6, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW7700-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.6]network 10.110.36.0.0 0.0.0.255
nssa Syntax
nssa [ default-route-advertise ] [ no-import-route ] [ no-summary ]
undo nssa
View
OSPF Area view
Parameter
default-route-advertise Enter to import the default route to the NSSA area.
no-import-route Enter to block the import of the default route to the NSSA
area.
no-summary Enter to disable ABR from transmitting summary_net LSAs to the

NSSA area.
Description
Using the nssa command, you can configure the type of an OSPF area as an NSSA
area. Using the undo nssa command, you can cancel the function.
By default, NSSA area is not configured.

For all the routers connected to the NSSA area, the command nssa must be used
to configure the area as the NSSA attribute.
The default-route-advertise parameter is used to generate a default type-7

LSA. No matter whether there is route 0.0.0.0 in the routing table on an ABR,
type-7 LSA default route will always be generated. Only when there is route
0.0.0.0 in routing table on ASBR, will a type-7 LSA default route be generated.
On ASBR, the no-import-route parameter disables an external route that is

imported by OSPF with the import-route command from being advertised to the
NSSA area.
Example
To configure area 1as an NSSA area, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]nssa
ospf Syntax
ospf [ process-id [ router-id router-id ]]
undo ospf
View
System View
Parameter
process-id Enter the ID of the OSPF process, ranging from 1 to 65535. By
default, the process ID is 1. process-id is locally significant.
router-id Enter the router ID that is a 32-bit unsigned integer.
Description
Using the ospf command, you can enable the OSPF protocol.
Using the undo ospf command, you can disable the OSPF protocol. By default, the
system does not run the OSPF protocol.
After enabling the OSPF protocol, you can configure OSPF operations using the
commands described in the “OSPF Configuration Commands” section.
Related command: network.
Example
Enable the OSPF protocol.
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]
Enable the OSPF protocol with a process ID of 120.
[SW5500]router id 10.110.1.8
[SW5500]ospf 120
[SW5500-ospf-120]
ospf Syntax
authentication-mode ospf authentication-mode { simple password | md5 key_id key }
undo ospf authentication-mode { simple | md5 }
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameter
simple password Enter a password of no more than 8 characters.
key_id Enter the ID of the MD5 authentication key, in the range from 1 to 255.
key Enter the MD5 authentication key. If it is input in a plain text form, MD5 key
is a character string not exceeding 16 characters. And it will be displayed in a
cipher text form in a length of 24 characters when display
current-configuration command is executed. Inputting the MD5 key in a
cipher text form with 24 characters is also supported.
Description
Using the ospf authentication-mode command, you can configure the
authentication mode and key between adjacent routers.
Using the undo ospf authentication-mode command, you can cancel the set
authentication key. By default, the interface does not authenticate the OSPF
packets.
The passwords for the authentication keys of routers on the same network
segment must be identical. In addition, if you use this command with the
authentication-mode command, you can set the authentication type of an area
(see the example below).
Related command: authentication-mode.
Example
Area 1 is where the network segment 131.119.0.0 of Interface Vlan-interface 1 is
located. To set this area to support MD5 cipher text authentication, with an
authentication key identifier of 15 and an authentication key of 3Com, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]

[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]authentication-mode md5
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]quit
[SW5500-ospf-1]quit
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ospf authentication-mode md5 15 3Com
ospf cost Syntax

ospf cost value
undo ospf cost
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameter
value Enter the cost for running the OSPF protocol, in the range 1 to 65535.
Description
Using the ospf cost command, you can configure the cost of sending traffic from
each interface.
Using the undo ospf cost command, you can restore the default costs.
For the Switch 5500-EI, the default cost for running OSPF protocol of on a VLAN
interface is 10.
Example
To specify a cost of 33 when the interface vlan-interface 1 runs OSPF, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ospf cost 33
ospf dr-priority Syntax

ospf dr-priority value
undo ospf dr-priority
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameter
value Enter the interface priority for electing the "designated router", ranging
from 0 to 255. The default value is 1.

Description
Using the ospf dr-priority command, you can configure the priority for
electing the "designated router" on an interface. Using the undo ospf
dr-priority command, you can restore the default value.
The priority of the interface determines the qualification of the interface when the
"designated router" (DR) is elected. The interface with the higher priority will be
always be elected the DR. A priority of 0 will disallow the interface from
participating in a DR election.
Example
To set a priority of 8 for Vlan-interface 1, when electing the DR, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ospf dr-priority 8
ospf mib-binding Syntax

ospf mib-binding process-id
undo ospf mib-binding
View
System View
Parameter
process-id Enter the process ID of OSPF, ranging from 1 to 65535.
Description
Using the ospf mib-binding command, you can bind the MIB operation to the
specified OSPF process. Using the undo ospf mib-binding command, you can
restore the default settings.
When OSPF protocol enables the first process, it always binds MIB operation to
this process. You can use this command to bind MIB operation to another OSPF
process. Execute the undo ospf mib-binding command if you want to cancel the
setting. OSPF will automatically re-bind MIB operation to the first process that it
enables.
By default, MIB operation is bound to the first enabled OSPF process.
Example
Bind MIB operation to OSPF process 100.

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf mib-binding 100
Bind MIB operation to OSPF process 200.

[SW5500]ospf mib-binding 200

Cancel the binding of MIB operation.

[SW5500]undo ospf mib-binding
ospf mtu-enable Syntax

ospf mtu-enable
undo ospf mtu-enable
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the ospf mtu-enable command, you can enable the interface to write the
MTU value when sending DD packets.
Using the undo ospf mtu-enable command, you can restore the default. By
default, the MTU value is 0 when sending DD packets, that is the MTU value of the
interface is not written.
DD packets (Database Description Packet) are sent by the router to describe its
own LSDB when the router running OSPF protocol is synchronizing the database.
Example
To set interface Vlan-interface 3 to write the MTU value when sending DD packets,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface 3]ospf mtu-enable
ospf network-type Syntax

ospf network-type { broadcast | nbma | p2mp | p2p }
undo ospf network-type
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
broadcast Change the interface network type to broadcast.
nbma Change the interface network type to NBMA.
p2mp Change the interface network type to p2mp.
p2p Change the interface network type to point-to-point.

Description
Use the ospf network-type command to configure the network type of OSPF
interface.
Use the undo ospf network-type command to restore the default network type
of the OSPF interface.
OSPF divides networks into four types by link layer protocol:

■ Broadcast: If Ethernet or FDDI is adopted, OSPF defaults the network type to
broadcast.
■ Non-Broadcast Muli-access (nbma): If Frame Relay, ATM, HDLC or X.25 is
adopted, OSPF defaults the network type to NBMA.
■ Point-to-Multipoint (p2mp): OSPF will not default the network type of any link
layer protocol to p2mp. The general undertaking is to change a partially
connected NBMA network to p2mp network if the NBMA network is not
fully-meshed.
■ Point-to-point (p2p): If PPP, LAPB or POS is adopted, OSPF defaults the network
type to p2p.
NBMA means that a network is non-broadcast and multi-accessible. ATM is a

typical example. A user can configure the polling interval to specify the interval of
sending polling hello packets before the adjacency of the neighboring routers is
formed.
Configure the interface type to nonbroadcast on a broadcast network without

multi-access capability.
Configure the interface type to p2mp if not all the routers are directly accessible
on an NBMA network.
Change the interface type to p2p if the router has only one peer on the NBMA
network.
When the network type of an interface is NBMA or it is changed to NBMA

manually, the peer command must be used to configure the neighboring point.
Related command: ospf dr-priority.
Example
Set the interface Vlan-interface 1 to NBMA type.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ospf network-type nbma
ospf timer dead Syntax

ospf timer dead seconds
undo ospf timer dead
View
VLAN Interface View

Parameter
seconds Enter the amount of dead time allowed, in seconds, in the range 1 to
65535.
Description
Using the ospf timer dead command, you can configure the amount of dead
time allowed to OSPF neighbors, in seconds.
Using the undo ospf timer dead command, you can restore the default value.
By default, the dead time allowed to OSPF neighbors is 40 seconds.
If no Hello message is received from a neighbor in the specified time, the neighbor
is considered unresponsive or down. The timer dead value should be at least
four times that of the timer hello value. The timer dead value for routers on
the same network segment must be identical.
Related commands: ospf timer hello.
Example
To set the dead time to 80 seconds on interface Vlan-interface 1, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ospf timer dead 80
ospf timer hello Syntax

ospf timer hello seconds
undo ospf timer hello
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
seconds Enter the Hello interval time allowed, in seconds, in the range 1 to 255.
Description
Using the ospf timer hello command, you can configure the Hello interval time
allowed for an interface.
Using the undo ospf timer hello command, you can restore the interval to the
default value. By default, the amount of time allowed is 10 seconds for an
interface of p2p or broadcast type, and 30 seconds for an interface of nbma or
p2mp type.
Related command: ospf timer dead.
Example
To set a time interval of 20 seconds for transmitting Hello messages on the
interface Vlan-interface 1, enter the following:

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ospf timer hello 20
ospf timer poll Syntax

ospf timer poll seconds
undo ospf timer poll
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameter
seconds Enter the the poll Hello interval in seconds, in the range 1 to 65535. The
default value is 120 seconds.
Description
Using the ospf timer poll command, you can configure the Hello packet poll
interval.
Using the undo ospf timer poll command, you can restore the default poll
interval.
The Poll interval should be at least three times the Hello interval.
Example
To set the transmit poll Hello packet interval to 130 seconds for interface
Vlan-interface 2, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface2]ospf timer poll 130
ospf timer retransmit Syntax

ospf timer retransmit interval
undo ospf timer retransmit
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameter
interval Enter the interval allowed before LSA re-transmission. This time is set for
an interface, in seconds, in the range 1 to 65535. The default value is 5 seconds.
Description
Using the ospf timer retransmit command, you can configure the interval
before LSA re-transmission on an interface.

Using the undo ospf timer retransmit command, you can restore the default
interval value for LSA re-transmission on an interface.
When a router transmits a Link State Advertisement (LSA) to the peer, it waits for
the acknowledgement packet. If no acknowledgement is received from the
neighbor within the time you set using this command, the LSA is re-transmitted.
According to RFC2328, the LSA retransmit between adjacent routers should not
be set too short to avoid unexpected re-transmission.
Example
To set the retransmit interval between the interface Vlan-interface 1 and the
adjacent routers to 12 seconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ospf timer retransmit 12
ospf trans-delay Syntax

ospf trans-delay value
undo ospf trans-delay
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameter
value Enter the LSA transmission delay, in seconds, in the range 1 to 3600. By
default, the value is 1 second.
Description
Using the ospf trans-delay command, you can configure the LSA transmission
delay on an interface.
Using the undo ospf trans-delay command, you can restore the default value
of the LSA transmission delay.
LSA will age in the "link state database" (LSDB) of the router as time goes by (add
1 for every second), but it will not age during network transmission. Therefore, it is
necessary to add a period of time set by this command to the aging time of LSA
before transmitting it.
Example
To set the LSA transmission delay to three seconds on interface Vlan-interface 1,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface1]ospf trans-delay 3

peer Syntax
peer ip_address [ dr-priority dr_priority_number ]
undo peer ip_address
View
OSPF View
Parameter
ip_address Enter the IP address of the neighboring router.
dr_priority_number Enter the priority value that represents the corresponding

priority value of the network neighbor. The range is from 0 to 255. The default
value is 1.
Description
Using the peer command, you can configure the neighboring point if a router is
connected to a network of NBMA type. Using the undo peer command, you can
cancel the configured neighboring point.
Example
To configure the IP address of the neighboring router to 10.1.1.1, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]peer 10.1.1.1
preference Syntax
preference [ ase ] value
undo preference [ ase ]
View
OSPF View
Parameter
value Enter the OSPF protocol route preference, ranging from 1 to 255.
ase Enter to indicate the preference of an imported external route of the AS.
Description
Using the preference command, you can configure the OSPF protocol route
preference.
Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default value of the
OSPF protocol route. By default, the preference of an OSPF protocol internal route
is 10 and the preference of an external route is 150.

Because multiple dynamic routing protocols could be running on a router at any

one time, priority needs to be assigned to each protocol. Using this command, you
can set a default preference for each routing protocol. The protocol with the
higher preference has priority.
Example
To set the preference of an imported external route of the AS to 160, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]preference ase 160
reset ospf Syntax

reset ospf [ statistics ] { all | process-id }
View
User View
Parameter
all Enter to reset all OSPF processes
process-id Enter the process ID of OSPF, ranging from 1 to 65535. By default,

the process ID is 1.
statistics Enter to reset OSPF statistics.
Description
Using the reset ospf all command, you can reset the OSPF process, as follows:
■ Invalid LSAs are cleared immediately without waiting for LSA timeout.
■ If the Router ID changes, a new Router ID takes effect to execute the
command.
■ Re-elect DR and BDR.
■ OSPF configuration before the restart will not be lost.
After you enter the command, you are asked to confirm that the OSPF protocol
should be re-enabled.
Example
Reset all the OSPF processes:
<SW5500>reset ospf all
router id Syntax
router id router_id
undo router id

View
System View
Parameter
router_id Enter the router ID as a 32-bit unsigned integer.
Description
Using the router id command, you can configure the ID of a router running the
OSPF protocol.
Using the undo router id command, you can cancel the router ID that has been
set.
By default, if the LoopBack interface address exists, the system chooses the
LoopBack address with the greatest IP address value as the router ID; if no
LoopBack interface is configured, then the address of the physical interface with
the greatest IP address value will be the router ID.
The router ID is a 32-bit unsigned integer that uniquely identifies a router in an

OSPF system. You can specify the ID for a router. If a router ID isn’t specified, the
router automatically selects one of the configured IP address as the router ID. If an
IP address is not configured for any interface, the router ID must be configured in
OSPF view. Otherwise, OSPF protocol cannot be enabled.
When the router ID is configured manually, the IDs of any two routers cannot be
the same in the autonomous system. So, the IP address of one interface can be
selected as the router ID.
The modified router ID will not be valid unless OSPF is re-enabled.
Related command: ospf.
Example
To set the router ID to 10.1.1.3., enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]router id 10.1.1.3
silent-interface Syntax
silent-interface silent-interface_type silent-interface_number
undo silent-interface silent-interface_type silent-interface_number
View
OSPF View
Parameter
silent-interface_type Enter the interface type
silent-interface_number Enter the interface number.

Description
Using the silent-interface command, you can prevent an interface from
transmitting OSPF packets.
Using the undo silent-interface command, you can restore the default setting.
By default, the interface transmits OSPF packets.
You can use this command to stop the transmission of OSPF packets on an
interface. This prevents the router on some network from receiving the OSPF
routing information. On a Switch, this command can disable/enable the specified
VLAN interface to send OSPF packets.
Example
To stop interface Vlan-interface 2 from transmitting OSPF packets, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]silent-interface Vlan-interface 2
snmp-agent trap enable Syntax

ospf snmp-agent trap enable ospf [ process-id ] [ ifstatechange |
virifstatechange | nbrstatechange | virnbrstatechange | ifcfgerror |
virifcfgerror | ifauthfail | virifauthfail | ifrxbadpkt |
virifrxbadpkt | txretransmit | viriftxretransmit | originatelsa |
maxagelsa | lsdboverflow | lsdbapproachoverflow ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable ospf [ process-id ] [ ifstatechange |

virifstatechange | nbrstatechange | virnbrstatechange | ifcfgerror |
virifcfgerror | ifauthfail | virifauthfail | ifrxbadpkt |
virifrxbadpkt | txretransmit | viriftxretransmit | originatelsa |
maxagelsa | lsdboverflow | lsdbapproachoverflow ]
View
System View
Parameter
process-id Enter the process ID of OSPF. The command is applied to all current
OSPF processes if you do not specify a process ID.
ifstatechange, virifstatechange, nbrstatechange, virnbrstatechange,

ifcfgerror, virifcfgerror, ifauthfail, virifauthfail, ifrxbadpkt,
virifrxbadpkt, txretransmit, viriftxretransmit, originatelsa,
maxagelsa, lsdboverflow, lsdbapproachoverflow: Types of TRAP packets
that the switch produces in case of OSPF anomalies.
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap enable ospf command to enable the OSPF TRAP
function. Use the undo snmp-agent trap enable ospf command to disable the
OSPF TRAP function.

This command cannot be applied to the OSPF processes that are started after the
command is executed.
By default, the switch does not send TRAP packets in case of OSPF anomalies.
For detailed configuration of SNMP TRAP, see “Using System Management

Commands” on page 397.
Example
Enable the TRAP function for OSPF process 100.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent trap enable ospf 100
spf-schedule-interval Syntax
spf-schedule-interval interval
undo spf-schedule-interval
View
OSPF View
Parameter
interval Enter the SPF route calculation interval for OSPF, in seconds, in the range
1 to 10. The default value is 5 seconds.
Description
Using the spf-schedule-interval command, you can configure the route
calculation interval of OSPF.
Using the undo spf-schedule-interval command, you can restore the default
setting.
According to the Link State Database (LSDB), the router running OSPF can
calculate the shortest path tree, with itself as the root, and determine the next hop
to the destination network according to the shortest path tree. By adjusting the
SPF calculation interval, you can decrease the frequency of network changes and
unnecessary consumption of bandwidth and router resources.
Example
To set the OSPF route calculation interval of the Switch 5500 to 6 seconds, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf]spf-schedule-interval 6
stub Syntax
stub [ no-summary ]
undo stub

View
OSPF Area view
Parameter
no-summary Enter to prevent the transmission of Summary LSAs to the Stub area.
Description
Using the stub command, you can configure the type of an OSPF area as “stub”.
Using the undo stub command, you can cancel the setting. By default, no OSPF
areas are set as Stub areas.
If the router is an ABR, it will send a default route to the connected stub area.
Using the default-cost command, you can configure the default route cost.
Related commands:default-cost.
Example
To set the type of OSPF area 1 to Stub, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf]area 1
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1]stub
vlink-peer Syntax
vlink-peer router_id [ hello seconds | retransmit seconds |
trans-delay seconds | dead seconds | simple password | md5 keyid key
]*
undo vlink-peer router-id
View
OSPF Area view
Parameter
router_id Enter the Router ID of a virtual link neighbor.
hello seconds Enter the interval for the transmission of hello packets, in the
range 1 to 8192 seconds. This must equal the hello seconds value of the router
virtually linked to the interface. The default value is 10 seconds.
retransmit seconds Enter the interval for the retransmission of LSA packets on
an interface, in the range 1 to 8192 seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.
trans-delay seconds Enter the delay interval for transmitting LSA packets on an
interface, in the range 1 to 8192 seconds. The default value is 1 second.
dead seconds Enter the dead time interval, in the range 1 to 8192 seconds. This
value must equal the dead time of the virtually linked router, and must be at least
four times that of the hello interval. The default value is 40 seconds.

simple password Enter the simple text authentication key of the interface, in
eight characters or less. This must equal the authentication key of the virtually
linked neighbor.
md5 keyid Enter the MD5 authentication key ID, in the range 1 to 255. This must
be equal to the authentication key ID of the virtually linked peer.
key : Specify the MD5 authentication key. If it is input in a plain text form, the key
is a character string not exceeding 16 characters. It will be displayed in a cipher
text form in a length of 24 characters when display current-configuration
command is executed. Inputting the MD5 key in a cipher text form with 24
characters is also supported.
Description
Using the vlink-peer command, you can create and configure a virtual link.
Using the undo vlink-peer command, you can cancel an existing virtual link.
RFC2328 states that an OSPF area must be connected to the backbone network.
You can use vlink-peer command to set up this connectivity if an area does not
have a direct connection to the backbone area. A virtual link can also be used to
connect a discontiquous backbone. Virtual link can be regarded as a common
interface that uses OSPF so that you can easily understand how to configure
parameters such as hello, retransmit, and trans-delay.
When configuring virtual link authentication, use the authentication-mode

command to set the authentication type to MD5 cipher text or plain text on the
backbone network.
Related commands: authentication-mode, display ospf.
Example
To create a virtual link to 10.110.0.3, and use the MD5 cipher authentication
mode, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ospf
[SW5500-ospf-1]area 10.0.0.0
[SW5500-ospf-1-area-10.0.0.0]vlink-peer 10.110.0.3 md5 3 345
IP Routing Policy This section describes the commands you can use to configure IP Routing Policy.
Configuration These commands operate across all routing protocols.
Commands
When the Switch 5500 runs a routing protocol, it is able to perform the functions
of a router. The term router in this section can refer either to a physical router or to
the Switch 5500 running a routing protocol.
apply cost Syntax

apply cost value
undo apply cost

View
Route Policy View
Parameter
value Enter the route cost value of route information.
Description
Use the apply cost command to configure the route cost value of route
information. This command is one of the apply sub-statements of the
Route-policy attribute set.
Use the undo apply cost command to cancel the apply sub-statement.
Related commands: if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix,

if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply
ip next-hop, apply local-preference, apply origin and apply tag.
Example
Define one apply sub-statement. When it is used for setting route information
attribute, it sets the route metric value of route information to 120.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]route-policy permit node 1
% New sequence of this list
[SW5500-route-policy]apply cost 120
apply tag Syntax

apply tag value
undo apply tag
View
Route Policy view
Parameter
value Enter the tag value of route information.
Description
Use the apply tag command to configure to set the tag area of OSPF route
information. This command is one of the apply sub-statements of the
Route-policy attribute set.
Use the undo apply tag command to cancel the apply sub-statement.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix,

if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply
ip next-hop, apply local-preference, apply cost and apply origin.
Example
Define one apply sub-statement. When it is used for setting route information
attribute, it sets the tag area of route information to 100.

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-route-policy]apply tag 100
display ip ip-prefix Syntax

display ip ip-prefix [ ip_prefix_name ]
View
All Views
Parameter
ip_prefix_name Enter displayed address prefix list name.
Description
Use the display ip ip-prefix command to view the address prefix list.
Related command: ip ip-prefix.
Example
Display the information of the address prefix list named to p1.
<SW5500>display ip ip-prefix p1
name index conditions ip-prefix / mask GE LE
p1 10 permit 10.1.0.0/16 17 18
Table 39 Output Description of the display ip-ip prefix Command
Field Description
name Name of ip-prefix
index Internal sequence number of ip-prefix
conditions Mode: permit or deny
ip-prefix Address and network segment length of ip-prefix
GE Greater-equal value of ip-prefix network segment length
LE Less-equal value of ip-prefix network segment length
display route-policy Syntax

display route-policy [ route_policy_name ]
View
All Views
Parameter
route_policy_name Specify displayed Route-policy name.
Description
Use the display route-policy command to view the configured Route-policy
Related command: route-policy.

Example
Display the information of Route-policy named as policy1.
<SW5500>display route-policy policy1
Route-policy : policy1
Permit 10 : if-match (prefixlist) p1
apply cost 100
matched : 0 denied : 0
Table 40 Output Description of the display route-policy Command
Field Description
Route-policy Name of ip-prefix
Permit 10 Information of the route-policy with mode as permit and node as 10:
■ if-match (prefixlist) p1 — The configured if-match clause
■ apply cost 100 — Apply routing cost 100 to the routes matching the
conditions defined by if-match clause
■ matched — Number of routes matchng the conditions set by if-match
clause
■ denied — Number of routes not matching the conditions set by if-match
clause

filter-policy { acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name } export [
protocol ]
undo filter-policy { acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name } export

[ protocol ]
View
Routing Protocol view
Parameter
acl_number Enter the number of the access control list used for matching the
destination address field of the routing information.
ip_prefix_name Enter the address prefix list used for matching the routing
information destination address field.
protocol Enter the routing information of which kind of route protocol to be

filtered.
Description
Use the filter-policy export command to configure to set the filtering
conditions of the routing information advertised by a certain type of routing
protocols.
Use the undo filter-policy export command to cancel the filtering conditions
set.
By default, the advertised routing information is not filtered.

It may be necessary that only the routing information that meets special conditions
can be advertised. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the filtering
conditions for the advertised routing information. Only the routing information
passing the filter can be advertised.
Related command: filter-policy import.
Example
Define the filtering rules for advertising the routing information of RIP. Only the
routing information passing the filtering of address prefix list p1 will be advertised
by RIP.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]filter-policy ip-prefix p1 export

filter-policy gateway ip_prefix_name import
undo filter-policy gateway ip_prefix_name import
filter-policy { acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name } import
undo filter-policy { acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name } import
View
Routing Protocol view
Parameter
acl_number Enter the access control list number used for matching the
destination address field of the routing information.
ip-prefix ip_prefix_name Enter the prefix address list name. Its matching
object is the destination address field of the routing information.
gateway ip_prefix_name Enter the prefix address list name of the neighbor
router address. Its matching object is the routing information advertised by the
specified neighbor router.
Description
Use the filter-policy gateway import command to filter the received routing
information advertised by a specified router.
Use the undo filter-policy gateway import command to cancel the setting of
the filtering condition.
Use the filter-policy import command to set the condition for filtering the
Use the undo filter-policy import command to cancel the setting of filter
condition
By default, the received routing information is not filtered.

It may be necessary that only the routing information that meets special conditions
can be received. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the filtering
conditions for the received routing information. Only the routing information
passing the filtration can be received.
Related command: filter-policy export.
Example
Define the filtering rule for receiving routing information of RIP. Only the routing
information filtered through the address prefix list p1 can be received by RIP.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rip
[SW5500-rip]filter-policy ip-prefix p1 import
if-match { acl | ip-prefix } Syntax

if-match { acl acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name }
undo if-match [ acl | ip-prefix ]
View
Route Policy view
Parameter
acl_number Enter the number of the access control list used for filtration
ip_prefix_name Enter the prefix address list used for filtration
Description
Use the if-match { acl | ip-prefix } command to configure the IP address
range to match the Route-policy.
Use the undo if-match { acl | ip-prefix } command to cancel the setting of
the match rule.
Filtration is performed by quoting an ACL or a prefix address list.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match ip next-hop, if-match

cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply cost, apply ip next-hop, apply
cost, apply local-preference, apply origin and apply tag.
Example
Define one if-match sub-statement. When the sub-statement is used for filtering
route information, the route information filtered by the route destination address
through address prefix list p1 can pass the if-match sub-statement.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-route-policy]if-match ip-prefix p1

if-match cost Syntax

if-match cost value
undo if-match cost
View
Route Policy view
Parameter
value Specify the required route metric value, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.
Description
Use the if-match cost command to configure one of the match rules of
route-policy to match the cost of the routing information.
Use the undo if-match cost command to cancel the configuration of the match
rule.
By default, no match sub-statement is defined.

if-match ip next-hop, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop,
apply local-preference, apply cost, apply origin and apply tag.
Example
A match sub-statement is defined, which allows the routing information with
routing cost 8 to pass this match sub-statement.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-route-policy]if-match cost 8
if-match interface Syntax

if-match interface { interface_name | interface_type
interface_number }
undo if-match interface
View
Route Policy view
Parameter
interface_type Enter interface type.
interface_number Enter interface number.
interface_name Enter interface name.
Description
Use the if-match interface command to match the route whose next hop is the
designated interface.

Use the undo if-match interface command to cancel the setting of matching
condition.
By default, no match sub-statement is defined.
Related command: if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip

next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop,
apply cost, apply local-preference, apply origin and apply tag.
Example
Define one match sub-statement to match the route whose next hop interface is
Vlan-interface 1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-route-policy]if-match interface Vlan-interface 1
if-match ip next-hop Syntax

if-match ip next-hop { acl acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name }
undo if-match ip next-hop [ ip-prefix ]
View
Route Policy view
Parameter
acl_number Enter the number of the access control list used for filtration. The
range is 1 to 99.
ip_prefix_name Enter the name of the prefix address list used for filtration.
Description
Use the if-match ip next-hop command to configure one of the match rules of
route-policy on the next hop address of the routing information.
Use the undo if-match ip next-hop command to cancel the setting of the ACL
matching condition. Use the undo if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix
command to cancel the setting of the address prefix list matching condition.
Filtration is performed by quoting an ACL or a address prefix list.

if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply
cost, apply local-preference, apply origin and apply tag.
Example
Define a match sub-statement. It permits the routing information, whose route
next hop address passes the filtration of the prefix address list p1, to pass this
match sub-statement.
<SW5500>system-view


[SW5500-route-policy]if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix p1
if-match tag Syntax

if-match tag value
undo if-match tag
View
Route Policy view
Parameter
value Enter the value in tag field of OSPF route information.
Description
Use the if-match tag command to match the tag field of OSPF route
information.
Use the undo if-match tag command to cancel the existing matching rules.

if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, route-policy, apply ip next-hop,
apply cost, apply local-preference, apply origin and apply tag.
Example
Define one match sub-statement and enable the OSPF route information whose
value of tag is 8 to pass the match sub-statement.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-route-policy]if-match tag 8
ip ip-prefix Syntax
ip ip-prefix ip_prefix_name [ index index_number ] { permit | deny }
network len [ greater-equal greater_equal | less-equal less_equal ]
undo ip ip-prefix ip_prefix_name [ index index_number | permit | deny

]
View
System View
Parameter
ip_prefix_name Enter the specified address prefix list name. It identifies one
address prefix list uniquely.
index_number Identify an item in the prefix address list. The item with smaller
index-number will be tested first.

permit Enter to specify the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as
permit mode.
deny Enter to specify the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as
deny mode.
network Enter the IP address prefix range (IP address). If it is 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP
addresses are matched.
len Enter the IP address prefix range (mask length). If it is 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP
addresses are matched.
greater_equal, less_equal The address prefix range [greater-equal, less-equal]

to be matched after the address prefix network len has been matched. The
meaning of greater-equal is "larger than or equal to" , and the meaning of
less-equal is "less than or equal to". The range is len <= greater-equal <=
less-equal <= 32. When only greater-equal is used, it denotes the prefix range
[greater-equal, 32]. When only less-equal is used, it denotes the prefix range
[len, less-equal].
Description
Use the ip ip-prefix command to configure an address prefix list or one of its
items.
Use the undo ip ip-prefix command to delete an address prefix list or one of its
items.
By default, there’s no address prefix list.
The address prefix list is used for IP address filtering. An address prefix list may
contain several items, and each item specifies one address prefix range. The
inter-item filtering relation is "OR", i.e. passing an item means passing the filtering
of this address prefix list. Not passing the filtering of any item means not passing
the filtration of this prefix address list.
The address prefix range may contain two parts, which are determined by len and
[greater-equal, less-equal] respectively. If the prefix ranges of these two parts
are both specified, the IP to be filtered must match the prefix ranges of these two
parts.
If you specify network len as 0.0.0.0 0, it only matches the default route.
Example
The prefix address list of this address indicates to match the bits 1 to 8 and the bits
17 to 18 for filtering the IP address with the bits 1 to 8 and the bits 17 to 18 of the
specified IP network segment 10.0.192.0.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ip ip-prefix p1 permit 10.0.192.0 8 greater-equal 17
less-equal 18
route-policy Syntax
route-policy route_policy_name { permit | deny } node { node_number }

undo route-policy route_policy_name [ permit | deny | node

node_number ]
View
System view
Parameter
route_policy_name Enter the Route-policy name to identify one Route-policy
uniquely.
permit Enter to specify the match mode of the defined Route-policy node as
permit mode.
deny Enter to specify the match mode of the defined Route-policy node as deny
mode.
node Enter the node of the route policy.
node_number Enter the index of the node in the route-policy. When this
route-policy is used for routing information filtration, the node with smaller
node-number will be tested first.
Description
Use the route-policy command to create and enter the Route-policy view.
Use the undo route-policy command to delete the established Route-policy.
By default, no Route-policy is defined.
The route-policy command is used for route information filtration or route

policy. One Route-policy comprises some nodes and each node comprises some
match and apply sub-statements. The match sub-statement defines the match
rules of this node and the apply sub-statement defines the actions after passing
the filtration of this node. The filtering relationship between the match
sub-statements of the node is “and”, that is, all match sub-statements that meet
the node. The filtering relation between Route-policy nodes is "OR", i.e. passing
the filtering of one node means passing the filtering of this Route-policy. If the
information does not pass the filtration of any nodes, it cannot pass the filtration
of this Route-policy.

if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, apply ip next-hop,
apply local-preference, apply cost apply origin and apply tag.
Example
Configured one Route-policy policy1, whose node number is 10 and if-match
mode is permit, and enter Route policy view.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]route-policy policy permit node 10
[SW5500-route-policy]

Route Capacity This section describes the commands you can use to configure route capacity on
Configuration the Switch.
Commands
display memory Syntax

display memory [ unit unit-id ]
Mode
Any View
Parameter
unit-id Enter the unit ID.
Description
Use the display memory command to view the memory setting.
Example
To display the current memory setting, enter the following:
<SW5500> display memory
Unit 1
System Available Memory(bytes): 92412672
System Used Memory(bytes): 25011700
Used Rate: 27%
The displayed information is defined in Table 41.

Table 41 Output Description of the display memory Command
Item Description
Unit 1 Display the memory information of unit 1.
System Total Memory(bytes) The total number of the Switch memory in bytes.
Total Used Memory(bytes) The total number of the used Switch memory in bytes.
Used Rate The used rate of the Switch memory.
display memory limit Syntax

display memory limit
Mode
All Views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display memory limit command to display the memory setting and
state information related to the Ethernet switch capacity, including available
memory and state information about connections, such as times for disconnecting
connections, times for reestablishing connections, and the current state of the
system.

Example
Display the current memory setting and state information.
<SW5500>display memory limit
Current memory limit configuration information:
system memory safety: 2 (MBytes)
system memory limit: 1 (MBytes)
auto-establish enabled
Free Memory: 67397036 (Bytes)
The state information about connection:

The times of disconnect: 0
The times of reconnect: 0
The current state: Normal
The displayed information is defined in Table 42.
Table 42 Output Description of the display memory limit Command
Item Description
system memory safety The safety value of the Switch memory
system memory limit The lower limit of the Switch memory
auto-establish enabled The system allows recovering the connection automatically. (If
the automatic recover is disabled, auto-establish
disable will be displayed.)
Free Memory: 17781708 The size of the current idle memory is 17781708 bytes, that is,
(Byte) 17,782Mbytes.
The times of disconnect: 0 The times of the connection disconnecting of the Switch is 0.
The times of reconnect: 0 The times of the connection reestablishment of the Switch is 0.
The current state: Normal The current state is normal. If entering the emergent state, the
display will read Exigence.
memory auto-establish Syntax

disable memory auto-establish disable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the memory auto-establish disable command to disable the routing
protocol connection that is forcibly disconnected to recover automatically when
the idle memory of the Ethernet switch reaches this value. Thus, connections of all
the routing protocols will not recover when the idle memory of the Ethernet
switch recovers to a safety value. In this case, you need to restart the routing
protocol to recover the connections.
By default, when the idle memory of the Ethernet switch recovers to a safety
value, connections of all the routing protocols will always recover (when the idle

memory of the Ethernet switch reduces to a lower limit, the connection will be
disconnected forcibly).
Related commands: memory auto-establish enable, memory { safety |

limit }, display memory limit.
Example
Disable memory resume of the current Ethernet switch and recover connections of
all the protocols automatically.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]memory auto-establish disable
memory auto-establish Syntax

enable memory auto-establish enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the memory auto-establish enable command to allow the routing protocol
connection that is forcibly disconnected to recover automatically when the idle
memory of the Switch reaches this value.
By default, when the idle memory of the Switch recovers to a safety value,
connections of all the routing protocols will always recover (when the idle memory
of the Ethernet switch reduces to a lower limit, the connection will be
disconnected forcibly).
Related commands: memory auto-establish disable, memory { safety |

limit }, display memory limit.
Example
Enable memory resume of the current Switch and recover connections of all the
protocols automatically.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]memory auto-establish enable
memory { safety | limit } Syntax

memory { safety safety_value | limit limit_value }*
undo memory [ safety | limit ]
View
System View

Parameter
safety safety_value Enter the safety value of the Switch idle memory, in
Mbytes. Its value range depends on the idle memory of the active Switch. The
default value is 4Mbytes.
limit limit_value Enter the lower limit of the Switch idle memory, in Mbytes. Its
value range depends on the idle memory of the active Switch. The default value is
2Mbytes.
Description
Use the memory limit limit_value command to configure the lower limit of the
Switch idle memory. When the idle memory of the Switch is less than this limit, all
the routing protocol connections will be disconnected forcibly. The limit_value
in the command must be less than the current idle memory safety value or the
configuration will fail.
Use the memory safety safety_value command to configure the safety value of
the Switch idle memory. If you use the memory auto-establish enable
command (the default configuration), the routing protocol connection that is
forcibly disconnected will automatically recover when the idle memory of the
Switch reaches this value. The safety_value in the command must be more than
the current idle memory lower limit or the configuration will fail.
Use the memory safety safety_value limit limit_value command to change

both of the safety value and lower limit of the Switch idle memory. The
safety_value must be more than the limit_value or the configuration will fail.
Use the memory default command to configure the safety value and the lower
limit of the Switch idle memory to the default configuration.
Related commands: memory auto-establish disable, memory auto-establish

enable, display memory limit.
Example
Set the lower limit of the Switch idle memory to 1 Mbytes and the safety value to
3 Mbytes.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]memory safety 3 limit 1
%Jun 6 04:18:49:533 2000 SW5500 RM/5/RTLOG:- 1 -Change the system

memory limit (1->1)/safety(2->3) successfully

7 USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL
COMMANDS
IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands

■ display igmp-snooping configuration
■ display igmp-snooping group
■ display igmp-snooping statistics
■ igmp-snooping
■ igmp-snooping host-aging-time
■ igmp-snooping max-response-time
■ igmp-snooping router-aging-time
■ reset igmp-snooping statistics
Multicast Common Configuration Commands

■ debugging multicast forwarding
■ debugging multicast kernel-routing
■ debugging multicast status-forwarding
■ display multicast forwarding-table
■ display multicast routing-table
■ mtracert
■ multicast route-limit
■ multicast routing-enable
■ reset multicast forwarding-table
■ reset multicast routing-table
IGMP Configuration Commands

■ debugging igmp
■ display igmp group
■ display igmp interface
■ igmp enable
■ igmp group-limit
■ igmp group-policy
■ igmp group-policy vlan
■ igmp host-join

236 CHAPTER 7: USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL COMMANDS
■ igmp host-join port

■ igmp host-join vlan
■ igmp lastmember- queryinterval
■ igmp max-response-time
■ igmp robust-count
■ igmp timer other-querier-present
■ igmp timer query
■ igmp version
■ reset igmp group
PIM Configuration Commands

■ bsr-policy
■ c-bsr
■ c-rp
■ crp-policy
■ debugging pim common
■ debugging pim dm
■ debugging pim sm
■ display pim bsr-info
■ display pim interface
■ display pim neighbor
■ display pim routing-table
■ display pim rp-info
■ pim
■ pim bsr-boundary
■ pim dm
■ pim neighbor-limit
■ pim neighbor-policy
■ pim sm
■ pim timer hello
■ register-policy
■ reset pim neighbor
■ reset pim routing-table
■ source-policy
■ static-rp

IGMP Snooping This section describes how to use the Internet Group Management Protocol
Configuration (IGMP) configuration commands on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
display igmp-snooping Syntax

configuration display igmp-snooping configuration
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display igmp-snooping configuration command to view the IGMP
Snooping configuration information.
This command is used to display the IGMP Snooping configuration information of

the Switch. The information displayed includes whether IGMP Snooping is
enabled, router port timeout, maximum response timeout of a query and the
member port timeout.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
Example
Display the IGMP Snooping configuration information of the Switch.
<SW5500>display igmp-snooping configuration
Enable IGMP-Snooping.
The router port timeout is 105 second(s).

The max response timeout is 10 second(s).
The member port timeout is 260 second(s).
The information above tells us that: IGMP Snooping is enabled; the router port
timer is set to be 105 seconds; the max response timer is set to be 10 seconds; the
aging timer of multicast group member is set to be 260 seconds.

group display igmp-snooping group [ vlan vlan_id ]
View
All views
Parameter
vlan vlan_id: Specifies the VLAN where the multicast group to be viewed is
located. When the parameter is omitted, the command will display the
information about all the multicast groups on the VLAN.

Description
Use the display igmp-snooping group command to view the IP multicast groups
and MAC multicast groups under VLAN.
This command displays the IP multicast group and MAC multicast group
information of a VLAN or all the VLAN where the Ethernet Switch is located. It
displays the information such as VLAN ID, router port, IP multicast group address,
member ports in the IP multicast group, MAC multicast group, MAC multicast
group address, and the member ports in the MAC multicast group.
Example
Display the multicast group information about VLAN2.
<SW5500>display igmp-snooping group vlan 2
***************Multicast group table***************
Vlan(id):2.
Router port(s):GigabitEthernet1/0/1
IP group(s):the following ip group(s) match to one mac group.
IP group address:230.45.45.1
Member port(s):GigabitEthernet1/0/2
MAC group(s):
MAC group address:01-00-5e-2d-2d-01
Member port(s):GigabitEthernet1/0/2
The display above shows that:

■ There is a multicast group in VLAN 2;
■ The router port is GigabitEthernet 1/0/1;
■ The address of the multicast group is 230.45.45.1;
■ The member of the IP multicast group is GigabitEthernet 1/0/2;
■ MAC multicast group is 0100-5e2d-2d01;
■ The member of the MAC multicast group is GigabitEthernet 1/0/2

statistics display igmp-snooping statistics
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display igmp-snooping statistics command to view the statistics
information on IGMP Snooping.
This command displays the statistics information about IGMP Snooping of the
Ethernet Switch. It displays the information such as number of received general
IGMP query packets, received IGMP specific query packets, received IGMP Version
1 and Version 2 report packets, received IGMP leave packets and error packets,
and sent IGMP specific query packets.

Example
Display statistics information about IGMP Snooping.
<SW5500>display igmp-snooping statistics
Received IGMP general query packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP specific query packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP V1 report packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP V2 report packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP leave packet(s) number:0.
Received error IGMP packet(s) number:0.
Sent IGMP specific query packet(s) number:0.
igmp-snooping Syntax
igmp-snooping { enable | disable }
View
System View
Parameter
enable: Enable IGMP Snooping.
disable: Disables IGMP Snooping; By default, the Switch disables IGMP Snooping
feature.
Description
Use the igmp-snooping enable command to enable IGMP Snooping.
Use the igmp-snooping disable command to restore the default setting.
Although layer 2 and layer 3 multicast protocols can run together, they cannot run
on the same VLAN or its corresponding VLAN interface at the same time. For
example, if the layer 2 multicast protocol is enabled on a VLAN, then the layer 3
multicast protocol cannot operate on this VLAN, and vice versa.
IGMP Snooping functions only when it is enabled both in System View and in
VLAN View. You must first enable IGMP Snooping globally in System View and
then the VLAN View before configuring it. Otherwise, the IGMP Snooping fails to
operate.
Example
Enable IGMP Snooping on VLAN 100.
<SW5500>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[SW5500]igmp-snooping enable
[SW5500]vlan 100
[SW5500-vlan100]igmp-snooping enable
host-aging-time igmp-snooping host-aging-time seconds

undo igmp-snooping host-aging-time
View
System View
Parameter
seconds: Specifies the port aging time of the multicast group member, ranging
from 200 to 1000 and measured in seconds. The default is 260.
Description
Use the igmp-snooping host-aging-time command to configure the port aging
time of the multicast group members.
Use the undo igmp-snooping host-aging-time command to restore the default

value.
This command sets the aging time of the multicast group member so that the
refresh frequency can be controlled. When the group members change frequently,
the aging time should be comparatively short, and vice versa.
Example
Set the aging time to 300 seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]igmp-snooping host-aging-time 300
max-response-time igmp-snooping max-response-time seconds
undo igmp-snooping max-response-time
View
System View
Parameter
seconds: Maximum response time for a query ranging from 1 to 25 and
measured in seconds. The default is 10.
Description
Use the igmp-snooping max-response-time command to configure the
maximum response time for a query.
Use the undo igmp-snooping max-response-time command to restore the

default value.
The set maximum response time decides the time limit for the Switch to respond
to IGMP Snooping general query packets.
Related commands: igmp-snooping, igmp-snooping router-aging-time.

Example
Configure to respond to the IGMP Snooping packet within 20s.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]igmp-snooping max-response-time 20
router-aging-time igmp-snooping router-aging-time seconds
undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time
View
System View
Parameter
seconds: Specifies the router port aging time, ranging from 1 to 1000 measured
in seconds. The default is 105.
Description
Use the igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to configure the router
port aging time of IGMP Snooping.
Use the undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to restore the

default value.
The port here refers to the Switch port connected to the router. The Layer-2
Ethernet Switch receives general query packets from the router via this port. The
timer should be set to about 2.5 times of the general query period of the router.
Related commands: igmp-snooping, igmp-snooping max-response-time.
Example
Set the aging time of the IGMP Snooping router port to 500 seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]igmp-snooping router-aging-time 500
reset igmp-snooping Syntax

statistics reset igmp-snooping statistics
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset igmp-snooping statistics command to reset the IGMP
Snooping statistics information.

Example
Clear IGMP Snooping statistics information.
<SW5500>reset igmp-snooping statistics
Multicast Common This section describes how to use the Multicast Common configuration commands
Configuration on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
debugging multicast Syntax

forwarding debugging multicast forwarding
undo debugging multicast forwarding
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging multicast forwarding to enable multicast packet
forwarding debugging functions.
Use the undo debugging multicast forwarding to disable the debugging

functions.
By default, the debugging function is disabled.
Example
Enable multicast packet forwarding debugging functions.
<SW5500>debugging multicast forwarding

kernel-routing debugging multicast kernel-routing
undo debugging multicast kernel-routing
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging multicast kernel-routing to enable multicast kernel
routing debugging functions.

Use the undo debugging multicast kernel-routing to disable the debugging

functions.
Example
Enable multicast kernel routing debugging functions.
<SW5500>debugging multicast kernel-routing

status-forwarding debugging multicast status-forwarding
undo debugging multicast status-forwarding
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging multicast status-forwarding to enable multicast
forwarding status debugging functions.
Use the undo debugging multicast status-forwarding to disable the

debugging functions.
Example
Enable multicast forwarding status debugging functions.
<SW5500>debugging multicast status-forwarding
display multicast Syntax

forwarding-table display multicast forwarding-table [ group-address [ mask { mask |
mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] |
incoming-interface { interface-type interface-number | register }]*
View
Any View
Parameter
group-address: Multicast group address, used to specify a multicast group,
ranging from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
source-address: Unicast IP address of the multicast source.
incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the multicast forwarding table.
register: Register interface of PIM-SM.
Description
Use the display multicast forwarding-table to view the information of IP
multicast forwarding table.

Related command: display multicast routing-table.
Example
View the multicast forwarding table information.
<SW5500>display multicast forwarding-table
Multicast Forwarding Cache Table
Total 2 entries
00001. (4.4.4.4, 224.2.254.84), iif Vlan-interface1, 0 oifs

Matched 240 pkts(11288 bytes), Wrong If 0 pkts
Forwarded 232 pkts(11288 bytes)
00002. (4.4.4.4, 224.2.149.17), iif Vlan-interface1, 1 oifs

List of outgoing interface:
01: Vlan-interface2
Matched 236 pkts(3267 bytes), Wrong If 0 pkts
Forwarded 233 pkts(3267 bytes)
Matched 2 entries
Table 43 Information from the display multicast forwarding-table command

Field Description
Multicast Forwarding Cache Table Multicast forwarding cache table
Total 2 entries Total number of entries
00002 Sequence number of entries
(4.4.4.4, 224.2.149.17) (s,g) Source IP Address, multicast group
If Vlan-interface 1, 1oifs Multicast forwarding cache table has an incoming
interface Vlan-interface 1 and one outgoing interface
List of outgoing interface: List of outgoing interface has an outgoing interface
01: Vlan-interface2 Vlan-interface 2
Matched 236 pks (3267 bytes), 236 matched packets (3267 bytes); 0 matched packets
Wrong if 0 pkts means wrong; 233 forwarded packets (3267 bytes)
Forwarded 233 pkts (3267 bytes)
Matched 2 entries 2 matched entries
display multicast Syntax

routing-table display multicast routing-table [ group-address [ mask { mask |
mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] |
incoming-interface { interface-type interface-number | register } ]*
View
All views
Parameter
group-address: Multicast group address, used to specify a multicast group and
display the corresponding routing table information of the group. The value
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
source-address: Unicast IP address of the multicast source.
incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the multicast route entry.

register: Register interface of PIM-SM.
Description
Use the display multicast routing-table to view the information of IP
multicast routing table.
This command displays the multicast routing table information, while the display
multicast forwarding-table command displays the multicast forwarding table
information.
Example
View the routing table information corresponding to multicast group 225.1.1.1 in
the multicast routing table.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]display multicast routing-table 225.1.1.1
Multicast Routing Table
Total 3 entries
(4.4.4.4, 224.2.149.17)
Uptime: 00:15:16, Timeout in 272 sec
Upstream interface: Vlan-interface1(4.4.4.6)
Downstream interface list:
Vlan-interface2(2.2.2.4), Protocol 0x1: IGMP
(4.4.4.4, 224.2.254.84)
Downstream interface list: NULL
(4.4.4.4, 239.255.2.2)
Matched 3 entries
Table 44 Information from the display multicast routing-table Command

Field Description
Multicast Routing Table Multicast routing table
Total 3 entries Total number of entries
(4.4.4.4, 224.2.149.17) (s,g)
Uptime: 00:15:16, Timeout in 272 sec Multicast routing entry has been active 15
min. and 16 sec.
Upstream interface: Upstream interface vlan-interface 1 (IP

Vlan-interface1 (4.4.4.6) address is 4.4.4.6).
Downstream interface: Downstream interface list: has an interface
Vlan-interface2 (2.2.2.4), Protocol 0x1:IGMP Vlan-interface 2 (IP address is 2.2.2.4). The
downstream interface is configured with
IGMP groups.
Matched 3 entries 3 matched entries

mtracert Syntax
mtracert { source-address } [ last-hop-address ] [ group-address ]
View
Any view
Parameter
source-address: Address of the multicast source.
last-hop-address: Unicast address, which is the starting address of path tracing.

This address must be an interface address of a hop router. By default, it is a
physical interface address of the local router.
group-address: Address of multicast group. By default, the value is 0.0.0.0.
Description
Using the mtracert command, you can trace the network path from the multicast
source to the destination receiver along Multicast Distribution Tree, according to
either the multicast kernel routing table or RPF rule to the source. This command
can help to locate the faults, such as information loss and configuration error.
The trace mode to the group address of 0.0.0.0 is called weak trace mode.
Example
Trace the path reversely from the local hop router 18.110.0.1 to the multicast
source 10.10.1.2 in weak trace mode.
<SW5500>mtracert 10.10.1.2
Type Ctrl+C to abort
Mtrace from 10.10.1.2 to 18.110.0.1 via RPF
Querying full reverse path...
-1 18.110.0.1
Incoming Interface Address: 18.110.0.1
Previous-Hop Router Address: 18.110.0.2
Input packet count on incoming interface: 0
Output packet count on outgoing interface: 0
Total number of packets for this source-group pair: 0
Protocol: PIM
Forwarding TTL: 0
Forwarding Code: No error
-2 18.110.0.2
Protocol: PIM
Forwarding TTL: 0
-3 11.110.0.4


Protocol: PIM
Forwarding TTL: 0
multicast route-limit Syntax

multicast route-limit limit
undo multicast route-limit
View
System View
Parameter
limit: Limits the capacity of the multicast routing table, in the range of 0 to 256.
Description
Use the multicast route-limit command to limit the capacity of multicast
routing table. When the preset capacity is exceeded, the router will discard new (S,
G) protocol and data packets.
Use the undo multicast route-limit command to restore the limit to the
default value.
By default, the capacity of multicast routing table is set to 256.
If the existing route entries exceed the capacity value you configured using this
command, the system will not delete the existing entries, but prompts the user
with the following message: Existing route entries exceed the configured
capacity value.
The new configuration overwrites the old one if you run the command for a
second time.
Example
Limit multicast routing table capacity at 256.
[SW5500]multicast route-limit 256
multicast routing-enable Syntax

multicast routing-enable
undo multicast routing-enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the multicast routing-enable to enable IP multicast routing.

Use the undo multicast routing-enable to disable IP multicast routing.
By default, IP multicast routing is disabled.
The system will not forward any multicast packet when IP multicast routing is
disabled.
Related commands: igmp enable, pim dm, pim sm.
Example
Enable IP multicast routing.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]multicast routing-enable
reset multicast Syntax

forwarding-table reset multicast forwarding-table [ statistics ] { all | {
group-address [ mask { group-mask | group-mask-length } ] |
source-address [ mask { source-mask | source-mask-length } ] |
incoming-interface interface-type interface-number } * }
View
User View
Parameter
statistics: If it is selected, the system clears the statistic information of MFC
forward entries. Otherwise, the system clears MFC forward entries.
all: All MFC forward entries.
group-address: Specifies group address.
group-mask: Specifies Mask of group address
group-mask-length: Specifies mask length of group address.
source-address: Specifies source address.
source-mask: Specifies mask of source address.
source-mask-length: Specifies mask length of source address.
incoming-interface: Specifies incoming interface for the forward entry.
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description
Use the reset multicast forwarding-table command to clear MFC forwarding
entries or statistic information of MFC forwarding entries.
Type in the source address first and group address after in the command, ensure
that both addresses are valid. The system prompts error information if invalid
addresses are entered.

Related commands: reset pim routing-table, reset multicast

routing-table and display multicast forwarding-table.
Example
Clear the forwarding entry with address of 225.5.4.3 from the MFC forwarding
table.
<SW5500>reset multicast forwarding-table 225.5.4.3
Clear statistic information of the forwarding entry with address of 225.5.4.3 from
the MFC forwarding table.
<SW5500>reset multicast forwarding-table statistics 225.5.4.3
reset multicast Syntax

routing-table reset multicast routing-table { all | { group-address [ mask {
group-mask | group-mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask {
source-mask | source-mask-length } ] | { incoming-interface
interface-type interface-number } } * }
View
User View
Parameter
all: All route entries in the core multicast routing table.
group-mask: Specifies Mask of group address
group-mask-length: Specifies mask length of group address.
source-mask: Specifies mask of source address.
source-mask-length: Specifies mask length of source address.
incoming-interface: Specifies incoming interface for the forward entry.
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.
Description
Use the reset multicast routing-table command to clear route entries from
the core multicast routing table, as well as MFC forwarding entries.
Type in the source address first and group address after in the command, ensure
that both addresses are valid. The system prompts error information if invalid
addresses are entered.
Related commands: reset pim routing-table, reset multicast

forwarding-table and display multicast forwarding-table.

Example
Clear the route entry with address of 225.5.4.3 from the core multicast routing
table.
<SW5500>reset multicast routing-table 225.5.4.3
Clear statistic information of the forward entry with address of 225.5.4.3 from the
MFC forwarding table.
<SW5500>reset multicast forwarding-table statistics 225.5.4.3
IGMP Configuration This section describes how to use the IGMP Configuration commands on your
Commands Switch 5500G-EI.
debugging igmp Syntax

debugging igmp { all | event | host | packet | timer }
undo debugging igmp { all | event | host | packet | timer }
View
User View
Parameter
all: Enables all the debugging information for IGMP functions.
event: Enables debugging information for IGMP events.
host: Enables debugging information for IGMP hosts
packet: Enables debugging information for IGMP packets.
timer: Enables debugging information for IGMP timers.
Description
Use the debugging igmp command to enable IGMP debugging functions.
Use the undo debugging igmp command to disable the debugging functions.
By default, IGMP debugging functions are disabled.
Example
Enable all IGMP debugging functions
<SW5500>debugging igmp all
display igmp group Syntax

display igmp group [ group-address | interface interface-type
interface-number ]
View
Any View

Parameter
group-address: Address of the multicast group.
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of the

router, used to specify the specific interface.
Description
Use the display igmp group command to view the member information of the
IGMP multicast group.
You can specify to show the information of a group or the member information of
the multicast group on an interface. The information displayed contains the
multicast groups that are joined by the downstream hosts through IGMP or
through command line.
Related command: igmp host-join.
Example
View the member information of multicast group in the system.
<SW5500>display igmp group
LoopBack0 (20.20.20.20): Total 3 IGMP Groups reported:
Group Address Last Reporter Uptime Expires
225.1.1.1 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15
225.1.1.3 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15
225.1.1.2 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:17
Table 45 Output Display of the display igmp group Command
Field Description
Group address Multicast group address
Last Reporter The last host reporting to join in the multicast group
Uptime Time passed since multicast group is discovered (hh: mm: ss)
Expires Specifies when the member will be removed from the multicast group (hh:
mm: ss).
display igmp interface Syntax

display igmp interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View
Any View
Parameter
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of the
router, used to specify the interface. If the parameters are omitted, information
about all the interfaces running IGMP will be displayed.
Description
Use the display igmp interface command to view the IGMP configuration and
running information on an interface.

Example
View the IGMP configuration and running information of all interfaces.
<SW5500>display igmp interface
Vlan-interface1 (10.153.17.99):
IGMP is enabled
Current IGMP version is 2
Value of query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 60
Value of other querier time out for IGMP(in seconds): 120
Value of maximum query response time for IGMP(in seconds): 10
Value of robust count for IGMP: 2
Value of startup query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 15
Value of last member query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 1
Value of query timeout for IGMP version 1(in seconds): 400
Policy to accept IGMP reports: none
Querier for IGMP: 10.153.17.99 (this router)
IGMP group limit is 1024
No IGMP group reported
igmp enable Syntax

igmp enable
undo igmp enable
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the igmp enable command to enable IGMP on an interface.
Use the undo igmp enable command to disable IGMP on the interface.
By default, IGMP is disabled.
The igmp enable command can be executed only if the multicast routing function
is enabled. After multicast routing is enabled, you can initiate the IGMP feature
configuration.
Related command: multicast routing-enable
Example
Enable IGMP on Vlan-interface 10.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface10]igmp enable
igmp group-limit Syntax

igmp group-limit number

undo igmp group-limit
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
number: Number of multicast groups, in the range of 0 to 1024.
Description
Use the igmp group-limit command to limit multicast groups on an interface.
Use the undo igmp group-limit command to restore the default setting.
By default, you can add up to 1024 IGMP groups on an interface.
If the existing IGMP groups exceed the quantity limit you configured using this
command, the system will not delete the existing entries.
second time.
Example
Limit the maximum IGMP groups at Vlan-interface10 to 100.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface10] igmp group-limit 100
igmp group-policy Syntax

igmp group-policy acl-number [ 1 | 2 | port { interface_type
interface_ num | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_
num | interface_name } ] ]
undo igmp group-policy [ port { interface_type interface_ num |

interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_ num |
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
acl-number: Number of the basic IP ACL number, defining a multicast group
range. The value ranges from 2000 to 2999.
1: IGMP version 1.
2: IGMP version 2. If IGMP version is not specified, version 2 will be used as

default.
port: Packets received and sent by the port(s) and applied to the conditions set by
the ACL will be filtered. And the port(s) must belong to the VLAN interface being
configured by this command.

Description
Use the igmp group-policy command to set the filter of multicast groups on an
interface to control the accessing to the IP multicast groups. Use the undo igmp
group-policy command to remove the filter configured.
By default, no filter is configured, that is, a host can join any multicast group.
If you do not want the hosts on the network that the interface is on to join some
multicast groups and receive the packets from the multicast groups, you can use
this command to limit the range of the multicast groups serviced by the interface.
Related command: igmp host-join.
Example
Configure the access-list 5.
<SW5500>system-view
Configure so that only the hosts contained in the access-list 2000 connected to
the VLAN-interface10 can be added to the multicast group, which is configured to
use IGMP version 2.
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]igmp group-policy 2000 2
igmp group-policy vlan Syntax

igmp group-policy acl-number vlan vlan_id
undo igmp group-policy vlan vlan_id
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
acl-number: Number of the basic IP access control list number, defining a
multicast group range. The value ranges from 2000 to 2999.
vlan_id: Specify the ID for the VLAN to which the port belongs.
Description
Using igmp group-policy vlan command, you can set the filter of multicast
groups on an port to control the accessing to the IP multicast groups. Using undo
igmp group-policy vlan command, you can remove the configured filter.
By default, no filter is configured, so a host can join any multicast group.
This command has the same function as the igmp group-policy command. Note
that the configured port must belong to the specified VLAN, and the IGMP
protocol must be enabled on this port; otherwise, the configuration does not
function.
For the related command, see igmp host-join, igmp host-join vlan, igmp
host-join port.

Example
Configure that only the hosts contained in the access-list 2000 connected to the
port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 in VLAN-interface10 can be added to the multicast
group, which is configured to use IGMP version 2.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]igmp group-policy 2000 vlan 10
igmp host-join Syntax

igmp host-join group-address
undo igmp host-join group-address
View
LoopBack interface view
Parameter
group-address: Multicast address of the multicast group that an interface will
join.
Description
Using igmp host-join command, you can enable a LoopBack interface of an
ethernet switch to join a multicast group. Using undo igmp host-join command,
you can disable the configuration.
By default, a LoopBack interface does not join any multicast group.
For the related command, see igmp host-join port, igmp host-join vlan and
igmp group-policy.
Example
Add LoopBack 0 to the multicast group at 225.0.0.1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface LoopBack 0
[SW5500-LoopBack0]igmp host-join 225.0.0.1
igmp host-join port Syntax

igmp host-join group-address port { interface_type interface_ num |
interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_ num |
interface_name } ]
undo igmp host-join group-address port { interface_type interface_

num | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_ num |
interface_name } ]
View
VLAN Interface View

Parameter
join.
port: Specifies the port in the VLAN interface.
Description
Use the igmp host-join port command to enable a port in the VLAN interface
of an ethernet Switch to join a multicast group.
Use the undo igmp host-join port command to disable the configuration.
By default, an interface does not join any multicast group.
Related command: igmp host-join vlan, igmp host-join and igmp

group-policy.
Example
Add port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN-interface10 to the multicast group at
225.0.0.1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]igmp host-join 225.0.0.1 port
GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
igmp host-join vlan Syntax

igmp host-join group-address vlan vlan_id
undo igmp host-join group-address vlan vlan_id
View
Ethernet Port view
Parameter
join.
vlan_id: Specifies the ID for the VLAN to which the port belongs.
Description
Use igmp host-join vlan command to enable a port in the VLAN interface of a
switch to join a multicast group. Use undo igmp host-join vlan command to
disable the configuration.
By default, a port does not join any multicast group.
This command has the same function as the igmp host-join port command.
Note that the configured port must belong to the specified VLAN, and the IGMP
protocol must be enabled on this VLAN interface; otherwise, the configuration
does not function.

For the related command, see igmp host-join port, igmp host-join, igmp
group-policy.
Example
Add port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN-interface10 to the multicast group at
225.0.0.1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface10]igmp enable
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet 1/0/1]port access vlan 10
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet 1/0/1]igmp host-join 225.0.0.1 vlan 10
igmp lastmember- Syntax

queryinterval
igmp lastmember-queryinterval seconds
undo igmp lastmember-queryinterval
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
seconds: Time interval before IGMP query router sends the IGMP group query
message after it receives the IGMP Leave message from the host. It is in the range
of 1 to 5 seconds. By default, it is 1 second.
Description
Use the igmp lastmember-queryinterval command to set the time interval
before IGMP query router sends the IGMP group query message after it receives
the IGMP Leave message from the host.
Use the undo igmp lastmember-queryinterval command to restore the default

value.
In the shared network, that is, a network segment including multiple hosts and
multicast routers, the IGMP Querier is responsible for maintaining the IGMP group
membership on the interface. When an IGMP v2 host leaves a group, it sends an
IGMP Leave message. When the IGMP Leave message is received, the IGMP
Querier must send an IGMP group specific query message a specified number of
times (set using the igmp robust-count command, with a default value of 2) in a
specified time interval. (Set using the igmp lastmember-queryinterval
command, with default value of 1 second).
If other hosts which are interested in the specified group receive the IGMP group
specific query message from the IGMP Querier, they send back an IGMP
Membership Report message within the specified maximum response time
interval. If the IGMP Querier receives the IGMP Membership Report message
within the defined period (equal to robust-value seconds), the IGMP Querier
continues to maintain the membership of this group. When no IGMP Membership

Report messages are received from any hosts within the defined period, the IGMP
Querier considers it a timeout and stops membership maintenance for the group.
This command only takes effect on an IGMP Querier running IGMP v2. For a
Querier running IGMP v1, this command cannot take effect because the IGMP
group members cannot send an IGMP Leave message when they leave a group.
Related command: igmp robust-count and display igmp interface.
Example
Set the query interval on Vlan-interface10 as 3 seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface10]igmp lastmember-queryinterval 3
igmp max-response-time Syntax

igmp max-response-time seconds
undo igmp max-response-time
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
seconds: Maximum response time in the IGMP query messages in seconds. Range
from 1 to 25. By default, the value is 10 seconds.
Description
Use the igmp max-response-time command to configure the maximum response
time contained in the IGMP query messages.
Use the undo igmp max-response-time command to restore the default value.
The maximum query response time determines the period for a router to quickly
detect that there are no more directly connected group members in a LAN.
Related command: display igmp group
Example
Set the maximum response time carried in host-query message to 8 seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]igmp max-response-time 8
igmp robust-count Syntax

igmp robust-count robust-value
undo igmp robust-count

View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
robust-value: IGMP robust value, number of sending the IGMP group query
message after the IGMP query router receives the IGMP Leave message from the
host. It is in the range of 2 to 5. The default is 2.
Description
Use igmp robust-count command to set the number of sending the IGMP group
query message after the IGMP Querier receives the IGMP Leave message from the
host.
Use the undo igmp robust-count command to restore the default value.
In the shared network, that is, a network segment including multiple hosts and
multicast routers, the IGMP Querier is responsible for maintaining the IGMP group
membership on the interface. When an IGMP v2 host leaves a group, it sends an
IGMP Leave message. When the IGMP Leave message is received, the IGMP
Querier must send an IGMP group specific query message a specified number of
times (set using the igmp robust-count command, with a default value of 2) in a
specified time interval. (Set using the igmp lastmember-queryinterval
command, with default value of 1 second).
If other hosts which are interested in the specified group receive the IGMP group
specific query message from the IGMP Querier, they send back an IGMP
Membership Report message within the specified maximum response time
interval. If the IGMP Querier receives the IGMP Membership Report message
within the defined period (equal to robust-value seconds), the IGMP Querier
continues to maintain the membership of this group. When no IGMP Membership
Report messages are received from any hosts within the defined period, the IGMP
Querier considers it a timeout and stops membership maintenance for the group.
This command only takes effect on an IGMP Querier running IGMP v2. For a
Querier running IGMP v1, this command cannot take effect because the IGMP
group members cannot send an IGMP Leave message when they leave a group.
Related command: igmp lastmember-queryinterval and display igmp

interface
Example
Set the robust value at the Vlan-interface 10 as 3.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface10]igmp robust-count 3
igmp timer Syntax

other-querier-present
igmp timer other-querier-present seconds
undo igmp timer other-querier-present

View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
seconds: IGMP querier present timer value in second ranging from 1 to 131070.
By default, the value is twice the value of IGMP query message interval, i.e., 120
seconds.
Description
Use the igmp timer other-querier-present command to configure the timer
of presence of the IGMP querier.
Use the undo igmp timer other-querier-present command to restore the

default value.
On a shared network, where there are multiple multicast routers on the same
network segment, the query router (querier for short) takes charge of sending
query messages periodically on the interface. If other non-queriers receive no
query messages within the valid period, the router will consider the previous
Querier to be invalid and the router itself becomes the querier.
In IGMP version 1, the selection of a Querier is determined by the multicast routing

protocol. In IGMP version 2, the router with the lowest IP address on the shared
network segment acts as the querier.
Related commands: igmp timer query and display igmp interface
Example
Set querier to expire after 300 seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]igmp timer other-querier-present 300
igmp timer query Syntax

igmp timer query seconds
undo igmp timer query
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
seconds: The interval, in seconds, at which a router transmits IGMP query
messages in the range from 1 to 65535. By default, the value is 60 seconds.
Description
Use the igmp timer query command to configure the interval at which a router
interface sends IGMP query messages.
Use the undo igmp timer query command to restore the default value.

A multicast router periodically sends out IGMP query messages to attached

segments to find hosts that belong to different multicast groups. The query
interval can be modified according to the practical conditions of the network.
Related command: igmp timer other-querier-present
Example
Configure to transmit the host-query message every 60 seconds via
VLAN-interface2.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface2]igmp timer query 60
igmp version Syntax

igmp version { 1 | 2 }
undo igmp version
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
1: IGMP Version 1.
2: IGMP Version 2. By default, IGMP Version 2 is used.
Description
Use the igmp version command to specify the version of IGMP that a router uses.
Use the undo igmp version command to restore the default value.
All routers on a subnet must support the same version of IGMP. After detecting
the presence of IGMP Version 1 system, the Switch cannot automatically change
to Version 2.
Example
Run IGMP Version 1 on VLAN-interface10.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]igmp version 1
reset igmp group Syntax

reset igmp group { all | interface interface-type interface-number {
all | group-address [ group-mask ] } }
View
User View

Parameter
all: All IGMP groups.
interface interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface

number.
group-address: IGMP group address.
group-mask: Mask of IGMP group address.
Description
Use the reset igmp group command to delete an existing IGMP group from the
interface. The deleted group can added again on the interface.
Example
Delete all IGMP groups on all the interfaces.
<SW5500>reset igmp group all
Delete all IGMP groups on the Vlan-interface10.
<SW5500>reset igmp group interface Vlan-interface10 all
Delete the group 225.0.0.1 from the Vlan-interface10.
<SW5500>reset igmp group interface Vlan-interface10 225.0.0.1
Delete the IGMP groups ranging from 225.1.1.0 to 225.1.1.255 on the

Vlan-interface10.
<SW5500>reset igmp group interface Vlan-interface10 225.1.1.0

255.255.255.0
PIM Configuration This section describes how to use the Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
Commands configuration commands on your Switch 5500G-EI.
bsr-policy Syntax
bsr-policy acl-number
undo bsr-policy
View
PIM View
Parameter
acl-number: ACL number imported in BSR filtering policy, in the range of 2000 to
2999.
Description
Use the bsr-policy command to limit the range of legal BSRs to prevent BSR
spoofing.

Use the undo bsr-policy command to restore the default setting so that no
range limit is set and all received messages are taken as legal.
In a PIM SM network using the BSR (bootstrap router) mechanism, every router
can set itself as a C-BSR (candidate BSR) and have the authority to advertise RP
information in the network once it wins the election. To prevent malicious BSR
spoofing in the network, the following two measures need to be taken:
■ Prevent the router from being spoofed by hosts though faking legal BSR
messages to modify RP mapping. BSR messages are of multicast type and their
TTL is 1, so this type of attacks often hits edge routers. Fortunately, BSRs are
inside the network, while the assaulting hosts are outside, therefore neighbor
and RPF checks can be used to stop this type of attacks.
■ If a router in the network is manipulated by an attacker, or an illegal router is
placed on the network, the attacking router may set itself as a C-BSR and try to
win the election and gain the authority to advertise RP information throughout
the network. Since the router configured as a C-BSR propagates BSR messages,
as multicast with a TTL of 1. Then the network cannot be affected as long as
the peer routers do not receive these BSR messages. This is done by configuring
bsr-policy on each router to limit the legal BSR range, for example, only
1.1.1.1/32 and 1.1.1.2/32 can be BSRs, thus the routers cannot receive or
forward BSR messages received from any other source other than these two.
Even legal BSRs cannot contest with them.
Problems may still exist if a legal BSR is attacked, though these two measures can
effectively guarantee high BSR security.
The source parameter in the rule command is translated as a BSR address in the
bsr-policy command.
Related commands: acl and rule
Example
Configure BSR filtering policy on routers, only 1.1.1.1/32 can be a BSR.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]pim
[SW5500-pim]bsr-policy 2000
[SW5500-pim]quit
[SW5500-acl-basic-2000]rule 0 permit source 1.1.1.1 0
c-bsr Syntax
c-bsr interface-type interface-number hash-mask-len [ priority ]
undo c-bsr
View
PIM View

Parameter
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of a
router. The candidate BSR is configured on the interface. PIM-SM must be enabled
on the interface first.
hash-mask-len: Length of the mask. The value ranges from 0 to 32.
priority: Priority of the candidate BSR. The larger the value of the priority, the
higher the priority of the BSR. The value ranges from 0 to 255. The default value is
0.
Description
Use the c-bsr to configure a candidate BSR.
Use the undo c-bsr to remove the candidate BSR configured.
By default, no candidate BSR is set.
Related command: pim sm.
Example
Configure the Ethernet Switch as C-BSR with priority 2 (and the C-BSR address is
designated as the IP address of VLAN-interface10).
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500] pim
[SW5500-pim]c-bsr vlan-interface 10 24 2
c-rp Syntax
c-rp interface-type interface-number [ group-policy acl-number |
priority priority-value ]*
undo c-rp {interface-type interface-number | all }
View
PIM View
Parameter
interface-type interface-number: Specified interface with the IP address
advertised as a candidate RP address.
acl-number: Number of the basic ACL that defines a group range, which is the
service range of the advertised RP. The value ranges from 2000 to 2999.
priority-value: Priority value of candidate RP, in the range of 0 to 255. By

default, it is 0. The greatest value corresponds to the lowest priority level.
all: Remove all candidate RP configurations.
Description
Use the c-rp to configure the router to advertise itself as a candidate RP.

Use the undo c-rp to remove the configuration.
By default, no candidate RP is configured.
Related command: c-bsr.
Example
Configure the Ethernet Switch to advertise the BSR that it is the C-RP in the PIM
domain. The standard access list 2000 defines the groups related to the RP. The
address of C-RP is designated as the IP address of VLAN-interface10.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]pim
[SW5500-pim]c-rp vlan-interface 10 group-list 2000
crp-policy Syntax
crp-policy acl-number
undo crp-policy
View
PIM View
Parameter
acl-number: ACL number imported in C-RP filtering policy, ranging from 3000 to
3999.
Description
Use the crp-policy command to limit the range of legal C-RP, as well as target
service group range of each C-RP, prevent C-RP spoofing.
Use the undo crp-policy command to restore the default setting so that no
range limit is set and all received messages are taken as legal.
In a PIM SM network, every router can set itself as a C-RP (candidate rendezvous
point) servicing particular groups. If elected, a C-RP becomes the RP servicing the
current group.
A C-RP router unicasts C-RP messages to the BSR, which then propagates the C-RP
messages among the network using BSR messages. To prevent C-RP spoofing, you
need to configure a crp-policy on the BSR to limit legal C-RP range and their
service group range. Since each C-BSR has the chance to become the BSR, you
must configure the same filtering policy on each C-BSR router.
This command uses the ACLs numbered between 3000 and 3999. The source
parameter in the rule command is translated as C-RP address in the crp-policy
command, and the destination parameter as the service group range of this C-RP
address. For the C-RP messages received, only when their C-RP addresses match

the source address and their server group addresses are subset of those in ACL,
can the be considered as matched.
Related commands: acl and rule
Example
Configure C-RP filtering policy on the C-BSR routers, allowing only 1.1.1.1/32 as
C-RP and to serve only for the groups 225.1.0.0/16.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]pim
[SW5500-pim]crp-policy 3000
[SW5500-pim]quit
[SW5500-acl-adv-3000]rule 0 permit ip source 1.1.1.1 0 destination
225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255
debugging pim common Syntax

debugging pim common { all | event | packet | timer }
undo debugging pim common { all | event | packet | timer }
View
User View
Parameter
all: all the common debugging information of PIM.
event: debugging information of common PIM event.
packet: debugging information of PIM hello packet.
timer: debugging information of common PIM timer.
Description
Use the debugging pim common to enable common PIM debugging functions.
Use the undo debugging pim common to disable the debugging functions.
By default, common PIM debugging functions are disabled.
Example
Enable all common PIM debugging functions.
<SW5500>debugging pim common all
debugging pim dm Syntax

debugging pim dm { alert | all | mrt | timer | warning | { recv |
send } { all | assert | graft | graft-ack | join | prune } }

undo debugging pim dm { alert | all | mrt | timer | warning | { recv

| send } { all | assert | graft | graft-ack | join | prune } }
View
User View
Parameter
alert: interoperation event debugging information of PIM-DM
all: all the debugging information of PIM-DM.
mrt: debugging information of PIM-DM multicast routing table.
timer: debugging information of PIM-DM timer.
warning: debugging information of PIM-DM warning message.
recv: debugging information of PIM-DM receiving packets.
send: debugging information of PIM-DM sending packets.
all | assert | graft | graft-ack | join | prune: packets type.
Description
Use the debugging pim dm to enable PIM-DM debugging functions.
Use the undo debugging pim dm to disable the debugging functions.
By default, PIM-DM debugging functions are disabled.
Example
Enable all PIM-DM debugging functions
<SW5500>debugging pim dm all
debugging pim sm Syntax

debugging pim sm { all | register-proxy | mrt | warning | mbr {alert
| fresh } | timer { assert | bsr | crpadv | jp | jpdelay | mrt |
probe | spt } | { recv | send } { assert | bootstrap | crpadv | reg |
regstop | jp } }
undo debugging pim sm { all | register-proxy | mrt | warning | mbr

{alert | fresh } | timer { assert | bsr | crpadv | jp | jpdelay | mrt
| probe | spt } | { recv | send } { assert | bootstrap | crpadv | reg
| regstop | jp } }
View
User View
Parameter
mbr: debugging information of PIM-SM multicast border router event.
register-proxy: debugging information of PIM-SM IO registry proxy.

mrt: debugging information of PIM-SM multicast routing table.
timer: debugging information of PIM-SM timer.
warning: debugging information of PIM-SM warning message.
recv: debugging information of PIM-SM receiving packets.
send: debugging information of PIM-SM sending packets.
alert | fresh: debugging information of PIM-SM multicast border router event.
assert | boostrap | crpadv | jp | reg | regstop: packets type.
assert | bsr | crpadv | jp | jpdelay | mrt | probe | spt: debugging

information of PIM-SM timer.
Description
Use the debugging pim sm to enable PIM-SM debugging functions.
Use the undo debugging pim sm to disable the debugging functions.
By default, PIM-SM debugging functions are disabled.
Example
Enable all PIM-SM debugging functions
[SW5500]debugging pim sm all
display pim bsr-info Syntax

display pim bsr-info
View
All Views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display pim bsr-info to display the BSR information.
Related command: c-bsr, c-rp.
Example
<SW5500>display pim bsr-info
Current BSR Address: 20.20.20.30
Priority: 0
Mask Length: 30
Expires: 00:01:55
Local host is BSR

Table 46 Output description of the display pim bsr command

Field Description
BSR Boot strap router
Priority Priority of BSR
Mask Length:30 Length of mask
Expires:00:01:55 Expire Time
display pim interface Syntax

display pim interface [ interface-type interface-number ]
View
All Views
Parameter
interface-type: Specifies the interface type.
interface-number: Specifies interface number.
Description
Use the display pim interface to display the PIM configuration information
about an interface.
Example
<SW5500>display pim interface
PIM information of VLAN-interface 2:
IP address of the interface is 10.10.1.20
PIM is enabled
PIM version is 2
PIM mode is Sparse
PIM query interval is 30 seconds
PIM neighbor limit is 128
PIM neighbor policy is none
Total 1 PIM neighbor on interface
PIM DR(designated router) is 10.10.1.20
Table 47 Output description of the display pim interface command
Field Description
PIM version Version of PIM
PIM mode PIM mode enabled on the interface (DM or SM)
PIM query interval Hello packet interval
PIM neighbor limit Limit of the PIM neighbors on an interface. No neighbor can be
added any more when the limit is reached.
PIM neighbor policy Filtering policy of the PIM neighbors on the current interface.
PIM DR Designated router.
display pim neighbor Syntax

display pim neighbor [ interface interface-type interface-number ]

View
All Views
Parameter
interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number, used
to specify the interface.
Description
Use the display pim neighbor to view the PIM neighbor information.
Example
<SW5500>display pim neighbor
Neighbor Address Interface Name Uptime Expires
8.8.8.6 VLAN-interface10 1637 89
Table 48 Output description about PIM neighbors
Field Description
Neighbor Address Neighbor address
Interface Interface where the neighbor has been discovered
Uptime Time passed since the multicast group has been discovered
Expires Specifies when the member will be removed from the group
display pim Syntax

routing-table display pim routing-table [ { { *g [ group-address [ mask {
mask-length | mask } ] ] | **rp [ rp-address [ mask { mask-length |
mask } ] ] } | { group-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] |
source-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] } * } |
incoming-interface { interface-type interface-num | interface-name |
null } | { dense-mode | sparse-mode } ] *
View
All views
Parameter
**rp: (*, *, RP) route entry.
*g: (*, G) route entry.
group-address: Address of the multicast group.
source-address: IP address of the multicast source.
incoming-interface: Router entry with the specified incoming interface.
Description
Use the display pim routing-table to view the contents of the PIM multicast
routing table.
Related command: display multicast routing-table.

Example
View the contents of the PIM multicast routing table on the router.
<SW5500>display pim routing-table
PIMSM Routing Table
Total 0 (*,*,RP), 0 (*,G), 2 (S,G)
(192.168.1.2, 224.2.178.130),
Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x4: SPT
UpTime: 23:59, Timeout after 196 seconds
Upstream interface: VLAN-interface2, RPF neighbor: NULL
(192.168.1.2, 224.2.181.90),
Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x4: SPT
UpTime: 23:59, Timeout after 196 seconds
Upstream interface: VLAN-interface2, RPF neighbor: NULL
Total 2 entries listed
Table 49 Output description about PIM routing table

Field Description
RP Rendezvous Point
(S,G) Source address, multicast group
PIM-SM PIM Sparse Mode
SPT Shortest Path Tree
RPF Reverse Path Forwarding
display pim rp-info Syntax

display pim rp-info [ group-address ]
View
All Views
Parameter
group-address: Specify the group address to be showed. If no multicast group is
specified, the RP information about all multicast groups will be displayed.
Description
Use the display pim rp-info to view the RP information of multicast group.
In addition, this command can also show the BSR and static RP information.
Example
<SW5500>display pim rp-info
PIM-SM RP-SET information:
BSR is: 192.168.1.1
Group/MaskLen: 224.0.0.0/4
RP 192.168.1.1, Version 2
priority: 0
uptime(from last update): 29:11, to expire in: 2:02

pim Syntax
pim
undo pim
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the pim to enter the PIM View.
Use the undo pim to clear the configurations in PIM View.
The global parameters of PIM can only be configured in PIM View.
Example
Enable multicast and enter the PIM View.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]pim
[SW5500-pim]
pim bsr-boundary Syntax

pim bsr-boundary
undo pim bsr-boundary
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the pim bsr-boundary to configure an interface to be the PIM domain
border.
Use the undo pim bsr-boundary to remove the border.
By default, no domain border is set.
You can use this command to set a border for bootstrap messages, that is to say,
bootstrap messages cannot pass interfaces that are configured with the pim
bsr-boundary command while other PIM messages can. In this way, the network
is divided into different BSR domains.
It should be noted that this command cannot set up multicast boundaries. It only
sets up a PIM domain bootstrap message border.

Related command: c-bsr.
Example
Configure domain border on VLAN-interface10.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]interface Vlan-interface-10
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]pim bsr-boundary
pim dm Syntax
pim dm
undo pim dm
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the pim dm to enable PIM-DM (Dense Mode).
Use the undo pim dm to disable PIM-DM.
By default, PIM-DM is disabled.
Once PIM-DM is enabled on an interface, PIM-SM cannot be enabled on the same

interface and vice versa.
Example
Enable PIM DM on VLAN-interface10 of the Ethernet Switch.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]pim dm
pim neighbor-limit Syntax

pim neighbor-limit limit
undo pim neighbor-limit
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
limit: Limits of PIM neighbors on the interface, in the range of 0~128.

Description
Use the pim neighbor-limit command to limit the PIM neighbors on an
interface. No neighbor can be added when the limit is reached.
Use the undo pim neighbor-limit command to restore the default setting.
By default, the PIM neighbors on the interface are limited to 128.
If the existing PIM neighbors exceed the configured value during configuration,
they will not be deleted.
Example
Limit the PIM neighbors on the Vlan-interface10 to 50.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface10]pim neighbor-limit 50
pim neighbor-policy Syntax

pim neighbor-policy acl-number
undo pim neighbor-policy
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
acl-number: Basic ACL number, in the range of 1to 99.
Description
Use the pim neighbor-policy command to filter the PIM neighbors on the
current interface.
Use the undo pim neighbor-policy command to remove the filter.
Only the routers that match the filtering rule in the ACL can serve as a PIM
neighbor of the current interface.
second time.
Example
Configure that 10.10.1.2 can serve as a PIM neighbor of the Vlan-interface10, but
not 10.10.1.1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-interface10]pim neighbor-policy 2000

[SW5500-acl-basic-2000]rule permit source 10.10.1.2 0

[SW5500-acl-basic-2000]rule deny source 10.10.1.1 0
pim sm Syntax
pim sm
undo pim sm
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the pim sm to enable the PIM-SM protocol on an interface.
Use the undo pim sm to disable the PIM-SM protocol.
By default, PIM-SM is disabled.
Once PIM-SM is enabled on an interface, PIM-DM cannot be enabled on the same

interface and vice versa.
Example
Enable PIM-SM on VLAN-interface10.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]pim sm
pim timer hello Syntax

pim timer hello seconds
undo pim timer hello
View
Interface View
Parameter
seconds: Interval of sending Hello messages in second ranging from 1 to 18000.
By default, the interval value is 30 seconds.
Description
Use the pim timer hello to configure the interval of sending PIM router Hello
messages.
Use the undo pim timer hello to restore the default interval value.

Example
Configure to transmit Hello packet via VLAN-interface10 every 40 seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-vlan-interface10]pim timer hello 40
register-policy Syntax
register-policy acl-number
undo register-policy
View
PIM View
Parameter
acl-number: Number of IP advanced ACL, defining the rule of filtering the source
and group addresses. The value ranges from 3000 to 3999.
Description
Use the register-policy command to configure a RP to filter the register
messages sent by the DR in the PIM-SM network and to accept the specified
messages only.
Use the undo register-policy command to remove the configured message

filtering.
Example
If the local device is the RP in the network, use the following command to only
accept multicast message register of the source sending multicast address in the
range of 225.1.0.0/16 on network segment 10.10.0.0/16.
<SW5500> system-view
[SW5500] acl number 3010
[SW5500-acl-adv-3010] rule permit ip source 10.10.0.0 0.0.255.255
destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255
[SW5500-acl-adv-3010] quit
[SW5500] pim
[SW5500-pim] register-policy 3010
reset pim neighbor Syntax

reset pim neighbor { all | { neighbor-address | interface
interface-type interface-number} * }
View
User View
Parameter
all: All PIM neighbors

neighbor-address: Specifies neighbor address.
interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies interface.
Description
Use the reset pim neighbor command to clear a PIM neighbor.
Related command: display pim neighbor
Example
Clear the PIM neighbor 25.5.4.3.
<SW5500>reset pim neighbor 25.5.4.3
reset pim routing-table Syntax

reset pim routing-table { all | { group-address [ mask { group-mask |
group-mask-length }] | source-address [ mask { source-mask |
source-mask-length }] | { incoming-interface { interface-type
interface-number | null } } } * }
View
User View
Parameter
all: All PIM neighbors
mask group-mask: Specifies group mask.
mask-length group-mask-length: Specifies mask length of the group address.
mask source-mask: Specifies source mask.
mask-length source-mask-length: Specifies mask length of the group address.
incoming-interface: Specifies incoming interface for the route entry in PIM

routing table.
interface-type interface-number: Specifies the interface.
null: Specifies the incoming interface of the route entry as null.
Description
Use the reset pim routing-table command to clear a PIM route entry.
You can type in source-address first and group-address after in the command,
as long as they are valid. Error information will be given if you type in invalid
addresses.
If in this command, the group-address is 224.0.0.0/24 and source-address is the

RP address (where group address can have a mask, but the resulted IP address

must be 224.0.0.0, and source address has no mask), then it means only the (*, *,
RP) item will be cleared.
If in this command, the group-address is any a group address, and source-address

is 0 (where group address can have a mask, and source address has no mask), then
only the (*, G) item will be cleared.
This command clears multicast route entries from PIM routing table, as well as the
corresponding route entries and forward entries in the multicast core routing table
and MFC.
Related commands: reset multicast routing-table, reset multicast

forwarding-table and display pim routing-table.
Example
Clear the route entries with group address 225.5.4.3 from the PIM routing table.
<SW5500>reset pim routing-table 225.5.4.3
source-policy Syntax
source-policy acl-number
undo source-policy
View
PIM View
Parameter
acl-number: Basic or advanced ACL, in the range of 2000 to 3999.
Description
Use the source-policy command to filter the source (and group) address of
multicast data packets. Use the undo source-policy command to remove the
configuration.
If resource address filtering is configured, as well as basic ACLs, then the router
filters the resource addresses of all multicast data packets received. Those not
matched will be discarded.
If resource address filtering is configured, as well as advanced ACLs, then the

router filters the resource and group addresses of all multicast data packets
received. Those not matched will be discarded.
When this feature is configured, the router filters not only multicast data, but the
multicast data encapsulated in the registration packets.
second time.
Example
Set to receive the multicast data packets from source address 10.10.1.2, but
discard those from 10.10.1.1.


[SW5500]pim
[SW5500-pim]source-policy 1
[SW5500-pim]quit
[SW5500-acl-basic-1]rule permit source 10.10.1.2 0
[SW5500-acl-basic-1]rule deny source 10.10.1.1 0
static-rp Syntax
static-rp rp-address [ acl-number ]
undo static-rp
View
PIM View
Parameter
rp-address: Static RP address, a legal unicast IP address.
acl-number: Basic ACL, used to control the range of the multicast group served
by the static RP, which ranges from 2000 to 2999. If an ACL is not specified at
configuration, static RP will serve all multicast groups; if an ACL is specified, static
RP will only serve the multicast group passing the ACL.
Description
Use the static-rp command to configure static RP.
Use the undo static-rp command to remove the configuration.
The Static RP functions as the backup for a dynamic RP so as to improve the

network robustness. If the RP is elected by the BSR mechanism, static RP will not
work.
All routers in the PIM domain should be configured with this command and be
specified with the same RP address.
second time.
Related command: display pim rp-info
Example
Configure 10.110.0.6 as a static RP.
[SW5500]pim
[SW5500-pim]static-rp 10.110.0.6


8 USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
ACL Configuration Command List

■ acl
■ display acl
■ display packet-filter
■ display time-range
■ packet-filter
■ reset acl counter
■ rule
■ time-range
QoS Configuration Commands List

■ display mirror
■ display qos-interface all
■ display qos-interface line-rate
■ display qos-interface mirrored-to
■ display qos-interface traffic-limit
■ display qos-interface traffic-priority
■ display qos-interface traffic-redirect
■ display qos-interface traffic-statistic
■ display queue-scheduler
■ line-rate
■ mirrored-to
■ mirroring-port
■ monitor-port
■ priority
■ priority trust
■ queue-scheduler
■ reset traffic-statistic
■ traffic-limit
■ traffic-priority
■ traffic-redirect

282 CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
■ traffic-statistic
QoS Profile Configuration Commands
■ apply qos-profile
■ display qos-profile
■ packet-filter
■ qos-profile
■ qos-profile user-based
■ traffic-limit
■ traffic-priority
Logon user’s ACL Control Command

■ acl
■ ip http acl
■ snmp-agent community
■ snmp-agent group
■ snmp-agent usm-user
ACL Configuration This section describes how to use the ACL configuration commands on your
Command List Switch.
acl Syntax
acl number acl-number [ match-order { config | auto } ]
undo acl { number acl-number | all }
View
System View
Parameter
number acl-number: the sequence number of an Access Control List (ACL), the
range is:
■ 2000~2999: Basic ACL.
■ 3000~3999: Advanced ACL.
■ 4000~4999: Layer 2 ACL.
■
config: Follow the user configuration order to match ACL rules.
auto: Follow the depth-first order to match ACL rules.
all ( for the undo command): Cancel all the ACLs.

Description
Use the acl command to define an ACL identified by a number, and enter the
corresponding ACL View.
Use the undo acl command to cancel all subitems of an ACL identified by a
number, or cancel the entire ACL.
By default, the ACLs are matched in config order.
After entering a corresponding ACL View, you can use the rule command to
create subitems of this ACL (you can exit the ACL View by using the quit
command).
Using the match-order, you can specify whether the match order is the user's
configuration order or depth first order (it first matches the rules with a small
range); if not specified, then the user's configuration order will be chosen by
default. Once the matching order of the ACL is specified, you cannot change the
order unless you have cancelled all the subitems. Note that the ACL matching
order is in effect only when the ACL is employed by the software as a means of
data filtering and classification.
For related configurations, refer to the command rule.
Example
Specify depth first order as the match order of number 2000 ACL.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]acl number 2000 match-order auto
[SW5500-acl-basic-2000]
display acl Syntax

display acl { all | acl-number }
View
All Views
Parameter
all: Displays all ACLs.
acl-number: Specifies the sequence number of the ACL to be displayed. It can be

a number chosen from 2000 to 4999.
Description
Use the display acl command to view the detailed configuration information
about the ACL, including every rule, sequence number and the number and byte
number of the packets matched with this rule.
The matched times displayed by this command are software matched times,
namely, the matched times of the ACL to be processed by the Switch CPU. You
can use the traffic-statistic command to calculate the matched times of
hardware during packet-forwarding

Example
Display the content of all the ACLs.
<SW5500>display acl all
Basic acl 2000, 0 rule,match-order is auto
Acl’s step is 1
Advanced ACL 3000, 1 rule

Acl's step is 1
rule 1 permit ip (0 times matched)
display packet-filter Syntax

display packet-filter { interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num } | unitid unit-id }
View
Any View
Parameter
interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num }: Interface
of the Switch, for more detail, please refer to the port command in this manual.
unitid unit-id: Unit ID. If user inputs this parameter, all the packet-filtering
information of the specified unit will be displayed.
Description
Use the display packet-filter command to view the information of the
activated of ACL. The displayed content includes ACL number, subitem name and
activation status.
Example
To display the information of the activated ACL of all interfaces, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display packet-filter unitid 1
display time-range Syntax

display time-range { all | name }
View
Any View
Parameter
all: Displays all the time-range
name: Specifies the name of the time range. This is a character string that starts
with the letter (a-z or A-Z), ranging from 1 to 32 characters
Description
Use the display time-range command to view the configuration and status of
the current time range. You will see the active or inactive state outputs
respectively.

Note that the system has a delay of about 1 minute when updating the ACL state,
while the display time-range command applies the current time. Therefore
when display time-range displays that a time range is active, the ACL using it
may not have been activated yet.
For the related configuration, see the time-range command.
Example
Display all the time ranges.
<SW5500>display time-range all
Current time is 14:36:36 Apr/1/2000 Thursday
Time-range : hhy ( Inactive )

from 08:30 2-5-2005 to 18:00 2-19-2005
Time-range : hhy1 ( Inactive )

from 08:30 2-5-2003 to 18:00 2-19-2003
packet-filter Syntax
packet-filter inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group

acl-number rule rule ] ] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] }
undo packet-filter inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [

link-group acl-number rule rule ] ] | link-group acl-number [ rule
rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View.
Parameter
inbound: Filters the traffic received by the Ethernet port.
ip-group acl-number: Activates the IP ACLs, including basic and advanced

ACLs. acl-number specifies the sequence number of the ACL, ranging from 2000
to 3999.
link-group acl-number: Activates the Layer 2 ACLs. acl-number specifies the

ACL number, ranging from 4000 to 4999.
rule rule: Specifies the rule of an ACL, ranging from 0 to 65534; if not
specified, all subitems of the ACL will be activated. An ACL can have many rules.
They start at 0.
Description
Use the packet-filter command to activate the ACL on a specific interface.
Use the undo packet-filter command to disable the ACL on a specific

interface.
Example
Activate ACL 2000 for inbound traffic on interface Ethernet 1/0/1.
<SW5500>system-view


[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000
reset acl counter Syntax

reset acl counter { all | acl-number }
View
User View
Parameter
all: All ACLs.
acl-number: Specifies an ACL by its number, ranging from 2000 to 4999.
Description
Use the reset acl counters command to reset the ACL statistics information to
zero.
Example
Clear the statistics information of ACL 2000.
<SW5500>reset acl counters 2000
rule Syntax
Define or delete the subrules of a basic ACL:

rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } [source { source-addr wildcard | any
} fragment | time-range name ]*
undo rule rule-id [ source | fragment | time-range ]*
Define or delete the subrules of an advanced ACL:
rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } protocol [ source { source-addr

wildcard | any } ] [ destination { dest-addr wildcard | any } ] [
source-port operator port1 [ port2 ] ] [ destination-port operator
port1 [ port2 ] ] [ icmp-type type code ] [ established ] [ [ {
precedence precedence tos tos | dscp dscp }* | vpn-instance instance ] |
fragment | logging | time-range name ]*
undo rule rule-id [ source | destination | source-port |

destination-port | icmp-type | precedence | tos | dscp | fragment |
logging | time-range | vpn-instance ]*
Define or delete the subrules of a Layer 2 ACL:
rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } [ [ type protocol-type type-mask |

lsap lsap-type type-mask ] | format-type | cos cos | source {
source-vlan-id | source-mac-addr source-mac-wildcard }* | dest {
dest-mac-addr dest-mac-wildcard } | time-range name ]*
undo rule rule-id

View
Corresponding ACL View
Parameter
rule-id: Specifies the subitems of an ACL, ranging from 0 to 65534.
permit: Permits packets that meet the requirements.
deny: Denies packets that meet the requirements.
time-range name: Name of a time range, during which a rule takes effect.
The following parameters are various property parameters carried by packets. The
ACL sets rules according to this parameter.
Parameters specific to basic ACLs:

source { source-addr wildcard | any }: source-addr wildcard represents
the source IP address and the wildcard digit represented in dotted decimal
notation. any represents all source addresses.
fragment: Means this rule is only effective fragment packets and is ignored for
non-fragment packets.
logging
Parameters specific to advanced ACLs:

protocol: Specifies the protocol type which is represented by a name or a
number. When it is a name, this parameter can be adopted like: icmp, igmp, tcp,
udp, ip, gre, ospf, ipinip, etc. If the adopted value is IP, that means all the Internet
Protocols. When it is a number: it ranges from 1 to 225.
source { source-addr wildcard | any }: source-addr wildcard means the

source IP address and the wildcard digit represented in dotted decimal notation.
any means all source addresses.
destination { dest-addr wildcard | any }: dest-addr wildcard means the

destination IP address and the wildcard digit represented in dotted decimal
notation. any means all destination addresses.
source-port operator port1 [port2]: Source port number of TCP or UDP used
by the packet. operator is port operator, including eq (equal), gt (greater than), lt
(less than),neq (not-equal), range (within this range). Note that this parameter is
only available when the parameter protocol is TCP or UDP. port1 [port2]: Source
port number of TCP or UDP used by the packet, notated by a character or a
number which ranges from 0 to 65535 inclusive. For the value of the character,
please refer to mnemonic symbol table. The two parameters port1 and port2
appear at the same time only when the operator is “range”, but other operators
need “port1” only.
destination-port operator port1 [port2]: Destination port number of TCP or

UDP used by packets. For detailed description, please refer to source-port
operator port1 [port2].

icmp-type type code: Appears when protocol is icmp. type code specifies an
ICMP packet. type represents the type of ICMP packet, notated by a character or
a number which ranges from 0 to 255; code represents ICMP code, which appears
when the protocol is “icmp” and the type of packet is not notated by a character,
ranging from 0 to 255.
established: Means that it is only effective to the first SYN packet established by
TCP, appears when protocol is tcp.
precedence precedence: IP predence, can be a name or a number ranging from 0

to 7.
tos tos: ToS (Type of Service) value, can be a name or a number ranging from 0 to
15. Packets can be classified according to TOS value.
dscp dscp: DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) value, can be a name or a
number ranging from 0 to 63. Packets can be classified according to DSCP value.
fragment: Means this rule is only effective for fragment packets and is ignored for
non-fragment packets.
Parameters specific to Layer 2 ACL:

source { source-vlan-id | source-mac-addr source-mac-wildcard }*: The
source information of a packet, source-vlan-id represents source VLAN of the
packet, source-mac-addr source-mac-wildcard represents source MAC address
of the packet. For example, if you set source-mac-wildcard to 0-0-ffff, it means
that you will take the last 16 bits of source MAC address as the rule of traffic
classification.
dest { dest-vlan-id | dest-mac-addr dest-mac-wildcard }*: The

destination information of a packet: dest-mac-addr dest-mac-wildcard
represents the the packet’s destination MAC address. For example, if you set
source-mac-wildcard to 0-0-ffff, it means that you will take the last 16 bits of
source MAC address as the rule of traffic classification.
type protocol-type protocol-type-mask: Protocol type carried by the Ethernet

frame.
lsap lsap-type lsap-type-mask: lsap type carried by the Ethernet frame.
Description
Use the rule command to add a subrule to an ACL.
Use the undo rule command to cancel a subrule from an ACL.
You can define several subrules for an ACL. If you include parameters when using
the undo rule command, the system only deletes the corresponding content of
the subrule.
For related configurations, refer to command acl.
Example
Add a subrule to an advanced ACL:

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-acl-adv-3000]rule 1 permit tcp established source 1.1.1.1 0
destination 2.2.2.2 0
[SW5500-acl-adv-3000]
Add a subrule to a basic ACL:

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-acl- basic-2000]rule 1 permit source 1.1.1.1 0 fragment
[SW5500-acl- basic-2000]
Add a subrule to a Layer 2 ACL:

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-acl-ethernetframe-4000] rule 1 permit source 1
[SW5500-acl-ethernetframe-4000]
time-range Syntax
time-range time-name { start-time to end-time days-of-the-week [
from start-time start-date ] [ to end-time end-date ] | from
start-time start-date [ to end-time end-date ] | to end-time end-date
}
undo time-range time-name [ start-time to end-time days-of-the-week
[ from start-time start-date ] [ to end-time end-date ] | from
start-time start-date [ to end-time end-date ] | to end-time end-date
]
View
System View
Parameter
time-name: Name of a special time range to be referenced.
start-time: Start time of the special time range, format as hh:mm.
end-time: End time of the special time range, format as hh:mm.
days-of-the-week: Means the special time is effective on a specified day every

week. You can input the following parameters:
■ Numbers (ranging from 0 to 6);

■ Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday or Sunday;
■ working-day, representing 5 working days, from Monday to Friday;
■ off-day, representing Saturday and Sunday;
from start-time start-date:: The start date of a special time-range, together

with end-time end-date means this special time-range is effective during a
certain period, notated as hh:mm MM/DD/YYYY.

to end-time end-date:: The end date of a special time-range, together with

start-time start-date means this special time-range is effective during a
certain period, notated as hh:mm MM/DD/YYYY.
If the above two parameters are not configured, it means there is no restriction to
time-range.
Description
Use the time-range command to configure a time range.
Use the undo time-range command to delete a time range.
If you input the parameter when using the undo time-range command, the
system will cancel the corresponding content of the parameters in the time range.
Example
Configure a time range to take effect at 00:00 on January 1, 2000 with no end
date specified.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]time-range test from 0:0 1-1-2000
QoS Configuration This section describes how to use the Quality of Service (QoS) configuration
Commands List commands on your Switch 5500G-EI.
display mirror Syntax

display mirror
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display mirror command to view port mirroring configuration,
including monitored ports, monitor port and monitor direction, and so on.
Related commands: mirroring-port, monitor-port.
Example
To display the port mirroring configuration, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500] display mirror
Monitor-port:
GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Mirroring-port:
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 both

display qos-interface all Syntax

display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } all
View
All views
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Interfaces of the Switch.

For more information, refer to the port command in this manual.
unit-id: Unit ID of the Switch.
Description
Using the display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } all command, you can view QoS information of all
interfaces. If you do not input interface parameters, this command will display all
QoS setting information for the Switch, including traffic policing, rate limit at
interface, and so on. If you input interface parameters, this command will display
QoS setting information of the specified interfaces, including traffic policing, rate
limit at interfaces, and so on.
Example
Display all the configurations of QoS parameters for unit 1.
<SW5500> display qos-interface 1 all

GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-limit
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 1 running
Target rate: 128 Kbps
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-priority
Inbound:
Priority action: cos best-effort
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: line-rate
Outbound: 128 Kbps
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-statistic
Queue scheduling mode: weighted round robin
weight of queue 1: 1
---- More ----
display qos-interface Syntax

line-rate display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } line-rate

View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Interface of the Switch, for

detailed a description, refer to the port command in this manual.
Description
Use the display qos-interface line-rate command to view the traffic rate
limitations of the interface output. If you do not specify interface parameters, you
will view the traffic rate limitations of all interfaces’ output. If you enter interface
parameters, you will view the parameter settings of traffic rate limitations of the
specified interfaces’ output.
Example
Display the parameter configuration of interface traffic rate limitation.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500] display qos-interface line-rate
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: line-rate
Outbound: 128 Kbps

mirrored-to display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } mirrored-to
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Interface of the Switch,
for detailed description, refer to the port command in this manual.
Description
Use the display qos-interface mirrored-to command to view the settings of
the traffic mirror.
This command is used for displaying the settings of traffic mirror. The information
displayed includes the ACL of traffic to be mirrored and the observing port.
Related command: mirrored-to.
Example
To display the settings of traffic mirror, enter the following:
<SW5500> display qos-interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 mirrored-to
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: mirrored-to

Inbound:
Mirrored to: monitor interface

traffic-limit display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } traffic-limit
View
All views
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num:: Specifices an Interface of
the Switch, for more information, refer to the port command in this manual.
Description
Use the display qos-interface traffic-limit command to view the traffic
limit settings. If you set the port parameters, the configuration information about
the specified port will be displayed. The information displayed includes the ACL of
the traffic to be limited, the limited average rate and the settings of some related
policing action.
Related commands: traffic-limit.
Example
Display the traffic limit settings.
<SW5500> display qos-interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 traffic-limit
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-limit
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule running
Target rate: 128 Kbps
display Syntax
qos-interface display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
traffic-priority interface-num | unit-id } traffic-priority
View
All views
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num:: Specifies an interface of

the Switch, for a detailed description, refer to the port command in this manual.
Description
Use the display qos-interface traffic-priority command to view the
traffic priority settings.

This command is used for displaying the traffic priority settings. The information
displayed includes the ACL corresponding to the traffic tagged with priority,
priority type and value.
Related command: traffic-priority.
Example
Display the traffic priority settings.
<SW5500>display qos-interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 traffic-priority
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-priority
Inbound:
Priority action: cos best-effort

traffic-redirect display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } traffic-redirect
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Interface of the Switch,
for more information, refer to the port command in this manual.
Description
Use the display qos-interface traffic-redirect command to view the
settings of the redirection parameters. The displayed content includes the
corresponding ACLs of the traffic to be redirected, the redirected interfaces, and
so on.
Related conmmand: traffic-redirect.
Example
Display the redirection parameter configuration.
<SW5500>display qos-interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 traffic-redirect
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-redirect
Inbound:
Redirected to: interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2

traffic-statistic display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } traffic-statistic
View
All views

Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Specifies a port of the
Switch. For detailed information, refer to the port command in this manual.
unit-id:: Unit ID of the Switch.
Description
Use the display qos-interface traffic-statistic command to view the
traffic statistics information. The information displayed includes the ACL
corresponding to the traffic to be counted and the number of packets counted.
Related command: traffic-statistic.
Example
Display the traffic statistics information.
<SW5500>display qos-interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 traffic-statistic
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-statistic
Inbound:
0 packet inprofile
0 packet outprofile
display queue-scheduler Syntax

display queue-scheduler
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display queue-scheduler command to view queue scheduling mode
and corresponding parameter configuration.
The default is Weighted Round Robin.
Related command: queue-scheduler.
Example
To display the queue scheduling mode, enter the following:
<SW5500> display queue-scheduler
Queue scheduling mode: weighted round robin

line-rate Syntax
line-rate outbound target-rate
undo line-rate outbound
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
target-rate: The total limited rate of packets sent by interfaces. Unit in Kbps.
The number inputted must be a multiple of 64. For 1000 Mbps port, the range is
from 64 to 1000000.
Description
Use the line-rate command, to limit the total rate of the packets delivered by
interfaces. Use the undo line-rate command, to cancel the configuration of limit
rate at interfaces.
The granularity of line rate is 64 kbps.
Example
Set the rate limitation of interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to 128 kbps.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]line-rate outbound 128
mirrored-to Syntax
mirrored-to inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group
acl-number rule rule ] ] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] } { cpu
| monitor-interface }
undo mirrored-to inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [
rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
inbound: Performs traffic mirror for the packets received by the interface.
ip-group acl-number: Activates IP ACLs, including basic and advanced ACLs.

acl-number: Sequence number of ACL, ranging from 2000 to 3999.
link-group acl-number: Activates Layer 2 ACLs. acl-number: Sequence number

of ACL, ranging from 4000 to 4999.
rule rule: Specifies the subitem of an active ACL, ranging from 0 to 65534; if
not specified, all subitems of the ACL will be activated. If only IP ACL or Layer 2
ACL are activated, this parameter can be omitted. If both IP and Layer 2 ACL are
activated at the same time, the rule parameter cannot be omitted.

cpu: Specifies the traffic will be mirror to CPU
interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num }: Specifies

the destination port where the traffic will be mirrored to. interface-num specifies
the port number. interface-num and interface-type specify a complete port
name together. interface-name is interface-type added with interface-num.
Description
Use the mirrored-to command to enable ACL traffic identification and perform
traffic mirroring.
Use the undo mirrored-to command to disable traffic mirroring.
This command is used for mirroring the traffic matching the specified ACL (whose
action is permit). The observing port cannot be a Trunk port or aggregated port.
This command only supports one observing port. When you use the traffic mirror
for the first time, you have to designate the observing port.
Related command: display qos-interface mirrored-to.
Example
To mirror the packets matching the ACL 2000 rules, whose action is permit, to the
port Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]monitor-port
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]quit
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/2]mirrored-to ip-group 2000
monitor-interface
SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/2]
mirroring-port Syntax
mirroring-port { inbound | outbound | both }
undo mirroring-port
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the mirroring-port command to configure a mirroring port.
Use the undo mirroring-port command to remove setting of mirroring port.
The Switch supports one monitor port and one mirroring port. If several Switches
form a Fabric, only one monitor port and one mirroring port can be configured in

the Fabric. You need to configure the monitor port before configuring the
monitored port.
Related command: display mirror.
Example
To configure GigabitEthernet1/0/1 as a monitored port, and monitor packets in
both directions, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]mirroring-port both
monitor-port Syntax
monitor-port
undo monitor-port
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the monitor-port command to configure a monitor port.
Use the undo monitor-port command to remove the setting of monitor port.
The Switch supports one monitor port and one mirroring port. If several Switches
form a Fabric, only one monitor port and one mirroring port can be configured in
the Fabric. You need to configure monitor port before configuring monitored port.
Related command: display mirror.
Example
To configure the port GigabitEthernet1/0/4 as a monitor port, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/4]monitor-port
priority Syntax
priority priority-level
undo priority
View
Ethernet Port View

Parameter
priority-level: Specifies the priority level of the port, ranging from 0 to 7.
Description
Use the priority command to configure the priority of Ethernet port.
Use the undo priority command to restore the default port priority.
By default, the priority level of the port is 0. The Switch replaces the 802.1p
priority carried by a packet with the port priority that is defined.
Every port on the Switch supports eight packet egress queues. The Switch puts the
packets into different egress queues according to their priorities.
When transmitting a packet, the Switch replaces the packet’s 802.1p priority with
the priority of the received port, according to which the packet will be put into the
corresponding egress queue.
Example
Set the priority of GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port to 7.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]priority 7
priority trust Syntax

priority trust
undo priority
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the priority trust command to configure the system to trust the packet’s
802.1p priority and not replace the 802.1p priorities carried by the packets with
the port priority. Use undo priority command to configure the system not to
trust the packet 802.1p priority.
By default, the system replaces the 802.1p priority carried by a packet with the
port priority.
For the related command, see priority.
Example
Configure the system to trust the packet 802.1p priority and not replace the
802.1p priorities carried by the packets with the port priority.
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]priority trust
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]
queue-scheduler Syntax
queue-scheduler { wrr queue1-weight queue2-weight queue3-weight
queue4-weight queue5-weight queue6-weight queue7-weight
queue8-weight
undo queue-scheduler
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
wrr queue1-weight queue2-weight queue3-weight queue4-weight

queue5-weight queue6-weight queue7-weight queue8-weight: Indicates that
the queue uses weight round robin (WWR) scheduling. queue1-weight: the
weight of queue 1, the percentage allocated by bandwidth; queue2-weight: the
weight of queue 2, and so on. The weight ranges from 0 to 15.
Description
Use the queue-scheduler command to configure queue scheduling mode.
Use the undo queue-scheduler command to restore the default value.
By default, WRR algorithm is selected for all outbound queues at a port.
The queue weight is based on bytes. For example, if the weight of queues 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8 is respectively as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, then among every 36 bytes in
process, 1 byte from queue 1, 2 bytes from queue 2, 3 bytes from queue 3, 4
bytes from queue 4, 5 bytes from queue 5, 6 bytes from queue 6, 7 bytes from
queue 7 and 8 bytes from queue 8.
Related configuration: display queue-scheduler.
Example
To set wrr as the port queue scheduling mode, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]queue-scheduler wrr 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The queue scheduling parameters in all interfaces are refreshed.
reset traffic-statistic reset traffic-statistic inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule ]

| link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View

Parameters
inbound: specify the traffic received by the Ethernet port.

acl-number: Sequence number of ACL, ranging from 2000 to 3999.

rule rule: Specifies the subitem of an active ACL, ranging from 0 to 65534; if not
specified, all subitems of the ACL will be activated. If only an IP ACL or a Layer 2
ACL is activated, this parameter can be omitted. If both IP and Layer 2 ACLs are
Description
Use the reset traffic-statistic command to reset the traffic statistics
information.
This command is used for clearing the statistics information about all the traffic or
a specified one.
Figure 1 Comparison of Statistics Information reset Commands
Commnad Function
reset acl Reset the statistics information of the ACL which is used in the case of
counter filtering or classifying the data treated by the software of the Switch.
The case includes: ACL cited by route policy function, ACL used for
control logon user, etc.
reset Reset statistic information of traffic. This command is used in the case
traffic-statist of filtering or classifying the data transmitted by the hardware of the
ic Switch. Commonly, this command is used to reset the statistics
information of the traffic-statistic command.
Example
Clear the statistics information about ACL 2000.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]reset traffic-statistic inbound
ip-group 2000
traffic-limit traffic-limit inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group

acl-number rule rule ]] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] }
target-rate [ exceed action ]
undo traffic-limit inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [

rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View

Parameter
inbound: Performs traffic limitation to the packets received by the interface.

acl-number : Sequence number of ACL, ranging from 2000 to 3999.

target-rate: The set normal traffic, unit in Kbps, the granularity of traffic limit is
64 kbps, if the number input is in ( N*64 <the number input<(N+1)*64), in which
N is a natural number, the Switch automaticaly sets (N+1)*64 as the parameter
value. target-rate ranges from 64 to 1000000 inclusive.
exceed action: The action taken when the traffic exceeds the threshold. The
action can be:
■ drop: Drops the packets.

■ remark-dscp value: Sets new DSCP value.
Description
Use the traffic-limit command, to activate the ACL and perform traffic
limitation. Use the undo traffic-limit command to remove traffic limitation.
This command performs traffic limitation on the packets that match with a
specified ACL rule, and is only effective with a permit rule.
The granularity of traffic limit is 64 kbps.
You can only remark traffic with a DSCP value. The Switch 5500G-EI does not
permit CoS remarking with this command.
Example
Perform traffic limitation on packets that match the permit rule of ACL 2000. The
target traffic rate is 128 kbps.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000
128
traffic-priority Syntax
traffic-priority inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [
rule ] } { { dscp dscp-value | ip-precedence { pre-value | from-cos }
} | cos { pre-value | from-ipprec } | local-precedence pre-value }*

undo traffic-priority inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [

rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
inbound: Performs priority marking to the packets received by the interface.


dscp dscp-value: Set DSCP priority, ranging from 0 to 63.
ip-precedence { pre-value | from-cos }: Set IP precedence, pre-value ranges

from 0 to 7. from-cos means to set the IP precedence with the corresponding
802.1p priority value.
cos { pre-value | from-ipprec }: Set 802.1p priority. pre-value ranges from 0

to 7. from-ipprec means to set the 802.1p priority of the packet with the
corresponding 802.1p priority value.
local-precedence: This does not actually remark the packet but gives it an
internal "local-precedence" that determines which queue it is assigned to. The
queue can be determined by looking at cos-local precedence map using the
display qos cos-local-precedence command.
Description
Use the traffic-priority command to activate an ACL and perform priority
marking.
Use the undo traffic-priority command to remove the priority marking.
The system can mark the packets with various levels DSCP priority, IP Precedence,
CoS (802.1p) priority and local Precedence.
Related command: display qos-interfacee traffic-priority.
Example
Perform priority marking to packets that match with the permit rule of ACL 2000.
Set its 802.1p priority to 0.
<SW5500>system-view


[SW5500-Ethernet1/0/1]traffic-priority inbound ip-group 2000 cos 0
traffic-redirect Syntax
traffic-redirect inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [
rule ] } { cpu | interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num } }
undo traffic-redirect inbound | { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [

rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
inbound: Performs traffic redirecting on the packets received by the interface.


cpu: Configures to redirect the traffic to the CPU.
interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num }: Specifies

the Ethernet port to which the packets will be redirected. interface-type
specifies the port type. interface-num specifies the port number. interface-num
and interface-type specify a complete port name together. interface-name is
interface-type added with interface-num.
Description
Use the traffic-redirect command to activate the ACL to recognize and
redirect the traffic (whose action is permit). Use the undo traffic-redirect
command to cancel the redirection.
You can only redirect traffic within the same unit. That is to say that if you receive
traffic on port 2/0/1 you can only redirect it to another port in unit 2.
For the related command, see display qos-global traffic-redirect.
Example
Redirects the packets matching the ACL 2000 rules with action permit to the port
GigabitEthernet1/0/1.
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500]interface gigabitethernet1/0/2
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] traffic-redirect inbound ip-group 2000
interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
traffic-statistic Syntax
traffic-statistic inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [
rule ] }
undo traffic-statistic inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [

rule ] }
View
System View
Parameter
inbound: Performs traffic statistic on the packets received by the interface.


Description
Use the traffic-statistic command to activate the ACL to recognize and
count the traffic (whose action is permit).
Use the undo traffic-statistic command to cancel the traffic statistics.
The statistics information of traffic-statistic command keeps track of the

number of times a packet is matched to the ACL. You can use the display
traffic-statistic command to display the statistics information.
Related command: display qos-interface traffic-statistic.
Example
Count the packets matching the ACL 2000 rules with action permit.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]traffic-statistic inbound ip-group 2000

QoS Profile This section describes how to use the Quality of Service (QoS) Profile configuration
Configuration commands on your Switch.
Commands
apply qos-profile Syntax

apply qos-profile profile-name
undo apply qos-profile profile-name
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
profile-name: QoS profile name, a string of one to 32 characters, starting with
letters [a-z, A-Z] and excluding all, interface, and user which are reserved as
keywords.
Description
Use the apply qos-profile command to apply the QoS profile to the current
port.
Use the undo apply qos-profile command to remove the QoS profile from a
port.
You cannot delete a QoS profile which has been applied to a port. Likewise a
profile has to be created before it can be assigned to a port.
Example
To apply the qos-profile student to the current port, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]apply qos-profile student
display qos-profile Syntax

display qos-profile { all | profile-name | interface {
interface-name | interface-type interface-num } | user user-name }
View
Any view
Parameter
all: Displays all QoS profiles.
profile-name: The profile name.
interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num }: Displays

the QoS profile delivered to a specific port.
user user-name: Displays the QoS profile mapped with a specific user.

Description
Use the display qos-profile command to view QoS profile configuration
information.
Example
To display QoS profile configuration information, enter the following:
<SW5500> display qos-profile all
qos-profile: qos-profile student, 3 actions
packet-filter inbound link-group 4000 rule 1
traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 rule 1 128 exceed drop
traffic-priority inbound ip-group 2000 rule 1 local-precedence 0
packet-filter Syntax
packet-filter inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group
undo packet-filter inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [

rule ] }
View
QoS Profile View
Parameter
inbound: Filters the inbound packets on the port.
ip-group acl-number: Basic or advanced ACL, acl-number is in the range 2000

to 3999
link-group acl-number: Layer 2 ACL, acl-number is in the range 4000 to 4999
rule rule: Specifies a match statement in the ACL, in the range 0 to 65534. All
match statements are selected if you skip this keyword.
Description
Use the packet-filter command to add packet filtering action to the QoS
profile.
Use the undo packet-filter command, you can remove packet filtering action
from the QoS profile.
Example
To add the qos-profile student to this packet filtering action: Filters the inbound
packets matching the ACL 4000, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]qos-profilestudent
[SW5500-qos-profilestudent]packet-filter inbound link-group 4000
[SW5500-qos-profilestudent]

qos-profile Syntax
qos-profile profile-name
undo qos-profile profile-name
View
System View
Parameter
profile-name: QoS profile name, a string of one to 32 characters, starting with
letters [a-z, A-Z] and excluding all, interface, and user which are reserved as
keywords.
Description
Use the qos-profile command to create a QoS profile and enter the
corresponding view. For an existing profile, you can directly enter the
corresponding view.
Use the undo qos-profile command to delete a QoS profile.
You cannot delete the specific QoS profile which has been applied to the port.
Example
To create QoS profile student, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500] qos-profile student
[SW5500-qos-profilestudent]
qos-profile user-based Syntax

qos-profile user-based
undo qos-profile user-based
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the qos-profile user-based command to configure application mode on
the port of the QoS profile.
Use the undo qos-profile user-based command to restore the default

(port-based) application mode.
By default, port-based application mode is selected on the port.

After you configure the QoS profiles and the user pass the authentication, the
Switch will deliver the right profile dynamically to the port from which the user is
accessed. The QoS profile can be delivered to the port in these different modes:
■ User-based mode: If the source station information (source MAC address,

source IP address or source MAC address + IP address) has been defined in the
ACL which is referenced in the traffic actions, the Switch cannot deliver the
QoS profile; if no source station information is available, the Switch generates a
new ACL by adding the source MAC address address and source IP address into
the existing ACL, and then delivers all traffic actions in the QoS profile to the
user port.
■ Port-based mode: The Switch delivers the traffic actions in the QoS profile
directly to the user port.
Example
To configure user-based application mode on the port, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]qos-profile user-based
traffic-limit Syntax
traffic-limit inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group
target-rate [ exceed action ]
undo traffic-limit inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [

rule ] }
View
QoS Profile View
Parameter
inbound: Set traffic limiting for the inbound packets on the port.

to 3999
rule rule: Specifies a match statement in the ACL, in the range 0 to in the range
0 to 65534. All match statements are selected if you skip this keyword.
target-rate: The set normal traffic, unit in Kbps, the granularity of traffic limit is
64kbps, if the number input is in ( N*64 <the number input< (N+1)*64], in which
N is a natural number, the Switch automaticaly sets (N+1)*64 as the parameter
value. target-rate ranges for 1000 Mbps port, from 64 to 1000000 inclusive.
exceed action: Action taken when the traffic threshold is exceeded (optional).
Two actions are available:

■ drop: Drops packets.

■ remark-dscp value: Sets a new DSCP value.
Description
Use the traffic-limit command to add traffic policing action in the QoS profile,
with the granularity of 64 kbps.
Use the undo traffic-limit command to remove traffic policing action from the
QoS profile.
You cannot remove traffic policing action from the specific QoS profile which has
been applied to the port.
Example
To add to the qos-profile student this traffic policing action: Limits traffic for the
packets matching ACL 2000, the target rate is 128 kbps, drop the packets at a
rate exceeding this target rate, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]qos-profile student
[SW5500-qos-profilestudent]traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 128
exceed drop
traffic-priority Syntax
traffic-priority inbound { ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [
rule ] } { { dscp dscp-value | ip-precedence { pre-value | from-cos }
} | { pre-value | from-ipprec } | local-precedence pre-value }*
undo traffic-priority inbound { user-group acl-number [ rule rule ]

| ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group acl-number rule rule
] ] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] }
View
QoS Profile View
Parameter
inbound: Replaces the preference value for the inbound packets on the port.

to 3999
rule rule: Specifies a match statement in the ACL, in the range 0 to in the range
0 to 65534. All match statements are selected if you skip this keyword.
dscp dscp-value: Sets DSCP preference value, in the range 0 to 63.

ip-precedence { pre-value | from-cos }: Set IP precedence value, pre-value

is in the range 0 to 7. from-cos sets the IP precedence value consistent with the
802.1p value.
cos { pre-value | from-ipprec }: Sets the 802.1p value, pre-value is in the

range 0 to 7. from-ipprec sets the 802.1p value consistent with the IP precedence
value.
local-precedence pre-value: Sets local preference value, in the range 0 to 7.
Description
Use the traffic-priority command to enable traffic priority marking for traffic
that matches the ACL.
Use the undo traffic-priority command to remove traffic priority marking.
You cannot remove traffic priority marking from the specific QoS profile which has
been applied to the port.
Example
To add to the student profile this preference replacing action: Sets local preference
0 to the inbound packets matching the ACL 2000, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]qos-profile student
[SW5500-qos-profilestudent]traffic-priority inbound ip-group 2000
local-precedence 0
Logon user’s ACL This section describes how to use the Logon user’s ACL control commands on your
Control Command Switch 5500G-EI.
acl Syntax
acl acl-number { inbound | outbound }
undo acl { inbound | outbound }
View
VTY User Interface View
Parameter
acl-number: The number identifier of basic and advanced number-based ACLs,
inbound: Performs ACL control to the users who access the local Switch using
TELNET.
outbound: Performs ACL control to the users who access other Switches from the
local Switch using TELNET.

Description
Using the acl command, you can reference ACL and implement the ACL control
to the TELNET users. Using the undo acl command, you can remove the control
from the TELNET users.
Example
Perform ACL control to the users who access the local Switch using TELNET (basic
ACL 2000 has been defined).
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-vty0-4]acl 2000 inbound
ip http acl Syntax

ip http acl acl-number
undo ip http acl
View
User Interface View
Parameter
acl-number: Specifies a basic ACL with a number in the range of 2000 to 2999.
Description
Use the ip http acl command to call an ACL and perform ACL control over the
WEB network management users.
Use the undo ip http acl command to cancel the ACL control over the WEB
network management users.
This command calls numbered basic ACL only.
Example
To perform ACL control over the WEB network management users, enter the
following: (Suppose ACL 2020 has been defined.)
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ip http acl 2020
snmp-agent community Syntax

snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ [ mib-view
view-name ] | [ acl acl-number ] ]*
undo snmp-agent community community-name
View
System View

Parameter
read: Indicates that this community name has the read-only right within the
specified view.
write: Indicates that this community name has the read-write right within the
specified view.
community-name: Character string of the community name.
mib-view: Set the MIB view name which can be accessed by the community
name.
view-name: MIB view name.
acl acl-number: The number identifier of basic number-based ACLs, ranging

from 2000 to 2999
Description
Using the snmp-agent community command, you can set the community access
name, permit the access to the Switch using SNMP, and reference the ACL to
perform ACL control to the network management users by acl-number. Using the
undo snmp-agent community command, you can remove the setting of
community access name.
By default, SNMPV1 and SNMPV2C use community name to perform access.
Example
Set the community name as "MyCompany", permit the user to perform read-only
access by using this community name, and reference the ACL 2000 to perform
ACL control to the network management users (basic ACL 2000 has already been
defined ).
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent community read MyCompany acl 2000
snmp-agent group Syntax

snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name [ read-view read-view ] [
write-view write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [acl acl-number]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [

read-view read-view ] [ write-view write-view ] [ notify-view
notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]
View
System View
Parameter
v1: V1 security mode.

v2c: V2c security mode.
v3: V3 security mode.
groupname: Group name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
authentication: If this parameter is added to configuration command, the

system will authenticate but not encrypt SNMP data packets.
privacy: Authenticates and encrypts the packets.
read-view: Sets read-only view.
read-view: Read-only view name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
write-view: Sets read-write view.
write-view: Read-write view name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
notify-view: Sets notify view.
notify-view: Notify view name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
acl acl-number: the number identifier of basic number-based ACLs, ranging

from 2000 to 2999
Description
Using the snmp-agent group command, you can configure a new SNMP group
and reference the ACL to perform ACL control to the network management users
by acl acl-number. Using the undo snmp-agent group command, you can
remove a specified SNMP group.
Example
Creates a new SNMP group: MyCompany, and reference the ACL 2001 to perform
ACL control to the network management users (basic ACL 2001 has already been
defined).
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent group v1 MyCompany acl 2001
snmp-agent usm-user Syntax

snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name [ acl
acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name
snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name [ authentication-mode {

md5 | sha } auth-password ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name { local | engineid

engineid-string }
View
System View

Parameter
v1: V 1 security mode.
v2c: V 2 security mode.
v3: V 3 security mode.
user-name: The user name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
group-name: The corresponding group name of the user, ranging from 1 to 32

bytes.
authentication-mode: Specifies the security level to "to be authenticated"
md5: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC-MD5-96.
sha: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC-SHA-96.
auth-password: Authentication password, character string, ranging from 1 to 64

bytes.
privacy: Specifies the security level as encryption.
des56: Specifies the DES encryption protocol.
priv-password: Encryption password, character string, ranging from 1 to 64

bytes.
acl acl-number: The number identifier of basic number-based ACLs, ranging

from 2000 to 2999.
local: Local entity user.
engineid: Specifies the engine ID related to the user.
engineid-string: Engine ID character string.
Description
Using the snmp-agent usm-user command, you can add a new user to an SNMP
group, and reference the ACL to perform ACL control to the network
management users by acl acl-number. Using the undo snmp-agent usm-user
command, you can remove the user from the related SNMP group as well as the
configuration of the ACL control of the user.
Example
Add a user "John" to the SNMP group "Mygroup". Specify the security level to
"to be authenticated", the authentication protocol to HMAC-MD5-96 and the
authentication password to "hello", and reference the ACL 2002 to perform ACL
control to the network management users (basic ACL 2002 has already been
defined).
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500] snmp-agent usm-user v3 John Mygroup authentication-mode md5

hello acl 2002

10 USING RSTP COMMANDS
RSTP Configuration Commands

■ display stp
■ display stp ignored-vlan
■ display stp tc
■ reset stp
■ stp
■ stp bpdu-protection
■ stp cost
■ stp edged-port
■ stp loop-protection
■ stp ignored vlan
■ stp mcheck
■ stp mode
■ stp pathcost-standard
■ stp point-to-point
■ stp port priority
■ stp priority
■ stp root primary
■ stp root secondary
■ stp root-protection
■ stp timeout-factor
■ stp timer forward-delay
■ stp timer hello
■ stp timer max-age
■ stp transmit-limit

322 CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
RSTP Configuration This section describes how to use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
Commands configuration commands on your Switch.
display stp Syntax

display stp [ interface interface_list ]
display stp brief
View
Any view
Parameter
interface interface_list: Specifies the Ethernet port list, including multiple
Ethernet ports. Expressed as interface _list={ { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num
| interface_name } ] }&<1-10>.
For details about interface_type, interface_num and interface_name, refer

to the port command in this manual.
&<1-10>: Indicates the preceding parameter can be input up to 10 times.
Description
Use the display stp command to view the status information of the current
RSTP.
Use the display stp brief command to view summary information of the STP
state of the Switch.
Related command: reset stp.
Example
To display the RSTP status information for GigabitEthernet1/0/2, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display stp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Protocol mode: IEEE RSTP
The bridge ID (Pri.MAC): 32768.00e0-fc00-5600
The bridge times: Hello Time 2 sec, Max Age 20 sec, Forward Delay 15
sec
Root bridge ID(Pri.MAC): 32768.00e0-fc00-5600
Root path cost: 0
Bridge bpdu-protection: disabled
Default path cost standard is dot1t
Timeout factor: 3
Port 2 (Ethernet1/0/2) of bridge is DOWN

Port spanning tree protocol: enabled
Port role: Disabled Port
Port path cost: 2000000
Port priority: 128
Designated bridge ID(Pri.MAC): 32768.00e0-fc00-5600
The Port is a non-edged port
Connected to a non-point-to-point LAN segment

Maximum transmission limit is 3 Packets / hello time

Times: Hello Time 2 sec, Max Age 20 sec
Forward Delay 15 sec, Message Age 0
BPDU sent: 0
TCN: 0, RST: 0, Config BPDU: 0
BPDU received: 0
Table 50 Display information
Field Description
Protocol mode Current Switch is executing RSTP.
The bridge ID (Pri.MAC): The RSTP configuration of the Switch, including
32768.00e0-fc00-5600 priority and MAC address of local bridge, Configured
time parameter (Hello Time, Max Age, Forward
The bridge times: Hello Time 2 sec, Max
Delay), priority and MAC address of root bridge, the
Age 20 sec, Forward Delay 15 sec
path cost from this Switch to the root path cost
Root bridge ID(Pri.MAC): mode, timeout time.
32768.00e0-fc00-5600
Root path cost: 0
Bridge bpdu-protection: disabled
Default path cost standard is dot1t
Timeout factor: 3
Port 2 (GigabitEthernet1/0/2) of bridge
The RSTP configuration of port 2, including the
is DOWN port’s status is down, the port RSTP is enabled, this
port is Disabled Port, the cost to root of this port ,
Port spanning tree protocol: enabled
the priority of this port, the priority and MAC address
Port role: Disabled Port of Designated bridge, this port is configured as a
non-edge port, the link of this port is
Port path cost: 200000 Port priority:
non-point-to-point, Maximum transmission limit is 3
128
BPDUs per hello time, configured RSTP time
Designated bridge ID(Pri.MAC): parameters(Hello Time, Max Age, Forward Delay,
32768.00e0-fc00-5600 Message Age), the statistics of BPDU (TCN specifies
the number of topology-change-notify datagram,
The Port is a non-edged port
RST specifies the number of RSTP datagram, Config
Connected to a non-point-to-point LAN BPDU specifies the number of STP datagram)
segment
Maximum transmission limit is 3
Packets / hello time
Times: Hello Time 2 sec, Max Age 20
sec
Forward Delay 15 sec, Message Age 0
BPDU sent: 0
BPDU received: 0
To display a brief STP summary for the Switch, enter the following:
<SW5500>display stp brief
The summary is displayed as shown in the following example.
unitID Port Role STP State Protection PA

2 Ethernet2/0/6 DISA FORWARDING NONE NONE

display stp ignored-vlan Syntax

display stp ignored-vlan
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display stp ignored-vlan command to view the list of STP-Ignored
VLANs.
After a STP-Ignored VLAN is configured, the packets of this VLAN will be

forwarded on any Switch port, with no restriction from the calculated STP path.
Example
To display the list of STP-Ignored VLANs, enter the following:
<SW5500>display stp ignored-vlan
STP-Ignored VLAN: 10, 20, 30, 40
display stp tc Syntax

display stp tc
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display stp tc command to display the number of topology changes
and/or topology change notifications that an active port has recieved.
Related command: reset stp.
Example
To display the number of topology changes and/or notifications , enter the
following:
<SW5500>display stp stc
-------Stp port received--------- TC-----or----- TCN----count-
reset stp Syntax

reset stp [ interface interface_list ]
View
User view

Parameter
interface interface_list: Specifies the Ethernet port list, including multiple
Ethernet ports. Expressed as interface _list = { { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num
| interface_name } ] }&<1-10>.
For details about interface_type, interface_num and interface_name, refer to

the port command in this manual.
&<1-10>: Indicates the preceding parameter can be input up to 10 times.
Description
Use the reset stp command to reset the statistics information about Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
This command can be used to clear the statistics information about a specified
port. If no port is specified, the statistics information of all the ports of the device
will be cleared.
Related command: display stp.
Example
To clear the statistics information about GigabitEthernet1/0/1 through
GigabitEthernet1/0/3, enter the following:
<SW5500>reset stp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to
GigabitEthernet1/0/3
stp Syntax
stp { enable | disable }
undo stp
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
enable: Enables RSTP on a device or a port.
disable: Disables RSTP on a device or a port.
Description
Use the stp enable command to enable RSTP on a device or port.
Use the stp disable command to disable RSTP on a device or port.
Use the undo stp command to disable RSTP on a device.
By default, RSTP is enabled on the Switch and all ports.
If the parameters of RSTP have not been set for the device or the ports before
RSTP is enabled on the device, they will take the default values. Before or after
RSTP is enabled, you can use the configuration command to set RSTP parameters

for the device and ports. This command enables/disables RSTP on a device in
system view and enables/disables RSTP on a port in Ethernet Port View.
Related command: stp mode.
Example
To enable RSTP on a Switch, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp enable
To disable RSTP on GigabitEthernet1/0/1, enter the following:
[SW5500]interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp disable
stp bpdu-protection Syntax

stp bpdu-protection
undo stp bpdu-protection
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the stp bpdu-protection command to enable BPDU protection on a Switch.
Use the undo stp bpdu-protection command to resume the default status of
BPDU protection function.
By default, BPDU protection is not enabled.
For an access layer device, its ports are generally directly connected to a user
terminal (such as a PC) or file server, and configured as an edge port to implement
fast transition. When such a port receives BPDU packets, the system will set it to a
non-edge port and recalculate the spanning tree, which will cause network
topology flapping. In normal circumstances, these ports should not receive any
BPDU packets. However, someone may forge BPDU to maliciously attack the
Switch and cause network flapping.
RSTP provides the BPDU protection function against such an attack. After the
BPDU protection function is enabled on a Switch, the system will disable an edge
port that has received BPDUs and notify the network manager about it. The
disabled port can only be re-enabled by the network manager.
Example
To enable BPDU protection function on a Switch, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500]stp bpdu-protection
stp cost Syntax

stp cost cost
undo stp cost
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
cost: Specifies the path cost, ranging from 1 to 2000000.
Description
Use the stp cost command to configure the path cost on a spanning tree for the
current Ethernet port.
Use the undo stp cost command to restore the default cost.
By default, the bridge gets the path cost directly through the speed of the link
connected to the port.
The path cost of an Ethernet port is related to the link speed. You can refer to the
following table. RSTP will check the link speed of the port and get the path cost
directly. It is recommended to set the cost to the default value and let RSTP query
the path cost of the port.
Table 51 Path cost for ports at different link speeds
Recommended Recommended
Link Speed Value Range Switch Range
10Mbps 2000 200 to 20000 1 to 2000000
100Mbps 200 20 to 2000 1 to 2000000
1Gbps 20 2 to 200 1 to 2000000
10Gbps 2 2to 20 1 to 2000000
Example
To configure the path cost of GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to 200, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp cost 200
stp edged-port Syntax

stp edged-port { enable | disable }
undo stp edged-port
View
Ethernet Port View

Parameter
enable: Sets the current Ethernet port as an edge port.
disable: Sets the current Ethernet port as a non-edge port.
Description
Use the stp edged-port enable command to configure the current port as an
edge port.
Use the stp edged-port disable command to configure the current port as a
non-edge port.
Use the undo stp edged-port command to restore the default setting.
By default, all the Ethernet ports of the bridge are configured as non-edge ports.
If the current Ethernet port is connected to other Switch, you can use the stp
edged-port disable or undo stp edged-port command to specify it as a
non-edge port. The stp edged-port enable command can be used to configure the
current Ethernet port as an edge port. All the Ethernet ports have been set to
non-edge ports by default. You can configure the Ethernet ports directly
connected to the user terminals as edge ports, so that they can transition to
forwarding state quickly.
Related command: stp point-to-point.
Example
To set GigabitEthernet1/0/1 as a non-edge port, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp edged-port disable
stp loop-protection Syntax

stp loop-protection
undo stp loop-protection
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
none
Description
Use the stp loop-protection command to enable loop protection function.
Use the undo stp loop-protection command to restore the setting.
By default, the loop protection function is not enabled.

Example
To enable loop protection function in GigabitEthernet1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp loop-protection
stp ignored vlan Syntax
stp ignored vlan vlan-list
undo stp ignored vlan vlan-list
View
System View
Parameter
vlan-list: List of VLANs, and vlan-list={ vlan-id [ to vlan-id ]
}&<1-10>.
&<1-10>: Indicates that vlan-id can be specified for 10 times at most. The value of
VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094.
Description
Use the stp ignored vlan command to configure a STP-Ignored VLAN.
Use the undo stp ignored vlan command to cancel the configuration.
By default, no VLAN is considered STP-Ignored when STP is enabled on the Switch.
Once a STP-Ignored VLAN is configured, the packets of this VLAN will be

forwarded on any Switch port, with no restriction from the calculated STP path.
Example
To specify VLAN 10 to VLAN 20 as an STP-Ignored VLANs, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp ignored vlan 10 to 20
To cancel the configuration of VLAN 10 to VLAN 20 as an STP-Ignored VLANs,

[SW5500]undo stp ignored vlan 10 to 20
stp mcheck Syntax

stp mcheck
View
System View

Parameter
None
Description
If the network is unstable, even when the bridge running STP on the segment is
removed, the corresponding port will still work in the STP compatible mode.
Use the stp mcheck command to force the port to work in RSTP mode.
If there is any bridge running STP on the segment connected to the current
Ethernet port, the port will Switch to run RSTP in STP compatible mode. If the
network is rather stable, even when the bridge running STP on the segment is
removed, the corresponding port will still work in the STP compatible mode. In this
case, you can use this command to force the port to work in RSTP mode. In RSTP
mode, when the port receives an STP packet, it will transition to the STP
compatible mode.
The configuration can only be performed when the bridge runs in RSTP mode. If
the bridge is configured to work in STP compatible mode, the command will not
make any sense.
Related command: stp mode.
Example
To set the port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to work in RSTP mode, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp mcheck
stp mode Syntax

stp mode { stp | rstp }
undo stp mode
View
System view
Parameter
stp: Specifies to run Spanning Tree in STP compatible mode.
rstp: Specifies to run Spanning Tree in RSTP mode.
Description
Use the stp mode command to configure Spanning Tree’s running mode.
Use the undo stp mode command to restore the default Spanning Tree’s running
mode.
By default, the value is rstp.

This command can be used for specifying the current Ethernet Switch to run the
Spanning Tree in RSTP mode or in STP compatible mode.
Related commands: stp, stp mcheck.
Example
To set Spanning Tree to work in STP compatible mode, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp mode stp
stp pathcost-standard Syntax

stp pathcost-standard { dot1d-1998 | dot1t }
undo stp pathcost-standard
View
System view
Parameter
dot1d-1998: The Switch calculates the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE
802.1D-1998 standard.
dot1t: The Switch calculates the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE 802.1t
standard.
Description
Use the stp pathcost-standard command to specify the standard to be used by
the Switch in calculating the default Path Cost.
Use the undo stp pathcost-standard command to restore the default choice of
the standard.
By default, the Switch calculates the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE 802.1t
standard.
Example
To configure the Switch to calculate the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE
802.1D-1998 standard, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp pathcost-standard dot1d-1998
To configure the Switch to calculate the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE
802.1t standard, enter the following:
[SW5500]stp pathcost-standard dot1t
stp point-to-point Syntax

stp point-to-point { force-true | force-false | auto }
undo stp point-to-point

View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
force-true: Indicates that the link to the current Ethernet port is a point-to-point
link.
force-false: Indicates that the link to the current Ethernet port is not a
point-to-point link.
auto: Specifies to automatically check if the link to the Ethernet port is a

point-to-point link or not.
Description
Use the stp point-to-point command to configure the state of the link to the
current Ethernet port as a point-to-point link or not a point-to-point link.
Use the undo stp point-to-point command to restore the default status of the
link, that is, RSTP is responsible for checking whether the link to the current
Ethernet port is a point-to-point link or not.
By default, the value is auto.
Example
To indicate that the link to GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is a point-to-point link, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp point-to-point force-true
stp port priority Syntax

stp port priority port-priority
undo stp port priority
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
port-priority: Specifies the priority of the port, ranging from 0 to 240. The
values are not consecutive integers. Step length is 16. By default, the value is 128.
Description
Use the stp port priority command to configure the priority of the current
Ethernet port.
Use the undo stp port priority command to restore the default priority.
The priority value shall be a multiple of 16, such as 0, 16, 32, 48 etc. The smaller
value represents the higher priority. A port with higher priority (lower numerical
value) is more likely to be a root port.

Example
To set the priority of GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to 64, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp port priority 64
stp priority Syntax

stp priority bridge-priority
undo stp priority
View
System View
Parameter
bridge-priority: Specifies the priority of a Switch, ranging from 0 to 61440.
The values are not consecutive integers. The step length is 4096. By default, the
value is 32768.
Description
Use the stp priority command to configure the bridge priority of the Switch.
Using undo stp priority command, you can restore the default bridge priority
of the Switch.
The priority value shall be a multiple of 4096, such as 0, 4096, 8192 etc. The
smaller value represents the higher priority. A Switch with higher priority is more
likely to be a root bridge.
Example
To set the priority of the Switch to 4096, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp priority 4096
stp root primary Syntax

stp root primary
undo stp root
View
System View
Parameter
None

Description
Use the stp root primary command to configure the current Switch as the
primary root of a spanning tree.
Use the undo stp root command to cancel the current Switch for primary root of
a spanning tree.
By default, the Switch is not a primary root.
You can designate a primary root for the spanning tree without caring about the
priority configuration of the Switch.
CAUTION: In a switching network, you can configure no more than one primary
root for a spanning tree but you can configure one or more secondary roots for it.
Remember not to designate more than one primary root in a spanning tree;
otherwise, the switching behavior will be unpredictable.
After a Switch is configured as a primary root bridge or secondary root bridge, you
can not modify the bridge priority of the Switch.
Example
To designate the current Switch as the primary root of a spanning tree, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp root primary
stp root secondary Syntax

stp root secondary
undo stp root
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the stp root secondary command to configure the current Switch as a
secondary root of a specified spanning tree.
Use the undo stp root command to cancel the designation of the current Switch
for a secondary root of a specified spanning tree.
By default, a Switch is not a secondary root.
You can designate one or more secondary roots for a spanning tree. When the
primary root fails or is powered off, a secondary root can take its place. If more
than one secondary root exists, the one with the smallest MAC address will
become the primary root of the specified spanning tree.

You can configure no more than one primary root for a spanning tree but you can
configure one or more secondary roots for it. You cannot change the bridge
priority of a Switch if you configure it as a secondary root of a spanning tree.
Example
To designate the Switch as a secondary root of the STP, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp root secondary
stp root-protection Syntax

stp root-protection
undo stp root-protection
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the stp root-protection command to enable Root protection function on a
Switch.
Use the undo stp root-protection command to restore the default status of
Root protection function.
By default, root protection is not enabled.
Following incorrect configuration or malicious attack, a legal root of the network

may receive a BPDU with higher priority and lose its status as root, which causes
problems with the network topology. Such problems may pull the higher-speed
traffic to lower-speed links and cause network congestion.
To avoid this problem, RSTP provides Root protection function. After being
configured with Root protection, a port always stays as a designated port. Once
this port receives a BPDU with higher priority, it turns to listening status and will
not forward any packets (as if the link to it is disconnected). It will resume normal
status if it receives no BPDU with higher-priority for a period of time.
Example
To enable Root protection function on GigabitEthernet1/0/1 of the Switch, enter

the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp root-protection

stp timeout-factor Syntax

stp timeout-factor number
undo stp timeout-factor
View
System View
Parameter
number: Specifies the multiple of hello time, ranging from 3 to 7.
Description
Use the stp timeout-factor command to configure the multiple of hello time
for the Switch.
Use the undo stp timeout-factor command to restore the default multiple
value.
By default, the multiple is 3.
The Ethernet Switch transmits RSTP packets every hello time seconds. By default, if
the Switch does not receive RSTP packets from the upstream Switch for 3 x hello
time seconds, the Switch will decide the upstream Switch is dead and will
recalculate the topology of the network. In a congested network, a system
administrator may want to increase the timeout interval to prevent an unnessary
network topology change. This can be accomplished by using the timeout-factor
command to set the multipler to the desired value. The higher the multipler the
greater the timeout interval. It is recommended to set 5, 6 or 7 as the value of
multiple in the steady network.
Example
To set the multiple value of hello time to 7, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp timeout-factor 7
stp timer forward-delay Syntax

stp timer forward-delay centiseconds
undo stp timer forward-delay
View
System View
Parameter
centiseconds: Specifies the time of forward delay in centisecond, ranging from
400 to 3000. By default, the value is 1500 centiseconds.
Description
Use the stp timer forward-delay command to configure the time of forward
delay for the Switch.

Use the undo stp timer forward-delay command to restore the default
forward delay time.
The value of forward delay is related to the “diameter” of the switching network.
The more extensive the switching network is, the longer the forward delay should
be set. You can use this command to modify the value of forward delay. The
default value, 1500, is recommended.
Related commands: stp timer hello, stp timer max-age.
Example
To set the forward delay of the device to 2000 centiseconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp timer forward-delay 2000
stp timer hello Syntax

stp timer hello centiseconds
undo stp timer hello
View
System View
Parameter
centiseconds: Specifies the value of hello time in centisecond, ranging from 100
to 1000. By default, the value is 200 centiseconds.
Description
Use the stp timer hello command to configure hello time of the Switch.
Use the undo stp timer hello command to restore the default hello time.
The Ethernet Switch transmits RSTP packets every hello time seconds. A longer
hello time can ease the CPU load of the Switch, but it will also affect the
performances of RSTP in how rapidly it responds to changes. The stp timer
hello command can be used to modify the value of hello time. The default value
is recommended.
Related commands: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer max-age, stp

transmit-limit.
Example
To set the hello time of the Switch to 300 centiseconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp timer hello 300
stp timer max-age Syntax

stp timer max-age centiseconds

undo stp timer max-age
View
System View
Parameter
centiseconds: Specifies the maximum age in centiseconds, ranging from 600 to
4000. By default, the value is 2000 centiseconds.
Description
Use the stp timer max-age command to configure the Max Age of the Switch.
Use the undo stp timer max-age command to restore the default Max Age.
Maximum age is used for judging if an RSTP packet is outdated. If the value is set
too small, the spanning tree will be computed too frequently because the network
congestion may be considered as a link failure. However, if the value is set too
large, the link failure may not be discovered in time. Maximum age is related to
the network “diameter”, or complexity of the switched network. The default
value, 2000, is recommended.
Related commands: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer hello.
Example
To set the Max Age of the Switch to 1000 centiseconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]stp timer max-age 1000
stp transmit-limit Syntax

stp transmit-limit packetnum
undo stp transmit-limit
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
packetnum: The maximum number of STP packets a port can send within one
hello time. It ranges from 1 to 255 and defaults to 3.
Description
Use the stp transmit-limit command to set the maximum number of STP
packets the current port can send within one hello time.
Use the undo stp transmit-limit command to restore the default value.
The larger the value of packetnum is, the larger the transmission rate is. However,
more Switch resources will be used.

Example
To set the packetnum parameter of GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to 5, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]stp transmit-limit 5


9 USING FABRIC COMMANDS
Fabric Configuration Commands

■ display xrn-fabric
■ change self-unit
■ change unit-id
■ set unit name
■ sysname
Fabric Commands This section describes how to use the Fabric configuration commands on your
Switch 5500G-EI.
display xrn-fabric Syntax

display xrn-fabric
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display xrn-fabric command to view the information of the entire
fabric, including unit ID, unit name, operation mode and the roll of a device
(master or slave). An asterisk (*) is used to indicate which unit you have connected
to via a console connection.
Example
To display fabric information, enter the following:
[SW5500]display xrn-fabric
Fabric name is SW5500 , system mode is L3.
Fabric authentication: NOT SUPPORT, unit number: 1.
Unit Name Unit ID
SW5500 1(*)
change self-unit Syntax

change self-unit to { 1 | auto-numbering }

318 CHAPTER 9: USING FABRIC COMMANDS
View
System View
Parameter
self-unit: current unit
auto-numbering: change the unit ID automatically.
Description
Use the change unit command to change the unit ID of the current Switch. By
default, the unit ID of a Switch is set to 1. A unit ID can be set to a value in the
range from 1 to the maximum number of devices supported in XRN.
Example
To change the unit ID of the current Switch to 3, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]change self-unit to 3
change unit-id Syntax

change unit-id < 1-8 > to { < 1-8 > | auto-numbering }
View
System View
Parameter
< 1-8 >: unit ID of the unit in a fabric
auto-numbering: change the unit ID automatically.
Description
Use the change unit-id command to change the unit ID of a Switch in the
Fabric. By default, the unit ID of a Switch is set to 1. A unit ID can be set to a value
in the range from 1 to the maximum number of devices supported in XRN by the
Switch 5500G-EI.
Related command: fabric save-unit-id
Example
To change the unit ID of the Switch from 6 to 4, enter the following:
<SW5500>system view
[SW5500]change unit-id 6 to 4
The unit exists in fabric
Continue? [Y/N] y
[SW5500]
%Apr 2 00:48:34:574 2000 Quidway FTM/3/DDPFLA:- 6 -Change unitid
successful, unit 4 saved UnitID(4) in flash!
[SW5500]display ftm topology
Total number of UNITs in fabric : 8, My CPU ID : 4

Fabric Commands 319
UID CPU-Mac Prio Fabric-port Chips Mid Pid A/M

1 00e0-fc00-5502 10 UP/DOWN 2 0/1 3 A
2 00e0-fc03-5502 10 UP/DOWN 2 2/3 3 A
3 00e0-fc04-5502 10 UP/DOWN 2 4/5 3 A
6 00e0-fc05-5502 10 UP/DOWN 2 10/11 3 A
5 00e0-fc06-5502 10 UP/DOWN 2 8/9 3 A
4 00e0-fc07-5502 5 UP/DOWN 2 6/7 3 M
7 00e0-fc04-6502 10 UP/DOWN 2 12/13 3 A
8 00e0-fc01-5502 10 UP/DOWN 2 14/15 5 A
set unit name Syntax

set unit unit-id name unit-name
View
System view
Parameter
unit-id: Unit ID of a device.
unit-name: Unit name of a device. It is a string comprising 1 to 64 characters.
Description
Use this command to set a name for a device.
Example
Set the name "finance" for the device with unit ID 1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]set unit 1 name finance
[SW5500]display xrn-fabric
Fabric name is SW5500, system mode is L3.
Fabric authentication : NOT SUPPORT, unit number : 1.
Unit Name Unit ID
finance 1(*)
sysname Syntax
sysname sysname
undo sysname
View
System view
Parameter
sysname: A string comprising 1 to 30 characters. By default, the fabric name of

Switch is SW5500.
Description
Use the sysname command to change the name of the fabric where the current
device belongs. The modification will affect the prompt character in the command
line interface. For example, if the fabric name of the switch is SW5500, the prompt
character in user view is <SW5500>.

320 CHAPTER 9: USING FABRIC COMMANDS
Use the undo sysname command to restore the default fabric name.
Example
Change the fabric name of the device to "building1".
<SW5500>display xrn-fabric
Fabric name(HostName): SW5500, Fabric authentication: md5
Fabric mode : L3, Fabric unit number: 2
Unit Name Unit ID
First 1
Second 2
[SW5500]sysname building1
<building1>display xrn-fabric
Fabric name(HostName): building1, Fabric authentication: md5
Fabric mode : L3, Fabric unit number: 2
Unit Name Unit ID
First 1
Second 2

11 USING AAA AND RADIUS
COMMANDS
802.1x Configuration Commands

■ display dot1x
■ dot1x
■ dot1x authentication-method
■ dot1x dhcp-launch
■ dot1x max-user
■ dot1x port-control
■ dot1x port-method
■ dot1x quiet-period
■ dot1x retry
■ dot1x supp-proxy-check
■ dot1x timer
■ reset dot1x statistics
Centralized MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands

■ debugging mac-authentication event
■ display mac-authentication
■ mac-authentication
■ mac-authentication domain
■ mac-authentication timer
AAA Configuration Commands

■ access-limit
■ attribute
■ cut connection
■ display connection
■ display domain
■ display local-user
■ domain
■ idle-cut
■ level

342 CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
■ local-user
■ messenger
■ password
■ radius-scheme
■ scheme
■ self-service-url
■ service-type
■ state
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands

■ accounting optional
■ data-flow-format
■ display local-server statistics
■ display radius
■ display radius statistics
■ display stop-accounting-buffer
■ key
■ local-server
■ nas-ip
■ primary accounting
■ primary authentication
■ radius nas-ip
■ radius scheme
■ reset radius statistics
■ reset stop-accounting-buffer
■ retry
■ retry realtime-accounting
■ retry stop-accounting
■ secondary accounting
■ secondary authentication
■ server-type
■ state
■ stop-accounting-buffer enable
■ timer
■ timer realtime-accounting
■ timer response-timeout
■ user-name-format

802.1x Configuration This section describes how to use the 802.1x configuration commands on your
display dot1x Syntax

display dot1x [ sessions | statistics [ interface interface-list ]]
View
All views
Parameter
interface: Displays the 802.1x information on the specified interface.
sessions: Displays the session connection information of 802.1x.
statistics: Displays the relevant statistics information of 802.1x.
interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet interfaces,

expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface-num ] } & < 1-10 >. interface-num specifies a single Ethernet
interface in the format interface-num = { interface-type interface-num |
interface-name }, where interface-type specifies the interface type,
interface-num specifies the interface number and interface-name specifies the
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, read the Parameter
of the Port Command Manual section.
Description
Use the display dot1x command to view the relevant information of 802.1x,
including configuration information, running state (session connection
information) and relevant statistics information.
By default, all the relevant 802.1x information about each interface will be
displayed.
This command can be used to display the following information on the specified
interface: 802.1x configuration, state or statistics. If no port is specified when
executing this command, the system will display all 802.1x related information.
For example, 802.1x configuration of all ports, 802.1x session connection
information, and 802.1x data statistical information. The output information of
this command can help the user to verify the current 802.1x configurations so as
to troubleshoot 802.1x.
Related commands: reset dot1x statistics, dot1x, dot1x retry, dot1x

max-user, dot1x port-control, dot1x port-method, dot1x timer.
Example
Display the configuration information of 802.1x.
<SW5500>display dot1x
Equipment 802.1X protocol is enabled
DHCP-launch is disabled
EAP-relay is enabled
Proxy trap checker is disabled
Proxy logoff checker is disabled

Configuration: Transmit Period 30 s, Handshake Period 15 s

Quiet Period 60 s, Quiet Period Timer is disabled
Supp Timeout 30 s, Server Timeout 100 s
The maximum retransmitting time 2
Total maximum 802.1x user resource number is 1024
Total current used 802.1x resource number is 0
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
802.1X protocol is disabled
Proxy trap checker is disabled
Proxy logoff checker is disabled
The port is a(n) authenticator
Authenticate Mode is auto
Port Control Type is Mac-based
Max on-line user number is 256
… (Omitted)
dot1x Syntax
dot1x [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
interface interface-list: Ethernet port list including several Ethernet ports.
interface-list = { interface-num [ to interface-num ] } & < 1-10 >.
interface-num specifies a single Ethernet port in the format interface-num = {
interface-type interface-num | interface-name }, where interface-type
specifies the port type, interface-num specifies the port number and
interface-name specifies the port name. For the respective meanings and value
ranges, read the Parameter of the Port Configuration section.
Description
Use the dot1x command to enable 802.1x on the specified port or globally, (that is
on the current device). Use the undo dot1x command to disable the 802.1x on
the specified port or globally.
By default, 802.1x is disabled on all the ports and globally on the device.
This command is used to enable the 802.1x on the current device or on the
specified port. When it is used in System View, if the parameter ports-list is not
specified, 802.1x will be globally enabled. If the parameter ports-list is
specified, 802.1x will be enabled on the specified port. When this command is
used in Ethernet Port View, the parameter interface-list cannot be entered and
802.1x can only be enabled on the current port.
The configuration command can be used to configure the global or port 802.1x
performance parameters before or after 802.1x is enabled. Before 802.1x is

enabled globally, if the parameters are not configured globally or for a specified
port, they will maintain the default values.
After the global 802.1x performance is enabled, only when port 802.1x
performance is enabled will the configuration of 802.1x become effective on the
port.
Related commands: display dot1x.
Example
To enable 802.1x on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1, enter the following.
<SW5500>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[SW5500]dot1x interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
To enable 802.1x globally, enter the following.

[SW5500]dot1x
dot1x Syntax
authentication-method dot1x authentication-method { chap | pap | eap md5-challenge }
undo dot1x authentication-method
View
System View
Parameter
Chap: Use CHAP authentication method.
Pap: Use PAP authentication method.
eap: Use EAP authentication method. At present, only md5 encryption method is
available
Description
Use the dot1x authentication-method command to configure the
authentication method for the 802.1x user. Use the undo dot1x
authentication-method command to restore the default authentication method
of the 802.1x user.
By default, CHAP authentication is used for 802.1x user authentication.
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) is a kind of authentication protocol with

two handshakes. It sends the password in the form of simple text.
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is a kind of authentication

protocol with three handshakes. It only transmits the username, not the password.
CHAP is more secure and reliable.
In the process of EAP authentication, the Switch directly sends authentication

information of an 802.1x user to a RADIUS server in the form of anEAP packet. It is

not necessary to transfer the EAP packet to a standard RADIUS packet first and
then send it to RADIUS server.
To use PAP, CHAP or EAP authentication, RADIUS server should support PAP, CHAP
or EAP authentication respectively.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example
Configure 802.1x user to use PAP authentication
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dot1x authentication-method pap
dot1x dhcp-launch Syntax

dot1x dhcp-launch
undo dot1x dhcp-launch
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the dot1x dhcp-launch command to set 802.1x to prevent the Switch from
triggering user ID authentication for users who configure static IP addresses in a
DHCP environment. Use the undo dot1x dhcp-launch command to allow the
Switch to trigger ID authentication.
By default, the Switch can trigger user ID authentication for users who configure
static IP addresses in a DHCP environment.
Related command: dot1x.
Example
Prevent the Switch from triggering the authentication ID for users who configure
static IP addresses in a DHCP environment.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dot1x dhcp-launch
dot1x max-user Syntax

dot1x max-user user-number [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x max-user [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View

Parameter
user-number: Specifies the limit to the amount of supplicants on the port,
By default, the maximum user number is 1024.
interface interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet

interfaces, expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, see the parameters
in the Port Command chapter.
Description
Use the dot1x max-user command to configure a limit to the amount of
supplicants on the specified interface using 802.1x. Use the undo dot1x
max-user command to restore the default value.
This command is used for setting a limit to the amount of supplicants that 802.1x
can hold on the specified interface. This command takes effect on the interface
specified by the parameter interface-list when executed in System View. It
takes effect on all the interfaces when no interface is specified. The parameter
interface-list cannot be entered when the command is executed in Ethernet
Port View and it takes effect only on the current interface.
Example
Configure the interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to hold no more than 32 users.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dot1x max-user 32 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
dot1x port-control Syntax

dot1x port-control { auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force-}
[ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x port-control [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
auto: Automatic identification mode, configuring the initial state of the interface
as unauthorized. The user is only allowed to receive or transmit EAPoL packets but
not to access the network resources. If the user passes the authentication flow, the
interface will Switch over to the authorized state and then the user is allowed to
access the network resources. This is the most common case.

authorized-force: Forced authorized mode, configuring the interface to always

stay in authorized state and the user is allowed to access the network resources
without authentication/authorization.
unauthorized-force: Forced unauthorized mode, configuring the interface to

always stay in non-authorized mode and the user is not allowed to access the
network resources.

of the Port Command chapter.
Description
Use the dot1x port-control command to configure the mode for 802.1x to
perform access control on the specified interface. Use the
undo dot1x port-control command to restore the default access control mode.
By default, the value is auto.
This command is used to set the mode, or the interface state, for 802.1x to
perform access control on the specified interface. This command has an effect on
the interface specified by the parameter interface-list when executed in
System View. It has an effect on all the interfaces when no interface is specified.
The parameter interface-list cannot be entered when the command is
executed in Ethernet Port View and it has an effect only on the current interface.
Example
To configure the interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to be in force-unauthorized state,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dot1x port-control force-unauthorized interface
gigabitethernet 1/0/1
dot1x port-method Syntax

dot1x port-method { macbased | portbased } [ interface
interface-list ]
undo dot1x port-method [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View

Parameter
macbased: Configures the 802.1x authentication system to perform
authentication on the supplicant based on MAC address.
portbased: Configures the 802.1x authentication system to perform

authentication on the supplicant based on interface number.

Description
Use the dot1x port-method command to configure the base for 802.1x to
perform access control on the specified interface. Use the undo dot1x
port-method command to restore the default access control base.
By default, the value is macbased.
This command is used to set the base for 802.1x to perform access control,
namely authenticate the users, on the specified interface. When macbased is used,
the users accessing this interface must be authenticated independently, and as
such will be able to access the network as long as they independently require.
When portbased is used, only the first user on that port needs to be
authenticated. Subsequent users accessing the network through this port are
considered authenticated. However if the original user terminates his connection,
the other users will need to be re-authenicated.
This command has an effect on the interface specified by the parameter

interface-list when executed in System View. It has an effect on all the interfaces
when no interface is specified. The parameter interface-list cannot be input when
the command is executed in Ethernet Port View and it has an effect only on the
current interface.
Example
To authenticate the supplicant based on the interface number on Gigabitethernet
1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dot1x port-method portbased interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
dot1x quiet-period Command

dot1x quiet-period
undo dot1x quiet-period

View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the dot1x quiet-period command to enable the quiet-period timer. Use the
undo dot1x quiet-period command to disable this timer.
If an 802.1x user has not been authenticated, the Authenticator will keep quiet for
a while (which is specified by quiet-period timer) before launching the
authentication again. During the quiet period, the Authenticator does not do
anything related to 802.1x authentication.
By default, the quiet-period timer is disabled.
Related command: display dot1x, dot1x timer.
Example
To enable quiet-period timer, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dot1x quiet-period
dot1x retry Syntax

dot1x retry max-retry-value
undo dot1x retry
View
System View
Parameter
max-retry-value: Specifies the maximum times an Ethernet switch can
retransmit the authentication request frame to the supplicant, ranging from 1 to
10.
By default, the value is 2, that is, the Switch can retransmit the authentication
request frame to the supplicant 2 times.
Description
Use the dot1x retry command to configure the maximum times a Switch can
retransmit the authentication request frame to the supplicant. Use the undo dot1x
retry command to restore the default maximum retransmission time.
After the Switch has transmitted an authentication request frame to the user for
the first time, if no user response is received during the specified time-range, the
Switch will re-transmit authentication request to the user. This command is used to
specify how many times the Switch can re-transmit the authentication request
frame to the supplicant. When the time is 1, the Switch is configured to transmit

the authentication request frame only once. 2 indicates that the Switch is
configured to transmit authentication request frame once again when no response
is received for the first time and so on. This command has an effect on all the
ports after configuration.
Example
To configure the current device to transmit an authentication request frame to the
user for no more than 9 times, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dot1x retry 9
dot1x supp-proxy-check Syntax

dot1x supp-proxy-check { logoff | trap } [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x supp-proxy-check { logoff | trap } [ interface
interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
logoff: Cuts network connection to a user upon detecting the use of proxy.
trap: Sends a trap message upon detecting a user using proxy to access the
Switch.

Description
Use the dot1x supp-proxy-check command to configure the control method for
802.1x proxy users on the specified interface. Use the undo dot1x
supp-proxy-check command to cancel the control method set for 802.1x proxy
users.
Note that when performing this function, the user logging on via proxy needs to
run the 3Com 802.1x client program, (3Com 802.1x client program version V1.29
or above is needed).
This command is used to set a control method on the specified interface when
executed in System View. The parameter interface-list cannot be input when the
command is executed in Ethernet Port View and it takes effect only on the current
interface. After globally enabling proxy user detection and control in System View,

only if you enable this feature on a specific port can this configuration take effect
on the port.
Example
To configure the Switch to cut the network connection to a user upon detecting
the use of proxy on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 ~ GigabitEthernet 1/0/8, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]dot1x supp-proxy-check logoff
[SW5500]dot1x supp-proxy-check logoff interface GigabitEthernet
1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/8
To configure the Switch to send a trap message upon detecting the use of proxy to
login to GigabitEthernet 1/0/9, enter the following:
[SW5500]dot1x supp-proxy-check trap

[SW5500]dot1x supp-proxy-check trap interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/9
or
[SW5500]dot1x supp-proxy-check trap

[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/9]dot1x supp-proxy-check trap
dot1x timer Syntax

dot1x timer { handshake-period handshake-period-value | quiet-period
quiet-period-value | tx-period tx-period-value | supp-timeout
supp-timeout-value | server-timeout server-timeout-value }
undo dot1x timer { handshake-period | quiet-period | tx-period |

supp-timeout | server-timeout }
View
System View
Parameter
handshake-period: This timer begins after the user has passed authentication.
After setting the handshake-period, the system will send a handshake packet
every handshake period seconds. Suppose the dot1x handshake-period time is
configured as N, the system will consider the user as having logged off and will set
the user state as logoff if the system does not receive a response from the user for
N consecutive times.
handshake-period-value: Handshake period. The value ranges from 1 to 1024 in
units of second and defaults to 15.
quiet-period: Specify the quiet timer. If an 802.1x user has not passed the
authentication, the Authenticator will keep quiet for a while (which is specified by
quiet-period timer) before launching the authentication again. During the quiet
period, the Authenticator does not do anything related to 802.1x authentication.

quiet-period-value: Specify how long the quiet period is. The value ranges
from 10 to 120 in units of second and defaults to 60.
server-timeout: Specify the timeout timer of an Authentication Server. If an

Authentication Server has not responded before the specified period expires, the
Authenticator will resend the authentication request.
server-timeout-value: Specify how long the duration of a timeout timer of an

Authentication Server is. The value ranges from 100 to 300 seconds and defaults
to 100 seconds.
supp-timeout: Specify the authentication timeout timer of a Supplicant. After

the Authenticator sends Request/Challenge request packet which requests the
MD5 encrypted text, the supp-timeout timer of the Authenticator begins to run. If
the Supplicant does not respond back successfully within the time range set by
this timer, the Authenticator will resend the above packet.
supp-timeout-value: Specify how long the duration of an authentication

timeout timer of a Supplicant is. The value ranges from 10 to 120 seconds and
defaults to 30 seconds.
tx-period: Specify the transmission timeout timer. After the Authenticator sends
the Request/Identity request packet which requests the user name or user name
and password together, timer of the Authenticator begins to run. If the Supplicant
does not respond back with authentication reply packet successfully, then the
Authenticator will resend the authentication request packet.
tx-period-value: Specify how long the duration of the transmission timeout

timer is. The value ranges from 10 to 120 seconds and defaults to 30 seconds.
Description
Use the dot1x timer command to configure the 802.1x timers. Use the undo
dot1x timer command to restore the default values.
802.1x has many timers that control the rational and orderly interacting of the
Supplicant, the Authenticator and the Authentication Server. This command can
set some of the timers (while other timers cannot be set) to adapt the interaction
process. Changing the timers could be necessary in some special cases, but
generally the user should keep the default values.
Example
To set the Authentication Server timeout timer to 150s, enter the following:
[SW5500]dot1x timer server-timeout 150
reset dot1x statistics Syntax

reset dot1x statistics [ interface interface-list ]

View
User View
Parameter
interface interface-list: Ethernet port list including several Ethernet ports.
interface-list = { interface-num [ to interface-num ] } & < 1-10 >.
interface-num specifies a single Ethernet port in the format port-num = {
interface-type interface-num | interface-name }, where interface-type
specifies the port type, interface-num specifies the port number and
interface-name specifies the port name. For the respective meanings and value
ranges, read the Parameter of the Port Configuration section.
Description
Use the reset dot1x statistics command to reset the statistics of 802.1x.
This command can be used to re-perform statistics if the user wants to delete the
former statistics of 802.1x.
When the original statistics are cleared, if no port type or port number is specified,
the global 802.1x statistics of the Switch and 802.1x statistics on all the ports will
be cleared. If the port type and port number are specified, the 802.1x statistics on
the specified port will be cleared.
Example
Clear the 802.1x statistics on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<SW5500>reset dot1x statistics interface Gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Centralized MAC
Address
Authentication
Configuration
Commands
debugging Syntax
mac-authentication debugging mac-authentication event
event
undo debugging mac-authentication event
View
User View
Parameter
None

Description
Use the debugging mac-authentication event command to enable centralized
MAC address authentication event debugging. Use the undo debugging
mac-authentication event command to disable event debugging.
Example
To enable centralized MAC address authentication event debugging, enter the
following:
<SW5500>debugging mac-authentication event
display Syntax
mac-authentication display mac-authentication [ interface interface-list ]
View
Any view
Parameter
Description
Use the display mac-authentication command to display the global
information on centralized MAC address authentication, including centralized
MAC address authentication features, value of each current timer, number of
online users, the MAC address in silent periods, and the authentication status of
the MAC address on each interface.
Example
Display the gloable information of centralized MAC address authentication
<SW5500>display mac-authentication
mac address authentication is Enabled.
offline detect period is 300s
quiet period is 1 minute
server response timeout value is 100s
max allowed user number is 1024
current user number amounts to 0
current domain:
Silent Mac User info:
MAC ADDR From Port Port Index
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
MAC address authentication is Enabled
Authenticate success: 0, failed: 0
Current online user number is 0
MAC ADDR Authenticate state AuthIndex

Table 52 Description of MAC address authentication configuration information
Field Description
mac address authentication The MAC address authentication feature is enabled
is Enabled on the switch
offline detect period Offline-detect timer, set the time interval for the
Switch to detect whether the user is offline. By
default, it is 300 seconds.
quiet period Quiet timer. A period of quiet time that the Switch
needed after failing to authenticate the user.
server response timeout Server timeout timer, set the timeout period to the
value connection between the Switch to the RADIUS
server.
max allowed user number The maximum number of users allowed by the
Switch.
current user number amounts Current user number.
current domain Current domain, by default, it is null.
Silent Mac User info The silent user information. If a user does not pass
the MAC address authentication, the Switch sets this
user to be silent, in this period of time, the Switch
does not authenticate this user.
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is Interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 link is in the up state.
link-up
MAC address authentication MAC address authentication is enabled on interface
is Enabled GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Authenticate success: 0, The statistics of the MAC address authentication on
failed: 0 the interface, including the number of users passing
the authentication and the number of users failing
the authentication.
Authenticate state There are four states of the online users:
■ Connecting: the user is connecting
■ Success: the user has passed the authentication
■ Failure: the user has failed the authentication
■ Logoff: the user is offline.
mac-authentication Syntax
mac-authentication [ interface interface-list ]
undo mac-authentication [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter

Description
Use the mac-authentication command to enable the centralized MAC address
authentication feature on a specified port or globally. Use the undo
mac-authentication command to disable the feature on a specified port or
globally.
By default, the centralized MAC address authentication feature is disabled on each

port and globally.
In System View, if the interface-list parameter is not specified, the centralized

MAC address authentication feature is enabled globally; if the interface-list
parameter is specified, the feature is enabled on the specified interfaces. In the
Ethernet Port View, the interface-list parameter cannot be specified, and you
can use the command only to enable the feature on the current interface.
Before or after the enabling of the centralized MAC address authentication, you
can configure related parameters both globally or on the port through their
respective commands. If the parameters are not configured before enabling this
feature, then the parameters will be in their default state when it is enabled.
You must first enable the centralized MAC address authentication globally and
then on the port to make the related configurations on the port effective.
Example
To enable the centralized MAC address authentication feature on port
GigabitEthernet 1/0/1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]mac-authentication interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
To enable the centralized MAC address authentication feature globally, enter the
following:
[SW5500]mac-authentication
domain mac-authentication domain isp-name
undo mac-authentication domain
View
System View
Parameter
isp-name: ISP domain name, character string with no more than 24 characters,
excluding characters like “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “<”, and ">".
Description
Use the mac-authentication domain command to configure the ISP domain
used by the centralized MAC address authentication user. Use the undo
mac-authentication domain command to return to the default ISP domain.

By default, the domain used by centralized MAC address authentication user is

null, that is, not configured.
Example
To configure the domain used by the MAC address to Cams, enter the following:
[SW5500]mac-authentication domain Cams
timer mac-authentication timer { offline-detect offline-detect-value |
quiet quiet-value | server-timeout server-timeout-value }
undo mac-authentication timer { offline-detect | quiet |
server-timeout }
View
System View
Parameter
offline-detect: Offline-detect timer, set the time interval for the Switch to
detect whether the user is offline.
offline-detect-value: Period set by the offline-detect timer, ranging from 1 to

65535, in seconds. The default value is 300 seconds.
quiet: Quiet timer. If the user fails authentication, the Switch needs a period of
quiet time (set by the quiet timer) before it re-authenticates. The Switch does not
authenticate during the quiet time.
quiet-value: Period set by the quiet timer, ranging from 1 to 65535, in minutes.
The default value is 1.
server-timeout: Server timeout timer. During the authentication to the user, if

the connection between the Switch and the RADIUS server times out, the Switch
denies the user’s access to the network on corresponding ports.
server-timeout-value: Period set by the server timeout timer, ranging form 1 to

65535, in seconds. The default value is 100 seconds.
Description
Use the mac-authentication timer command to configure timer parameters of
the centralized MAC address authentication. Use the undo mac-authentication
timer command to restore the value to the defaults.
For the related command, see display mac-authentication.
Example
To set the timeout timer of the server to 150 seconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]mac-authentication timer server-timeout 150

AAA Configuration This section describes how to use the AAA configuration commands on your
access-limit Syntax
access-limit { disable | enable max-user-number }
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
disable: No limit to the supplicant number in the current ISP domain.
enable max-user-number: Specifies the maximum supplicant number in the

current ISP domain, ranging from 1 to 1048
Description
Use the access-limit command to configure a limit to the amount of
supplicants in the current ISP domain.
By default, there is no limit to the amount of supplicants in the current ISP domain.
This command limits the amount of supplicants contained in the current ISP
domain. The supplicants may contend with each other for the network resources.
So setting a suitable limit to the amount will guarantee the reliable performance
for the existing supplicants.
Example
Sets a limit of 500 supplicants for the ISP domain, marlboro.net.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]domain marlboro.net
New domain added.
[SW5500-isp-marlboro.net]access-limit enable 500
attribute Syntax
attribute { ip ip-address | mac mac-address | idle-cut second |
access-limit max-user-number | vlan vlanid | location { nas-ip
ip-address port portnum | port portnum }
undo attribute {ip | mac | idle-cut | access-limit | vlan | location

}
View
Local User View
Parameter
idle-cut second: Allows/disallows the local users to enable the idle-cut
function. (The specific data for this function depends on the configuration of the
ISP domain where the users are located.) The argument minute defines the
idle-cut time, which is in the range of 60 to 7200 seconds.

access-limit max-user-number: Specifies the maximum number of users who

access the device using the current user name. The argument max-user-number is
in the range of 1 to 1024.
ip: Specifies the IP address of a user.
mac mac-address: Specifies the MAC address of a user. Where, mac-address

takes on the hexadecimal format of HHHH-HHHH-HHHH-HHHH.
vlan vlanid: Sets the VLAN attribute of user, in other words, the VLAN to which
a user belongs. The argument vlanid is an integer in the range of 1 to 4094.
location: Sets the port binding attribute of user.
nas-ip ip-address: The IP address of the access server in the event of binding a
remote port with a user. The argument ip-address is an IP address in dotted
decimal format and defaults to 127.0.0.1.
port portnum: Sets the port to which a user is bound. The argument portnum is
represented by “SlotNumber SubSlotNumber PortNumber”. If any of these three
items is absent, the value 0 will be used to replace it.
Description
Use the attribute command to configure some attributes for specified local user.
Use the undo attribute command to cancel the attributes that have been
defined for this local user.
It should be noted that the argument nas-ip must be defined for a user bound
with a remote port, which is unnecessary, however, in the event of a user bound
with a local port.
Related command: display local-user.
Example
To configure the IP address 10.110.50.1 to the user JohnQ, enter the following:
[SW5500]local-user JohnQ
New local user added.
[SW5500-luser-JohnQ]ip 10.110.50.1
cut connection Syntax

cut connection { all | access-type { dot1x | gcm | mac-authentication
} | domain domain-name | interface interface-type interface-number |
ip ip-address | mac mac-address | radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
vlan vlanid | ucibindex ucib-index | user-name user-name }
View
System View
Parameter
all: Configures to disconnect all connection.

access-type { dot1x | gcm | mac authentication }: Configures to cut a

category of connections according to logon type. dot1x means the 802.1x users.
gcm means gcm user. mac authentication means the centralized MAC address
authentication users.
domain domain-name: Configures to cut the connection according to ISP domain.

domain-name specifies the ISP domain name with a character string not exceeding
24 characters. The specified ISP domain shall have been created.
mac mac-address: Configures to cut the connection of the supplicant whose

MAC address is mac-address. The argument mac-address is in the hexadecimal
format (H-H-H).
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Configures to cut the connection

according to RADIUS server name. radius-scheme-name specifies the RADIUS
server name with a character string not exceeding 32 characters.
interface interface-type interface-number: Configures to cut the

connection according to the port.
ip ip-address: Configures to cut the connection according to IP address. The

argument ip-address is in the hexadecimal format (ip-address).
vlan vlanid: Configures to cut the connection according to VLAN ID. Here,
vlanid ranges from 1 to 4094.
ucibindex ucib-index: Configures to cut the connection according to

ucib-index. Here, ucib-index ranges from 0 to 4095.
user-name user-name: Configures to cut the connection according to user name.

user-name is the argument specifying the username. It is a character string not
exceeding 80 characters, excluding “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “<” and “>”. The @
character can only be used once in one username. The pure username (the part
before @, namely the user ID) cannot exceed 55 characters.
Description
Use the cut connection command to disconnect a user or a category of users by
force.
Related command: display connection.
Example
To cut all the connections in the ISP domain, marlboro.net, enter the following:
[SW5500]cut connection domain marlboro.net
display connection Syntax

display connection [ access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication } |
domain domain-name | interface interface-type interface-number | ip
ip-address | mac mac-address | radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
vlan vlanid | ucibindex ucib-index | user-name user-name ]

View
All views
Parameter
access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication }: Configures to display the
supplicants according to their logon type. dot1x means the 802.1x users.
mac-authentication means the centralized mac address authentication users.
domain domain-name: Configures to display all the users in an ISP domain.

domain-name specifies the ISP domain name with a character string not exceeding
mac mac-address: Configures to display the supplicant whose MAC address is

mac-address. The argument mac-address is in the hexadecimal format (H-H-H).
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Configures to display the supplicant

according to RADIUS server name. radius-scheme-name specifies the RADIUS
server name with a character string not exceeding 32 characters.
interface interface-type interface-number: Configures to display the

supplicant according the port.
ip ip-address: Configures to display the user specified with IP address. The

argument ipt-address is in the hexadecimal format (ip-address).
vlan vlanid: Configures to display the user specified with VLAN ID. Here,
vlanid ranges from 1 to 4094.
ucibindex ucib-index: Configures to display the user specified with

ucib-index. Here, ucib-index ranges from 0 to 4095.
user-name user-name: Configures to display a user specifies with user-name.

Description
Use the display connection command to view the relevant information of all
the supplicants or the specified one(s).
The output can help you with the user connection diagnosis and troubleshooting.
If no parameter is specified, this command displays the related information about

all connected users
Related command: cut connection.
Example
To display the relevant information of all the users, enter the following:
<SW5500>display connection
Total 0 connections matched ,0 listed.

display domain Syntax

display domain [ isp-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
isp-name: Specifies the ISP domain name, with a character string not exceeding
Description
Use the display domain command to view the configuration of a specified ISP
domain or display the summary information of all ISP domains.
This command is used to output the configuration of a specified ISP domain or

display the summary information of all ISP domains. If an ISP domain is specified,
the configuration information (content and format) will be displayed exactly the
same as the displayed information of the display domain command. The output
information can help with ISP domain diagnosis and troubleshooting. Note that
the accounting scheme to be displayed should have been created.
Related commands: access-limit, domain, radius scheme, state, display

domain.
Example
To display the summary information of all ISP domains of the system, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display domain
0 Domain = default system
State = Active
Scheme = Local Access-limit = Disable
Domain User Template:
Idle-cut = Disable
Self-service = Disable
Messenger Time = Disable
Default Domain Name: default_system
Total 1 domain(s).1 listed.
display local-user Syntax

display local-user [ domain isp-name | idle-cut { enable | disable }
| service-type { telnet | ftp | ssh | terminal | lan-access } |
state { active | block } | user-name user-name | vlan vlanid ]
View
All views
Parameter
domain isp-name: Configures to display all the local users in the specified ISP
domain. isp-name specifies the ISP domain name with a character string not
exceeding 24 characters. The specified ISP domain shall have been created.

idle-cut: Configures to display the local users according to the state of idle-cut
function. disable means that the user disables the idle-cut function and enable
means the user enables the function. This parameter only takes effect on the users
configured as lan-access type. For other types of users, the display local-user
idle-cut enable and display local-user idle-cut disable commands do
not display any information.
service-type: Configures to display local user of a specified type. telnet means

that the specified user type is telnet. ftp means that the specified user type is ftp.
ssh means the specified user type is ssh. terminal means that the specified user
type is terminal which refers to users who use the terminal service (login from the
console port). lan-access means that the specified user type is lan-access which
mainly refers to Ethernet accessing users, 802.1x supplicants for example.
state { active | block }: Configures to display the local users in the specified
state. active means that the system allows the user requesting network service
and block means the system does not allow the user requesting network service.
user-name user-name: Configures to display a user specified with user-name.

vlan vlanid: Configures to display the users belonged to specified VLAN.

vlanid is the integer, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Description
Use the display local-user command to view the relevant information of all
the local users or the specified one(s).
This command displays the relevant information about a specified or all the local
users. The output can help you with the fault diagnosis and troubleshooting
related to local user.
Related command: local-user.
Example
To display the relevant information of all the local users, enter the following:
<SW5500>display local-user
The contents of local user xxx:
State: Active ServiceType Mask:
Idle Cut: Disable
AccessLimit: Disable Current AccessNum: 0
Bind location: Disable
Vlan ID: Disable
Total 1 local user(s) Matched,1 listed.
domain Syntax
domain { isp-name | default { disable | enable isp-name }}
undo domain isp-name

View
System View
Parameter
isp-name: Specifies an ISP domain name. The name is expressed with a character
string not exceeding 24 characters, excluding “/”, “: ”, “*”, “? ”, “<”, and “>”.
default enable isp-name: Enables the default ISP domain specified by

isp-name.
default disable: Restores the default ISP domain to default system.
Description
Use the domain command to configure an ISP domain or enter the view of an
existing ISP domain. Use the undo domain command to cancel a specified ISP
domain.
By default, a domain named default system has been created in the system. The
attributes of default system are all default values.
ISP domain is a group of users belonging to the same ISP. Generally, for a
username in the userid@isp-name format, taking gw20010608@3Com163.net as an
example, the isp-name (that is, 3Com163.net) following the @ is the ISP domain
name. When 3Com 5500 Series Ethernet Switches control user access, as for an
ISP user whose username is in userid@isp-name format, the system will take
userid part as username for identification and take isp-name part as domain
name.
The purpose of introducing ISP domain settings is to support the application

environment with several ISP domains. In this case, an access device may have
supplicants from different ISP domains. Because the attributes of ISP users, such as
username and password structures, service types, may be different, it is necessary
to separate them by setting ISP domains. In ISP Domain View, you can configure a
complete set of exclusive ISP domain attributes for each ISP domain, which
includes AAA schemes ( RADIUS scheme applied and so forth.)
For a Switch, each supplicant belongs to an ISP domain. The system supports up to
16 ISP domains. If a user has not reported its ISP domain name, the system will
put it into the default domain.
When this command is used, if the specified ISP domain does not exist, the system
will create a new ISP domain. All the ISP domains are in the active state when
they are created.
Related commands: access-limit, radius scheme, state, display domain.
Example
To create a new ISP domain, marlboro.net, and enters its view, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
New Domain added.
[SW5500-isp-marlboro.net]

idle-cut Syntax
idle-cut { disable | enable minute flow }
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
disable: means disabling the user to use idle-cut function .
enable: means enabling the user to use the function.
minute: Specifies the maximum idle time, ranging from 1 to 120 and measured in
minutes.
flow: The minimum data traffic, ranging from 1 to 10,240,000 and measured in
bytes.
Description
Use the idle-cut command to configure the user template in the current ISP
domain.
By default, after an ISP domain is created, this attribute in user template is

disable, that is, the user idle-cut is disabled.
The user template is a set of default user attributes. If a user requesting for the
network service does not have some required attributes, the corresponding
attributes in the template will be endeavored to him as default ones. The user
template of the Switch you are using may only provide user idle-cut settings. After
a user is authenticated, if the idle-cut is configured to enable or disable by neither
the user nor the RADIUS server, the user will adopt the idle-cut state in the
template.
Because a user template only works in one ISP domain, it is necessary to configure
user template attributes for users from different ISP domain respectively.
Related command: domain
Example
To enable the user in the current ISP domain, 3Com163.net, to use the idle-cut
attribute specified in the user template (that is, enabling the user to use the
idle-cut function). The maximum idle time is 50 minutes and the minimum data
traffic is 500 bytes.
[SW5500-isp-marlboro.net]idle-cut enable 50 500
level Syntax
level level
undo level

View
Local User View
Parameter
level: Specifies user priority level, an integer ranging from 0 to 3.
Description
Use the level command to configure user priority level. Use the undo level
command to restore the default user priority level.
By default, the user priority level is 0.
Related command: local-user
If the configured authentication mode is none authentication or password

authentication, the command level that a user can access after login depends on
the priority of user interface. In the case of authentication requiring both
username and password, however, the accessible command level depends on user
priority level.
Example
To set the priority level of the user 3Com to 3, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]local-user 3Com1
[SW5500-luser-3Com1]level 3
local-user Syntax
local-user user-name
undo local-user { user-name | all [ service-type { telnet | ftp |

lan-access | ssh | terminal } ] }
View
System View
Parameter
user-name: Specifies a local username with a character string not exceeding 80
characters, excluding “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “<” and “>”. The @ character can only
be used once in one username. The pure username (the part before @, namely the
user ID) cannot exceed 55 characters. The user-name parameter is not case
sensitive.
service-type: Specifies the service type.
telnet: The specified user type is telnet.
ftp: The specified user type is ftp.
lan-access: The specified user type is lan-access which mainly refers to Ethernet

ssh: The specified user type is ssh.
terminal: The specified user type is terminal which refers to users who use the
terminal service (login from the console port).
all: All the users.
Description
Use the local-user command to configure a local user and enter the local user
view. Use the undo local-user command to cancel a specified local user.
By default, no local user.
Related commands: display local-user, server-type.
Example
To add a local user named 3Com1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-luser-3Com1]
messenger Syntax
messenger time { enable limit interval | disable }
undo messenger time
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
limit: Remaining-online-time threshold in minutes, in the range of 1 to 60. When
the remaining online time of a user is equal to this threshold, the Switch begins to
send alert messages to the client.
interval: Sending interval of alert messages in minutes, in the range of 5 to 60.
Description
Use the messenger time enable command to enable messenger alert and
configure the related parameters.
Use the messenger time disable command to disable messenger alert.
Use the undo messenger time command to restore messenger alert to default
settings.
By default, the messenger alert is disabled on the Switch.
This function allows the clients to inform the online users about their remaining
online time through message alert dialog box.
The implementation of this function is as follows:
■ On the Switch, use the messenger time enable command to enable this
function and to configure the remaining-online-time threshold (the limit
argument) and the alert message interval.

■ If the threshold is reached, the Switch sends messages containing the user's
remaining online time to the client at the interval you configured.
■ The client keeps the user informed of the remaining online time through a
message alert dialog box.
Example
To configure to start the sending of alert messages when the user's remaining
online time is 30 minutes and send the messages at an interval of five minutes,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]domain system
New Domain added
[SW5500-isp-system]messenger time enable 30 5
password Syntax
password { simple | cipher } password
undo password
View
Local User View
Parameter
simple: Specifies to display passwords in simple text.
cipher: Specifies to display passwords in cipher text.
password: Defines a password, which is a character string of up to 16 characters

if it is in simple text and of up to 24 characters if it is in cipher text.
Description
Use the password command to configure a password display mode for local users.
Use the undo password command to cancel the specified password display mode.
Related command: display local-user.
Example
To set the user 3Com1 to display the password in simple text, given the password
is 20030422, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-luser-3Com1]password simple 20030422
radius-scheme Syntax
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name
View
ISP Domain View

Parameter
radius-scheme-name: Specifies a RADIUS scheme, with a character string not
exceeding 32 characters.
Description
Use the radius-scheme command to configure the RADIUS scheme used by the
current ISP domain.
This command is used to specify the RADIUS scheme for the current ISP domain.
The specified RADIUS scheme shall have been created.
Related commands: radius scheme, display radius.
Example
The following example designates the current ISP domain, marlboro.net, to use
the RADIUS server, Radserver.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-isp-marlboro.net]radius-scheme Radserver
scheme Syntax
scheme { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name [ local ] | local | none }
undo scheme { radius-scheme | none }
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
radius-scheme-name: RADIUS scheme, a character string not exceeding 32
characters.
local: Local authentication.
none: No authentication.
Description
Use the scheme command to configure the AAA scheme to be referenced by the
current ISP domain. Use the undo scheme command to restore the default AAA
scheme.
The default AAA scheme is local.
When using scheme radius-scheme radius-scheme-name local in the

configuration command, the local refers to the alternative authentication
scheme if the RADIUS server does not respond normally. That is, when the RADIUS
server operates normally, the local scheme is not used; otherwise, the local scheme
is used. When using scheme radius-scheme radius-scheme-name (without
local), the local scheme does not work when there is no normal response

You can use either the scheme or radius-scheme command to specify the RADIUS
scheme for an ISP domain. If both of these two commands are used, the latest
configuration will take effect.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example
To specify the current ISP domain, 3Com163.net, to use the RADIUS scheme
3Com, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-isp-marlboro.net]scheme radius-scheme 3Com
self-service-url Syntax
self-service-url enable url-string
self-service-url disable
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
url-string: The URL address of the page used to change the user password on
the self-service server, a string with 1 to 64 characters. This string cannot contain
"?" character. If "?" is contained in the URL address, you must replace it with "|"
when inputting the URL address in the command line.
Description
Use the self-service-url enable command to configure self-service server
URL.
Use the self-service-url disable command to remove the configuration.
By default, self-service server URL is not configured on the Switch.
This command must be incorporated with a RADIUS server (such as a CAMS

server) that supports self-service. Self-service means that users can manage their
accounts and card numbers by themselves. And a server with the self-service
software is called a self-service server.
Once this function is enabled on the Switch, users can locate the self-service server
and perform self-management through the following operations:
■ Select "Change user password" on the 802.1x client.

■ After the client opens the default explorer (IE or NetScape), locate the specified
URL page used to change the user password on the self-service server.
■ Change user password on this page.
The "Change user password" option is available only after the user passed the
authentication; otherwise, this option is in grey and unavailable.

Example
In the ISP domain "marlboro.net", configure the URL address of the page used to
change the user password on the self-service server to
http://10.153.89.94/selfservice/modPasswd1x.jsp|userName.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-isp-marlboro.net] self-service-url enable
http://10.153.89.94/selfservice/modPasswd1x.jsp|userName
service-type Syntax
service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access | ssh |
terminal | telnet [ level level ] ] | telnet [ level level ] }
undo service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory ] | lan-access | telnet }
View
Local User View
Parameter
telnet: Specifies user type as Telnet.
level level: Specifies the level of Telnet users. The argument level is an integer
in the range of 0 to 3 and defaults to 0.
ftp: Specifies user type as ftp.
ftp-directory directory: Specifies the directory of ftp users, directory is a

character string of up to 64 characters.

ssh: The specified user type is ssh.
terminal: The specified user type is terminal which refers to users who use the
terminal service (login from the console port).
Description
Use the service-type command to configure a service type for a particular user.
Use the undo service-type command to cancel the specified service type for the
user.
When you configure the service type ssh, Telnet or Terminal, note the following:
■ When you configure a new service type for a user, the system adds the new
service type to the existing one.
■ You can set a user level when you configure a service type. If you set multiple
service types and specify the user levels, only the last configured user level is
valid. Service types do not have individual user levels.

You can use either level or service-type commands to specify the level for a
local user. If both of these commands are used, the latest configuration takes
effect.
Example
To set to provide the lan-access service for the user JohnQ, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]local-user JohnQ
[SW5500-luser-JohnQ]service-type lan-access
state Syntax
state { active | block }
View
ISP Domain View
Local User View
Parameter
active: Configures the current ISP domain (ISP Domain View)/current user (Local
User View) as being in active state, that is, the system allows the users in the
domain (ISP Domain View) or the current user (Local User View) to request
network service.
block: Configures the current ISP domain (ISP Domain View)/current user (Local
User View) as being in block state, that is, the system does not allow the users in
the domain (ISP Domain View) or the current user (Local User View) to request
network service.
Description
Use the state command to configure the state of the current ISP domain/current
user.
By default, after an ISP domain is created, it is in the active state (in ISP Domain
View).
A local user will be active (in Local User View) upon its creation.
In ISP Domain View, every ISP can either be in active or block state. If an ISP
domain is configured to be active, the users in it can request for network service,
while in block state, its users cannot request for any network service, which will
not affect the users currently online.
Related command: domain.
Example
To set the current ISP domain marlboro.net to be in the block state. The
supplicants in this domain cannot request for the network service, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500-isp-marlboro.net]state block
[SW5500-isp-marlboro.net]quit
To set the user 3Com1 to be in the block state, enter the following:
[SW5500-user-3Com1]state block
RADIUS Protocol This section describes how to use the RADIUS Protocol configuration commands
Configuration on your Switch.
Commands
accounting optional Syntax

accounting optional
undo accounting optional
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the accounting optional command to enable the selection of the RADIUS
accounting option. Use the undo accounting optional command to disable the
selection of RADIUS accounting option.
By default, selection of the RADIUS accounting option is disabled.
If no RADIUS server is available or if RADIUS accounting server fails when the

accounting optional is configured, the user can still use the network resource,
otherwise, the user will be disconnected.
The user configured with accounting optional command in RADIUS scheme will
no longer send real-time accounting update packet or stop accounting packet.
The accounting optional command in RADIUS Scheme View is only effective on

the accounting that uses this RADIUS scheme.
Example
Enable the selection of RADIUS accounting of the RADIUS scheme named as
CAMS.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]radius scheme cams
New Radius scheme
[SW5500-radius-cams]accounting optional
data-flow-format Syntax
data-flow-format data { byte | giga-byte | kilo-byte | mega-byte }
packet { giga-byte | kilo-byte | mega-byte | one-packet }

undo data-flow format
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
data: Set data unit.
byte: Set 'byte' as the unit of data flow.
giga-byte: Set 'giga-byte' as the unit of data flow.
kilo-byte: Set 'kilo-byte' as the unit of data flow.
mega-byte: Set 'mega-byte' as the unit of data flow.
packet: Set data packet unit.
giga-packet: Set 'giga-packet' as the unit of packet flow.
kilo-packet: Set 'kilo-packet' as the unit of packet flow.
mega-packet: Set 'mega-packet' as the unit of packet flow.
one-packet: Set 'one-packet' as the unit of packet flow.
Description
■ Use the data-flow-format command to configure the unit of data flow that
is sent to the RADIUS Server.
■ Use the undo data-flow format command to restore the unit to the default
setting.
By default, the data unit is byte and the data packet unit is one-packet.
Related command: display radius.
Example
To set the unit of data flow that is sent to kilo-byte and the data packet to
kilo-packet, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]radius scheme 3Com
New Radius scheme
[SW5500-radius-3Com]data-flow-format data kilo-byte packet
kilo-packet
display local-server Syntax

statistics display local-server statistics
View
All views

Parameter
None
Description
Use the display local-server statistics command to view the statistics of
local RADIUS authentication server.
Related command: local-server.
Example
To display the statistics of local RADIUS authentication server, enter the following
<SW5500>display local-server statistics
On Unit 1:
The localserver packet statistics:
Receive: 30 Send: 30
Discard: 0 Receive Packet Error: 0
Auth Receive: 10 Auth Send: 10
Acct Receive: 20 Acct Send: 20
On Unit 2:
The localserver packet statistics:
Receive: 0 Send: 0
Discard: 0 Receive Packet Error: 0
Auth Receive: 0 Auth Send: 0
Acct Receive: 0 Acct Send: 0
display radius Syntax

display radius [ radius-scheme-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
radius-scheme-name: Specifies the RADIUS scheme name with a character string
not exceeding 32 characters. Display all RADIUS schemes when the parameter is
not set.
Description
Use the display radius command to view the configuration information of all
RADIUS schemes or a specified one.
By default, this command outputs the configuration information about the

specified or all the RADIUS schemes. The output can help with RADIUS diagnosis
and troubleshooting.
Example
To display the configuration information of all the RADIUS schemes, enter the
following.
<SW5500>display radius
------------------------------------------------------------------

SchemeName = default system Index=0 Type=3Com

Primary Auth IP =127.0.0.1 Port=1645
Primary Acct IP =127.0.0.1 Port=1646
Second Auth IP =0.0.0.0 Port=1812
Second Acct IP =0.0.0.0 Port=1813
Auth Server Encryption Key= 3Com
Acct Server Encryption Key= 3Com
Accounting method = required
TimeOutValue(in second)=3 RetryTimes=3 RealtimeACCT(in minute)=12
Permitted send realtime PKT failed counts =5
Retry sending times of noresponse acct-stop-PKT =500
Quiet-interval(min) =5
Username format =without-domain
Data flow unit =Byte
Packet unit =1
unit 1 :
Primary Auth State=active, Second Auth State=block
Primary Acc State=active, Second Acc State=block
------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 1 RADIUS scheme(s). 1 listed
display radius statistics Syntax

display radius statistics
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display radius statistics command to view the statistics information
of RADIUS packet.
This command outputs the statistics information about the RADIUS packets. The
displayed packet information can help with RADIUS diagnosis and
troubleshooting.
Example
To display the statistics information of RADIUS packets, enter the following:
<SW5500>display radius statistics
state statistic(total=0):
DEAD=1048 AuthProc=0 AuthSucc=0
AcctStart=0 RLTSend=0 RLTWait=0
AcctStop=0 OnLine=0 Stop=0
StateErr=0
Receive and Send packets statistic:
Send PKT total :0 Receive PKT total:0
RADIUS received packets statistic:
Code= 2,Num=0 ,Err=0


Code=11,Num=0 ,Err=0
Code=22,Num=0 ,Err=0
Running statistic:
RADIUS received messages statistic:
Normal auth request ,Num=0 ,Err=0 ,Succ=0
EAP auth request ,Num=0 ,Err=0 ,Succ=0
Account request ,Num=0 ,Err=0 ,Succ=0
Account off request ,Num=0 ,Err=0 ,Succ=0
Leaving request ,Num=0 ,Err=0 ,Succ=0
display Syntax
stop-accounting-buffer display stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name
user-name }
View
All views
Parameter
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Configures to display the saved stopping
accounting requests according to RADIUS server name. radius-scheme-name
specifies the RADIUS server name with a character string not exceeding 32
characters.
session-id session-id: Configures to display the saved stopping accounting

requests according to the session ID. session-id specifies the session ID with a
character string not exceeding 50 characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Configures to display the saved stopping

accounting requests according to the saving time. Start-time specifies the start
time of the saving time range and stop-time specifies the stop time of the saving
time range. The time is expressed in the format hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd. When this
parameter is specified, all the stopping accounting requests saved in the time
range since start-time to stop-time will be displayed.
user-name user-name: Configures to display the saved stopping accounting

requests according to the username. User-name specifies the username, a
character string not exceeding 32 characters,. The @ character can only be used
once in one username. The pure username (the part before @, namely the user ID)
cannot exceed 24 characters.
Description
Use the display stop-accounting-buffer command to view the stopping
accounting requests, which have not been responded and saved in the buffer.
After transmitting the stopping accounting requests, if there is no response from

the RADIUS server, the Switch will save the packet in the buffer and retransmit it
for several times, which is set through the retry realtime-accounting.
This command is used to display the stopping accounting requests saved in the
Switch buffer. You can select to display the packets sent to a certain RADIUS

server, or display the packets according to user session ID or username. You may
also display the request packets saved during a specified time range. The displayed
packet information can help with diagnosis and troubleshooting.
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, stop-accounting-buffer

enable, retry stop-accounting.
Example
To display the stopping accounting requests saved in the system buffer since 0:0:0
to 23:59:59 on August 31, 2002, enter the following:
<SW5500>display stop-accounting-buffer time-range 0:0:0-2002/08/31
23:59:59-2002/08/31
Total find 0 record
key Syntax
key { accounting | authentication } string
undo key { accounting | authentication }
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
accounting: Configures to set/delete the authentication key for the RADIUS
accounting packet.
authentication: Configures to set/delete the encryption key for RADIUS

authentication/authorization packet.
string: Specifies the key with a character string not exceeding 16 characters. By
default, the key is “3Com”.
Description
Use the key command to configure encryption key for RADIUS
authentication/authorization or accounting packet. Use the undo key command
to restore the default key.
RADIUS client (Switch) and RADIUS server use MD5 algorithm to hash the
exchanged packets. The two ends verify the packet through setting the key. Only
when the keys are identical can both ends accept the packets from each other and
give responses. So it is necessary to ensure that the keys set on the Switch and the
RADIUS server are identical. If the authentication/authorization and accounting are
performed on two different servers with different keys, you should set two keys
respectively.
Related commands: primary accounting, primary authentication, radius

scheme.
Example
Example 1:

To set the authentication/authorization key of the RADIUS scheme to “hello”,

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]key authentication hello
Example 2:
To set the accounting packet key of the RADIUS scheme to “ok”, enter the
following:
[SW5500-radius-3Com]key accounting ok
local-server Syntax
local-server nas-ip ip-address key password
undo local-server nas-ip ip-address
View
System View
Parameter
nas-ip ip-address: set NAS-IP address of access server. ip-address is expressed
in the format of dotted decimal. By default, there is a local server with the NAS-IP
address of 127.0.0.1.
key password: Set password of logon user. password is a character string

containing up to 16 characters.
Description
Use the local-server command to configure the parameters of local RADIUS
authentication server. Use the undo local-server command to cancel a local
RADIUS authentication server.
RADIUS service, which adopts authentication/authorization/accounting servers to

manage users, is widely used in the Switch 5500G-EI. Besides, local
authentication/authorization service is also used in these products and it is called
local RADIUS authentication server function, that is, realize basic RADIUS function
on the Switch.
When using local RADIUS authentication server function, remember the number
of the UDP port used for authentication is 1645 and that for accounting is 1646.
The password configured by this command must be the same as that of the
RADIUS authentication/authorization packet configured by the command key
authentication in the RADIUS Scheme View.
The Switch 5500G-EI Family supports up to 16 local RADIUS authentication

servers.
Related commands: radius scheme, state and key.

Example
To set the IP address of local RADIUS authentication server to 10.110.1.2 and the
password to 3Com, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]local-server nas-ip 10.110.1.2 key 3Com
nas-ip Syntax
nas-ip ip-address
undo nas-ip
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address in dotted decimal format.
Description
Use the nas-ip command to set the source IP address of the network access
server (NAS, the Switch in this manual), so that all packets destined for the RADIUS
server carry the same source IP address. Use the undo nas-ip command to cancel
the configuration.
Specifying a source address for the RADIUS packets to be transmitted can avoid
the situation where the packets sent back by the RADIUS server cannot be
received as the result of a physical interface failure. The address of a loopback
interface is usually used as the source address.
By default, the source IP address of packets is the IP address of the output port.
Related commands: display radius, radius nas-ip.
Example
To set the source IP address that is carried in the RADIUS packets sent by the NAS
(the Switch) to 10.1.1.1, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]radius scheme test1
New radius scheme
[SW5500-radius-test1]nas-ip 10.1.1.1
primary accounting Syntax

primary accounting ip-address [ port-number ]
undo primary accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View

Parameter
ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal format.
port-number: Specifies UDP port number. ranging from 1 to 65535. .
Description
Use the primary accounting command to configure the IP address and port
number for the primary accounting server. Use the undo primary accounting
command to restore the default IP address and port number of the primary
RADIUS accounting server.
By default, as for the newly created RADIUS scheme, the IP address of the primary
accounting server is 0.0.0.0, and the UDP port number of this server is 1813; as
for the "default system" RADIUS scheme created by the system, the IP address of
the primary accounting server is 127.0.0.1, and the UDP port number is 1646.
After creating a RADIUS scheme, you are supposed to set IP addresses and UDP
port numbers for the RADIUS servers, including primary/second
authentication/authorization servers and accounting servers. In real networking
environments, the above parameters shall be set according to the specific
requirements. However, you must set at least one authentication/authorization
server and an accounting server. Besides, ensure that the RADIUS service port
settings on the Switch is consistent with the port settings on the RADIUS server.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.
Example
To set the IP address of the primary accounting server of RADIUS scheme,
“3Com”, to 10.110.1.2 and the UDP port 1813 to provide RADIUS accounting
service, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]primary accounting 10.110.1.2 1813
primary authentication Syntax

primary authentication ip-address [ port-number ]
undo primary authentication
View
RADIUS Server Group View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal format. By default, the IP addresses of
the primary authentication/authorization is at 0.0.0.0.
port-number: Specifies UDP port number. ranging from 1 to 65535. By default,

the UDP port for authentication/authorization service is 1812 .

Description
Use the primary authentication command to configure the IP address and port
number for the primary RADIUS authentication/authorization. Use the undo
primary authentication command to restore the default IP address and port
number of the primary RADIUS authentication/authorization.
After creating a RADIUS server group, you are supposed to set IP addresses and
UDP port numbers for the RADIUS servers, including primary/second
authentication/authorization servers and accounting servers. In real networking
environments, the above parameters shall be set according to the specific
requirements. However, you set at least one authentication/authorization server
and an accounting server. Besides, ensure that the RADIUS service port settings on
the Switch is consistent with the port settings on the RADIUS server.
Example
To set the IP address of the primary authentication/authorization server of RADIUS
server group, “3Com”, to 10.110.1.1 and the UDP port 1812 to provide RADIUS
authentication/authorization service, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]primary authentication 10.110.1.1 1812
radius nas-ip Syntax

radius nas-ip ip-address
undo radius nas-ip
View
System View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address in dotted decimal format.
Description
Use the radius nas-ip command to specify the source address of the RADIUS
packet sent from NAS. Use the undo radius nas-ip command to restore the
default setting.
By specifying the source address of the RADIUS packet, you can avoid unreachable
packets as returned from the server upon interface failure. The source address is
normally recommended to be a loopback interface address.
By default, the source address is not specified, that is, the address of the interface
sending the packet serves as the source address.
This command specifies only one source address; therefore, the newly configured
source address may overwrite the original one.

Example
To configure the Switch to send RADIUS packets from 129.10.10.1, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]radius nas-ip 129.10.10.1
radius scheme Syntax

radius scheme radius-scheme-name
undo radius scheme radius-scheme-name
View
System View
Parameter
radius-scheme-name: Specifies the Radius server name with a character string
not exceeding 32 characters.
Description
Use the radius scheme command to configure a RADIUS scheme group and enter
its view. Use the undo radius scheme command to delete the specified RADIUS
scheme.
A default RADIUS scheme named system has been created in the system. The
attributes of default system are all default values.
RADIUS protocol configuration is performed on a per-RADIUS-scheme basis. Every

RADIUS scheme shall at least have the specified IP address and UDP port number
of the RADIUS authentication/authorization/accounting server and some necessary
parameters exchanged with the RADIUS client end (Switch). It is necessary to
create the RADIUS scheme and enter its view before performing other RADIUS
protocol configurations.
A RADIUS scheme can be used by several ISP domains at the same time. You can
configure up to 16 RADIUS schemes, including the default scheme named as
default system.
Although undo radius scheme can remove a specified RADIUS scheme, the
default one cannot be removed. Note that a scheme currently in use by the online
user cannot be removed.
Related commands: key, retry realtime-accounting, radius-scheme, timer

realtime-accounting, stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry
stop-accounting, server-type, state, user-name-format, retry, display
radius, display radius statistics.
Example
To create a RADIUS scheme named “3Com” and enter its view, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view


New Radius scheme
[SW5500-radius-3Com]
reset radius statistics Syntax

reset radius statistics
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset radius statistics command to clear the statistic information related to
the RADIUS protocol.
Related command: display radius.
Example
To clear the RADIUS protocol statistics, enter the following:
<SW5500>reset radius statistics
reset Syntax
stop-accounting-buffer reset stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name
user-name }
View
User View
Parameter
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Configures to delete the stopping
accounting requests from the buffer according to the specified RADIUS server
name. radius-scheme-name specifies the RADIUS server name with a character
string not exceeding 32 characters.
session-id session-id: Configures to delete the stopping accounting requests

from the buffer according to the specified session ID. session-id specifies the
session ID with a character string not exceeding 50 characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Configures to delete the stopping

accounting requests from the buffer according to the saving time. Start-time
specifies the start time of the saving time range and stop-time specifies the stop
time of the saving time range. The time is expressed in the format
hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd. When this parameter is set, all the stopping accounting
requests saved since start-time to stop-time will be deleted.
user-name user-name: Configures to delete the stopping accounting requests

from the buffer according to the username. User-name specifies the username, a
character string not exceeding 32 characters, excluding “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “<”

and “>”. The @ character can only be used once in one username. The pure
username (the part before @, namely the user ID) cannot exceed 24 characters.
Description
Use the reset stop-accounting-buffer command to reset the stopping
accounting requests, which are saved in the buffer and have not been responded.
By default, after transmitting the stopping accounting requests, if there is no

response from the RADIUS server, the Switch will save the packet in the buffer and
retransmit it for several times, which is set through the retry
realtime-accounting command.
This command is used to delete the stopping accounting requests from the Switch
buffer. You can select to delete the packets transmitted to a specified RADIUS
server, or according to the session-id or username, or delete the packets
transmitted during the specified time-range.
Related commands: stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry

stop-accounting, display stop-accounting-buffer.
Example
To delete the stopping accounting requests saved in the system buffer by the user,
user0001@marlboro.net, enter the following:
[SW5500]reset stop-accounting-buffer user-name user0001@marlboro.net
To delete the stopping accounting requests saved in the system buffer since 0:0:0
to 23:59:59 on August 31, 2002, enter the following:
[SW5500]reset stop-accounting-buffer time-range 0:0:0-2002/08/31
23:59:59-2002/08/31
retry Syntax
retry retry-times
undo retry
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
retry-times: Specifies the maximum times of retransmission, ranging from 1 to
20. By default, the value is 3.
Description
Use the retry command to configure the RADIUS request retransmission times.
Use the undo retry command to restore the retry-times to default value.
Because RADIUS protocol uses UDP packets to carry the data, its communication
process is not reliable. If the RADIUS server has not responded NAS until timeout,
NAS has to retransmit RADIUS request packet. If it transmits more than the
specified retry-time, NAS considers that the communication with the current

RADIUS server has been disconnected and it will transmit request packet to other
RADIUS servers.
Setting a suitable retry-time according to the network situation can speed up the
system response.
Related command: radius scheme
Example
To set to retransmit the RADIUS request packet no more than 5 times via the server
3Com in the RADIUS scheme, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]retry 5
retry Syntax
realtime-accounting retry realtime-accounting retry-times
undo retry realtime-accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
retry-times: Specifies the maximum times of real-time accounting request
failing to be responded, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the accounting request
can fail to be responded up to 5 times.
Description
Use the retry realtime-accounting command to configure the maximum
number of retries for real-time accounting requests. Use the undo retry
realtime-accounting command to restore the maximum number of retries for
real-time accounting requests to the default value.
RADIUS server usually checks if a user is online with timeout timer. If the RADIUS
server has not received the real-time accounting packet from NAS, it will consider
that there is line or device failure and stop accounting. Therefore, it is necessary to
disconnect the user at the NAS end and on the RADIUS server synchronously when
unexpected failure occurs. The Switch 5500G-EI Family supports a maximum
number of times that real-time accounting requests can fail to be responded to.
NAS will disconnect the user if it has not received a real-time accounting response
from the RADIUS server for the number of specified times.
How is the value of count calculated? Suppose RADIUS server connection will
timeout in T and the real-time accounting interval of NAS is t, then the integer
part of the result from dividing T by t is the value of count. Therefore, when
applied, T is suggested the numbers which can be divided exactly by t.

Example
To allow the real-time accounting request failing to be responded for up to 10
times, enter the following:
[SW5500-radius-3Com]retry realtime-accounting 10
retry stop-accounting Syntax

retry stop-accounting retry-times
undo retry stop-accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
retry-times: Specifies the maximal retransmission times after stopping
accounting request,. ranging from 10 to 65535. By default, the value is 500.
Description
Use the retry stop-accounting command to configure the maximal
retransmission times after stopping accounting request. Use the undo retry
stop-accounting command to restore the retransmission times to the default
value.
Because the stopping accounting request concerns account balance and will affect
the amount of charge, which is very important for both the user and ISP, NAS shall
make its best effort to send the message to RADIUS accounting server.
Accordingly, if the message from the Switch to RADIUS accounting server has not
been responded, the Switch shall save it in the local buffer and retransmit it until
the server responds or discard the messages after transmitting for specified times.
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, radius scheme, display

stop-accounting-buffer.
Example
To indicate that, when stopping accounting request for the server “3Com” in the
RADIUS server group, the Switch will retransmit the packets for up to 1000 times,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]retry stop-accounting 1000
secondary accounting Syntax

secondary accounting ip-address [ port-number ]
undo secondary accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View

Parameter
second accounting server is at 0.0.0.0.
port-number: Specifies the UDP port number, ranging from 1 to 65535. By

default, the accounting service is provided via UDP 1813.
Description
Use the secondary accounting command to configure the IP address and port
number for the second RADIUS accounting server. Use the undo secondary
accounting command to restore the IP address and port number to default
values.
For detailed information, read the Description of the primary accounting

command.
Example
To set the IP address of the second accounting server of RADIUS scheme, 3Com, to
10.110.1.1 and the UDP port 1813 to provide RADIUS accounting service, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]secondary accounting 10.110.1.1 1813
secondary Syntax
authentication secondary authentication ip-address [ port-number ]
undo secondary authentication
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
second authentication/authorization is at 0.0.0.0.
port-number: Specifies the UDP port number, ranging from 1 to 65535. By

default, the authentication/authorization service is provided via UDP 1812
Description
Use the secondary authentication command to configure the IP address and
port number for the second RADIUS authentication/authorization. Use the undo
secondary authentication command to restore the IP address and port number
to default values.
For detailed information, read the Description of the primary authentication

command.

Example
To set the IP address of the second authentication/authorization server of RADIUS
scheme, “3Com”, to 10.110.1.2 and the UDP port 1812 to provide RADIUS
authentication/authorization service, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]secondary authentication 10.110.1.2 1812
server-type Syntax
server-type { 3com | standard }
undo server-type
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
3Com: Configures the Switch to support the extended RADIUS server type, which
requires the RADIUS client end (Switch) and RADIUS server to interact according
RADIUS extensions.
standard: Configures the Switch to support the RADIUS server of Standard type,
which requires the RADIUS client end (Switch) and RADIUS server to interact
according to the regulation and packet format of standard RADIUS protocol (RFC
2138/2139 or newer).
Description
Use the server-type command to configure the RADIUS server type supported by
the Switch. Use the undo server-type to restore the RADIUS server type to the
default value.
By default, the newly created RADIUS scheme supports the server of standard.
type, while the "default system" RADIUS scheme created by the system supports
the server of 3Com type.
The Switch 5500G-EI supports standard RADIUS protocol and the extended
RADIUS service platform independently developed by 3Com. This command is
used to select the supported RADIUS server type.
Example
To set the RADIUS server type of RADIUS scheme, “3Com” to 3Com, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]server-type 3Com

state Syntax
state { primary | secondary } { accounting | authentication } { block
| active }
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
primary: Configures to set the state of the primary RADIUS server.
secondary: Configures to set the state of the second RADIUS server.
accounting: Configures to set the state of RADIUS accounting server.
authentication: Configures to set the state of RADIUS

authentication/authorization.
block: Configures the RADIUS server to be in the state of block.
active: Configures the RADIUS server to be active, namely the normal

operation state.
Description
Use the state command to configure the state of RADIUS server.
By default, as for the newly created RADIUS scheme, the primary and secondary
accounting/authentication servers are in the state of block; as for the "default
system" RADIUS scheme created by the system, the primary
accounting/authentication servers are in the state of active, and the secondary
accounting/authentication servers are in the state of block.
For the primary and second servers (no matter an authentication/authorization or

an accounting server), if the primary server is disconnected to NAS for some fault,
NAS will automatically turn to exchange packets with the second server. However,
after the primary one recovers, NAS will not resume the communication with it at
once, instead, it continues communicating with the second one. When the second
one fails to communicate, NAS will turn to the primary one again. This command
is used to set the primary server to be active manually, in order that NAS can
communicate with it right after the troubleshooting.
When the primary and second servers are all active or block, NAS will send the
packets to the primary server only.
Related commands: radius scheme, primary authentication, secondary

authentication, primary accounting, secondary accounting.
Example
To set the second authentication server of RADIUS scheme, “3Com”, to be active,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]state secondary authentication active

stop-accounting-buffer Syntax
enable stop-accounting-buffer enable
undo stop-accounting-buffer enable
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the stop-accounting-buffer enable command to configure to save the
stopping accounting requests without response in the Switch buffer. Use the undo
stop-accounting-buffer enable command to cancel the function of saving the
stopping accounting requests without response in the Switch buffer.
By default, enable to save the stopping accounting requests in the buffer.
Because the stopping accounting request concerns the account balance and will
affect the amount of charge, which is very important for both the user and ISP,
NAS shall make its best effort to send the message to the RADIUS accounting
server. Accordingly, if the message from the Switch to the RADIUS accounting
server has not been responded to, the Switch shall save it in the local buffer and
retransmit it until the server responds or discard the messages after transmitting
for a specified number of times.
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, radius scheme, display

stop-accounting-buffer.
Example
To indicate that, for the server “3Com” in the RADIUS scheme, the Switch will
save the stopping accounting request packets in the buffer, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]stop-accounting-buffer enable
timer Syntax
timer seconds
undo timer
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
seconds: RADIUS server response timeout timer, ranging from 1 to 10 and
measured in seconds. By default, the value is 3.

Description
Use the timer command to configure RADIUS server response timer. Use the undo
timer command to restore the default value of the timer.
After a RADIUS (authentication/authorization or accounting) request packet has

been transmitted for a period of time, if NAS has not received the response from
the RADIUS server, it has to retransmit the message to guarantee RADIUS service
for the user. The period taken is called RADIUS server response timeout time,
which is controlled by the RADIUS server response timeout timer in the Switch.
This command is used to set this timer.
Setting a suitable timer according to the network situation will enhance system
performance.
Related commands: radius scheme, retry.
Example
To set the response timeout timer of RADIUS scheme, 3Com, to 5 seconds, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]timer 5
timer Syntax
realtime-accounting timer realtime-accounting minute
undo timer realtime-accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
minute: Real-time accounting interval, ranging from 3 to 60, measured in minutes
in multiples of 3. By default, the value is 12.
Description
Use the timer realtime-accounting command to configure the real-time
accounting interval. Use the undo timer realtime-accounting command to
restore the default interval.
To implement real-time accounting, it is necessary to set a real-time accounting

interval. After the attribute is set, NAS will transmit the accounting information of
online users to the RADIUS server regularly.
The value of minute is related to the performance of NAS and RADIUS server. The
smaller the value is, the higher the requirement for NAS and RADIUS server is.
When there are a large amount of users (more than 1000, inclusive), we suggest a
larger value. The following table recommends the ratio of minute value to number
of users.

Table 53 Recommended ratio of minute to number of users
Real-time accounting
Number of users interval (minute)
1 to 99 3
100 to 499 6
500 to 999 12
>1000 >15
Related commands: retry realtime-accounting, radius scheme.
Example
To set the real-time accounting interval of RADIUS scheme, “3Com”, to 15
minutes, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]timer realtime-accounting 15
timer response-timeout Syntax

timer response-timeout seconds
undo timer response-timeout
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
seconds: RADIUS server response timeout timer, ranging from 1 to 10 seconds. By
default, the value is 3.
Description
Use the timer response-timeout command to configure the RADIUS server
response timer.
Use the undo timer command to restore the default.
If the NAS receives no response from the RADIUS server after sending a RADIUS
request (authentication/authorization or accounting request) for a period of time,
the NAS resends the request, thus ensuring the user can obtain the RADIUS
service. You can specify this period by setting the RADIUS server response timeout
timer, taking into consideration the network condition and the desired system
performance.
Related commands: radius scheme, retry.
Example
To set the response timeout timer in the RADIUS scheme 3Com to 5 seconds,
<SW5500>system-view


[SW5500-radius-3Com]timer response-timeout 5
user-name-format Syntax
user-name-format { with-domain | without-domain }
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
with-domain: Specifies to send the username with domain name to RADIUS
server.
without-domain: Specifies to send the username without domain name to

RADIUS server.
Description
Use the user-name-format command to configure the username format sent to
RADIUS server.
By default, the username sent to RADIUS servers includes the ISP domain name.
The supplicants are generally named in userid@isp-name format. The part

following “@” is the ISP domain name. The Switch will put the users into certain
ISP domains according to the domain names. However, some earlier RADIUS
servers reject the username including the ISP domain name. In this case, the
username will be sent to the RADIUS server after its domain name is removed.
Accordingly, the Switch provides this command to decide whether the username
that is to be sent to RADIUS server carries the ISP domain name or not.
If a RADIUS scheme is configured to reject usernames including ISP domain names,

the RADIUS scheme shall not be simultaneously used in more than one ISP
domains. Otherwise, the RADIUS server will regard two users in different ISP
domains as the same user by mistake, if they have the same username (excluding
their respective domain names.)
Example
To specify to send the username without domain name to RADIUS server, enter
the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-radius-3Com]user-name-format without-domain


12 USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
COMMANDS
File System Management Commands

■ cd
■ copy
■ delete
■ dir
■ execute
■ file prompt
■ format
■ mkdir
■ more
■ move
■ pwd
■ rename
■ reset recycle-bin
■ rmdir
■ undelete
Configuration File Management Commands

■ display current-configuration
■ display saved-configuration
■ display this
■ display startup
■ reset saved-configuration
■ save
■ startup saved-configuration
FTP Server Configuration Commands

■ display ftp-server
■ display ftp-user
■ ftp server
■ ftp timeout

398 CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
■ local-user
■ password
■ service-type
FTP Client Commands

■ ascii
■ binary
■ bye
■ cd
■ cdup
■ close
■ delete
■ dir
■ disconnect
■ ftp
■ get
■ lcd
■ ls
■ mkdir
■ passive
■ put
■ pwd
■ quit
■ remotehelp
■ rmdir
■ user
■ verbose
TFTP Configuration Commands

■ tftp get
■ tftp put
MAC Address Table Management Commands

■ display mac-address
■ display mac-address aging-time
■ mac-address
■ mac-address max-mac-count
■ mac-address timer
Device Management Commands

■ boot boot-loader

399
■ boot bootrom
■ display boot-loader
■ display cpu
■ display device
■ display fan
■ display memory
■ display power
■ display schedule reboot
■ reboot
■ schedule reboot at
■ schedule reboot delay
Basic System Configuration and Management Commands

■ clock datetime
■ clock summer-time
■ clock timezone
■ sysname
System Status and System Information Display Commands

■ display clock
■ display config-agent
■ display debugging
■ display version
System Debug Commands

■ debugging
■ display diagnostic-information
Network Connection Test Commands

■ end-station polling ip-address
■ ping
■ tracert
HWPing Commands
■ hwping-agent enable
■ hwping
■ count
■ destination ip
■ frequency
■ test-type
■ test-enable

Log Commands
■ display channel
■ display info-center
■ display logbuffer
■ display logbuffer summary
■ display trapbuffer
■ info-center channel name
■ info-center console channel
■ info-center enable
■ info-center logbuffer
■ info-center loghost
■ info-center loghost source
■ info-center monitor channel
■ info-center snmp channel
■ info-center source
■ info-center switch-on
■ info-center timestamp
■ info-center trapbuffer
■ reset logbuffer
■ reset trapbuffer
■ terminal debugging
■ terminal logging
■ terminal monitor
■ terminal trapping
SNMP Configuration Commands

■ display snmp-agent
■ display snmp-agent community
■ display snmp-agent group
■ display snmp-agent mib-view
■ display snmp-agent statistics
■ display snmp-agent sys-info
■ display snmp-agent usm-user
■ display snmp-proxy unit
■ enable snmp trap
■ snmp-agent community
■ snmp-agent group
■ snmp-agent local-engineid
■ snmp-agent mib-view

401
■ snmp-agent packet max-size

■ snmp-agent sys-info
■ snmp-agent target-host
■ snmp-agent trap enable
■ snmp-agent trap life
■ snmp-agent trap queue-size
■ snmp-agent trap source
■ snmp-agent usm-user
■ undo snmp-agent
RMON Configuration Commands

■ display rmon alarm
■ display rmon event
■ display rmon eventlog
■ display rmon history
■ display rmon prialarm
■ display rmon statistics
■ rmon alarm
■ rmon event
■ rmon history
■ rmon prialarm
■ rmon statistics
NTP Configuration Commands

■ debugging ntp-service
■ display ntp-service sessions
■ display ntp-service status
■ display ntp-service trace
■ ntp-service access
■ ntp-service authentication enable
■ ntp-service authentication-keyid
■ ntp-service broadcast-client
■ ntp-service broadcast-server
■ ntp-service max-dynamic sessions
■ ntp-service multicast-client
■ ntp-service multicast-server
■ ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid
■ ntp-service source-interface
■ ntp-service in-interface disable

■ ntp-service unicast-peer
■ ntp-service unicast-server
SSH Configuration Commands

■ debugging ssh server
■ display rsa local-key-pair public
■ display rsa peer-public-key
■ display ssh server
■ display ssh user-information
■ peer-public-key end
■ protocol inbound
■ public-key-code begin
■ public-key-code end
■ rsa local-key-pair create
■ rsa local-key-pair destroy
■ rsa peer-public-key
■ ssh server authentication-retries
■ ssh server rekey-interval
■ ssh server timeout
■ ssh user assign rsa-key
■ ssh user username authentication-type
File System This section describes the commands you can use to manage the file system on
Management your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
In switches supporting the XRN feature, the file path must start with
"unit[No.]>flash:/:", the [No.] is the unit ID. For example, suppose unit ID is 1, and
the path of the "text.txt" file under the root directory must be
"unit1>flash:/text.txt".
cd Syntax
cd directory
View
User view
Parameter
directory: Destination directory. The default directory is the working path
configured by the user when the system starts.
Description
Use the cd command to change the current user configuration path on the
Switch.

Example
Change the current working directory of the switch to flash.
<SW5500>cd flash:
<SW5500>pwd
unit1>flash:
copy Syntax
copy file-source file-dest
View
User view
Parameter
file-source: Source file name.
file-dest: Destination file name.
Description
Use the copy command to copy a file.
When the destination filename is the same as that of an existing file, the system
will ask whether to overwrite it.
Example
Display current directory information.
<SW5500>dir
Directory of unit1>flash:/
0 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 19:41:50 test.txt
16125952 bytes total (13975552 bytes free)
Copy the file test.txt and save it as test.bak.

<SW5500>copy test.txt test.bak
Copy unit1>flash:/test/test.txt to unit1>flash:/test/test.bak ?
[Y/N]:y
% Copyed file flash:/test/test.txt flash:/test/test.bak ...Done.
Display current directory information.

<SW5500>dir
0 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 19:41:50 test.txt
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 19:46:50 test.bak
delete Syntax
delete [ / unreserved ] file-path
View
User view

Parameter
/unreserved: The file will be deleted permanently if the user chooses this
parameter.
file-path: Path and name of the file you want to delete.
Description
Use the delete command to delete a specified file from the storage device of the
Switch.
The deleted files are kept in the recycle bin and will not be displayed when you use
the dir command. However they will be displayed, using the dir /all command.
The files deleted by the delete command can be recovered with the undelete
command or deleted permanently from the recycle bin, using the
reset recycle-bin command.
If two files with the same name in a directory are deleted, only the latest deleted
file will be kept in the recycle bin.
Example
Delete the file flash:/test/test.txt
<SW5500>delete flash:/test/test.txt
Delete unit1>flash:/test/test.txt?[Y/N]:
dir Syntax
dir [ /all ] [ file-path ]
View
User view
Parameter
/all: Display all the files (including the deleted ones).
file-path: File or directory name to be displayed. The file-path parameter
supports “*” matching. For example, using dir *.txt will display all the files with
the extension txt in the current directory.
dir without any parameters will display the file information in the current
directory.
Description
Use the dir command to display the information about the specified file or
directory in the storage device of the Switch.
Example
Display the information for file flash:/test/test.txt
<SW5500>dir flash:/test/test.txt
Directory of unit1>flash:/test/test.txt
1 -rw- 248 Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 text.txt

Display information for directory flash:/test/

<SW5500>dir flash:/test/
Directory of unit1>flash:/test/
1 -rw- 248 Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 test.txt
Display all of the files with names starting with "t" in directory flash:/test/
<SW5500>dir flash:/test/t*
Directory of unit1>flash:/test/t*
1 -rw- 248 Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 test.txt
Display information about all of the files (including the deleted files) in directory
flash:/test/
<SW5500>dir /all flash:/test/
1 -rw- 248 Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 text.txt
Display information about all of the files (including the deleted files) with names
starting with "t" in flash:/test/
<SW5500>dir /all flash:/test/t*

Directory of unit1>flash:/test/t*
1 -rw- 248 Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 text.txt
execute Syntax
execute filename
View
System view
Parameter
filename: Name of the batch file, which is a string up from 1 to 256 characters in
length, with a suffix of “.bat”.
Description
Use the execute command to execute the specified batch file.
The batch command executes the command lines in the batch file one by one.
There should be no invisible character in the batch file. If invisible characters are
found, the batch command will quit the current execution without back off
operation. The batch command does not guarantee the execution of each
command, nor does it perform hot backup itself. The forms and contents of the
commands are not restricted in the batch file.
Example
To execute the batch file “test.bat” in the directory of “flash:/”, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500]execute test.bat
file prompt Syntax

file prompt { alert | quiet }
View
System view
Parameter
alert: Select confirmation on dangerous file operations.. The default value is
alert.
quiet: No confirmation prompt on file operations.
Description
Use the file prompt command to modify the prompt mode of file operations on
the Switch.
If the prompt mode is set as quiet, so no prompts are shown for file operations,
some non-recoverable operations may lead to system damage.
Example
Configure the prompt mode of file operation as quiet.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]file prompt quiet
format Syntax
format filesystem
View
User view
Parameter
filesystem: Device name.
Description
Use the format command to format the storage device. All of the files on the
storage device will be lost and non-recoverable. Specially, configuration files will
be lost after formatting flash memory.
Example
Format flash:
<Sw5500>format unit1>flash:
All data on unit1>flash: will be lost , proceed with format ? [Y/N] y
% Now begin to format flash, please wait for a while...
Format unit1>flash: completed
mkdir Syntax
mkdir directory

View
User view
Parameter
directory: Directory name.
Description
Use the mkdir command to create a directory in the specified directory on the
storage device.
The directory to be created cannot have the same name as that of any other
directory or file in the specified directory.
Example
Create the directory dd.
<SW5500>mkdir dd
Created dir unit1>flash:dd
more Syntax
more file-path
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: File name.
Description
Use the more command to display the contents f of the specified file formatted as
text.
Example
Display contents of file test.txt.
<SW5500>more test.txt
AppWizard has created this test application for you.
This file contains a summary of what you will find in each of the
files that make up your test application.
Test.dsp
This file (the project file) contains information at the project
level and is used to build a single project or subproject. Other
users can share the project (.dsp) file, but they should export the
makefiles locally.
move Syntax
move filepath-source filepath-dest
View
User view

Parameter
filepath-source: Source file name.
filepath-dest: Destination file name.
Description
Use the move command to move files.
When the destination filename is the same as that of an existing file, the system
will ask whether to overwrite the existing file.
Example
Display the current directory information.
<SW5500>dir
0 -rw- 2145718 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne80.bin
1 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test
<SW5500>dir unit1>flash:/test/
0 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 20:23:37 subdir
1 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:08:32 sample.txt
Move flash:/test/sample.txt to flash:/sample.txt.

<SW5500>move flash:/test/sample.txt flash:/sample.txt
Move unit1>flash:/test/sample.txt to unit1>flash:/sample.txt
?[confirm]:y
% Moved file unit1>flash:/test/sample.txt unit1>flash:/sample.txt
Display the directory after moving a file.

<SW5500>dir
0 -rw- 2145718 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 3Com.bin
1 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test
2 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:26:48 sample.txt
<SW5500>dir flash:/test/
0 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 20:23:37 subdir
pwd Syntax
pwd
View
User view
Parameter
None

Description
Use the pwd command to display the current path.
Error may occur without setting the current path.
Example
Display the current path.
<SW5500>pwd
unit1>flash:
rename Syntax
rename filepath-source filepath-dest
View
User view
Parameter
filepath-source: Source file name.
filepath-dest: Destination file name.
Description
Use the rename command to rename a file.
If the destination file name is the same as an existing directory name, the rename
operation will fail. If the destination file name is the same as an existing file name,
a prompt will be displayed asking whether to overwrite the existing file.
Example
Display the current directory information.
<SW5500>dir
Directory of unit1>flash:
0 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test
1 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:26:48 sample.txt
Rename the file sample.txt with sample.bak.

<SW5500>rename sample.txt sample.bak
Rename flash:/sample.txt to flash:/sample.bak ?[confirm]:y
% Renamed file unit1>flash:/sample.txt unit1>flash:/sample.bak
Display the directory after renaming sample.txt with sample.bak.

<SW5500>dir
Directory of unit1>flash:
0 -rw- 2145718 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne80.bin
1 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test
2 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:29:55 sample.bak
reset recycle-bin Syntax

reset recycle-bin file-path [/force]

View
User view
Parameter
file-path: Name of the file to be deleted.
/force: Delete files from the recycle bin without prompt.
Description
Use the reset recycle-bin command to permanently delete files from the
recycle bin.
The delete command only puts the file into the recycle bin, but the reset
recycle-bin command will delete this file permanently.
Example
Delete the file from the recycle bin.
<SW5500>reset recycle-binflash:/p1h_logic.out
Clear unit1>flash:/plh_logic.out? [Y/N]:
rmdir Syntax
rmdir directory
View
User view
Parameter
directory: Directory name.
Description
Use the rmdir command to delete a directory. The directory to be deleted must be
empty.
Example
Delete the directory test.
<SW5500>rmdir test
Rmdir unit1>flash:/test?[Y/N]:y
..Removed directory unit1>flash:/test
undelete Syntax
undelete file-path
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: Name of the file to be recovered.

Description
Use the undelete command to recover the deleted file.
The file name to be recovered cannot be the same as an existing directory name. If
the destination file name is the same as an existing file name, a prompt will be
displayed asking whether to overwrite the existing file.
Example
Display the information for all of the files in the current directory, including the
deleted files.
<SW5500>dir /all
0 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 test.txt
1 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:09:23 [sample.bak]
Recover the deleted file sample.bak.

<SW5500>undelete sample.bak
Undelete unit1>flash:/sample.bak ?[confirm]:y
% Undeleted file unit1>flash:/sample.bak
Display the information for all of the files in the current directory, including the
deleted files .
<SW5500>dir /all
0 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:34:19 sample.bak
1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 test.txt
Configuration File This section describes the commands you can use to manage the configuration
Management files on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
display Syntax
current-configuration display current-configuration [ controller | interface
interface-type [ interface-number ] | configuration [ configuration
] ] [ | { begin | exclude | include } regular-expression ]
View
All views
Parameter
controller: View the configuration information of controllers.
interface: View the configuration information of interfaces.
interface-type: Type of the interface.
interface-number: Number of the interface.

configuration configuration: View specific parts of the current configuration.

The value of configuration is the key word of the configuration, such as:
acl-adv: View the configuration information of advanced ACL.
ospf: View the configuration information of OSPF.
system: View the configuration information of sysname.
timerange: View the configuration information of time range.
user-interface: View the configuration information of user-interface.
|: Filter the configuration information to be output via regular expression.
begin: Begin with the line that matches the regular expression.
exclude: Exclude lines that match the regular expression.
include: Include lines that match the regular expression.
regular-expression: Define the regular expression.
Description
Use the display current-configuration command to display the current
configuration parameters of the switch.
By default, if some running configuration parameters are the same with the
default operational parameters, they will not be displayed.
If a user needs to authenticate whether the configurations are correct after

finishing a set of configuration, the display current-configuration command
can be used to display the running parameters. Although the user has configured
some parameters, but the related functions are not effective, they are not
displayed.
When there is much configuration information to use the regular expression to

filter the output information. For specific rules about the regular expression, refer
to the Switch 5500G-EI Configuration manual.
Related commands: save, reset saved-configuration, display

saved-configuration.
Example
To view the running configuration parameters of the switch, enter the following:
<SW5500>display current-configuration
To view the lines containing the character string “10*” in the configuration
information, enter the following. The “*” indicates that the “0” before it can
appear 0 times or multiple consecutive times.
<SW5500>display current-configuration | include 10*
To view configuration information beginning with “user”, enter the following:

<SW5500>display current-configuration | include ^user

To view the pre-positive and post-positive configuration information, enter the

following:
<SW5500>display current-configuration configuration
display Syntax
saved-configuration display saved-configuration [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of switch.
Description
Use the display saved-configuration command to view the configuration files
in the flash memory of the Switch.
If the Switch works abnormally after power on, execute the display
saved-configuration command to view the startup configuration of the Switch.
Related commands: save, reset saved-configuration, display

current-configuration.
Example
To display configuration files in flash memory of the Switch, enter the following:
<SW5500>display saved-configuration
display this Syntax

display this
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display this command, to display the configuration of the current view.
If you need to authenticate whether the configurations are correct, after you have
finished a set of configurations under a view to use the display this command
to view the parameters.
Some effective parameters are not displayed if they are the same as the default
ones. Some ineffective parameters that were configured by the user, are not
displayed either.
Associated configuration of the interface is displayed when executing the

command in different interface views, related configuration of the protocol view is
displayed when excecuting this command in different protocol views, and all the

configurations of the protocol views are displayed when executing this command
in protocol sub-views.
For the related command, see save, reset, saved-configuration, display

current-configuration, display saved-configuration.
Example
Display the configuration parameters for the current view of the switch system.
[SW5500]display this
display startup Syntax

display startup [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views
Parameter
Description
Use the display startup command, to display the related system software and
configuration filenames used for the current and the next start-ups.
This command is used to display the following information:

■ Filename of the system software configured by the user
■ Filename of the system software actually used for this startup
■ Filename of the system software configured for the next startup
■ Configuration filename used for the current startup
■ Configuration filename configured for the next startup.
For the related command, see startup saved-configuration.
Example
Display the filenames related to the current and the next enabling.
<SW5500>display startup
UNIT1:
Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/sw5500cfg.cfg
Next startup saved-configuration file: flash:/sw5500cfg.cfg
Bootrom-access enable state: enabled
reset Syntax
saved-configuration reset saved-configuration
View
User view

Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset saved-configuration command to erase configuration files from

the flash memory of the Switch.
Consult with technical support personnel before executing this command.
Generally, this command is used in the following situations:

■ After upgrade of software, configuration files in flash memory may not match
the new version's software. Perform reset saved-configuration command
to erase the old configuration files.
■ When a Switch 5500G-EI is reused on a network but in a different manner to
previously, the original configuration file should be erased and the switch
reconfigured.
If the configuration files do not exist in the flash memory when the Switch is
powered on and initialized, it will choose the default setting.
Related commands: save, display current-configuration, display

saved-configuration.
Example
Erase the configuration files from the flash memory of the Switch.
<SW5500>reset saved-configuration
This will delete the configuration in the flash memory.
The switch configurations will be erased to reconfigure.
Are you sure?[Y/N]
save Syntax
save [ filename | safely ]
View
Any view
Parameter
file-name: the name of the configuration file. It is a character string of 5 to 56
characters.
safely: save the configuration file in safely mode.
Description
Use the save command, to save the current configuration files to flash memory.
After finishing a group of configurations and achieving corresponding functions,

get the current configuration files stored in the flash memory.
After a fabric is formed, if you execute the save command, all of the switches in
the fabric save the current configuration to the configuration files.

If you do not enter the file-name parameter in this command, for the switches that
have specified the configuration file for booting, the current configurations will be
stored to the specified configuration file; and for the switches that have not
specified the configuration file for booting, the current configurations will be
stored to the default configuration file, 3comoscfg.cfg.
Related commands: reset saved-configuration, display

current-configuration, display saved-configuration.
Example
Get the current configuration files stored in flash memory.
<SW5500>save
The configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure?[Y/N] y
Please input the file name(*.cfg)[flash:/sw5500cfg.cfg]:
Now saving current configuration to the device.

Saving configuration. Please wait .....
..........
startup saved
startup Syntax
saved-configuration startup saved-configuration [ unit unit-id ] cfgfile
View
User view
Parameter
cfgfile: The name of the configuration file. It is a string with a length of 5 to 56

characters.
Description
Use the startup saved-configuration command to configure the configuration
file used for enabling the system for the next time.
The configuration file must have ".cfg" as its extension name and must be saved
under the root directory of the Flash.
For the related command, please see display startup
Example
Configure the configuration file for the next start-up.
<SW5500>startup saved-configuration sw5500cfg.cfg
FTP Server This section describes how to use the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) configuration
Configuration commands on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands

display ftp-server Syntax

display ftp-server
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ftp-server command to display the parameters of the current
FTP Server. You can perform this command to verify the configuration after setting
FTP parameters.
Example
Display the configuration of FTP Server parameters.
<SW5500>display ftp-server
Ftp server is running
Max user number 5
User count 0
Timeout(minute) 30
display ftp-user Syntax

display ftp-user
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ftp-user command to display the parameters of current FTP
user. You can perform this command to examine the configuration after setting
FTP parameters.
Example
Show the configuration of FTP user parameters.
<SW5500>display ftp-user
% No ftp user
ftp server Syntax

ftp server enable
undo ftp server
View
System view

Parameter
enable: Start FTP Server.
Description
■ Use the ftp server command to start FTP Server and enable FTP user logon.
■ Use the undo ftp server command to close FTP Server and disable FTP user
logon.
By default, FTP Server is shut down.
Perform this command to easily start or shut down FTP Server, preventing the
Switch from being attacked by an unknown user.
Example
Shut down FTP Server.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]undo ftp server
ftp timeout Syntax

ftp timeout minute
undo ftp timeout
View
System view
Parameter
minute: Connection timeouts (measured in minutes), ranging from 1 to 35791;
The default connection timeout time is 30 minutes.
Description
■ Use the ftp timeout command to configure connection timeout interval.
■ Use the undo ftp timeout command to restore the default connection
timeout interval.
After a user logs on to an FTP Server and has established connection, if the
connection is interrupted or cut abnormally by the user, FTP Server will still hold
the connection. The connection timeout can avoid this problem. If the FTP server
has no command interaction with a client for a specific period of time, it considers
the connection to have failed and disconnects the client.
Example
Set the connection timeout to 36 minutes.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ftp timeout 36
local-user Syntax
local-user user_name

undo local-user { user_name | all [ service-type { telnet | ftp |

lan-access | ssh | terminal }]}
View
System view
Parameter
user_name: Enter a local user name, up to 80 characters in length, excluding "/",
":", "*", "?", "<" and ">". (The @ character can be used once in a user_name;
that part of the user name which precedes the @ symbol must not be more than
55 characters in length. The user-name is case-insensitive, so that UserA is the
same as usera.
all: Specifies all users.
service-type: Specifies the service type, which can be one of the following:
telnet: Specifies the user type of Telnet.
ftp: Specifies the user type of FTP.
lan-access: Specifies the user type of LAN access, which mainly refers to
Ethernet-accessing users.
ssh:Specifies that the user type is SSH.
terminal: Specifies that the user type is terminal which refers to users who use
the terminal service (login from the Console, AUX or Asyn port).
Description
Use the local-user command to configure a local user and enter the local user
view.
Use the undo local-user command to cancel a specified local user, a type of
user or all users. By default, a local user is not configured.
Related commands: display local-user, service-type.
Example
To add a local user named guest, enter the following:
<SW5500>system
[SW5500]local-user guest
[SW5500-luser-guest]
password Syntax
password {simple | cipher } password
undo password
View
Local user view

Parameters
simple: Specifies that passwords are displayed in simple text.
cipher: Specifies that passwords are displayed in cipher text.
password: Enter a password, up to 16 characters in length for simple text, and up

to 24 characters in length for cipher text.
Description
■ Use the password command to configure the password display mode for local
users.
■ Use the undo password command to cancel the specified password display
mode.
The settings in the local-user password-display-mode cipher-force,

command override the settings in the password command.
Related command: display local-user
Example
To set the user guest to display the password 20030422 in simple text, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]local-user guest1
[SW5500-luser-guest]password simple 20030422
service-type Syntax
service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access | { ssh |
telnet | terminal }* [ level level ] }
undo service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory ] | lan-access | { ssh |

telnet | terminal }* [ level level ] }
View
Local user view
Parameters
telnet: Specifies the user’s service type as Telnet.
ssh: Specifies the user type as SSH.
level level: Specifies the level of Telnet, SSH or terminal users. The argument
level is an integer in the range of 0 to 3 and defaults to 1.

ftp: Specifies the user’s service type as FTP.
ftp-directory directory: Enter an FTP directory, up to 64 characters in length.

Optional.

terminal: Authorizes the user to use the terminal service (login from the Console,
AUX or Asyn port).
Description
Use the service-type command to configure a service type for a particular user.
Use the undo service-type command to cancel the currently configured service
type for a particular user.
If configuring service types: SSH, Telnet or Terminal:

When you configure a new service type for a user, the system adds the new
service type to the existing one.
You can set user level when you configure a service type. If you set multiple service
types and specify the user levels, then only the last configured user level is valid.
Different service type does not have its individual user level.
You can use either level or service-type command to specify the level for a
local user. If both of these two commands are used, the latest configuration will
take effect.
Example
To configure a service type of LAN access for the user guest, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]local-user-guest
[SW5500-luser-guest]service-type lan-access
FTP Client Commands This section describes the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Client commands on your
Switch 5500G-EI.
ascii Syntax
ascii
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the ascii command to configure data transmission mode as ASCII mode.

By default, the file transmission mode is ASCII mode.
Perform this command if the user needs to change the file transmission mode to
default mode.
Example
Configure to transmit data in the ASCII mode.
[ftp]ascii
200 Type set to A.
binary Syntax
binary
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the binary command to configure file transmission type as binary mode.
Example
Configure to transmit data in the binary mode.
[ftp]binary
200 Type set to I.
bye Syntax
bye
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the bye command to disconnect with the remote FTP Server and return to user
view.
After performing this command, you can terminate the control connection and
data connection with the remote FTP Server.
Example
Terminate connection with the remote FTP Server and return to user view.
[ftp]bye
cd Syntax
cd pathname

View
FTP Client view
Parameter
pathname: Path name.
Description
Use the cd command to change the working path on the remote FTP Server.
This command is used to access another directory on FTP Server. Note that the user
can only access the directories authorized by the FTP server.
Example
Change the working path to flash:/temp
[ftp]cd flash:/temp
cdup Syntax
cdup
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the cdup command to change working path to the upper level directory.
This command is used to exit the current directory and return to the upper level
directory.
Example
Change working path to the upper level directory
[ftp]cdup
close Syntax
close
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the close command to disconnect FTP client side from FTP server side without
exiting FTP client side view so that you terminate the control connection and data
connection with the remote FTP server at the same time.

Example
Terminate connection with the remote FTP Server and stay in FTP Client view.
[ftp]close
delete Syntax
delete remotefile
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
remotefile: File name.
Description
Use the delete command to delete the specified file.
This command is used to delete a file.
Example
Delete the file temp.c
[ftp]delete temp.c
dir Syntax
dir [ filename [ localfile ]]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
filename: File name to be queried.
localfile: Saved local file name.
Description
Use the dir command to query a specified file.
If no parameter of this command is specified, then all the files in the directory will
be displayed.
Example
Query the file temp.c and save the results in the file temp1.
[ftp]dir temp.c temp1
disconnect Syntax
disconnect
View
FTP Client view

Parameter
None
Description
Using the disconnect command, subscribers can disconnect FTP client side from
FTP server side without exiting FTP client side view.
This command terminates the control connection and data connection with the
remote FTP Server at the same time.
Example
Terminate connection with the remote FTP Server and stay in FTP Client view.
[ftp]disconnect
ftp Syntax
ftp [ ipaddress [ port ] ]
View
User view
Parameter
ipaddress: IP address of the remote FTP Server.
port: Port number of remote FTP Server.
Description
Use the ftp command to establish control connection with the remote FTP Server
and enter FTP Client view.
Example
Connect to FTP Server at the IP address 1.1.1.1
<SW5500>ftp 1.1.1.1
get Syntax
get remotefile [ localfile ]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
localfile: Local file name.
remotefile: Name of a file on the remote FTP Server.
Description
Use the get command to download a remote file and save it locally.
If no local file name is specified, it will be considered the same as that on the
remote FTP Server.

Example
Download the file temp1.c and saves it as temp.c
[ftp]get temp1.c temp.c
lcd Syntax
lcd
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the lcd command to display local working path of FTP Client.
Example
Show local working path.
[ftp]lcd
% Local directory now flash:/temp
ls Syntax
ls [ remotefile [ localfile ]]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
remotefile: Remote file to be queried.
localfile: Saved local file name.
Description
Use the ls command to query a specified file.
If no parameter is specified, all the files will be shown.
Example
Query file temp.c
[ftp]ls temp.c
mkdir Syntax
mkdir pathname
View
FTP Client view

Parameter
pathname: Directory name.
Description
Use the mkdir command to create a directory on the remote FTP Server.
User can perform this operation as long as the remote FTP server has authorized
the operation.
Example
Create the directory flash:/lanswitch on the remote FTP Server.
[ftp]mkdir flash:/lanswitch
passive Syntax
passive
undo passive
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the passive command to set the data transmission mode to be passive
mode. Use the undo passive command to set the data transmission mode to be
active mode.
By default, the data transmission mode is passive mode
Example
Set the data transmission to passive mode.
[ftp]passive
put Syntax
put localfile [ remotefile ]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
localfile: Local file name.
remotefile: File name on the remote FTP Server.
Description
Use the put command to upload a local file to the remote FTP Server.
If the user does not specify the filename on the remote server, the system will
consider it the same as the local file name by default.

Example
Upload the local file temp.c to the remote FTP Server and saves it as temp1.c.
[ftp]put temp.c temp1.c
pwd Syntax
pwd
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the pwd command to display the current directory on the remote FTP Server.
Example
Show the current directory on the remote FTP Server.
[ftp]pwd
"flash:/temp" is current directory.
quit Syntax
quit
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the quit command to terminate the connection with the remote FTP Server
and return to user view.
Example
Terminate connection with the remote FTP Server and return to user view.
[ftp]quit
<SW5500>
remotehelp Syntax
remotehelp [ protocol-command ]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
protocol-command: FTP protocol command.

Description
Use the remotehelp command to display help information about the FTP protocol
command.
Example
Show the syntax of the protocol command user.
[ftp]remotehelp user
Syntax: USER <sp> <username>
rmdir Syntax
rmdir pathname
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
pathname: Directory name of remote FTP Server.
Description
Use the rmdir command to delete the specified directory from FTP Server.
Example
Delete the directory flash:/temp1 from FTP Server.
[ftp]rmdir flash:/temp1
user Syntax
user username [ password ]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
username: Logon username.
password: Logon password.
Description
Use the user command to register an FTP user.
Example
Log in the FTP Server with username tom and password d3hk
[ftp]user tom d3hk
verbose Syntax
verbose
undo verbose

View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the verbose command to enable verbose. Use the undo verbose command
to disable verbose.
By default, verbose is disabled.
Example
Enable verbose.
[ftp]verbose
TFTP Configuration This section describes the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) Commands on your
tftp get Syntax

tftp tftpserver get source-file [ dest-file ]
View
User view
Parameter
tftp-server: IP address or host name of the TFTP server. The name of the TFTP
server should be a string ranging from 1 to 20 characters.
source-file: Specify the filename of the source file on the TFTP server.
dest-file: Specify the filename of the destination file which will be saved on the
switch.
Description
Use the tftp get command to download a file from the specified directory of the
TFTP server and save it with a different name on the switch.
Related command: tftp put.
Example
Download the file LANSwitch.app from the TFTP server at 1.1.3.214 and save it as
vxWorks.app on the local switch.
<SW5500>tftp 1.1.3.214 get LANSwitch.app vxWorks.app
tftp put Syntax

tftp tftp-server put source-file [ dest-file ]

View
User view
Parameter
tftp-server: IP address or hostname of the TFTP server. The name of the TFTP
server should be a string ranging from 1 to 20 characters.
source-file: Specify the filename of the source file which is saved on the switch.
dest-file: Specify the filename of the destination file which will be saved on the
TFTP server.
Description
Use the tftp put command to upload a file from the switch to the specified
directory on the TFTP server and save it with a new name.
Related commands: tftp get.
Example
<SW5500>tftp 1.1.3.214 put sw5500cfg.txt temp.txt
MAC Address Table This section describes the commands you can use to manage the MAC Address
Management Table on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Commands
display mac-address Syntax

display mac-address [ mac-addr [ vlan vlan-id ] | [ static | dynamic
| blackhole ] [ interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num } ] [ vlan vlan-id ] [ count ] ]
View
All views
Parameter
mac-addr: Specify the MAC address.
vlan-id: Specify the VLAN ID.
static: Static table entry, lost after resetting switch.
dynamic: Dynamic table entry, which will be aged.
blackhole: Blackhole table entry, the packet with this destination MAC address
will be discarded.
interface-type: Specify the interface type.
interface-num: Specify the interface number.
interface-name: Specify the interface name.

For details about the interface-type, interface-num and interface-name

parameters, refer to the Port Configuration in this manual.
count: the display information will only contain the number of MAC addresses in
the MAC address table if the user enters this parameter when using this
command.
Description
Use the display mac-address command to display MAC address table
information.
When managing the Layer-2 addresses of the switch, the administrator can
perform this command to view such information as the Layer-2 address table,
address status (static or dynamic), Ethernet port of the MAC address, VLAN of the
address, and system address aging time.
For the related commands, see mac-address, mac-address timer.
Example
Show the information of the entry with MAC address at 00e0-fc01-0101
[SW5500]display mac-address 00e0-fc01-0101
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
00e0-fc01-0101 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/1 300
display mac-address Syntax

aging-time display mac-address aging-time
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display mac-address aging-time command to display the aging time
of the dynamic entry in the MAC address table.
For the related commands, see mac-address, mac-address timer, display

mac-address.
Examples
Display the aging time of the dynamic entry in the MAC address table.
[SW5500]display mac-address aging-time
mac-address aging-time: 300s
The above information indicates that the aging time of the dynamic entry in the
MAC address is 300s.
[sw5500] display mac-address aging-time

mac-address aging-time: no-aging

The above information indicates that the dynamic entry in the MAC address table
is no-aging.
mac-address Syntax
mac-address { static | dynamic | blackhole } mac-address interface {
interface-name | interface-type interface-num } vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address [ { static | dynamic | blackhole } mac-address

interface {interface-name | interface-type interface-num ] vlan
vlan-id ]
View
System view
Parameter
static: Static table entry, lost after resetting switch.
dynamic: Dynamic table entry, which will be aged.
blackhole: Blackhole table entry, the packet with this destination MAC address
will be discarded.
mac-addr: Specify the MAC address.
vlan-id: Specify the VLAN ID.
Description
Use the mac-address command to add/modify the MAC address table entry. Use
the undo mac-address command to delete MAC address table entry
If the input address has been existing in the address table, the original entry will be
modified. That is, replace the interface pointed by this address with the new
interface and the entry attribute with the new attribute (dynamic entry and static
entry).
All the (MAC unicast) addresses on a certain interface can be deleted. User can
choose to delete any of the following addresses: address learned by system
automatically, dynamic address configured by user, static address configured by
user.
For the related commands, see display mac-address.
Example
Configure the port number corresponding to the MAC address 00e0-fc01-0101 as
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 in the address table, and sets this entry as static entry.
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500]mac-address static 00e0-fc01-0101 interface gigabitethernet

1/0/1 vlan 2
mac-address Syntax
max-mac-count mac-address max-mac-count count
undo mac-address max-mac-count
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
count: Enter a value in the range 0 to 32768 to specify how many MAC
addresses a port can learn. 0 means that the port is not allowed to learn MAC
addresses.
Description
Use the mac-address max-mac-count command to configure the maximum
number of MAC addresses that can be learned by a specified Ethernet port. The
port stops learning MAC addresses when the specified limit is reached.
Use the undo mac-address-table max-mac-count command to cancel the

maximum limit on the number of MAC addresses learned by an Ethernet port. This
is the default. If you set no maximum limit, the MAC address table controls the
number of MAC addresses a port can learn.
Related commands: mac-address, mac-address timer
Examples
Configure the port GigabitEthernet 1/0/3 to learn at most 600 MAC addresses.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]inteface GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]mac-address max-mac-count 600
Cancel the maximum limit on the number of MAC addresses learned by the port
GigabitEthernet1/0/3.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]inteface GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/3]undo mac-address max-mac-count
mac-address timer Syntax

mac-address timer { aging age | no-aging }
undo mac-address timer aging
View
System view

Parameter
aging age: Specifies the aging time (measured in seconds) of the Layer-2 dynamic
address table entry, ranging from 10 to 1000000; by default, the aging time is 300
seconds.
no-aging: No aging time.
Description
Use the mac-address timer command to configure the aging time of the Layer-2
dynamic address table entry. Use the undo mac-address timer command to
restore the default value.
Setting the aging time on the switch to be too long or too short will cause the
switch to broadcast data packets without MAC addresses, this will affect the
operational performance of the switch.
If the aging time is set too long, the switch will store out-of-date MAC address
tables. This will consume MAC address table resources and the switch will not be
able to update MAC address table according to the network change.
If aging time is set too short, the switch may delete valid MAC address table
entries.
Example
Configure the entry aging time of Layer-2 dynamic address table to be 500
seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]mac-address timer aging 500

Device Management This section describes the device management commands available on your Switch
Commands 5500G-EI.
boot boot-loader Syntax

boot boot-loader file-path
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: Path and name of APP file.
Description
Use the boot boot-loader command to specify the app file used for booting next
time.
You can not specify the app file stored in another Unit as the boot application of a
Unit.
Example
Specify the APP application used for booting next time.
<SW5500>boot boot-loader unit1>flash:/PLATV100R002B09D002.APP The
specifed file will be booted next time!
<SW5500>
boot bootrom Syntax

boot bootrom file-path
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: File path and file name of Bootrom.
Description
Use the boot bootrom command to upgrade bootrom.
Example
Upgrade bootrom of the switch.
<SW5500>boot bootrom PLATV100R002B09D002.btm
display boot-loader Syntax

display boot-loader [unit unit-id]
View
All views

Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch.
Description
Use the display boot-loader command to display APP file used for this boot
and the next boot.
Example
<SW5500>display boot-loader
The app to boot of board 0 at the next time is: flash:/platform.app
The app to boot of board 0 at this time is:
flash:/PLATV100R002B09D002.APP
display cpu Syntax

display cpu [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views.
Parameter
Description
Use the display cpu command to display CPU occupancy.
Example
To display CPU occupancy, enter the following:
<SW5500>display cpu
CPU busy status:

18% in last 5 seconds
19% in last 1 minute
19% in last 5 minutes
Field Description
Board 0 CPU busy status The busy status of the Switch
18% in last 5 seconds The CPU occupancy rate is 18% at last 5 seconds
19% in last 1 minute The CPU occupancy rate is 19% at last 1 minute
19% in last 5 minutes The CPU occupancy rate is 19% at last 5 minutes
display device Syntax

display device [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views

Parameter
Description
Use the display device command to display the module type and working status
information of a card, including physical card number, physical daughter card
number, number of ports, hardware version number, FPGA version number,
version number of BOOTROM software, application version number, address
learning mode, interface card type and interface card type description, etc.
Example
Show device information.
<SW5500>display device
display fan Syntax

display fan [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch
Description
Use the display fan command to display the working state of the built-in fans.
Example
Display the working state of the fans.
<SW5500>display fan
Unit 1
Fan 1 State: Normal
Fan 2 State: Normal
The above information indicates that the fan works normally.
display memory Syntax

display memory [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views
Parameter
Description
Use the display memory command to display the current system memory status.

Example
To display the current memory status, enter the following:
<SW5500>display memory
System Total Memory(bytes): 32491008

Total Used Memory(bytes): 13181348
Used Rate: 40%

Field Description
System Total Memory (bytes) The Total Memory of switch, unit in byte
Total Used Memory (bytes) The Total used Memory of switch, unit in byte
Used Rate The memory used rate
display power Syntax

display power [ unit unit-id ][ power-ID ]
View
All views
Parameter

power-ID: Power ID.
Description
Use the display power command to display the working state of the built-in
power supply.
Example
Show power state.
<SW5500>display power 1
Unit1
Power 1 State: Normal
display schedule reboot Syntax

display schedule reboot
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display schedule reboot command to check the configuration of
related parameters of the switch schedule reboot terminal service.

Related command: reboot, schedule reboot at, schedule reboot delay,

undo schedule reboot.
Example
Display the configuration of the schedule reboot terminal service parameters of
the current switch.
<SW5500>display schedule reboot
Reboot system at 16:00:00 2002/11/1 (in 2 hours and 5 minutes).
reboot Syntax
reboot [ unit unit-id ]
View
User view
Parameter
Description
Use the reboot command to reset the Switch when failure occurs.
Example
Reboots the Switch.
<SW5500>reboot
This will reboot device. Continue? [Y/N]
schedule reboot at Syntax

schedule reboot at hh:mm [ yyyy/mm/dd ]
undo schedule reboot
View
User view
Parameter
hh:mm: Reboot time of the switch, in the format of "hour: minute" The hh ranges
from 0 to 23, and the mm ranges from 0 to 59.
yyyy/mm/dd: Reboot date of the switch, in the format of "year/month/day. The

yyyy ranges from 2000 to 2099, the mm ranges from 1 to 12, and the value of dd
is related to the specific month.
Description
Use the schedule reboot at command to enable the timing reboot function of
the switch and set the specific reboot time and date.
Use the undo schedule reboot command to disable the timing reboot function.
By default, the timing reboot switch function is disabled.

If the schedule reboot at command sets specified date parameters, which

represents a data in the future, the switch will be restarted in specified time, with
error not more than 1 minute.
If no specified date parameters are configured, two cases are involved: If the
configured time is after the current time, the switch will be restarted at the time
point of that day; if the configured time is before the current time, the switch will
be restarted at the time point of the next day.
It should be noted that the configured date should not exceed the current date
more than 30 days. In addition, after the command is configured, the system will
prompt you to input confirmation information. Only after the "Y" or the "y" is
entered can the configuration be valid. If there is related configuration before, it
will be covered directly.
After the schedule reboot at command is configured and the system time is
adjusted by the clock command, the former configured schedule reboot at
parameter will go invalid.
For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot delay, display
schedule reboot.
Example
Set the switch to be restarted at 22:00 that night (the current time is 15:50).
<SW5500>schedule reboot at 22:00
Reboot scheduled for 22:00:00 UTC 2002/11/18 (in 6 hours and 10
minutes)
Proceed with reboot? [Y/N]:y
schedule reboot delay Syntax

schedule reboot delay { hhh:mm | mmm }
undo schedule reboot
View
User view
Parameter
hhh:mm: Waiting time for rebooting a switch, in the format of "hour: minute" The
hhh ranges from 0 to 720, and the mm ranges from 0 to 59.
mmm: Waiting delay for rebooting a switch, in the format of "absolute minutes" .
Ranging from 0 to 43200,
Description
Use the schedule reboot delay command to enable the timing reboot switch
function and set the waiting time. Use the undo schedule reboot command to
disable the timing reboot function.
By default, the timing reboot switch function is disabled.

Two formats can be used to set the waiting delay of timing reboot switch, namely
the format of "hour: minute" and the format of "absolute minutes". But the total
minutes should be no more than 30×24×60 minutes, or 30 days.
After this command is configured, the system will prompt you to input
confirmation information. Only after the "Y" or the "y" is entered can the
configuration be valid. If there is related configuration before, it will be covered
directly.
After the schedule reboot at command is configured, and the system time is
adjusted by the clock command, the original schedule reboot at parameter will
become invalid.
For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot at, undo schedule
reboot, display schedule reboot
Example
Configure the switch to be restarted after 88 minutes (the current time is 21:32).
<SW5500>schedule reboot delay 88
Reboot scheduled for 23:00:00 UTC 2002/11/1 (in 1 hours and 28
minutes)
Proceed with reboot? [Y/N]:y
Basic System This section describes the basic system configuration and system management
Configuration and commands available on your Switch 5500G-EI.
Management
Commands
clock datetime Syntax

clock datetime time date
View
User view
Parameters
time : enter the current time in HH:MM:SS format . HH can be in the range 0 to
23. MM and SS can be in the range 0 to 59.
date : enter the current year in MM/DD/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD format . YYYY can be
in the range 2000 to 2099. MM can be in the range 1 to 12. DD can be in the range
1 to 31.
Description
Use the clock datetime command to set the current system time and date. The
default is 23:55:52, 2000/4/1.
Related command: display clock
Example
To set the system time and date to 09:30:00, 2004/1/1, enter the following:

Basic System Configuration and Management Commands 443
<SW5500>clock datetime 09:30:00 2004/01/01
clock summer-time Syntax

clock summer-time zone_name one-off start_time start_date end_time
end_date offset_time
clock summer-time zone_name repeating { start-time start-date
end-time end-date | start-time start-year start-month start-week
start-day end-time end-year end-month end-week end-day } offset-time
undo clock summer-time
View
User view
Parameters
zone_name: Enter the name of the summer time zone, up to 32 characters in
length.
one-off: Specifies that the summer time is set for the selected year.
repeating: Specifies that the summer time is set for every year, starting from the
selected year.
start_time: Enter the start time of summer time, in the format HH:MM:SS.
start_date: Enter the start date of summer time, in the format YYYY/MM/DD.
end_time: Enter the end time of summer time, in the format HH:MM:SS.
end_date: Enter the end date of summer time, in the format YYYY/MM/DD.
start-year: start year, ranging from 2000 to 2099.
start-month: start month, the value can be the following :January, February,
March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December.
start-week: start week, the value can be the following : first, second, third,
fourth, fifth, last.
start-day: start day , the value can be the following : Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday.
end-year: end year, ranging from 2000 to 2099. The value must be same as start
year.
end-month: end month, the value can be the following :January, February, March,
April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December.
end-week: end week, the value can be the following : first, second, third, fourth,
fifth, last.
end-day: end day , the value can be the following : Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday.

offset_time: Enter the offset time, that is the amount of time added, in the
format HH:MM:SS.
Description
Use the clock summer-time command to set the name, start date and time, and
end date and time of summer time.
Use the undo clock summer-time command to cancel the currently configured
summer time.
Use the display clock command to check the summer time settings.
Related command: clock timezone
Example
To set the summer time for zone 2 to start at 06:00:00 on 08/06/2002, and end at
06:00:00 on 01/09/2002, with a time added of one hour, enter the following:
<SW5500>clock summer-time z2 one-off 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00
2002/09/01 01:00:00
To set the summer time for zone 2 to start at 06:00:00 on 08/06, and end at
06:00:00 on 01/09 in each year starting in 2002, with a time added of one hour,
<SW5500>clock summer-time z2 repeating 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00
2002/09/01 01:00:00
clock timezone Syntax

clock timezone zone_name { add | minus } HH:MM:SS
undo clock timezone
View
User view
Parameter
zone_name: Enter the name of the time zone, up to 32 characters in length.
add: Specifies that time is ahead of UTC.
minus: Specifies that time is behind UTC.
HH:MM:SS: Enter the time difference between the time zone and UTC.
Description
Use the clock timezone command to set local time zone information.
Use the undo clock timezone command to return to the default, which is
Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).
Use the display clock command to check the summer time settings.

System Status and System Information Display Commands 445
Related command: clock summer-time
Example
To set the local time zone as zone 5, and configure the local time to be 5 hours
ahead of UTC, enter the following:
<SW5500>clock timezone z5 add 05:00:00
sysname Syntax
sysname sysname
undo sysname
View
System view
Parameter
sysname: Specify the hostname with a character string with the length ranging
from1 to 30 characters.
Description
Use the sysname command to set the host name of the Switch.
By default, the host name of the Switch is SW5500.
Changing the host name of the Switch will affect the prompt of the command line
interface. For example, the host name of the Switch is SW5500, and the prompt in
user view is <SW5500>.
Example
Set the hostname of the the Switch to be LANSwitch.
<5500>system-view
[SW5500]sysname LANSwitch
[LANSwitch]
System Status and This sections describes the system status and system information display
System Information commands on your Switch.
Display Commands
display clock Syntax

display clock
View
All views
Parameter
None

Description
Use the display clock command to obtain information about system data and
time from the terminal display..
For the related commands, see clock.
Example
View the current system date and clock.
<SW5500>display clock
15:50:45 UTC Mon 2001/2/12
display config-agent Syntax

display config-agent unit-id unit-id
View
Any view
Parameter
unit-id: Unit ID of current switch, in the range of 1 to 8.
Description
Use the display config-agent unit-id command to view statistics of the
configuration agent.
Configuration agent is one of the XRN features. You can log into one switch of the
fabric to configure and manage the fabric by the configuration agent. The
functions of the configuration agent include;
■ Distributing configuration commands to the right destination switches or

processing modules based on the resolution result of the commands input.
■ Sending output information of the commands from the switch you have
logged into to your terminal.
■ Supporting simultaneous configuration of multiple users.
You cannot configure the configuration agent, but can view the statistics of the
configuration agent.
Example
To display statistics of the configuration agent on switch 1, enter the following:
<SW5500>display config-agent unit-id 1

Config-agent info on Unit1
Successful Failed on
Config message recv: 10 0
Config message send: 10 0
Notification message recv: 10 0
Notification message send: 10 0
Information message recv: 3 0
Information message send: 1 0

System Debug Commands 447
display debugging Syntax

display debugging [ interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num } ] [ module-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
interface-name: Specify the Ethernet port name.
interface-type: Specify the Ethernet port type.
interface-num: Specify the Ethernet port number.
module-name: Specify the module name.
Description
Use the display debugging command to display the enabled debugging process.
Show all the enabled debugging when there is no parameter.
For the related commands, see debugging.
Example
Show all the enabled debugging.
<SW5500>display debugging
IP packet debugging switch is on.
display version Syntax

display version
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display version command to view the software version, issue date and
the basic hardware configuration information.
Example
Display the information about the system version.
<SW5500>display version
System Debug This section describes the system debugging options, and the system diagnostics
Commands information that can be displayed on your Switch 5500G-EI.

debugging Syntax
debugging module-name [ debugging-option ]
undo debugging { all | module-name [ debugging-option ] }
View
User view
Parameter
all: Disable all the debugging.
module-name: Specify the module name.
debugging-option: Debugging option.
Description
Use the debugging command to enable the system debugging. Use the undo
debugging command to disable the system debugging.
By default, all the debugging processes are disabled.
The Switch provides various kinds of debugging functions for technical support
personnel and experienced maintenance staff to troubleshoot the network.
Enabling the debugging will generate a large amount of debugging information

and decrease the system efficiency. If the the debugging all command is used, it
will adversely affect the operational performance of the network. Use the undo
debugging all command to disable all debugging.
For the related commands, see display debugging.
Example
Enable IP Packet debugging.
<SW5500>debugging ip packet
IP packet debugging switch is on.
display Syntax
diagnostic-information display diagnostic-information
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display diagnostic-information command to view the configuration
information on all currently running modules. This information helps you to
monitor and troubleshoot your Switch 5500G-EI.

Example
To display system information on all currently running modules, enter the
following:
<SW5500>display diagnostic-information
Network Connection This section describes the network connection test commands available on your
Test Commands Switch 5500G-EI.
end-station polling Syntax

ip-address end-station polling ip-address ip-address
undo end-station polling ip-address ip-address
View
System view
Parameter
ip-address: Specify the IP address.
Description
Use the end-station polling ip-address command to configure the IP address
requiring periodic testing.
Use the undo end-station polling ip-address command to delete the IP

address requiring periodic testing.
The switch can ping an IP address every one minute to test if it is reachable. Three
PING packets can be sent at most for every IP address in every testing with a time
interval of five seconds. If the switch cannot ping successfully the IP address after
the three PING packets, it assumes that the IP address is unreachable.
You can configure up to 50 IP addresses by using the command repeatedly.
Related command: ping, tracert.
Example
Test if the IP-address 202.38.160.244 is reachable.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]end-station polling ip-address 202.38.160.244
ping Syntax
ping [ -a ip-address ] [-c count ] [ -d ] [-h tll ][ -i
{interface-type interface-num | interface-name } ][ ip ] [ -n ] [ - p
pattern ] [ -q ] [ -r ] [ -s packetsize ] [ -t timeout ] [-tos tos ]
[ -v ] string
View
User view

Parameter
-a ip-address: Specify the source IP address to transmit ICMP ECHO-REQUEST.
-c: count specify how many times the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet will be
transmitted, ranging from 1 to 4294967295.
-d: Configure the socket to be in DEBUGGING mode.
-h ttl: Configure TTL value for echo requests to be sent, range from 1 to 255
-i: Configure to choose packet sent on the interface.
ip: Choose IP ICMP packet.
-n: Configure to take the host parameter as IP address without domain name
resolution.
-p: pattern is the hexadecimal padding of ICMP ECHO-REQUEST, e.g. -p ff pads

the packet completely with ff.
-q: Configure not to display any other detailed information except statistics.
-r: Record route.
-s packetsize: Specify the length of ECHO-REQUEST (excluding IP and ICMP

packet header) in bytes.
-t timeout: Maximum waiting time after sending the ECHO-REQUEST (measured

in ms).
-tos tos: Specify TOS value for echo requests to be sent, range from 0 to 255.
-v: Show other received ICMP packets (non ECHO-RESPONSE).
string: Destination host domain name or IP address.
Description
Use the ping command to check the IP network connection and the reachability
of the host.
By default, when the parameters are not specified:
■ the ECHO-REQUEST message will be sent for 5 times,

■ socket is not in DEBUGGING mode,
■ the TTL value for echo requests is 255,.

■ host will be treated as IP address first. If it is not an IP address, perform domain

name resolution,
■ the default padding operation starts from 0x01 and ends on 0x09
(progressively), then performs again,
■ show all the information including statistics,
■ routes are not recorded,
■ send ECHO-REQUEST according to route selection,
■ default length of ECHO-REQUEST is 56 bytes.,
■ default timeout of ECHO-RESPONSE is 2000ms,
■ do not display other ICMP packets (non ECHO-RESPONSE),
■ the TOS value of echo requests is 0.
The ping command sends ICMP ECHO-REQUEST message to the destination. If

the network to the destination works well, then the destination host will send
ICMP ECHO-REPLY to the source host after receiving ICMP ECHO-REQUEST.
Perform the ping command to troubleshoot the network connection and line
quality. The output information includes:
■ Responses to each of the ECHO-REQUEST messages. If the response message is

not received until timeout, output "Request time out". Or display response
message bytes, packet sequence number, TTL and response time.
■ The final statistics, including number of sent packets, number of response
packets received, percentage of non-response packets and
minimal/maximum/average value of response time.
If the network transmission rate is too low to increase the response message
timeout.
For the related commands, see tracert.
Example
Check whether the host 202.38.160.244 is reachable.
<SW5500>ping 202.38.160.244
ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytes
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=1 ttl=255 time = 1ms
--202.38.160.244 ping statistics--
5 packets transmitted
5 packets received
0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms
tracert Syntax
tracert [[ -a source-ip] -f first-TTL ] [ -m max-TTL ] [ -p port ] [
-q nqueries ] [ -w timeout ] string

View
All views
Parameter
-a source-IP: Configure the source IP address used by tracert command.
-f: Configure to verify the -f switch, first-TTL specifies an initial TTL, ranging
from 0 to the maximum TTL.
-m: Configure to verify the -m switch, max-TTL specifies a maximum TTL larger
than the initial TTL.
-p: Configure to verify the -p switch, port is an integer host port number.
Generally, user need not modify this option.
-q: Configure to verify the -q switch, nqueries is an integer specifying the

number of query packets sent, larger than 0.
-w: Configure to verify the -w switch, timeout is an integer specifying IP packet

timeout in seconds, larger than 0.
string: IP address of the destination host or the hostname of the remote system.
Description
Use the tracert command to check the reachability of network connection and
troubleshoot the network. User can test gateways passed by the packets
transmitted from the host to the destination.
By default, when the parameters are not specified,
first-TTL is 1,
max-TTL is 30,
port is 33434,
nqueries is 3 and
timeout is 5s.
The tracert command sends a packet with TTL 1, and the first hop will send an
ICMP error message back to indicate this packet cannot be transmitted (because
of TTL timeout). Then this packet will be sent again with TTL 2, and the second
hop will indicate a TTL timeout error. Perform this operation repeatedly till
reaching the destination. These processes are operated to record the source
address of each ICMP TTL timeout so as to provide a path to the destination for an
IP packet.
After the ping command finds some error on the network, perform tracert to
locate the error.
The output of the tracert command includes IP address of all the gateways to
the destination. If a certain gateway times out, output "***".

HWPing Commands 453
Example
Test the gateways passed by the packets to the destination host at 18.26.0.115.
<SW5500>tracert 18.26.0.115
tracert to allspice.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max
1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms
3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms
4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms
5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms
6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms
7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms
8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms
9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms
10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms
11 129.140.72.17 (129.140.72.17) 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms
12 * * *
13 128.121.54.72 (128.121.54.72) 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms
14 * * *
15 * * *
16 * * *
17 * * *
18 ALLSPICE.LCS.MIT.EDU (18.26.0.115) 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms
HWPing Commands This section displays the hwping options available on your Switch 5500G-EI.
hwping-agent enable Syntax

hwping-agent enable
undo hwping-agent enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the hwping-agent enable command to enable the HWPing client function.
Use the undo hwping-agent enable command to disable the HWPing client
function.
Before you can perfrom a test, you must enable the HWPing client function.
Example
Enable HWPing Client.
[SW5500]hwping-agent enable
hwping hwping administrator-name operation-tag

undo hwping administrator-name operation-tag

View
System View
Parameter
administrator-name: Specify the name of the administrator creating an HWPing
test group.
operation-tag: Test operation tag.
Description
Use the hwping command to create an HWPing test group. Executing this
command allows the systemto access the HWPing test group view.
Example
Create an HWPing test group, where the administrator name is ‘administrator’
and the test operation tag is ‘icmp’.
[SW5500]hwping administrator icmp
count Syntax
count times
undo count
View
HWPing Test Group View
Parameter
times: Number of test packets to be transmitted, in the range 1 to 15. Defaults to
1.
Description
Use the count command to configure the number of packets to be sent for each
test.
Use the undo count command to restore the deault.
A test timer will start when the system send the first test packet. In the event that
the times argument is set greater than one, the system continues to send the
second one upon receipt of the reply of the first one. If receiving no reply upon
expiry of the timer, the system sends the second and all the remaining packets
likewise.
Example
Send ten packets for each test.
[SW5500-administrator-icmp]count 10
destination ip Syntax
destination-ip ip-address
undo destination-ip

HWPing Commands 455
View
Parameter
ip-address: Destination IP address in a test
Description
Use the destination-ip command to configure the destination IP address in the
test.
Use the undo destination-ip command to delete the configured destination IP

address.
By default, no destination IP address is configured for any test.
Example
Set the destination IP address in the test to 169.254.10.3
[SW5500-administrator-icmp]destination-ip 169.254.10.3
frequency Syntax
frequency interval
undo frequency
View
Parameter
interval: Automatic test interval, in the range 0 to 65535. Default is 0 which
means no automatic test.
Description
Use the frequency command to configure an automatic test interval.
Use the undo frequency command to disable an automatic test.
The system automatically tests at intervals specified by this command, where the
argument interval is greater than 0.
For the related command, see count.
Example
Set the automatic test interval to 10 seconds.
[SW5500-administrator-icmp]frequency 10
test-type Syntax
test-type type
View

Parameter
test-type: Test type, which can be one of the following key words:
■ dhcp: DHCP test
■ ftp: FTP connection test
■ icmp-echo: ICMP test, the default test type
■ snmpquery: SNMP test
■ tcp-private: Tests the TCP connection of a specified unknown port
■ tcp-public: Tests the TCP connection of Port 7
■ udp-private: Tests the UDP connection of a specified unknown port
■ udp-public: Tests the UDP connection of Port 7
Description
Use the test-type command to configure the type of test.
HWPing tests include DHCP, FTP, HTTP, ICMP, SNMP, TCP and UDP test. The default
test type is ICMP.
Example
Set the test type to ICMP.
[SW5500-administrator-icmp]test-type icmp-echo
test-enable Syntax
test-enable
View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the test-enable command to execute an HWPing test.
After executing the test-enable command, the system will not display the test
result. You may view the test result information by executing the display hwping
command.
For the related command, see display hwping.
Example
Excecute the HWPing test defined by the test group ‘wgw-testicmp’.
[SW5500-hwping-wgw-testicmp]test-enable
display hwping Syntax

display hwping { result | history } [ administrator-name
operation-tag ]

Log Commands 457
View
Any View
Parameter
Use the display hwping command to view test results.
If a test group is specified using the arguments of administrator-name and

test-operation-tag , the system displays only the test result of the group. If not,
it displays the test results of all the test groups.
For the related command, see test-enable
Example
Display the test result of the test group whose administrator name is
‘administrator’ and operation tag is ‘jitter’.
[SW5500]display hwping result administrator icmp
Log Commands This section displays the logging options available on your Switch 5500G-EI.
display channel Syntax

display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has
ten channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name, the name can be console, monitor,
loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7,
channel8, channel9. Where console is channel 0, monitor is channel 1, loghost
is channel 2, trapbuffer is channel 3, logbuffer is channel 4 and snmpagent is
channel 5.
Description
Use the display channel command to display the details about the information
channel.
Without a parameter, the display channel command shows the configurations

of all the channels.
Example
Show details about the information channel 0.
<SW5500>display channel 0
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUGGING_LEVEL
0xffff0000default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging

display info-center Syntax

display info-center
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display info-center command to display the configuration of system
log and the information recorded in the memory buffer.
If the information in the current log/trap buffer is less than the specified sizeval,
display the actual log/trap information.
For the related commands, see info-center enable, info-center loghost,

info-center logbuffer, info-center console channel, info-center
monitor channel.
Example
Show the system log information.
<SW5500>display info-center
Information Center: enabled
Log host:
173.168.1.10, channel number:2, channel name:loghost,
language:english , host facility local:7
Console:
channel number:0, channel name:console
Monitor:
channel number:1, channel name:monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number:5, channel name:snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled, max buffer size:1024, current buffer size:256
current messages:6, channel number:4, channel name:logbuffer
dropped messages:0, overwrote messages:0
Trap buffer:
enabled, max buffer size:1024, current buffer size:256
current messages:0, channel number:3, channel
name:trapbuffer
dropped messages:0, overwrote messages:0
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
XRN SWITCH OF this Device: LOG = disable; TRAP = disable; DEBUG =
enable
display logbuffer Syntax

display logbuffer [ level severity | size buffersize ]* [ | { begin |
exclude | include } regular-expression ]

Log Commands 459
View
Any view
Parameter
level: Information level.
severity: Information level, do not output information below this level. By

default, the log information level is warnings, the trap information level is
debugging, the debugging information level is debugging.
Information at different levels is as follows:

■ emergencies: Level 1 information, which cannot be used by the system.
■ alerts: Level 2 information, to be reacted immediately.
■ critical: Level 3 information, critical information.
■ errors: Level 4 information, error information.
■ warnings: level 5 information, warning information.
■ notifications: Level 6 information, showed normally and important.
■ informational: Level 7 information, notice to be recorded.
■ debugging: Level 8 information, generated during the debugging progress.
size: Configure the size of buffer.
buffersize: Size of buffer (number of messages which can be kept); By default,

the size of the buffer is 512.
|: Filter the configuration information to be output via regular expression.
begin: Begin with the line that matches the regular expression.
exclude: Exclude lines that match the regular expression.
include: Include lines that match the regular expression.
regular-expression: Define the regular expression.
Description
Using display logbuffer command, you can view the attribute of logbuffer and
the information recorded in logbuffer.

monitor channel.
Example
Show the system logbuffer attribute and the log information in logbuffer.
<SW5500>display logbuffer
Logging buffer configuration and contents:enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 512
Channel number : 4 , Channel name : logbuffer

Dropped messages : 0
Overwritten messages : 0
Current messages : 91
display logbuffer Syntax

summary display logbuffer summary [ level severity ]
View
Any view
Parameter
level: Information level.
severity: Information level, do not output information below this level. By default,
the log information level is warnings, the trap information level is debugging, the
debugging information level is debugging.

■ emergencies: Level 1 information, which cannot be used by the system.
■ alerts: Level 2 information, to be reacted immediately.
■ critical: Level 3 information, critical information.
■ errors: Level 4 information, error information.
■ warnings: level 5 information, warning information.
■ notifications: Level 6 information, showed normally and important.
■ informational: Level 7 information, notice to be recorded.
■ debugging: Level 8 information, generated during the debugging progress.
Description
Using display logbuffer summary command, you can view the summary
information recorded in logbuffer.
monitor channel.
Example
Show the summary information recorded in logbuffer.
<SW5500>display logbuffer summary
EMERG ALERT CRIT ERROR WARN NOTIF INFO DEBUG
0 0 0 0 94 0 1 0
display trapbuffer Syntax

display trapbuffer [ size buffersize ]
View
Any view

Log Commands 461
Parameter
buffersize: Size of buffer (number of messages which can be kept); By default,

the size of the buffer is 256.
Description
Using display trapbuffer command, you can view the attribute of trapbuffer
and the information recorded in trapbuffer.
monitor channel.
Example
Show the system trapbuffer attribute and the log information in trapbuffer.
<SW5500>display trapbuffer
Trapping Buffer Configuration and contents:
enabled
allowed max buffer size : 1024
actual buffer size : 256
channel number : 3 , channel name : trapbuffer
dropped messages : 0
overwrote messages : 0
current messages : 6
Dec 31 14:01:25 2004 Quidway DEV/2/LOAD FINISHED:

Trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.2.23.1.12.1.20: frameIndex is 0, slotIndex
0.4
Dec 31 14:01:33 2004 Quidway DEV/2/BOARD STATE CHANGE TO NORMAL:

Trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.2.23.1.12.1.11: frameIndex is 0, slotIndex
0.2
Dec 31 14:01:40 2004 Quidway DEV/2/BOARD STATE CHANGE TO NORMAL:

Trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.2.23.1.12.1.11: frameIndex is 0, slotIndex 0.
….
info-center channel Syntax

name info-center channel channel-number name channel-name
undo info-center channel channel-number
View
System view
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name with a character string not exceeding
30 characters, excluding "-", "/" or "\".

Description
Use the info-center channel name command to rename a channel specified by
the channel-number as channel-name. . Using the undo info-center channel
command, you can restore the channel name.
Note that the channel name cannot be duplicated.
Example
Rename channel 0 as execconsole.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center channel 0 name execconsole
info-center console Syntax

channel
info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center console channel
View
System view
Parameter
channels.
channel-name: : Specify the channel name. The name can be channel6,

channel7, channel8, channel9, console, logbuffer, loghost, monitor,
snmpagent, trapbuffer.
Description
Use the info-center console channel command to configure the channel
through which the log information is output to the console.
By default, the Switch 5500G-EI does not output log information to the console.
This command takes effect only after system logging is started.
For the related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center.
Example
Configure to output log information to the console through channel 0.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center console channel 0
info-center enable Syntax

info-center enable
undo info-center enable

Log Commands 463
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the info-center enable command to enable the system log function. Use
the undo info-center enable command to disable system log function.
By default, system log function is enabled.
Only after the system log function is enabled can the system output the log
information to the info-center loghost and console, etc.
For the related commands, see info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer,

info-center console channel, info-center monitor channel, display
info-center.
Example
Enable the system log function.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center enable
info-center logbuffer Syntax

info-center logbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } |
size buffersize ]
undo info-center logbuffer [ channel | size ]
View
System view
Parameter
channel: Configure the channel to output information to buffer.
channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name. The name can be channel6,

buffersize: Size of buffer (number of messages which can be kept); The default
size of the buffer is 512.

Description
Use the info-center logbuffer command to configure to output information
to the memory buffer. Use the undo info-center logbuffer command to
cancel the information output to buffer
This command takes effect only after the system logging is enabled.
Example
Send log information to buffer and sets the size of buffer as 50.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center logbuffer 50
info-center loghost Syntax

info-center loghost host-ip-addr [ channel { channel-number |
channel-name } | facility local-number | language { chinese | english
} ]
undo info-center loghost host-ip-addr
View
System view
Parameter
host-ip-addr: IP address of info-center loghost.
channel: Configure information channel of the info-center loghost.
channels.

facility: Configure the recording tool of info-center loghost.
local-number: Record tool of info-center loghost, ranging from local0 to local7.
language: Set the logging language.
chinese, english: Language used in log file.
Description
Use the info-center loghost command to set the IP address of the info-center
loghost to send information to it. Use the undo info-center loghost command
to cancel output to info-center loghost.
By default, switches do not output information to info-center loghost.

Log Commands 465
Example
Configure to send log information to the UNIX workstation at 202.38.160.1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center loghost 202.38.160.1
info-center loghost syntax

source info-center loghost source interface-name
undo info-center source
View
System view
Parameter
source interface-name: Sets the source address of packets sent to the loghost
as the address of the interface specified by interface-name. Normally, the
interface is a VLAN interface.
Description
Use the info-center loghost source command to set the source address of
packets sent to the loghost as the address of the interface specified by the
interface-name parameter.
Use the undo info-center loghost source command to cancel the setting of
the source address of the packets sent to the loghost.
Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.
Example
Set the source address of the packets sent to the loghost as the address of the
VLAN interface 1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center loghost source vlan-interface 1
info-center monitor Syntax

channel
info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center monitor channel
View
System view
Parameter
ten channels.


Description
Use the info-center monitor channel command to set the channel to output
the log information to the user terminal.
Use undo info-center monitor channel command to restore the channel to

output the log information to the user terminal to the default value.
By default, switches do not output log information to user terminal.
This command takes effect only after system logging is started.
Example
Configure channel 0 to output log information to user terminal.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center monitor channel 0
info-center snmp Syntax

channel info-center snmp channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center snmp channel
View
System view
Parameter
ten channels. By default, channel 5 is used.

Description
Use the info-center snmp channel command to specify new channel for
transmitting the SNMP information.
Use undo info-center snmp channel command to restore the channel for
transmitting the SNMP information to default value.
Related commands: display snmp.
Example
Configure channel 6 as the SNMP information channel.
<SW5500>system-view

Log Commands 467
[SW5500]info-center snmp channel 6
info-center source Syntax

info-center source { modu-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ debug { level severity | state state }* | log {
level severity | state state }* | trap { level severity | state state
} ] *
undo info-center source { modu-name | default } channel {

channel-number | channel-name }
View
System view
Parameter
modu-name: Module name.
default: All the modules.
log: Log information.
trap: Trap information.
debugging: Debugging information.
level: Level.
severity: Information level, do not output information below this level. By

default, the log information level is warnings, the trap information level is
debugging, the debugging information level is debugging.

emergencies: Level 1 information, which cannot be used by the system.
alerts: Level 2 information, to be reacted immediately.
critical: Level 3 information, critical information.
errors: Level 4 information, error information.
warnings: level 5 information, warning information.
notifications: Level 6 information, showed normally and important.
informational: Level 7 information, notice to be recorded.
debugging: Level 8 information, generated during the debugging progress.
If you only specify the level for one or two of the three types of information, the
level(s) of the unspecified type(s) return to the default. For example, if you only
define the level of the log information, then the levels of the trap and debugging
information return to the defaults.
channel-number: Channel number to be set.

channel-name: Channel name to be set. The name can be channel6, channel7,

channel8, channel9, console, logbuffer, loghost, monitor, snmpagent,
trapbuffer.
state: Set the state of the information.
state: Specify the state as on or off.
Description
Use the info-center source command to add/delete a record to the information
channel. Use the undo info-center source command to delete the contents of
the information channel.
For example, for the filter of IP module log output, you can configure to output
the logs at a level higher than warnings to the log host and output those higher
than informational to the log buffer. You can also configure to output the trap
information on the IP module to a specified trap host, etc.
The channels for filtering in all the directions are specified by this configuration
command. All the information will be sent to the corresponding directions
through the specified channels. You can configure the channels in the output
direction, channel filter information, filtering and redirecting of all kinds of
information.
At present, the system distributes an information channel in each output direction

by default, shown as follows:
Table 57 Information Channel in Each Output Direction by Default
Output direction Information channel name

Console console
Monitor monitor
Info-center loghost loghost
Log buffer logbuffer
Trap buffer trapbuffer
snmp snmpagent
In addition, each information channel has a default record with the module name
“default” and module number as 0xffff0000. However, for different information
channel, the default log, trap and debugging settings in the records may be
different with one another. Use default configuration record if a module does not
have any specific configuration record in the channel.
Example
Configure to enable the log information of STP module in SNMP channel and
allows the output of the information with a level no higher than emergencies.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center source stp channel snmpagent log level
emergencies

Log Commands 469
info-center switch-on Syntax

info-center switch-on { unit-id | master | all } [ debugging |
logging | trapping ]*
undo info-center switch-on { unit-id | master | all } [ debugging |

logging | trapping ]*
View
System view
Parameter
unit-id: Unit ID of switch.
master: Master switch of Fabric.
all: All switches of Fabric.
logging: Log information.
trapping: Trap information.
Description
Use the info-center switch-on command to turn on the information
synchronization switch of the specified switch.
Use the undo info-center switch-on command to turn off the information
synchronization switch of the specified switch.
By default, the debugging information synchronization switch on master unit is

enabled, log information and trap information switches on master unit are
disabled, all information synchronization switches on slave unit are disabled.
After the forming of a Fabric by switches which support the XRN, the log,
debugging and trap information among the switches is synchronous. The
synchronization process is as follows: each switch sends its own information to
other switches in the Fabric and meantime receives the information from others,
and then the switch updates the local information to ensure the information
coincidence within the Fabric.
The switch provides command line to turn on/off the synchronization switch in
every switch. If the synchronization switch of a switch is turned off, it does not
send information to other switches but still receives information from others.
Example
To turn on the trapping information synchronization switch of the unit 2, enter the
following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center switch-on 2 trapping

info-center timestamp Syntax

info-center timestamp { log | trap | debugging } { boot | date | none
}
undo info-center timestamp { log | trap | debugging }
View
System view
Parameter
log: Log information.
trap: Trap information.
boot: Time elapsing after system starts. Format: xxxxxx.yyyyyy, xxxxxx is the high
32 bits of the elapsed time (in milliseconds) after system starts, and yyyyyy is the
low 32 bits.
date: Current system date and time. It shows as yyyy/mm/dd-hh:mm:ss in

Chinese environment and mm/dd/yyyy-hh:mm:ss in Western language
environment.
None: No timestamp format.
Description
Use the info-center timestamp command to configure the timestamp output
format in debugging/trap information. Use the undo info-center timestamp
command to disable the output of timestamp field.
By default, datetime stamp is used.
Example
Configure the debugging information timestamp format as boot.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center timestamp debugging boot
[SW5500]
info-center trapbuffer Syntax

info-center trapbuffer [ size buffersize ] [ channel { channel-number
| channel-name } ]
undo info-center trapbuffer [ channel | size ]
View
System view
Parameter
size: Configure the size of the trap buffer.

Log Commands 471
buffersize: Size of trap buffer (numbers of messages).
channel: Configure the channel to output information to trap buffer.
ten channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name.
Description
Use the info-center trapbuffer command to output information to the trap
buffer. Use the undo info-center trapbuffer command to cancel output
information to trap buffer.
By default, output information is transmitted to trap buffer and size of trap buffer
is 256.
Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.
Example
Send information to the trap buffer and sets the size of buffer as 30.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]info-center trapbuffer size 30
[SW5500]
reset logbuffer Syntax

reset logbuffer
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset logbuffer command to clear information in log buffer.
Example
Clear information in log buffer.
<SW5500>reset logbuffer
reset trapbuffer Syntax

reset trapbuffer
View
User view

Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset trapbuffer command to clear information in trap buffer.
Example
Clear information in trap buffer.
<SW5500>reset trapbuffer
terminal debugging Syntax

terminal debugging
undo terminal debugging
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the terminal debugging command to configure to display the debugging
information on the terminal. Use the undo terminal debugging command to
configure not to display the debugging information on the terminal.
By default, the displaying function is disabled.
Related commands: debugging.
Example
Enable the terminal display debugging.
<SW5500>terminal debugging
terminal logging Syntax

terminal logging
undo terminal logging
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the terminal logging command to start logging the information displayed
on the terminal. Use the undo terminal logging command to disable terminal
log information display.

Log Commands 473
By default, this function is enabled.
Example
Disable the terminal log display.
<SW5500>undo terminal logging
terminal monitor Syntax

terminal monitor
undo terminal monitor
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the terminal monitor command to enable the log debugging/log/trap on
the terminal monitor. Use the undo terminal monitor command to disable these
functions.
By default, enable these functions for the console user and disable them for the
terminal user.
This command only takes effect on the current terminal where the commands are
input. The debugging/log/trap information can be output to the current terminal,
beginning in user view. When the terminal monitor is shut down, no
debugging/log/trap information will be displayed in local terminal, which is equals
to having performed the undo terminal debugging, undo terminal logging,
undo terminal trapping commands. When the terminal monitor is enabled to use
terminal debugging / undo terminal debugging, terminal logging /
terminal logging and terminal trapping / undo terminal trapping
respectively to enable or disable the corresponding functions.
Example
Disable the terminal monitor.
<SW5500>undo terminal monitor
terminal trapping Syntax

terminal trapping
undo terminal trapping
View
User view
Parameter
None

Description
Use the terminal trapping command to enable terminal trap information
display. Use the undo terminal trapping command to disable this function.
By default, this function is enabled.
Example
Enable trap information display.
<SW5500>terminal trapping
SNMP Configuration This section displays the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Commands commands available on your Switch 5500G-EI.
display snmp-agent Syntax

display snmp-agent { local-engineid | remote-engineid }
View
All views
Parameter
local-engineid: local engine ID.
remote-engineid: remote engine ID.
Description
Use the display snmp-agent engineid command to view the engine ID of
current device.
SNMP engine is the core of SNMP entity. It performs the function of sending,
receiving and authenticating SNMP message, extracting PDU, packet
encapsulation and the communication with SNMP application, etc.
Example
Display the engine ID of current device.
<SW5500>display snmp-agent engineid
Local SNMP engineID: 00000009020000000C025808

community display snmp-agent community [ read | write ]
View
All views
Parameter
read: display read-only community information.
write: display read-write community information.

Description
Use the display snmp-agent community command to display the currently
configured community names.
Example
Display the currently configured community names.
<SW5500>display snmp-agent community
community name:public
group name:public
storage-type: nonVolatile
community name:tom
group name:guest
storage-type: nonVolatile

group display snmp-agent group [ group-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
groupname: Group name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
Description
Use the display snmp-agent group command to display group name, safe
mode, state of various views and storage modes.
Example
Display SNMP group name and safe mode.
<SW5500>display snmp-agent group
groupname: guest
Security model: v2c noAuthnoPriv
readview:v1default
writeview: no writeview specified
notifyview: *tv.FFFFFFFF
storage-type: volatile
The following table describes the output fields.
Table 58 Output description of the display snmp-agent group command
Field Description
groupname SNMP Group name of the user
Security model The security model adopted by SNMP
readview Read-only MIB view name corresponding to that group
writeview Writable MIB view corresponding to that group
notifyview The name of the notify MIB view corresponding to that group
storage-type Storage type


mib-view display snmp-agent mib-view [ exclude | include | viewname mib-view ]
View
All views
Parameter
exclude: Display the SNMP mib view excluded.
include: Display the SNMP mib view included.
viewname: Display the SNMP mib view according to the mib view name.
mib-view: Specify the mib view name.
Description
The display snmp-agent mib-view command is used to view the MIB view
configuration information of the Switch.
Example
Display the information about the currently configured MIB view.
<SW5500>display snmp-agent mib-view
View name:mv MIB Subtree:internet
Storage-type: nonVolatile -included active
View name:test MIB Subtree:internet

View name:ViewDefault MIB Subtree:internet

View name:ViewDefault MIB Subtree:snmpUsmMIB

Storage-type: nonVolatile -excluded active
View name:ViewDefault MIB Subtree:snmpVacmMIB

View name:ViewDefault MIB Subtree:snmpModules.18


Table 59 Output description of the display snmp-agent mib-view command
Field Description
View name View name
MIB Subtree MIB subtree
storage-type Storage type
included/excluded Permit or forbid access to a MIB object
active Indicate the line state in the table
If the SNMP Agent is disabled, "Snmp Agent disabled" will be displayed after you
execute the above display commands.


statistics display snmp-agent statistics
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display snmp-agent statistics command to view the current state of
SNMP communication.
This command provides a counter for SNMP operations.
Example
Display the current state of SNMP communication.
<SW5500>display snmp-agent statistics
0 Messages delivered to the SNMP entity
0 Messages which were for an unsupported version
0 Messages which used an unknown community name
0 Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community
supplied
0 ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding
0 MIB objects retrieved successfully
0 MIB objects altered successfully
0 Get-request PDUs accepted and processed
0 Get-next PDUs accepted and processed
0 Set-request PDUs accepted and processed
3 Messages passed from the SNMP entity
0 SNMP PDUs which had a tooBig error (Maximum packet size 1500)
0 SNMP PDUs which had a noSuchName error
0 SNMP PDUs which had a badValue error
0 SNMP PDUs which had a general error
0 Response PDUs accepted and processed
3 Trap PDUs accepted and processed
Table 60 Output description of the display snmp-agent statistics command
Field Description
0 Messages delivered to the SNMP entity Total number of the input SNMP packets
0 Messages which were for an Number of packets with version information error
unsupported version
0 Messages which used an unknown Number of packets with community name error
community name
0 Messages which represented an illegal Number of packets with authority error
operation for the community supplied corresponding to the community name
0 ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of Number of SNMP packets with encoding error
decoding
0 MIB objects retrieved successfully Number of variables requested by NMS
0 MIB objects altered successfully The number of variables set by NMS

Table 60 Output description of the display snmp-agent statistics command

0 Get-request PDUs accepted and Number of the received packets requested by get
processed
0 Get-next PDUs accepted and Number of the received packets requested by
processed get-next
0 Set-request PDUs accepted and Number of the received packets requested by set
processed
3 Messages passed from the SNMP Total number of the output SNMP packets
entity
0 SNMP PDUs which had a tooBig error Number SNMP packet with too_big error
(Maximum packet size 1500)
0 SNMP PDUs which had a noSuchName Number of the packets requesting nonexistent MIB
error objects
0 SNMP PDUs which had a badValue Number of SNMP packets with Bad_values error
error
0 SNMP PDUs which had a general error Number of SNMP packets with General_errors
0 Response PDUs accepted and Number of the response packets sent
processed
3 Trap PDUs accepted and processed Number of the sent Trap packets

sys-info display snmp-agent sys-info [ contact | location | version ]*
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display snmp-agent sys-info command to view the system

information of SNMP configuration. The information includes the character string
sysContact (system contact), the character string describing the system location,
the version information about the running SNMP in the system.
Example
Display the character string sysContact (system contact).
<SW5500>display snmp-agent sys-info contact
The contact person for this managed node:
Mr.Smith -Tel:3306
Display the system location.
<SW5500>display snmp-agent sys-info location
The physical location of this node:
Boston USA
Display the version information of running SNMP
<SW5500>display snmp-agent sys-info version
SNMP version running in the system:
SNMPv3


usm-user display snmp-agent usm-user [ engineid engineid | group groupname |
username username ]
View
All views
Parameter
engineid: display user information with specified engine ID.
username: display user information with specified user name.
groupname: display user information of specified group.
Description
Use the display snmp-agent usm-user command to view information of all the
SNMP usernames in the group username list.
Example
Display the information of all the current users.
<SW5500>display snmp-agent usm-user
User name: authuser
Engine ID: 00000009020000000C025808
UserStatus: active

Table 61 Output description of the display snmp-agent usm-user command
Field Description
User name Name of SNMP user
Engine ID Character string identifying SNMP device
UserStatus The status of the user, may be active or inactive
display snmp-proxy unit Syntax

display snmp-proxy unit unit-id
View
Any view
Parameter
unit-id:Unit ID of the switch.
Description
Using display snmp-proxy unit command, you can view statistics information
of SNMP proxy.
Example
View statistics information of SNMP proxy on unit 1.
<SW5500> display snmp-proxy unit 1
Number of GetReq msgs received :0

Number of GetReq msgs sent :0
Number of GetNextReq msgs Received :0

Number of GetNextReq msgs sent :0
Number of GetResp msgs received :0

Number of GetResp msgs sent :0
Number of GetNextResp msgs received :0

Number of GetNextResp msgs sent :0
Number of SnmpMibSync msgs received :0

Number of SnmpMibSync msgs sent :0
Number of SnmpMibGetCntrReq msgs received :0

Number of SnmpMibGetCntrReq msgs sent :0
Number of SnmpMibGetCntrResp msgs received :0

Number of SnmpMibGetCntrResp msgs sent :0
enable snmp trap Syntax

enable snmp trap updown
undo enable snmp trap updown
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
None.
Description
Use the enable snmp trap updown command to enable the current port to
transmit the LINK UP and LINK DOWN trap information.
Use the undo enable snmp trap updown command to disable the current port to
transmit the LINK UP and LINK DOWN trap information.
The command is not available for the Loopback interface, NULL interface and AUX
interface.
Example
Enable the current port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to transmit the LINK UP and LINK
DOWN trap information.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]enable snmp trap updown
snmp-agent community Syntax

snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ mib-view
view-name ] [ acl acl-list ] ]
undo snmp-agent community community-name

View
System view
Parameter
read: Indicate that MIB object can only be read.
write: Indicate that MIB object can be read and written.
community-name: Community name character string.
view-name: MIB view name.
acl acl-list: set access control list for specified community.
Description
Use the snmp-agent community command to set the community access name and
enable access to SNMP. Use the undo snmp-agent community command to cancel
the settings of community access name.
Example
Configure community name as guest and with read-only access permission.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent community read guest
Configure community name as mgr and read-write access permission.

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent community write mgr
Delete the community name comaccess.

[SW5500]undo snmp-agent community comaccess
snmp-agent group Syntax

snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group_name [ read-view read-view ] [
write-view write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-list ]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [

read-view read-view ] [ write-view write-view ] [ notify-view
notify-view ] [ acl acl-list ]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]
View
System view
Parameter
group-name: Enter a group name, up to 32 characters in length.
authentication: Specifies that the packet is authenticated without encryption.

privacy: Specifies that the packet is authenticated and encrypted.
read-view: Configures read-only view settings.
read-view: Enter a read-only view name, up to 32 characters in length.
write-view: Configures read and write view settings.
write-view: Enter a read and write view name, up to 32 characters in length.
notify-view: Configures notify view settings.
notify-view: Enter a notify view name, up to 32 characters in length.
acl acl-list: Enter the access control list for this group name.
v3: Configures SNMP version 3.
Description
Use the snmp-agent group command to configure a new SNMP group, that is,
map an SNMP user to SNMP view.
Use the undo snmp-agent group command to delete a specified SNMP group.
3Com recommends that you do not use the notify-view parameter when
configuring an SNMP group, for the following reasons:
■ The snmp-agent target-host command automatically generates a

notify-view for a user, and adds it to the corresponding group.
■ Any change of the SNMP group notify-view will affect all the users related to
this group.
Example
Create an SNMP group named guest:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent group v3 guest
snmp-agent Syntax
local-engineid snmp-agent local-engineid engineid
undo snmp-agent local-engineid
View
System view
Parameter
local-engineid: Specify an engineID for the local SNMPv3 entity
engineid: Specify the engine ID with a character string, only composed of

hexadecimal numbers between 5 and 32 inclusive. The default value is "Enterprise
Number + device information".

Description
Use the snmp-agent local-engineid command to configure a name for a local
or remote SNMP engine on the Switch. Use the undo snmp-agent
local-engineid command to restore the default setting of engine ID.
Device information is determined according to different products. It can be IP

address, MAC address or user defined text. However, you must use numbers in
hexadecimal form.
Example
Configure the ID of a local or remote device as 1234512345.
<SW5500>system-view
<SW5500>snmp-agent local-engineid 1234512345
snmp-agent mib-view Syntax

snmp-agent mib-view { included | excluded } view-name oid-tree
undo snmp-agent mib-view view-name
View
System view
Parameter
included: Include this MIB subtree.
excluded: Exclude this MIB subtree.
view-name: Specify the view name, with a character string, ranging from 1 to 32
characters.
oid-tree: MIB object subtree. It can be a character string of the variable OID, or a
variable name, ranging from 1 to 255 characters.
Description
Use the snmp-agent mib-view command to create or update the view
information. Use the undo snmp-agent mib-view command to delete the view
information
By default, the view name is v1default. OID is 1.3.6.1.
Both the character string of OID and the node name can be input as parameter.
Example
Create a view that consists of all the objects of MIB-II.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent mib-view included mib2 5.6.1.3
snmp-agent packet Syntax

max-size snmp-agent packet max-size byte-count

undo snmp-agent packet max-size
View
System view
Parameter
byte-count: Specify the size of SNMP packet (measured in bytes), ranging from
484 to 17940; the default size is 1500 bytes.
Description
Use the snmp-agent packet max-size command to configure the size of SNMP
packet that the Agent can send/receive. Use the undo snmp-agent packet
max-size command to restore the default size of SNMP packet.
The sizes of the SNMP packets received/sent by the Agent are different in different
network environments.
Example
Set the size of SNMP packet to 1042 bytes.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent packet max-size 1042
snmp-agent sys-info Syntax

snmp-agent sys-info { contact sysContact | location sysLocation |
version { { v1 | v2c | v3 } * | all } }
undo snmp-agent sys-info [ { contact | location }* | version { { v1 |

v2c | v3 }* | all } ]
View
System view
Parameter
sysContact: Specify a character string describing the system maintenance
contact (in bytes), with a length ranging from 1 to 255. The default contact
information is "3Com Marlborough USA".
sysLocation: Specify a character string to describe the system location. By

default, the character string is "Marlborough USA".
version: version of running SNMP.
v1: SNMP V1.
v2c: SNMP V2C.
v3: SNMP V3.
all: all SNMP version (includes SNMP V1, SNMP V2C, SNMP V3).

Description
Use the snmp-agent sys-info command to set system information such as
geographical location of the device, contact information for system maintenance
and version information of running SNMP. Use the undo snmp-agent sys-info
location command to restore the default value.
Example
Set system location as Building 3/Room 214.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent sys-info location Building 3/Room 214
snmp-agent target-host Syntax

snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain host-addr [ udp-port
udp-port-number ] params securityname community-string [ v1 | v2c |
v3 [ authentication | privacy ] ]
undo snmp-agent target-host host-addr securityname community-string
View
System view
Parameter
trap: Specifies the host to receive traps or notifications
address: Specifies the transport address to be used in the generation of SNMP

messages.
udp-domain: Specifies the transport domain over UDP for the target address.
host-addr: Enter the IP address of the destination host.
udp-port udp-port-number: Enter the UDP port number of the host to receive
the SNMP notification.
params: Specifies the SNMP target information to be used in the generation of

SNMP messages.
community-string: Enter the community name, up to 32 characters in length.
v1: Specifies SNMP version 1.
v2c: Specifies SNMP version 2C.
v3: Specifies SNMP version 3.
authentication: Specifies that the packet is authenticated without encryption.
privacy: Specifies that the packet is authenticated and encrypted.
Description
Use the snmp-agent target-host command to select and configure the host that
you want to receive SNMP notification.

Use the undo snmp-agent target-host command to cancel the host currently
configured to receive SNMP notification.
You must enter the snmp-agent trap enable command before you enter the
snmp-agent target-host command. The snmp-agent trap enable command
enables the device to transmit Trap packets. To send Trap messages, at least one
snmp-agent target-host command should be configured.
Example
To enable Trap messages to be sent to 2.2.2.2 with a community name of guest,
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent trap enable
[SW5500]snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 2.2.2.2
params securityname guest
[SW5500]
To enable Trap messages to be sent to 2.2.2.2 with a community name of
public, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent trap enable
params securityname public
snmp-agent trap enable Syntax

snmp-agent trap enable [ configuration | flash | ospf [ process-id ]
[ ospf-trap-list ] | standard [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown
| linkup | warmstart ]* | system ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable [ bgp [ backwardtransition ] [

established ] | configuration | flash | ospf [ process-id ] [
ospf-trap-list ] | standard [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown |
linkup | warmstart ]* | system ]
View
System view
Parameter
configuration: Configure to send SNMP configuratin Trap packets.
flash: Configure to send SNMP flash Trap packets.
ospf [ process-id ] [ ospf-trap-list ]: Configure to send the OSPF trap

packets. process-id is the ID of the OSPF process, ranging from 1 to 65535.
ospf-trap-list is the list of OSPF trap information.
standard [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown | linkup | warmstart

]*: Configure to send standard Trap messages.
authentication: Configure to send SNMP authentication Trap messages

when authentication fails.

coldstart: Configure to send SNMP cold start Trap messages when switch is
rebooted.
linkdown: Configure to send SNMP link down Trap messages when switch port
turns down.
linkup: Configure to send SNMP link up Trap messages when switch port
turns up.
warmstart: Configure to send SNMP warm start Trap messages when snmp is
re-enabled.
system: Configure to send SysMib trap messages.
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap enable command to enable the device to send Trap
message. Use the undo snmp-agent trap enable command to disable Trap
message sending.
By default, Trap message sending is disabled.
The snmp-agent trap enable command and the snmp-agent target-host

command should be used at the same time. The snmp-agent target-host
command specifies which hosts can receive Trap message. To send Trap messages,
at least one snmp-agent target-host command should be configured.
Example
Enable to send the trap packet of SNMP authentication failure to 10.1.1.1. The
community name is guest.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent trap enable standard authentication
param securityname guest
snmp-agent trap life Syntax

snmp-agent trap life seconds
undo snmp-agent trap life
View
System view
Parameter
seconds: Specify the timeouts, ranging from 1 to 2592000 seconds. By default,
the timeout interval is 120 seconds.
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap life command to set the timeout of Trap packets. Use
the undo snmp-agent trap life command to restore the default value.
The set timeout of Trap packet is represented by seconds. If time exceeds

seconds, this Trap packet will be discarded.

For the related commands, see snmp-agent trap enable,

snmp-agent target-host.
Example
Configure the timeout interval of Trap packet as 60 seconds.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent trap life 60
snmp-agent trap Syntax

queue-size snmp-agent trap queue-size length
undo snmp-agent trap queue-size
View
System view
Parameter
length: Length of queue, ranging from 1 to 1000; the default length is 100.
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap queue-size command to configure the information
queue length of Trap packet sent to destination host. Use the undo snmp-agent
trap queue-size command to restore the default value.
For the related commands, see snmp-agent trap enable,

snmp-agent target-host, snmp-agent trap life.
Example
Configure the queue length to 200.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent trap queue-size 200
snmp-agent trap source Syntax

snmp-agent trap source vlan-interface vlan-id
undo snmp-agent trap source
View
System view
Parameter
vlan-id: Specify the VLAN interface ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap source command to specify the source address for
sending Traps. Use the undo snmp-agent trap source command to cancel the
source address for sending Traps.

Example
Configure the IP address of the VLAN interface 1 as the source address for
transmitting the Trap packets.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent trap source vlan-interface 1
snmp-agent usm-user Syntax

snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } username groupname [ acl acl-list ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } username groupname
snmp-agent usm-user v3 username groupname [ authentication-mode {

md5 | sha } authpassstring [ privacy-mode { des56 privpassstring }]]
[ acl acl-list ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 username groupname { local | engineid

engine-id }
View
System view
Parameter
username: Enter the user name, up to 32 characters in length.
groupname: Enter the group name corresponding to that user, up to 32 characters

in length.
v1: Specifies the use of V1 safe mode.
v2c: Specifies the use of V2c safe mode.
v3: Specifies the use of V3 safe mode.
authentication-mode: Specifies the use of authentication.
md5: Specifies that the MD5 algorithm is used in authentication. MD5

authentication uses a128-bit password. The computation speed of MD5 is faster
than that of SHA
sha: Specifies that the SHA algorithm is used in authentication. SHA

authentication uses a 160-bit password. The computation speed of SHA is slower
than that of MD5, but SHA offers higher security.
authpassstring: Enter the authentication password, up to 64 characters in

length.
privacy-mode: Specifies the use of authentication and encryption.
des 56: Specifies that the DES encryption algorithm is used. Must be entered if
you enter the privacy-mode parameter.

privpassstring: Enter the encryption password with a character string, ranging

from 1 to 64 bytes.
acl acl-list: Enter the access control list for this user, based on USM name.
Description
Use the snmp-agent usm-user command to add a new community name or, if
you use the V3 parameter, a new user to an SNMP group.
Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user command to delete a user from an SNMP
group.
SNMP engineID (for authentication) is required when configuring remote users.

This command will not be effective if engineID is not configured.
For V1 and V2C, this command will add a new community name. For V3, it will
add a new user for an SNMP group. See Related Commands below.
Related commands: display snmp-agent, snmp-agent local engineid
Example
To add a user named JohnQ to the SNMP group guest, then configure the use of
MD5, and set the authentication password to pass, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]snmp-agent usm-user v3 JohnQ guest authentication-mode md5
pass
undo snmp-agent Syntax

undo snmp-agent
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the undo snmp-agent command to disable all versions of SNMP running on
the server.
Any snmp-agent command will enable SNMP Agent.
Example
Disable the running SNMP agents of all SNMP versions.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]undo snmp-agent
RMON Configuration This section describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) configuration commands
Commands available on your Switch 5500G-EI.

display rmon alarm Syntax

display rmon alarm [ alarm-table-entry ]
View
All views
Parameter
alarm-table-entry: Alarm table entry index.
Description
Use the display rmon alarm command to view RMON alarm information.
For the related commands, see rmon alarm.
Example
Display the RMON alarm information.
<SW5500>display rmon alarm
Alarm table 1 owned by 3COM is VALID.
Samples absolute value : 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
<etherStatsOctets.1>
Sampling interval : 10(sec)
Rising threshold : 1000(linked with event 1)
Falling threshold : 100(linked with event 1)
When startup enables : risingOrFallingAlarm
Latest value : 0
Table 62 Output description of the display rmon alarm command
Field Description
Alarm table 1 Index 1 in the alarm table
3Com Owner
VALID The entry corresponding to the index is valid
Samples absolute value Sampling the absolute value of the node
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
Sampling interval The interval of sampling the value
Rising threshold1 Rising threshold. When sampling value rises from
normal value to this threshold, rising threshold alarm
will be triggered.
Falling threshold Falling threshold. When sampling value decreases from
normal value to this threshold, falling threshold alarm
will be triggered.
startup The first trigger
risingOrFallingAlarm The type of the first alarm: Specifies to alarm when
exceeding the rising threshold or the falling threshold
display rmon event Syntax

display rmon event [ event-table-entry ]
View
All views

Parameter
event-table-entry: Entry index of event table.
Description
Use the display rmon event command to view RMON events.
The display includes event index in event table, owner of the event, description to
the event, action caused by event (log or alarm information), and occurrence time
of the latest event (counted on system initiate/boot time in centiseconds).
Related command: rmon event.
Example
Show the RMON event.
<SW5500>display rmon event
Event table 1 is VALID, and owned by 3COM.
Description: null.
Will cause log-trap when triggered, last triggered at 0days
00h:02m:27s.
Table 63 Output description of the display rmon event command
Field Description
Event table 1 Index 1 in event table
3COM Owner
Description Event description
Will cause log-trap when triggered, When the event is triggered, it will cause the log-trap.
last triggered at 0days 00h:02m:27s And the last triggered time is 00h:02m:27s
display rmon eventlog Syntax

display rmon eventlog [ event-number ]
View
All views
Parameter
event-number: Entry index of event table.
Description
Use the display rmon eventlog command to display RMON event log.
The display includes description about event index in event table, description to
the event, and occurrence time of the latest event (counted on system
initiate/boot time in centisecond).
Example
Show the RMON event log.
<SW5500>display rmon eventlog 1
Event table 1 owned by 3Com is VALID.
Generates eventLog 1.1 at 0days 00h:01m:39s.

Description: The 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1 defined in alarm table 1,

less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is
absolute.
Generates eventLog 1.2 at 0days 00h:02m:27s.
Description: The alarm formula defined in private alarm table 1,
less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is
absolute.
Table 64 Output description of the display rmon eventlog command
Field Description
Event table 1 Index 1 in event table
3Com Owner
Description Event description
less than (or =) 100 with alarm The alarm sample value is less than or equal to 100
value 0
Alarm sample type is absolute The type of alarm sampling is absolute
Generates eventLog 1.2 at 0days The eventlog corresponding to the index 1.2 is
00h:02m:27s generated at 0days 00h:02m:27s.
display rmon history Syntax

display rmon history [ port-num ]
View
All views
Parameter
port-num: Ethernet port name.
Description
Use the display rmon history command to view the latest RMON history
sampling information (including utility, error number and total packet number).
For the related commands, see rmon history.
Example
Show the RMON history information.
<SW5500>display rmon history gigabitethernet 2/0/1
History control entry 1 owned by 3Com is VALID,
Samples interface : GigabitEthernet1/0/1<ifEntry.642>
Sampling interval : 10(sec) with 10 buckets max
Latest sampled values :
Dropevents :0 , octets :0
packets :0 , broadcast packets :0
multicast packets :0 , CRC alignment errors :0
undersize packets :0 , oversize packets :0
fragments :0 , jabbers :0
collisions :0 , utilization :0

Table 65 Output description of the display rmon history command
Field Description
History control table Index number in history control table
3COM Owner
Samples interface The sampled interface
Sampling interval Sampling interval
buckets Records in history control table
dropevents Dropping packet events
octets Sent/received octets in sampling time
packets Packets sent/received in sampling time
broadcastpackets Number of broadcast packets
multicastpackets Number of multicast packets
CRC alignment errors Number of CRC error packets
undersized Number of undersized packets
oversized packets Number of oversized packets
fragments Number of undersized and CRC error packets
jabbers Number of oversized and CRC error packets
collisions Number of collision packets
utilization Utilization
display rmon prialarm Syntax

display rmon prialarm [ prialarm-table-entry ]
View
All views
Parameter
prialarm-table-entry: entry of extended alarm table.
Description
Use the display rmon prialarm command to display information about
extended alarm table.
Related command: rmon prialarm.
Example
Display alarm information about extended RMON.
<SW5500>display rmon prialarm
Prialarm table 1 owned by 3Com is VALID.
Samples absolute value : .1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
Sampling interval : 10(sec)
Rising threshold : 1000(linked with event 1)
Falling threshold : 100(linked with event 1)
When startup enables : risingOrFallingAlarm
This entry will exist : forever.
Latest value : 0

Table 66 Output description of the display rmon prialarm command

Field Description
Prialarm table 1 Index of extended alarm entry.
owned by 3COM Creator of the extended alarm entry.
Samples absolute value Sampling the absolute value of the node 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
Rising threshold Rising threshold. When sampling value rises from normal value to
this threshold, rising threshold alarm will be triggered.
Falling threshold Falling threshold. When sampling value decreases from normal
value to this threshold, falling threshold alarm will be triggered.
linked with event 1 Corresponding event index of ring and falling threshold alarm.
When startup enables: Kind of first alarm. It may trigger rising threshold alarm or falling
risingOrFallingAlarm threshold alarm or both.
This entry will exist forever The lifespan of this alarm entry which can be forever or a specified
period of time.
Latest value : 0 The value of the latest sampling.
display rmon statistics Syntax

display rmon statistics [ port-num ]
View
All views
Parameter
port-num: Ethernet port number.
Description
Use the display rmon statistics command to display RMON statistics.
The displayed information includes collision, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) and
queue, undersized or oversized packet, timeout, fragment, broadcast, multicast,
unicast, and bandwidth utility.
Related command: rmon statistics.
Example
Show RMON statistics.
<SW5500>display rmon statistics GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Statistics entry 1 owned by 3Com is VALID.
Interface : GigabitEthernet1/0/1<ifEntry.642>
Received :
octets :0 , packets :0
broadcast packets :0 , multicast packets:0
undersized packets :0 , oversized packets:0
fragments packets :0 , jabbers packets :0
CRC alignment errors:0 , collisions :0
Dropped packet (insufficient resources):0
Packets received according to length (octets):
64 :0 , 65-127 :0 , 128-255 :0
256-511:0 , 512-1023:0 , 1024-1518:0

Table 67 Output description of the display rmon statistics command
Field Description
Interface Port
3Com Owner
octets Received/Sent octets in sampling time
packets Packets received/sent in sampling time
broadcast packets Number of broadcast packets
multicast packets Number of multicast packets
undersized packets Number of undersized packets
oversized packets Number of oversized packets
fragments packets Number of undersized and CRC error packets
jabbers Number of oversized and CRC error packets
CRC alignment errors Number of CRC error packets
collisions Number of collision packets
Dropped packet Dropping packet events
(insufficient resources)
rmon alarm Syntax

rmon alarm entry-number alarm-variable sampling-time { delta |
absolute } rising-threshold threshold-value1 event-entry1
falling-threshold threshold-value2 event-entry2 [ owner text ]
undo rmon alarm entry-number
View
System view
Parameter
entry-number: Number of the entry to be added/deleted, ranging from 1 to
65535.
alarm-variable: Specifies the alarm variable with a character string, ranging

from 1 to 256, in the OID dotted format, like 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.10.1 (or ifInOctets.1).
sampling-time: Specifies the sampling interval, ranging from 5 to 65535

(measured in seconds).
delta: Sampling type is delta.
absolute: Sampling type is absolute.
rising-threshold threshold-value1: Rising threshold, ranging from 0 to

2147483647.
event-entry1: Event number corresponding to the upper limit of threshold,


falling-threshold threshold-value2: Falling threshold, ranging from 0 to

2147483647.
event-entry2: Event number corresponding to the falling threshold, ranging

from 0 to 65535.
owner text: Specifies the creator of the alarm. Length of the character string
ranges from 1 to 127.
Description
Use the rmon alarm command to add an entry to the alarm table. Use the undo
rmon alarm command to delete an entry from this table.
In this way, the alarm event can be triggered in the abnormal situations and then
decides to log and send trap to the NM station.
Example
Delete the information of entry 15 from the alarm table.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]undo rmon alarm 15
rmon event Syntax

rmon event event-entry [ description string ] { log | trap
trap-community | log-trap log-trapcommunity | none } [ owner
rmon-station ]
undo rmon event event-entry
View
System view
Parameter
event-entry: Number of the entry to be added/deleted, ranging from 1 to
65535.
description string: Event description. Length of the character string ranges

from 1 to 127.
log: Log event.
trap: Trap event.
trap-community: The community of the Network Management station that the

trap message is sent to.
log-trap: Log and trap event.
log-trapcommunity: The community of the Network Management station that

the trap message is sent to.
none: neither log nor trap event.

owner rmon-station: Name of the network management station that creates

this entry. The length of the character string ranges from 1 to 127.
Description
Use the rmon event command to add an entry to the event table. Use the undo
rmon event command to delete an entry from this table.
Event management of RMON defines the way to deal with event number and
event-log, send trap message or log while sending trap message. In this way,
alarm events may obtain corresponding treatment
Example
Add the entry 10 to the event table and mark it as log event.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rmon event 10 log
rmon history Syntax

rmon history entry-number buckets number interval sampling-interval
[ owner text-string ]
undo rmon history entry-number
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
65535.
buckets number: Capacity of the history table corresponding to the control line.
interval sampling-interval: Sampling interval, ranging from 5 to 3600

(measured in seconds).
owner text-string: Creator of the line. Length of the character string ranges from
1 to127.
Description
Use the rmon history command to add an entry to the history control table. Use
the undo rmon history command to delete an entry from history control table.
Perform this command to sample, set sample parameter (sample time interval) and
storage amounts for a port. RMON will periodically perform data collection and
save for query on this port. Sample information includes utility, error number and
total packet number.
Example
Delete the entry 15 from the history control table.
<SW5500>system-view

[SW5500-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]undo rmon history 15
rmon prialarm Syntax

rmon prialarm entry-number alarm-var [ alarm-des ] sampling-timer {
delta | absolute | changeratio } rising-threshold threshold-value1
event-entry1 falling-threshold threshold-value2 event-entry2
entrytype { forever | cycle cycle-period } [ owner text ]
undo rmon prialarm entry-number
View
System view
Parameter
entry-number: Specifies the entry number, ranging from 1 to 65535.
alarm-var: Specifies the alarm variable, which can be an arithmetic expression of

several integer MIB node instances. The node can be OID in dotted notation.
alarm-des: Specifies the alarm description with a length ranging from 1-256;
sampling-timer: Sets the sampling interval, ranging from 10 to 65535 and

measured in seconds.
delta | absolute | changeratio: Specifies the sampling type as delta ratio,

absolute ratio or change ratio.
threshold-value1: Rising threshold value, specified with a number greater than

0.
event-entry1: Corresponding event number to the upper limit threshold value,

threshold-value2: Falling threshold value, specified with a number greater than

0.
event-entry2: Event number corresponding to the falling threshold, ranging

from 0 to 65535.
forever | cycle cycle-period: Specifies the type of the alarm instance line.
cycle-period specifies the functional cycle of the instance.
owner text: Specifies the creator of the line. Length of the character string
ranges from 1 to 127.
Description
Use the rmon prialarm command to add an entry to the extended RMON alarm
table. Use the undo rmon prialarm command to delete an entry from the
extended RMON alarm table.
The number of instances can be created in the table depends on the hardware
resource of the product.

Example
Delete line 10 from the extended RMON alarm table.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]undo rmon prialarm 10
rmon statistics Syntax

rmon statistics entry-number [ owner text-string ]
undo rmon statistics entry-number
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
65535.
owner text-string: Creator of the entry. Length of the character string ranges
from 1 to127.
Description
Use the rmon statistics command to add an entry to the statistic table. Use the
undo rmon statistics command to delete an entry from statistic table.
RMON statistic management concerns the statistics and monitoring of the usage
and error on a port. Statistics includes collision, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
and queue, undersized or oversized packet, timeout, fragment, broadcast,
multicast, unicast, and bandwidth utility.
Example
Add the statistics of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1to entry 20 of the statistics table.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-gigabitethernet1/0/1]rmon statistics 20

NTP Configuration This section describes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) configuration commands
Commands available on your Switch 5500G-EI.
debugging ntp-service Syntax

debugging ntp-service { access | adjustment | authentication | event
| filter | packet | parameter | refclock | selection |
synchronization | validity | all }
undo debugging ntp-service { access | adjustment | authentication |

event | filter | packet | parameter | refclock | selection |
synchronization | validity | all }
View
User view.
Parameter
access: NTP access control debugging.
adjustment: NTP clock adjustment debugging.
all: All NTP debugging functions.
authentication: NTP authentication debugging.
event: NTP event debugging.
filter: NTP filter information debugging.
packet: NTP packet debugging.
parameter: NTP clock parameter debugging.
refclock: NTP reference clock debugging.
selection: NTP clock selection information debugging.
synchronization: NTP clock synchronization information debugging.
validity: NTP remote host validity debugging
Description
Use the debugging ntp-service command to debug different NTP services. Use
the undo debugging ntp-service command to disable corresponding
debugging function.
By default, no debugging function is enabled.
Example
Enable NTP access control debugging.
<SW5500>debugging ntp-service access

display ntp-service Syntax

sessions display ntp-service sessions [ verbose ]
View
All views.
Parameter
verbose: display detailed information about the sessions.
Description
Use the display ntp-service sessions command to display the status of all
the sessions maintained by NTP service provided by the local equipment.
By default, the status of all the sessions maintained by NTP service provided by the
local equipment will be displayed.
When you configure this command without the verbose parameter, the Switch
will only display brief information about all the sessions it maintains.
With the verbose parameter configured, the Switch will display detailed
information about all the sessions it maintains.
Example
<SW5500>display ntp-service sessions
source refid st now poll reach delay offset disp

****************************************************************************
[12345]212.125.95.4 131.188.3.221 2 18 64 377 339.8 10.8 0.9
note: 1 source(master),2 source(peer),3 selected,4 candidate,5 configured
display ntp-service Syntax

status display ntp-service status
Views
All views.
Parameter
None
Description
Use the command display ntp-service status to display the NTP service
status.
Example
<SW5500>display ntp-service status
clock status: unsynchronized

clock stratum: 16
reference clock ID: none
nominal frequency: 100.0000 Hz

actual frequency: 100.0000 Hz

clock precision: 2^17
clock offset: 0.0000 ms
root delay: 0.00 ms
root dispersion: 0.00 ms
peer dispersion: 0.00 ms
reference time: 00:00:00.000 UTC Jan 1 1900(00000000.00000000)
The following table describes the outputs:

Table 68 NTP service status information
Output Meaning
clock status:unsynchronized Local clock status: do not synchronize to any remote NTP
server.
clock stratum: 16 Indicates the NTP stratum of local clock
reference clock ID Indicates the address of a remote server of the reference
ID, in the case that the local system has been
synchronized by a remote NTP server or the ID of some
clock source.
nominal frequency Nominal frequency of the local system hardware clock.
actual frequency Actual frequency of the local system hardware clock.
clock precision Precision of local system clock
clock offset Offsets of the local clock to the NTP server clock.
root delay Root delay from local equipment to the master reference
clock.
root dispersion Dispersion of the local clock relative to the NTP server
clock.
peer dispersion Dispersion of the remote NTP server.
reference time Reference timestamp.
display ntp-service trace Syntax

display ntp-service trace
Views
All views
Parameter
None.
Description
Use the display ntp-service trace command to display the brief information
about every NTP server on the way from the local equipment to the reference
clock source.
This command will be ineffective when the switches form an XRN network.
Example
<SW5500>display ntp-service trace

server 127.0.0.1,stratum 8, offset 0.000000, synch distance 0.00000

refid 127.127.1.0
ntp-service access Syntax

ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer }
acl-number
undo ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer }
View
System view.
Parameters
query: Allow to control query authority.
synchronization: Only allow the server to access.
server: Allow query to server and access.
peer: Full access authority.
acl-number: IP address list number, ranging from 2000 to 2999.
Description
Use the ntp-service access command to set the authority to access the local
equipment. Use the undo ntp-service access command to cancel the access
authority settings.
By default, there is no limit to the access.
Set authority to access the NTP services on a local Switch. This is a basic and brief
security measure, compared to authentication. An access request will be matched
with peer, serve, serve only, and query only in an ascending order of the
limitation. The first matched authority will be given.
Example
Give the authority of time request, query control and synchronization with the
local equipment to the peer in ACL 2076.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ntp-service access peer 2076
Give the authority of time request and query control of the local equipment to the
peer in ACL 2028.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ntp-service access synchronization 2028
ntp-service Syntax
authentication enable ntp-service authentication enable
undo ntp-service authentication enable
View
System view

Parameters
None
Description
Use the ntp-service authentication enable command to enable the
NTP-service authentication function, if no IP address is specified, the switch
automatically selects 224.0.1.1 as the multicast IP address. Use the undo
ntp-service authentication enable command to disable this function, if no IP
address is specified, the switch will disable the configuration of the multicast IP
address 224.0.1.1.
By default, the authentication is disabled.
Example
Enable NTP authentication function.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ntp-service authentication enable
ntp-service Syntax
authentication-keyid ntp-service authentication-keyid number authentication-mode md5
value
undo ntp-service authentication-keyid number
View
System view
Parameter
number: Specify the key number and range from 1 to 4294967295.
value: Specify the value of the key with 1 to 32 ASCII characters.
Description
Use the ntp-service authentication-keyid command to set NTP
authentication key. Use the undo ntp-service authentication-keyid
command to cancel the NTP authentication key.
By default, there is no authentication key.
Only MD5 authentication is supported for the NTP authentication key settings.
Example
Set MD5 authentication key 10 as BetterKey.
<SW5500>system-view
SW5500]ntp-service authentication-keyid 10 authentication-mode md5
BetterKey
ntp-service Syntax
broadcast-client ntp-service broadcast-client

undo ntp-service broadcast-client
View
VLAN interface view
Parameter
None.
Description
Use the ntp-service broadcast-client command to configure NTP broadcast
client mode. Use the undo ntp-service broadcast-client command to disable
the NTP broadcast client mode.
By default, the NTP broadcast client mode is disabled.
Designate an interface on the local Switch to receive NTP broadcast messages and
operate in broadcast client mode. The local Switch listens to the broadcast from
the server. When it receives the first broadcast packet, it starts a brief client/server
mode to switch messages with a remote server for estimating the network delay.
Thereafter, the local Switch enters broadcast client mode and continues listening
to the broadcast and synchronizes the local clock according to the arrived
broadcast message.
Example
Configure to receive NTP broadcast packets via Vlan-Interface1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-Interface1]ntp-service broadcast-client
ntp-service Syntax
broadcast-server ntp-service broadcast-server [ authentication-keyid keyid ] [
version number ]
undo ntp-service broadcast-server
View
VLAN interface view
Parameter
authentication-keyid: Specify the authentication key.
keyid: Key ID used in broadcast, ranging from 1 to 4294967295.
version: Define NTP version number.
number: NTP version number, ranging from 1 to 3.
Description
Use the ntp-service broadcast-server command to configure NTP broadcast
server mode. Use the undo ntp-service broadcast-server command to disable
the NTP broadcast server mode.
By default, the broadcast service is disabled and number defaults to 3.

Designate an interface on the local equipment to broadcast NTP packets. The local
equipment runs in broadcast-server mode and regularly broadcasts packets to its
clients.
Example
Configure to broadcast NTP packets via Vlan-Interface1 and encrypt them with
Key 4 and set the NTP version number as 3.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-Interface1]ntp-service broadcast-server
authentication-key 4 version 3
ntp-service Syntax
max-dynamic sessions ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions number
undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions
View
System view
Parameter
number: The maximum sessions can be created locally, ranging from 0 to 100.
Description
Use the ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command to set how many
sessions can be created locally. Use the undo ntp-service
max-dynamic-sessions command to resume the default maximum session
number
By default, a local device allows up to 100 sessions.
Example
Set the local equipment to allow up to 50 sessions.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 50
ntp-service Syntax
multicast-client ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address ]
undo ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address ]
View
VLAN interface view
Parameter
ip-address: Specify a multicast IP address of Class D.

Description
Use the ntp-service multicast-client command to configure the NTP
multicast client mode. Use the undo ntp-service multicast-client command
to disable the NTP multicast client mode.
By default, the multicast client service is disabled. ip-address defaults to
224.0.1.1.
Designate an interface on the local Switch to receive NTP multicast messages and
operate in multicast client mode. The local Switch listens to the multicast from the
server. When it receives the first multicast packet, it starts a brief client/server
mode to switch messages with a remote server for estimating the network delay.
Thereafter, the local Switch enters multicast client mode and continues listening to
the multicast and synchronizes the local clock according to the arrived multicast
message.
Example
Configure to receive NTP multicast packet via Vlan-Interface1 and the multicast
group corresponding to these packets located at 224.0.1.1.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-Interface1]ntp-service multicast-client 224.0.1.1
ntp-service Syntax
multicast-server ntp-service multicast-server [ ip-address ] [ authentication-keyid
keyid ] [ ttl ttl-number ] [ version number ]*
undo ntp-service multicast-server [ ip-address ]
View
VLAN interface view
Parameter
ip-address: Specify a multicast IP address of Class D and default to 224.0.1.1.
authentication-keyid: Specify authentication key.
keyid: Key ID used in multicast, ranging from 1 to 4294967295.
ttl: Define the time to live of a multicast packet.
ttl-number: Specify the ttl of a multicast packet and range from 1 to 255.
version: Define NTP version number.
number: Specify NTP version number and range from 1 to 3.
Description
Use the ntp-service multicast-server command to configure NTP multicast
server mode. Use the undo ntp-service multicast-server command to disable
NTP multicast server mode.
By default, the multicast service is disabled. IP address defaults to 224.0.1.1 and
the version number defaults to 3.

Designate an interface on the local equipment to transmit NTP multicast packet.

The local equipment operates in multicast-server mode and multicasts packets
regularly to its clients.
Example
Configure to transmit NTP multicast packets encrypted with Key 4 via
Vlan-Interface1 at 224.0.1.1 and use NTP version 3.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-Vlan-Interface1]ntp-service multicast-server 224.0.1.1
authentication-keyid 4 version 3
ntp-service reliable Syntax

authentication-keyid ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid number
undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid number
View
System view
Parameter
number: Specify the key number, ranging from 1 to 4294967295.
Description
Use the ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command to configure
the key as reliable. Use the undo ntp-service reliable
authentication-keyid command to cancel the current setting.
By default, no key is configured as reliable.
When you enable the authentication to use this command to configure one or
more than one key as reliable. In this case, a client will only get synchronized by a
server whichever can provide a reliable key.
Example
Enable NTP authentication, adopt MD5 encryption, and designate Key 37
BetterKey and configure it as reliable.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ntp-service authentication enable
[SW5500]ntp-service authentication-keyid 37 authentication-mode md5
BetterKey
[SW5500]ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 37
ntp-service Syntax
source-interface ntp-service source-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-number }
undo ntp-service source-interface

View
System view
Parameter
interface-name : Specify an interface. The source IP address of the packets will
be taken from the address of the interface.
interface-type : Specify the interface type and determine an interface with the
interface-number parameter.
interface-number : Specify the interface number and determine an interface
with the interface-type parameter.
Description
Use the ntp-service source-interface command to designate an interface to
transmit NTP message. Use the undo ntp-service source-interface command
to cancel the current setting.
The source address specifies where the packets are transmitted from.
You can use this command to designate an interface to transmit all the NTP
packets and take the source address of these packets from its IP address. If you do
not want any other interface to receive the acknowledgement packets, use this
command to specify one interface to send all the NTP packets.
Example
Configure all the outgoing NTP packets to use the IP address of Vlan-Interface1 as
their source IP address.
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ntp-service source-interface Vlan-Interface 1
ntp-service in-interface Syntax

disable ntp-service in-interface disable
undo ntp-service in-interface disable
View
VLAN interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the ntp-service in-interface disable command to disable an interface
to receive NTP message. Use the undo ntp-service in-interface disable
command to enable an interface to receive NTP message.
By default, an interface is enabled to receive NTP message.
Example
Disable Vlan-Interface1 to receive NTP message.
<SW5500>system-view


[SW5500-Vlan-Interface1]ntp-service in-interface disable
ntp-service unicast-peer Syntax

ntp-service unicast-peer ip-address [ version number |
authentication-key keyid | source-interface { interface-name |
interface-type interface-number } | priority ]
undo ntp-service unicast-peer ip-address
View
System view
Parameter
ip-address : Specify the IP address of a remote server.
version : Define NTP version number.
number : NTP version number, ranging from 1 to 3.
authentication-key : Define authentication key.
keyid : Key ID used for transmitting messages to a remote server, ranging from 1
to 4294967295.
source-interface : Specify the name of an interface.
interface-name : Specify the interface name. When a local device sends an NTP
message to a peer, the source IP address of the message is taken from the address
of the interface.
interface-type : Specify the interface type and determine an interface together
with the interface-number parameter.
together with the interface-type parameter.
priority : Designate a server as the first choice.
Description
Use the ntp-service unicast-peer command to configure NTP peer mode.
Use the undo ntp-service unicast-peer command to cancel NTP peer mode.
By default, version number number defaults to 3, the authentication is disabled,

and the local server is not the first choice.
This command sets the remote server at ip-address as a peer of the local
equipment, which operates in symmetric active mode. ip-address specifies a host
address other than an IP address of broadcast, multicast, or reference clock. By
operating in this mode, a local device can synchronize and be synchronized by a
remote server.
Example
Configure the local equipment to synchronize or be synchronized by a peer at
128.108.22.44. Set the NTP version to 3. The IP address of the NTP packets are
taken from that of Vlan-Interface1.

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ntp-service unicast-peer 131.108.22.33 version 3
source-interface Vlan-Interface 1
ntp-service Syntax
unicast-server ntp-service unicast-server ip-address [ version number |
authentication-keyid keyid | source-interface { interface-name |
interface-type interface-number } | priority ]
undo ntp-service unicast-server ip-address
View
System view
Parameter
ip-address : Specify the IP address of a remote server.
version : Define NTP version number.
number : NTP version number, ranging from 1 to 3.
authentication-keyid : Define authentication key.
keyid : Key ID used for transmitting messages to a remote server, ranging from 1
to 4294967295.
source-interface : Specify the name of an interface.
interface-name : Specify the interface name. When a local device sends an NTP
message to a peer, the source IP address of the message is taken from the address
of the interface.
interface-type : Specify the interface type and determine an interface together
with the interface-number parameter.
together with the interface-type parameter.
priority : Designate a server as the first choice.
Description
Use the ntp-service unicast-server command to configure NTP server mode.
Use the undo ntp-service unicast-server command to disable NTP server
mode.
By default, version number number defaults to 3, the authentication is disabled,
and the local server is not the first choice.
The command announces to use the remote server at ip-address as the local
time server. ip-address specifies a host address other than an IP address of
broadcast, multicast, or reference clock. By operating in client mode, a local device
can be synchronized by a remote server, but not synchronize any remote server.
Example
Designate the server at 128.108.22.44 to synchronize the local device and use NTP
version 3.
<SW5500>system-view


[SW5500]ntp-service unicast-server 128.108.22.44 version 3
SSH Configuration This section describes the SSH configuration commands available on your Switch
Commands 5500G-EI.
debugging ssh server Syntax

debugging ssh server { all | vty index }
undo debugging ssh server { all | vty index }
View
User view
Parameter
all: All SSH channels
index: Debugged SSH channels. Optional values depend on the VTY number and
they are 0~4.
Description
Use the debugging ssh server command to send the negotiation process
defined in SSH1.5 protocol to the information center as debugging information
and debug a single user interface.
Use the undo debugging ssh server command to disable debugging function.
By default, debugging function is disabled.
Related commands: ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server

rekey-interval, ssh server timeout.
Example
To print debugging information in running SSH, enter the following:
<SW5500>debugging ssh server vty 0
00:23:20: SSH0: starting SSH control process
00:23:20: SSH0: sent protocol version id SSH-1.5-SW5500-1.25
00:23:20: SSH0: protocol version id is - SSH-1.5-1.2.26
00:23:20: SSH0: SSH_SMSG_PUBLIC_KEY msg
00:23:21: SSH0: SSH_CMSG_SESSION_KEY msg - length 112, type 0x03
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt started
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt finished
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt started
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt finished
display rsa local-key-pair Syntax

public display rsa local-key-pair public
View
All views

Parameter
None
Description
Use the display rsa local-key-pair public command to display local key pair
and public key of the server. If no key is generated, corresponding information will
be prompted, for example, “RSA keys not found”.
Related command: rsa local-key-pair create.
Example
To display local key pair and public key of the server, enter the following:
<SW5500>display rsa local-key-pair public

% Key pair was generated at: 12:26:33 UTC 2002/4/4
Key name: rtvrp_Host
Usage: Encryption Key
Key Data:
30470240 AF7DB1D0 DA78944F 53B7B59B 40D425D0 DC9C57D2 A60916C2
1F165807 08B84DDB 5F4DB8E7 A115B74E 2D41D96C AC61D276 AA027E41
DD48DE64 696E0934 EB872805 02030100 01
% Key pair was generated at: 12:26:45 UTC 2002/4/4
Key name: rtvrp_Server
Usage: Encryption Key
Key Data:
30670260 C05280D9 BA0D56C8 7BE43379 8634CDE7 83ABA9A2 3F36280E
25995487 4FF6AD7A 0E57871C 761E6D92 9914D8C5 CC577388 5B580B94
C2172C8F 36039EED 160A0478 651DED3A 9CCF1AAD D800AAF2 DF7FBEC4
A13ADA59 9E738319 AF366B8B 519D39F5 02030100 01
display rsa Syntax

peer-public-key display rsa peer-public-key [ brief | name keyname ]
View
All views
Parameter
brief: Displays brief information of the remote public key.
keyname: Specifies key name, a string including 0~32 characters.
Description
Use the display rsa peer-public-key command to display a designated RSA

public key. All public keys will be displayed if no key is specified.
Example
To display a designated RSA public key, enter the following:
<SW5500>display rsa peer-public-key
Address Bits Name

1023 abcd
1024 hq
1024 wn1
1024 hq_all
<SW5500>display rsa peer-public-key name abcd
Key name:abcd
Key address:
Data:
30818602 8180739A 291ABDA7 04F5D93D C8FDF84C 42746319 91C164B0
DF178C55 FA833591 C7D47D53 81D09CE8 2913D7ED F9C08511 D83CA4ED
2B30B809 808EB0D1 F52D045D E40861B7 4A0E1355 23CCD74C AC61F8E5
8C452B2F 3F2DA0DC C48E3306 367FE187 BDD94401 8B3B69F3 CBB0A573
202C16BB 2FC1ACF3 EC8F828D 55A36F1C DDC4BB45 504F0201 25
display ssh server Syntax

display ssh server { session | status }
View
All views
Parameter
session: Displays SSH sessions.
status: Displays SSH state information.
Description
Use the display ssh server command to display SSH state or session
information.
Related commands: ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server

rekey-interval, ssh server timeout.
Example
To display SSH state and configuration parameters, enter the following:
<SW5500>display ssh server status
SSH version : 1.5
SSH connection timeout : 60 seconds
SSH server key generating interval : 1 hours
SSH Authentication retries : 3 times
To display SSH sessions.

<SW5500>display ssh server session
Connection Version Encryption State Username
VTY0 1.5 DES Session started SW5500
VTY3 1.5 DES Session started switch
display ssh Syntax

user-information display ssh user-information [ username ]
View
All views

Parameter
username: Valid SSH user named defined by AAA
Description
Use the display ssh user-information command to display information of the
user, including username, corresponding key, authentication type. If a username is
specified, the system just gives its information.
Related commands: ssh user username assign rsa-key, ssh user username
authentication-type.
Example
To display SSH user information, enter the following:
[SW5500]display ssh user-information
Username authentication-type user-public-key-name
Jin rsa jin
hanqi1 password 816pub
peer-public-key end Syntax

peer-public-key end
View
Public key view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the peer-public-key end command to finish editing peer public key and
quit from public key view to system view.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end.
Example
To quit public key view, enter the following:
[SW5500]rsa peer-public-key 3COM003
[SW5500-rsa-public-key]peer-public-key end
[SW5500]
protocol inbound Syntax

protocol inbound { all | ssh | telnet }
View
VTY user interface view
Parameter
all: Supports both Telnet and SSH protocols.
ssh: Supports only SSH protocol.

telnet: Supports only Telnet protocol.
Description
Use the protocol inbound command to configure the protocols supported by a
designated user interface.
By default, the system supports both Telnet and SSH protocols.
If SSH protocol is enabled and specified for the user interface, but no local RSA key
is configured, SSH cannot take effect yet till you log onto the system next time.
If SSH protocol is specified, to ensure a successful logon, you must configure the
AAA authentication using the authentication-mode scheme command. The
protocol inbound ssh configuration fails if you configure
authentication-mode password and authentication-mode none.
Related command: user-interface vty.
Example
Disable Telnet on vty0 through vty4, with only SSH available:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500-ui-vty0-4]protocol inbound ssh
Disable Telnet on vty0, with only SSH available.

[SW5500-ui-vty0]protocol inbound ssh
public-key-code begin Syntax

public-key-code begin
View
Public key edit view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the public-key-code begin command to enter public key edit view.
Before using this command, you have to create a public key with the rsa
peer-public-key command. In the public key edit view to key in desired public
key, which consists of hexadecimal characters, with blank space allowed between
them, and is generated randomly by the client program supporting SSH.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end.
Example
To enter public key view and key in public key, enter the following:

<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rsa peer-public-key SW5500003
[SW5500-rsa-public-key]public-key-code begin
[SW5500-rsa-key-code]308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463
[SW5500-rsa-key-code]1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913
[SW5500-rsa-key-code]D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4
[SW5500-rsa-key-code]0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC
[SW5500-rsa-key-code]C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16
[SW5500-rsa-key-code]BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125
[SW5500-rsa-key-code]public-key-code end
public-key-code end Syntax

public-key-code end
View
Public key edit view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the public-key-code end command to save the configured public key and
return to the public key view from the public key edit view.
This command terminates the edit process of public key and checks its validity
before saving. If the public key contains invalid characters or violates coding rules,
corresponding information will be prompted and the current configuration fails. If
you have configured valid public key, the system will store it into the public key
table.
Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.
Example
To exit the public key edit view and save the configuration, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500] rsa peer-public-key 3COM003
[SW5500-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
[SW5500-rsa-key-code]public-key-code end
[SW5500-rsa-public-key]
rsa local-key-pair create Syntax

rsa local-key-pair create
View
System view
Parameter
None

Description
Use the rsa local-key-pair create command to create local RSA host key pair
and server key pair.
If you have configured RSA key, the system gives an alarm after using this
command and prompts that the existing one will be replaced. The key naming
format is switch name plus server and switch name plus host, for example,
SW5500_host and SW5500_server. The configuration result of this command will
not be stored in the configuration file.
The system prompts you to key in bit range, for which, the server key pair must be
at least 128 bits longer than the host key pair. The maximum bit range of both key
pairs is 2048 bits and the minimum is 512. If there have been key pairs, the system
will prompts you to decide whether to modify them.
For a successful SSH logon, you must configure and generate the local RSA key
pairs. To generate local key pairs, you just need to execute the command once,
with no further action required even after the system is rebooted.
Related command: rsa local-key-pair destroy.
Example
To create local host key pair and server key pair, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: SW5500_Host
% You already have RSA keys defined for SW5500_Host
% Do you really want to replace them? [yes/no]:y
Choose the size of the key modulus in the range of 512 to 2048 for
your Keys.
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
How many bits in the modulus [512]:512
Generating keys...
.....++++++++++++
........................++++++++++++
..........++++++++
............................++++++++
rsa local-key-pair Syntax

destroy rsa local-key-pair destroy
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rsa local-key-pair destroy command to remove all RSA key pairs at
the server, including Host key pair and Server key pair.

Acknowledgement information will be promoted before the system clears all RSA
key pairs. This command is just a one-time instruction, so the result will not be
stored in the configuration file.
Example
To remove all key pairs at the server, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rsa local-key-pair destroy
% The name for the keys which will be destroyed is SW5500_Host .
% Confirm to destroy these keys? [yes/no]:y
rsa peer-public-key Syntax

rsa peer-public-key key-name
View
System view
Parameter
key-name: Public key name
Description
Use the rsa peer-public-key command to enter the public key view.
When using this command together with the public-key-code begin command to
configure the public key at the client, which is generated randomly by the client
program supporting SSH1.5.
Related commands: public-key-code begin, public-key-code end.
Example
To enter the public key view, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]rsa peer-public-key 3COM002
ssh server Syntax

authentication-retries ssh server authentication-retries times
undo ssh server authentication-retries
View
System view
Parameter
times: Specifies authentication retry times, in the range of 1~5.

Description
Use the ssh server authentication-retries command to define SSH
authentication retry times value, which takes effect at next logon.
Use the undo ssh server authentication-retries command to restore the

default retry value.
By default, it is 3.
Related command: display ssh server.
Example
To define the authentication retry times value as 4, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ssh server authentication-retries 4
ssh server rekey-interval Syntax

ssh server rekey-interval hours
undo ssh server rekey-interval
View
System view
Parameter
hours: Defines key update interval, in the range of 1~24 hours.
Description
Use the ssh server rekey-interval command to define update interval of
server key pair.
Use the undo ssh server rekey-interval command to cancel the current
setting.
By default, system doesn’t update the server key.
Example
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ssh server rekey-interval 3
ssh server timeout Syntax

ssh server timeout seconds
undo ssh server timeout
View
System view

Parameter
seconds: Defines registration timeout value, in the range of 1~120 seconds.
Description
Use the ssh server timeout command to define timeout value for SSH
registration authentication, which takes effect at next logon.
Use the undo ssh server timeout command to restore the default value.
By default, the timeout value is 60 seconds.
Example
To define the registration timeout value as 80 seconds, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ssh server timeout 80
ssh user assign rsa-key Syntax

ssh user username assign rsa-key keyname
undo ssh user username assign rsa-key
View
System view
Parameter
keyname: Configures client public key, consisting of 1~32 characters.
username: Valid local user name or user name defined by remote RADIUS system.
Description
Use the ssh user username assign rsa-key command to associate an existing
public key with a designated user.
Use the undo ssh user username assign rsa-key command to delete the
association.
For a user who has been associated with a public key, the command associates
him/her with the new public key.
The newly configured users take effect at the next logon.
Related command: display ssh user-information.
Example
To associate the key 1 with jsmith, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ssh user jsmith assign rsa-key key1

ssh user username Syntax

authentication-type ssh user username authentication-type { all | password | rsa }
undo ssh user username authentication-type
View
System view
Parameter
username: Valid local user name or user name defined by remote RADIUS system.
all: Specifies authentication type as password and RSA.
password: Specifies authentication type as password.
rsa: Specifies authentication type as RSA.
Description
Use the ssh user username authentication-type command to define
authentication type for a designated user.
Use the undo ssh user username authentication-type command to restore

the default mode in which logon fails.
By default, user can’t logon the switch through SSH or TELNET, so you have to
specify authentication type for a new user. The new configuration takes effects at
the next logon.
Related commands: display ssh user-information.
Example
To specify jsmith’s authentication type as password, enter the following:
<SW5500>system-view
[SW5500]ssh user jsmith authentication-type password


A BOOTROM INTERFACE
Accessing the During the initial boot phase of the Switch the following prompt is
Bootrom Interface displayed with a five second countdown timer allowing access to the
bootrom:
Starting......
******************************************************
*
*
* SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI 52-Port BOOTROM, Version 1.0
*
******************************************************
Copyright 2003-2005 3Com Corporation. All Rights

Reserved.
Creation date : Jan 31 2005, 22:31:29
CPU type : BCM4704
CPU Clock Speed : 200MHz
BUS Clock Speed : 33MHz
Memory Size : 64MB
Mac Address : 000fcbb77740
Press Ctrl-B to enter Boot Menu... 3
Before the countdown reaches 0, enter <CTRL>B
The timer is followed by a password prompt. The default is no password.
Press Enter to display the following boot menu:

526 CHAPTER A: BOOTROM INTERFACE
BOOT MENU
1. Download application file to flash

2. Select application file to boot
3. Display all files in flash
4. Delete file from flash
5. Modify bootrom password
6. Enter bootrom upgrade menu
7. Skip current configuration file
8. Set bootrom password recovery
9. Set switch startup mode
0. Reboot
Enter your choice(0-9): 1
Boot Menu The following section describes the various options available in the boot menu.
Download Application This option enables you to download all files into flash. Enter 1 at the prompt to
File to Flash display the following menu options:
1. Set TFTP protocol parameter
2. Set FTP protocol parameter
3. Set XMODEM protocol parameter
0. Return to boot menu
For further information on downloading see “Boot Menu File Download

Select Application File to Select Option 2 at the prompt to display the following:
Boot
Select application file to boot
1. set application files
2. set configuration files
3. set web files
0. return
Enter your choice(0-3):

Boot Menu 527
Enter Option 1 at the prompt to display the following:
File
File Number Size(bytes) File Name
=================================================
1(*) 4649088 s4h03_01_04s168.app
Free Space: 10491904 bytes
(*)-with main attribute;(b)-with backup attribute

(*b)-with both main and backup attribute
Please input the file number to be change:
An asterisk (*) indicates the current main boot file.
A similar screen will be displayed for the configuration files and the web files.
In each case, the file is given the attribute “main” or “backup”.
Display all Files in Flash Select Option 3 at the prompt to display the following:
File
=================================================
1 4 snmpboots
2 151 private-data.txt
3(*) 4649088 s4b03_01_04s168.app
4 576218 s4h03_04.web
5 10301 3comoscfg.def
6 10369 3comoscfg.cfg
7 10369 [test.cfg]

The current application file is s4b03_01_04s168.app
The current application file is name and an * indicates the file in the list.
If the filename is in brackets, for example [test.cfg], this indicates that the file
has been deleted from the CLI but is still present in the recycle-bin.
Delete File from Flash Select Option 4 at the prompt to display the following:
File
=================================================
1 4 snmpboots
2 151 private-data.txt
3(*) 4649088 s4b03_01_04s168.app

File
4 576218 s4h03_04.web
5 10301 3comoscfg.def
6 10369 3comoscfg.cfg
7 10369 [test.cfg]

The current application file is s4b03_01_04s168.app
Please input the file number to delete:
The current application file is name and an * indicates the file in the list.
If the filename is in brackets, for example [test.cfg], this indicates that the file
has been deleted from the CLI but is still present in the recycle-bin.
Modify Bootrom Select Option 5 at the prompt to allow the bootrom access password to be
Password changed as follows:
Old password:
New password: XXXX
Confirm password: XXXX
Current password has been changed successfully!
Enter Bootrom Upgrade Select Option 6 at the prompt to allow a bootrom file to be downloaded to Flash
Menu and then automatically upgrade the bootrom to the new version as follows:
Bootrom update menu:
For further information on downloading see “Boot Menu File Download

Skip Current Select Option 7 at the prompt to allow the Switch to be rebooted without loading
Configuration File the current configurations as follows:
The current setting is running configuration file when reboot.
Are you sure to skip current configuration file when reboot?

Yes or No(Y/N)
The Switch will reboot using the factory defaults.
Set Bootrom Password Enter Option 8 at the prompt to allow the bootrom super password to be disabled
Recovery or enabled. The following is displayed:
Warning: if disable the bootrom password recovery, the super
password based on switch mac address is invalid!
The current mode is enable bootrom password recovery.

Boot Menu 529
Are you sure to disable bootrom password recovery? Yes or

No(Y/N) n
If the bootrom super password is disabled and the bootrom password (set at Boot
Menu Option 5) is lost, bootrom access is no longer possible. If access to the
bootrom menu is required, the Switch will need to be returned to 3Com for repair.
The super password is a fixed password that is based on the hardware of the
Switch. Once the Switch has been registered with 3Com, this password can be
supplied to the registered owner by contacting 3Com technical support.
Set Switch Startup Mode Enter Option 9 at the prompt to allow the Power on Self Test (POST) mode to be
selected. The following is displayed:
The current mode is fast startup mode!
Are you sure to change it to full startup mode? Yes or

No(Y/N)n
Full startup mode supplies additional POST information via the console.
Reboot Enter Option 0 at the prompt to reboot the Switch. The following is displayed:
Starting......
Boot Menu File Enter Option 1 from the Boot menu to display the following download options:
Download Commands
Selecting a TFTP download

Load File name :s4b03_01_04s168.app
Switch IP address :10.1.1.200
Server IP address :10.1.1.177
Are you sure to download file to flash? Yes or No(Y/N)
Attached TCP/IP interface to netdrv0.

0x83fbb6a0 (tNetTask): arp info overwritten for a147a5b2 by
00:0d:54:9a:fa:20
Attaching network interface lo0...done.
Loading......................................................
...................
..............done
Free flash Space: 10491904 bytes
Writing
flash........................................................
...........
..done!
Please input the file attribute (main/backup/none):none

done!

Selecting a FTP download


Load File name:s4b03_01_04s168.app
Switch IP address:10.1.1.200
Server IP address:10.1.1.177
FTP User Name :anonymous
FTP User Password :pass
Are you sure to download file to flash? Yes or No(Y/N) y
Loading.....done
Free flash Space: 10456064 bytes
Writing flash....done!
done!
Selecting an XModem download


Please select your download baudrate:
1. 9600
2.* 19200
3. 38400
4. 57600
5. 115200
0. Return

Download baudrate is 19200 bps
Please change the terminal's baudrate to 19200 bps and select
XMODEM protocol
Press enter key when ready
Now please start transfer file with XMODEM protocol

If you want to exit, Press <Ctrl+X>
Loading ...CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

done!

Superstack 4 Switch 5500G-Ei Family: Command Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Superstack 4 Switch 5500G-Ei Family: Command Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Superstack 4 Switch 5500G-Ei Family: Command Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SuperStack® 4 Switch 5500G-EI Family

Command Reference Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

1 USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2 USING PORT COMMANDS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3 USING VLAN COMMANDS

4 USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS

5 USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6 USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

7 USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL COMMANDS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

10 USING RSTP COMMANDS

11 USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12 USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

■ Using System Management Commands — Introduces the commands used

Intended Readership The manual is intended for the following readers:

Conventions This manual uses the following conventions:

Icon Notice Type Description

Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or

Table 2 Text conventions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Table 2 Text conventions

Example 3: in the command header [shell | incoming |

The 3Com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI Configuration Guide provides

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This chapter describes how to use the following commands:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

scheme: Requires local or remote authentication of username and password at

none: Allows users to log in without username or password.

Use the command authentication-mode password to prompt a user for local

Use the command authentication-mode scheme to prompt a user to provide

Use the command authentication-mode none to allow a user to log in without

auto-execute command Syntax

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

undo auto-execute command

Enter undo auto-execute command to cancel the auto-execute command so the

By default, auto-execute is disabled.

command-privilege level Syntax

undo command-privilege view view command

command: Enter the command to be configured.